TM 9-1430-1535-12-1 Icc An - MSQ-110, An - MSW-13 PCP Hawk

(Ol. 11: ’- /430 - 1535-12 TECHNICAL MANUAL OPERATOR AND ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL INFORMATION AND COORDINATION CENTRAL, GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM AN/MSQ-110 (U.S. ARMY) NSN 1430-01-042-4918 AN/MSQ-111 (USMC) NSN 1430-01-042-4917 AND PLATOON COMMAND PO GUIDED MISSILE AN/MSW-13 (U.S. ARMY) NSN 1430-01-042-4915 AN/MSW-14 (USMC) NSN 1430-01-042-4916 REFERENCE EPARTEHT JUL 18 1984 C % @ HAWK AIR DEFENSE GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM ee DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY JULY 1979 des current 12 This copy is a reprint which it pages from Changes 1 throu; fe mene a ee tao aery 1430—1535—12 WARNING FOR RADIO-FREQUENCY RADIATION HAZARD (FOR IHAWK SYSTEMS WITH ICWAR AN/MPQ-55) Radio-frequency (rf) radiation from radar antennas and associated equipment is a potential hazard to personnel. Rf radiation is not cumulative but it can be hazardous. It heats the body tissues, and, if the radiation intensity is sufficiently high, will permanently damage the tissue. This damage is not immediately apparent. Precautions should be taken to insure that personnel are not exposed to rf radiations of hazardous intensity levels. Personnel who must be within the hazardous distances for the below listed radars should be instructed not to place themselves on the radiating side of the antenna, and to never look into a transmitting horn or open waveguide which is connected to an energized transmitter. Personnel are prohibited from entering areas where they may be exposed to levels of rf radiation above 10 milliwatts per square centimeter (10 mw/cm?). This level, though not considered hazardous, is stipulated by AR 40-583 as the maximum permissible exposure level for personnel. ‘A power intensity of at least 10 mw/cm? is present along the axis of each radar’s transmitted beam, for the distances listed below. These distances are based on calculations and actual measurements and may be used as a guide to prevent radio-frequency radiation injury. In‘each instance, radiation intensity rapidly diminishes as the distance is increased. ANTENNA DISTANCE Improved High-powered Illuminator Radar 111.5 m (366 ft) Improved Cw Acquisition Radar non-scanning 74m (248 ft) scanning 36 m (118 ft) Improved Pulse Acquisition Radar . 15.2 m (50 ft) Improved Range-only Radar 45.1 m (148 ft) ‘The 36m distance for the scanning ICWAR antenna does not mean the system constitutes a hazard to personnel while the antenna is scanning. It means that those systems capable of producing power densities greater than 100 mw/cm? when the antenna is stationary must be controlled out to the 100 mw/cm? distance in the event the antenna should stop scanning. No radiation hazard exists at radar ground level if the radars are not depressed below zero degrees elevation. When at all possible during maintenance, however, place the antenna at a high elevation. Personnel are restricted from the area atop the radars or other elevated locations in front of the antennas when radiating. Personnel may move in and around the ICWAR to zero range at ground level provided they are below the horizontal center line of the antennas. There is no height restriction to either side or rear of the antennas. Potentially hazardous power density levels do not exist in the radiation field of the improved pulse acquisition radar when scanning. ‘The above information is applicable to typical Hawk sites. The services of the U.S. Army Environmental Hygiene Agency are available, in accordance with the provisions of AR 40-583 for the evaluation of potential radio-frequency hazards at sites where unusual operating or site conditions may exist.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a WARNING DANGEROUS VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment DEATH ON CONTACT may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions Never work on electronic equipment unless there is another person nearby who is familiar with the opera. tion and hazards of the equipment and who is competent in administering first aid. When the technician is aided by operators, he must wan them about dangerous areas, Whenever possible, the power supply to the equipment must be shut off before beginning work on the equipment. Take particular care to ground every capacitor likely to hold a dangerous potential. When working inside the equipment, after the power has been turned off, always ground every part before touching it. Use extreme caution when operating equipment protected by interlocks. Insure that interlocks (doors, panels, and drawers) are functioning properly. (TM 9-1425—525—12—4) Be careful not to contact high-voltage connections when installing or operating this equipment. ( Whenever the nature of the operation permits, keep one hand away from the equipment to reduce the hazard of current flowing through the vital organs of the body. coc) Do not be misled by the term “low voltage.” Potentials as low as 50 volts may cause death under adverse conditions. For artificial respiration, refer to FM 21—11. EXTREMELY DANGEROUS POTENTIALS greater than 500 volts exist in the following units: IFF Interrogator A14 PPI Drawer assembly A11A1 14-Kv Power supply assembly A11A1A1 Spectrum analyzer A11A2 2.5-Kv Power supply RO control panel A11A3 T.O. control panel AL1A7 (TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MECHANICAL HAZARD When performing maintenance procedures in the vicinity of the antenna, insure that one of the two antenna SAFE switches (one located on the IFF antenna and the other on the whip antenna base) is set to SAFE. In addition, not more than three personnel should occupy the roof of the ICC or IPCP at any time. WARNING HIGH NOISE LEVEL WHEN AIR CONDITIONER IS OPERATING When operating, the air conditioner produces dangerously loud noises at the vent. Without protection, long exposure to this noise can cause a hearing loss. Ear protectors should be worn when working in the vicinity of the air conditioner vent for extended periods. See AR 40-5 for additional information,-s1y Google <c12 TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Insert the latest changed pages in accordance with the instructions on the transmittal sheet. LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES Dates of issue for original and changed pages are: Original 0 25 July 1979 Change 7 Change 1 12 Dec. 1979 Change 8 23 Dec. 1982 Change 2 9 June 1980 Change 9 14 Feb, 1983 Change 3 7 Nov. 1980 Change 10 20 June 1983 Change 4 15 June 1981 Change 11 7 Nov 1983 Change 5 4 Sep, 1981 Change 12 8 Feb 1984 | Change 6 17 Feb. 1982 | THE EFFECTIVITY OF THE PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS LISTED BELOW. Page N *Chanae No. “Change No. a +6 10 b 24 +0 e 24 +0 a 5 aA 2 o B +20 oO c 2a ° D 2 ° z ~ ° Fr pr ° 4 ~2 5 id. +20 3 ddd +20 5 iv. +10 ° v +10 ° vi. .2 ° vid ae} ° 1-1 -2 ° 1-2 +2 ° 1-2.1, -R ° 1-2.2 5 .2 ° 1-3 -0 ° 1-4 om) ° 1-5 +0 ° 1-6 -8 3 1-7 +20 2 1-8 +0 ° 1-9 -0 2 1-10 +210 D2 1-11 22 Do 1-12 a) 10 1-13... +20 io ‘aro i i calmn indicates an orginal page.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 cr T OF EFFECTIVE PAGES — Contin I 2-70.1.46. 2-70.2 blank 2-70.3 2-70.4 2-71 2-72 2-72.12 woes 2-72.2 blank 2-73 2-74 2-75. 2-76 2-77 2-78 2-79 2-80 2-81 2-82 2-83 2-84 2-85 2-86 2-87 2-88 2-89 2-90 2-91 2-92 blank Zero in this column indicates an original page. 20000 oO 200 3-10.2 blank 311 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-26. 3-26. 3-27 2-38 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-40. Change No. BrOOCCOCOuMN ° 5 3 3 3 5 3 3 1 8 2 blank BAVUHLUHUWUUU® Page No. 3-40.2 3-40.3 3-40.4 blank 3-41 3-42 342.1 20... 3-42.2 blank 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-49 3-50 .. 3-51 ce cceee 3-52 3-53 3-54 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-60 3-60.1 3-60.2 3-61 3-62 3-63 3-64 3-64.1 3-64.2 blank 3-65 3-66 3-66. 3-66.2 3-66.3 3-66.4 3-66.5 ... 3-66.6 blank 3-67 3-68 3-69 3-70 Change No. 5 3 OOOUUHTEHUYWHUWANOS wun11 TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES — Continued Wwoec0000000 eucccccouno0c0H000000N000400000000000000000000 e0000000000000000000000 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ° ° ° 0 ° 0 0 ° 0 ° 5 3 3 8 8 8 3 3 ° 2 ° ° ° 200000 *Zer0;n this column Indleates an original page.TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 [saree | Page No. ‘Change No. Page No, Change No. Page No. Change No. 8 VOOVVWVOVHVHVOOOVOOOOOO @DONNHOOCOOOOOCOCOONNOON 9 9 7-2.1. 9 7-2.2 blank 9 +0 9 10 9 +2 9 9 +2 9 3 9 .0 9 ‘11-24.4.2 blank ~ 0 9 11-24.5 «10 9 11-24.6 10 9 11-24.7 .0 5 11-24.8 7-12 blank 5 11-24.9 e-1l. 9 5 11-24.10 8-2 9 5 11-24.10.1 { 8-3. 9 5 11-24.10.2 blank a4 a 9 11-24,11 \ 8-5 9 o 11-24.12 8-6 9 0 11-24.13cl TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES — Continued 1-24.14. 211-40.2.18 11-58.2 blank 11-24.15 . 11-40.3 10 11-24.16 . 11-40.4 10 11-25 11-40,5 10 11-26 11-40.6 10 11-60.2 blank 11-27 11-40.7 10 11-61, 1-28 11-40.8 10 11-62 11-29 11-40.9 10 11-62.1. 11-30 11-40.10 . 10 11-62,2 blank n-31 11-40.10.1 . 11-32 eeeeseeeeeee 10 11-40.10,2 blank 11-33 11-40.11 , 11-34 1-40.12 . 11-35 11-40.13 , 7 11-66.1 , 11-36 11-40.14 , 5 11-66.2 blank 1-36.21 1-41. ° 11-67 . 11-36.2 blank 11-42. 9 11-68 .... 1-37 11-42. 9 11-68.1 .. 1-38 1142.2 blank 11-68,2 blank 11-39 11-43. 9 11-69 11-44. 10 11-70 bi 11-44. 5 Lis Tignes en se LO) 11-44.2 blank 11-72 1-45. 5 11-73 ° 1-46 . 0 1-74 2-47, 0 1-75 ° 11-48, ° 11-76 ° 11-49. 5 1-77 ° 11-50 . 5 11-78 ° 11-51. 5 11-79 ° 11-40.2.8 11-52. 5 11-80 ° 11-40.2.9 n-53. 0 11-81 ° 11-40.2.10 11-54. ° 11-82 ° 11-40.2.11 11-55. nn 11-83 ° 11-40.2.12 11-56 ... 2 11-84 ° 11-40.2.13 11-56.1 .. + 10 211-85 ° 11-40.2.14 11-56.2 blank 11-86 ° 11-40.2.15 11-57 . 11-87 ° 11-40,2.16 11-58 . 11-88 ° 11-40.2.17 11-58.1 , 11-89 ° “Zero in this column indicates an original page,TM 9—1430—1535—12 el mn Page No. change No. Page No, Change No. Page No. change No. 11-90 +0 11-120 . ° 11-91 0 11-120.1 5 11-92 +0 11-120.2 blank o 11-93 +0 ii-l21. ° 11-94 +0 ° 11-95 al 2 D9. 5 11-96 . R D-10. o 11-97 . 2 Dill. 10 11-98 . R D-12. 10 11-99 . pr D-13 7 11-100 . R D-14 . ° 11-100.1 R Dis. 8 11-100.2 R Di6 . 8 11-101 . 2B Di7. ° 11-102 « 12 Dis. ) 11-102.1 9 D-19. ° 11-102.2 blank 9 D-20. 7 11-103 = 10 2 D-21. lo 11-104 . ~ 20 12 D2... ° 11-105. +0 2 D-23. 10 11-106 . nu D-24. 11-107 25 ° El. 11-108 . a2 20 E2. 11-109 . ae 5 Fel. 11-110 .i ° Fe2. ql-11 . . al ° P3, 11-112. .n 5 ra, 21-112.1 .n 0 Index-1 11-112.2 blank 10 Index-2 .. 11-113 . ~n 10 = Index-3 ... 11-114 ~n 10 © Index-4 11-115 ~n 10 Index-4.1 ... 1-116 . -u Index-4.2 blank 11-116.1 -n Index-5 11-116.2 Index-6 11-117 . li-lie . 11-118.1 11-118.2 blank 1-19... Zero in this column indicates an oriinal pags.Na TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 TECHNICAL MANUAL HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY No. 9—1430—1585—12—1 Washington, D.C. 30 June 1979 OPERATOR AND ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL INFORMATION AND COORDINATION CENTRAL, GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM AN/MSQ-110 (U.S. ARMY) 1430-01-042-4918 AND AN/MSQ-111 (USMC) 1430-01-042-4917 PLATOON COMMAND POST, GUIDED MISSILE AN/MSW-13 (U.S. ARMY) 1430-01-042-4915 AND AN/MSW-14 (USMC) 1430-01-042-4916 HAWK AIR DEFENSE GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter, DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms), or DA Form 2028-2 located in the back of this manual direct to: Commander, U.S. Army Missile Command, ATTN: DRSMI-SNPM, Redstone Arsenal, Alabama 35898. A reply will be furnished to you. TABLE OF CONTENTS Parngroph Page CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION Section L 1 1 Vat 12 1 18 ret Differences among model 14 11 Reporting equipment improvement recommendations (EIR's) a1 Hand receipt 14200 «12 ‘Modification 16 12 Table 1. 12 Section 0 16 12.2 LT 12.2 = 18 14 The 1-2 ICC! PCP physical and operating data. 14 Section ‘THT. Electrical cables description and data General 19 Lat 1-10 Lit 1 Lit 112 LIT Tek 1.18TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 CHAPTER Section Table Table Section 2 L OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Controls and indicators, ICC/ PCP controls and indicators Auxiliary equipment (AUX EQUIP) controle ‘and indicators. Power distribution cabinet — controls and indicators (fig. 2-1 Auniliary control unit-controls indicators (fig. 2-2) ADP ac power distribution drawer — controle and indicators (fig. 2-3) DTO DWR No.1. No. 2, and No. 3 — controls and indicators (fig. 2-4) CPU — controls and indicators (fig. Memory unit A Teleprinter — soli — Reader-printer drawer — controls and indicators (fig. 2-8) Main cable entry panel — controls and indicators (fig. 2-9) Communications unit — controls and indicators (fig. TDECC power distribution pane! — controls and indieatora ( PCP only) (fig. 2-11) Status panel — controls and indicators ( PCP only) (fig. 2-12) T.0. control panel — controls and indicators ( PCP only) (fig. RO control pane! — controls and indicators ( PCP only) (fig. 2-14) TO, communieations panel — controls and indieatora ( PCP only) tig 2:18) RO communications panel — controls anc 2.18) on BITE switeh panel — controls and indiestore ( PCP only) (fig. 2-17) TAS control unit *(AE)! —controls and indicators (PCP only) (fig. 2-18). ‘TAS display unit *(AE)' — controls and indicators (PCP only) (fig. 2-19) Multichannel communications station patch panel — Army) (fig. 2-20 Multichannel communications station patch panel — access jacks (USMC) (fig. 2-20) CTU panel connectors (U.S. Army) (fig. 2-21) CTU panel connectors (USMC) (fig. 2-21) Auxiliary equipment Operation under usual conditions General... Operational modes Functions performed at the TDECG ( PCP only) . Functions performed with the TAS *(AE)' (PCP only). HIPIR emission control (EMCON) *(AD)' (PCP only) .. Operating procedures TDECC CRT marking ADP mode operating procedures performed at the TDECC . HIPIR mode operating procedure performed atthe TDECC RO operational guidelines... .. RO operational guidelines ‘Tactical firing operations ADP symbol display during normal engagementa ADP looping procedure . . Operating procedures for erratic ADP symbol detections... Operation of materiel used in conjunction with the PCP Platoon communications Maintenance loop Firing section oo Operational control line. Internal lines ID iReter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. Paragraph 29 2-10 21 212 2.13 214 215 Page 21 21 28 25 21 2-10 214 2.15 2-16 217 2:18 2-20 221 2-25 231 284 2-86 2-88 289 C10clo CHAPTER Table Table Section CHAPTER Iv. vi. vil. a. ae, n. £E 85 37. a8 3:10, an. 312, 3.18, B14. 3.15. 3:16. iT. 3.18, 3:19, 3-20, eel. 322, m1. 4“ TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Operation under emergency conditions General ADP inoperative CWAR inoperative CWAR and IFF inoperative Removing a defective mis Operation under unusual conditions High-velocity winds Extreme cold and hot weather operation . Barometric pressure .. Humidity Rain. General ‘Multichannel operation .. Operation of multichannel communications (USMC) ‘Multichannel operatior PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS: Preventive maintenance services General eonineninesron Responsibility .. Intervals. General procedures for all services and inspections, Preventive maintenance services. ‘AFU electrical cable assembly checks and 8€FViC08 enn ICC/ PCP preventive maintenance checks and services AFU electrical cable assembly set OA-8951/G checks and services Operational checks General External test equipment required ee External test equipment required Procedures prior to application of pow Position of controls prior to application of power Position of controls prior to application of power enn Energizing procedure ... Energizing procedure — shutdown to standb; Energizing procedure — standby to operate Deenergizing procedure Deenergizing procedure — operate to standb; Cheek procedures ‘Main power distribution and illumination check . Emergency power distribution and illumination chech ADP check . ADP/modem interface check TDECC check ADP/TDECC interface check . Return ADP to system operatios Return ADP to system operation with tape. IFF cheek ... Multichannel communications station check (U.S. Army) .. Multichannel communieations station checks (USMC) PCP communications check MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Repair parts, special tools, and equipment (ICC/ PCP) Panenoh SS5R5 prere SESRE » & 227 37 38 3-10 ail a2 218 Page 2.75 2-75 2-76 2-76 2-76 2-76 2-16 277 277 277 277 277 2-85 2-85 a1 31 31 31 a1 Bg 38 34 34 34 34 35 818 218 313 316 BIT B17 3.18 319 3-20 3.22 824 3-46 3-69 3-16 278 3-80 9-84.2 3-91 3-95 3-100 3-102TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 n Section IIL. Iv. v. vi. vi. CHAPTER 5. Table ba. CHAPTER 6. Section L n. Table 61, Section III. Vv. ‘Scope General service procedures Service upon receipt of the PCP, AFU electrical cable amembly set 0A-8951/G and the 60-kw generator ac output receptacle box General. ae Service upon receipt of the ICC! PCP trailer ChaB818. «nnn Service upon receipt of the ICC/ PCP equipment shelter Service upon receipt of the identification friend or foe (IFF) equipment Service upon receipt of the batteries . Service upon receipt ofthe APU electrical cable amembly set OAS951/G......... Service upon receipt of the 60-kw generator ac: eoutput ‘receptacle box Lubrication General lubrication instruction Lubrication order .. ‘Tape reader and tape cleaning Cleaning the tape reader .. Cleaning diagnostic and oper Prepunched tape replacement General ‘Tape replacement procedure Equipment cabinet moisture removal CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE General Replacement of the modules in the Deenergize PPI display circuits ( PCP only) Replacement of the PPI drawer assembly CRT...... Replacement of the IFF antenna and ‘pedestal assembly (roof-mounted) .. Replacement of the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly (triped-mount Replacement of the air conditioner .. Replacement of switchboards SB-22A/PT Adjustment of the cable reel brake device ......... Replacement of the electrical cable parts ‘Output printer tape installation Replacement of the status panel meter lamps ‘TAS display unit mirror cleaning *(AE)' ‘Removal or replacement of additional units Removal or replacement of additional units PREPARATION FOR TRAVEL General Description of helicopter lifting components... Preparation for travel for the ICC/ PCP General « Preparation for travel procedures — prime mover Preparation for travel procedures — helicopter Preparation for travel for the electrical cables Rater to appendix E for serial number effectivity. w 2 SLEsr SEER EEEe 61 62 68 64 65 fae cw 41 “41 43 “3 43 “3 “3 “8 44 44 “4 “4 “6 46 4 ar b 51 61 61 rey 57 57 12 612 6-15 6-16 5.16 516.2 5-162 617 61 61 61 61 61 ee 66 61710 ™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 Parngraph Page General 6-9 628 ‘Typical cable retrieving procedures (fig. 6-17) 6-10 6-28 Preparation for travel procedures — prime mo’ G11 628 Preparation for travel procedures — helicopter .. G12 6-88 CHAPTER 7. EMPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1 Section 1. a 1 cat 16 Multichannel communications equipment (U.S. Army) 18 Multichannel communications equipment (USMC) ... 18 Emplacement procedures — helicopter ecm 19 19 II. Emplacement of the APU electrical cables 19 i 19 Emplacement procedure — helicopter ™ CHAPTER © & + ORIENTING AND ALINING THE AFU (PCP ONLY) Section 1. Orienting and alining Purpose 81 81 Methods of orienting and alining an AFU a2 aa Alinement operations as 84 M2 aiming circle a 83 i 85 85 86 85 aT 85 88 85 Computer-aided synchro null verification 89 85 Entering the synchro null verification software patch 810 a6 Table 81. Computer-aided synchro null verification patch ... 86 82 APU orientation and alinement procedure with t 87 88. AFU system orientation and alinement procedure without 813 Section TL Asimuth mil ring Introduction .. ove 820 Description ofthe azimuth mil ring and vernier scale siz 8:20 How to read the azimuth mil ring using the vernier scale eis 821 How to set the azimuth mil ring . — au 821 CHAPTER ——9._-ORIENTING AND ALINING AN ICC (HAWK BATTERY) Purpose on a Methods of orienting and alinng the 92 a Sequence of HAWK battery alinement operation 98 o4 ‘M2 aiming circle oo a4 Orientation and alinement during blackout conditions 95 o4 Preliminary procedures o4 Synchro control system ... o4 Orientation and alinement procedures o4 Table 9-1, System orientation and alinement procedure .. 98 CHAPTER 10.__ LIGHTNING PROTECTION Scope 104 104 [Lightning rod design and construction 10-2 1041 Lightning rod emplacement procedures = 108 1041 Table 101. Is required for the ICC/PCP, and BCC, and remotely located AN/TPX-46 receiver-transmitter group and IFF antenna ... 10-8 CHAPTER 11. INTEGRATED SYSTEM CHECKS Section L. Introduction General nnn Integrated Systems ChecksTM 9—1430—1535—12-1 Table 11-1. ue us Tbe 14. us 4 17. wt. 18 118.01, 1-81. 82, 119. Section IL. ‘Table 11-10, mal. naz 1g. a, 1a. Section = IV. ‘Teble 11-15. 11.16. nat, CHAPTER «12 Section L Paro ‘Cheek Procedures .. na Fault Isolation . 4 TSC and Fault Isolation Coverage ns Fault Isolation Directory Matrix 14 Explanation of Checks and Symbol T ‘System Color-Coded Tracing Diagrams ns Random Entry Index to Indicators 19 Index to Indicators ‘Site and Integrated Equipment Adjustment 11-10 Site Adjustments «2... Integrated Equipment Adj Additional ISC ADP Operator Aids nl Integrated System Checks General 12 ISC Program Loading 18 ‘Major Item Preparation for ISC's. nl Performing the ISC's 1-15 Initialization Checks (ADP Normal Mode) ...1..sosssusnnsnenson CWAR Checks (ADP Normal Mode) AADCP Checks (ADP Normal Mode) IFF Checks (ADP Normal Mode) .. HIPIR/LCHR Checks (ADP Normal Mode) *(AD)* HIPIR/LCHR Checks (ADP Normal Mode) *(AG)? TAS Check (ADP Normal Mode) *(AE)! .. AFU Platoon Integration Checks with AN/TSQ.73. AFU Platoon Integration Checks with ITAOC (USMC) ... Integrated Equipment Adjustment Procedures. Fault Isolation Directories, and System Color-Coded Wire Tracing Diagrams Fault Isolation Directories 1-16 Initialization Fault Isolation Directory .... CWAR Fault Isolation Directory . AADCP Fault Isolation Directory IFF Fault Isolation Directory . HIPIR/LCHR Fault Isolation Directory ‘TAS Fault Isolation Directory *(AB)' System Color-Coded Tracing Diagrams... at Explanation of Checks and Symbolic Diagrams General nas Initialization and ADCP Checks ~~ Mag CWAR Checks wns BD IFF Checks 121 HIPIR Four Parameter Designate Track and Firing Check 11.2 Casualty Mode (No ADP) Integrated System Checks Goneral . = = 11-23 Major Item Preparation for I8C's 11-4 Performing the ISC's 11-5 CWAR Checks (Casualty Mode — No ADP) IPF Checks (Casualty Mode — No ADP) . HIPIR/LCHR Checks (Casualty Mode — No ADP) « SILENT MODE SYSTEM REDEPLOYMENT CHECKS AFU (POP Only) General ya HIPIR Silent Aim . cence DB Entering the FUPIR Silent Aim and Antenna Safety Software Patch .......s-ccssse-- 128 en na M4 1a us us ut ut 9 11-10 wl Ml uaz Mas 1118 11441 11.45 wat 11.18 12 14 211-243 1-6 1140.2 11-401 11-408 M4 1144 1441 1146 140 11-58 11-55 11-4681 4 1-7 1% 11-99 191 11-98 11-106 11-106 11-106 u-l0t 11-108 11-10 we wa 19dcz Table 124. 122 128, Section 0. Table = 124. APPENDIX A. B c D. E Fr INDEX TM 9—1430—1535—12—-1 Paragraph Page HIPIR Silent Aim Software Patch — 12-2 ‘Major Item Preparation for the AFU Silent Mode Redeployment Checks 124 12-2 AFU Silent Mode Redeployment Checks Preparation, 1221 AFU Silent Mode Redeployment Checks 1241 HAWK Battery (ICC Only) General nnn 12-13 Preparation 126 12-13 HAWK Battery Silent Mode Redeployment Checks Preparation .. 12:13 REFERENCES .. — Ad MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART ...... Bi BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST . C1 NOMENCLATURE AND REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS . Da SERIAL NUMBER EFFECTIVITY CODE El MINOR ALTERATIONS Pa Index-1 viiTH 9—1430—1535—12—1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Section |. 1-1. Seope @. This technical manual (TM) contains instructions for operator and organizational maintenance of the guided missile information and coordination central (ICC) AN/MSQ-110 (U.S. Army) and AN/MSQ-111 (USMC), and the guided missile platoon command post (PCP) AN/MSW-13 (U.S. Army) and AN/MSW-14 (USMC). Also included are the HAWK integrated system maintenance check procedures (ISC’s), and descriptive and maintenance data for cabling emplacement procedures for the PCP in the AFU configuration only. Cabling equipment procedures for the ICC when used as part of a HAWK battery, battery minus, or triad configuration, and a PCP when used as an ICC are contained in TM 9—1430—1526—12—1. ®. *(AE)' This TM contains information relative to the operation and/or maintenance of the tracking adjunct system (TAS). However, only those HAWK units which have been specifically designated to receive TAS and have obtained appropriate tables of organization (TOE) authorization may order, receive or mount TAS battery replaceable units (BRU’s). ¢. The requirement for nomenclature distinc- tion between “Basic and Improved” HAWK Systems and major items is no longer applicable. Action to delete this distinctive terminology will be taken as the respective pages of the manual are changed for other reasons. 1-11. Destruction of Materiel to Prevent Enemy use Destruction of materiel to prevent enemy use will be undertaken by the user upon order of the unit commander. His decision will be based upon orders and policies established by the Army Com- mander, Procedures for destruction of the ICC/ PCP and related materiel are contained in TM 43— 0002-24, ‘Rater to appendix E for serial number effectivity. GENERAL 1.2. Travel Preparation, Emplacement, Alinement, and Lightning Protection Complete instructions for preparation for travel, emplacement, orientation and alinement, and lightning protection of the ICC/ PCP are contained in chapters 6 through 9. Chapters 6 and 7 provide procedures for the preperation for travel and emplacement of the electrical cables for the AFU. 1.3. Forms, Records, and Reports Maintenance forms, records, and reports which are to be used by maintenance personnel at all maintenance levels are listed in and prescribed by TM 38--750. 1-4, Differences Among Models Any differences among models that exist in this equipment are indicated in the text and on diagrams by the use of the serial number effectivity code. This code is given in appendix E. 1-4.1 Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIR‘s) If your HAWK equipment needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the only one who can tell us what you don’t like about your equipment. Let us know why you don’t like the design or performance. Put it on an SF 368 (Quality Deficiency Report). Instructions for preparing EIR’s are provided in TM 38-750, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS). EIR’s should be mailed directly to Commander, US Army Missile Command, ATTN: DRSMI-SNEM, Redstone Arse- nal, Alabama 35898. A reply will be sent directly to you.T™ 9—1430—1535—12-1 1.4.2 Hand Receipt Hand receipts for Components of End Item (COED, Basic Issue Items (BII), and Additional Authorization List (AAL) items are published in a Hand Receipt Manual, TM 9—1425—1525—10— HR. This manual is published to aid in property accountability and is available through: Com- mander, U.S. Army Adjutant General Publication Center, ATTN: AGDL—OD, 1655 Woodson Rd., St. Louis, MO 63114. ci 1-5. Modification Work Orders Table 1-1 lists all modification work orden (MWO’s) affecting the ICC/ PCP. NOTE MWO’s are listed in this manual for information only. This manual is not an authority for requisitioning kits. The published MWO, or change thereto, is the only authority for requisitioning kits. Table 1-1. Modification Work Orders ICC's 400002 through 480122. PCP's 275001 through 480122. ‘Adds two thermo switches to control the ADP Pedestal heaters and exhaust blower. 9-1425-525-50-18 9-1425-1525-60-2 ‘Makes wire wrap changes to ADP parent plate H. ICC's 276002 through 560,307. CP's 275001 through 40,160. 9-1425—1525-60-3 ‘Adds two protective load resistors to the reader-print- | ICC’s 275002 through 660412. er drawer to prevent diode failure. PCP's 275001 through 660412. 9-1425-1525-60-4 Makes wire wrap changes to ADP parent plates A, C, ICC's 276002 through 680283. D, B, and P. Deletes module AB7 from parent plate PCP's 276001 through 680233. D. 9-1425-1525—50-5 Makes wire wrap changes to ADP parent plate B, | ICC's 275002 through 680238. ‘and wiring changes to ADP harness cables AZ WT and AZA5 W2. Makes wire wrap changes to TDECC control logic PCP's 275001 through 680283. asembly A9 parent plate 2, 9-1425—1525—-50-6 Makes wire wrap changes to ADP parent plates H | ICC's 275002 through 680283. and 8. PCP's 275001 through 680283. 9-1425—-1525—-50-7 Makes wire wrap changes to TDECC digital amembly | ICC's 275002 through 580233. ‘Ad parent plate X, and to ADP parent plates D and CP's 275001 through 63028 8. Makes wiring change to radio rack patching panel and deletes designation strip. 9-1425—1525—50-8 Makes wire wrap changes to ADP parent plates A, B, D, E, F. Adds resistors to B plate modules, and in- ulation sleeving to A, B, and C plates. ICC's 275002 through 570118. POP's 275001 through 570118. ICC's 275002 through 560307. PCP’s 275001 through 660807. 9-1425-1525-50-9 ‘Adds diode and makes wire wrap changes in the ADP memory drawer. Makes wiring changes to shelter wire harness W1, and to ADP wire harness W4.cz TH 9~1430—1535—12— Table 1-1. Modification Work Orders — Continued 9—1425-1535-60-10 Releases block 11 operational program. Makes misc. changes to DTO 1. ‘Makes wire wrap changes to ADP parent plates B, E, and F. Adds sleeving to high voltage hazard pins on plates A and B. ICC's 275002 through 600460. ‘PCP's 275001 through 600450. ICC's 276002 through 670118. ‘PCP's 276001 through 57011! 9-1426—1525-60— 11 25-5 Makes modifications to the storage shelf for the | ICC's 275002 through 870118. aaeeeaea ese tea le IFP antenna tripod. PCP's 275001 through 570118, 9-1425-1528-60-18 | Adds two overvoltage protectors to ADP parent | ICC's 276002 through 620800. plate A to eliminate flue of modem interface | PCP' 276001 through 620800. modules A86 and A37, and two overvoltage pro- tectoes to TDECC parent plate X to eliminate failure of modem interface module A37. 9-1430-15885-60-1 PCP's 276001 through 680288. 9—1480—1585—50—2 Modifies the PCP for operation with HIPIR radar AN/MPQ-5T Modifies the PCP for operation with the TAS. ‘Adds blocking diode to the control logic assembly AD to prevent inadvertent missile firing. PCP's 276001 through 630451 9—1400—1695—80-3 PCP's 276001 through 680451 9-1430-1635-60-4 PCP's 275001 through 590344,1430—1535—12—1 Section Il. 1-6. Physical Description a. Trailer. The ICC/ PCP is mounted on an M390 or M390C modified trailer. For operation, detailed description, and maintenance procedures, refer to TM 92330-23514, b. Shelter. The electrical equipment shelter is basically a rectangular unit of lightweight ma. terial, and is equipped with standard lifting, ti down, and tow fittings for transport by helicopter, cargo plane, or truck. For detailed description and maintenance procedures, refer to TM 9—1425— 585—14/2. c. Exterior Electronic Equipment. The exterior electronic equipment and accessories are shown in figures 1-1, 1-2, 1-3 and 1-4, The target identification friend or foe (IFF) antenna and pedestal assembly (roof-mounted) (3, fig. 1-1) is shown emplaced for local operation. d. Interior Electronic Equipment. The interior electronic equipment and accessories are shown in figures 1-4 and 1-5. ¢. IFF Antenna (Tripod-Mounted). Figure 1-6 shows the remote setup for the IFF antenna, used when the antenna is located away from the ICC/ PCP, Essentially, the remote setup consists of the receiver-transmitter group OR-85/TPX-46 (V) and the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly mounted on the tripod (5, 1, 14, and 12, fig. 1-6). The pedestal assembly contains the IFF communication unit (4, fig. 1-1). The tripod contains the level indicators (2, fig. 1-6) used during emplacement (chapter 7). f. Automatic Data Processor. The automatic data processor (ADP) (fig. 1-7) consists of various drawers containing plug-in modules, The drawers are mounted on slides for ease of removal of plug- in modules during maintenance. Decals located inside each drawer door depict module location. The modules are keyed to prevent installation in improper locations. & Tactical Display and Engagement Control Console (PCP Only). The tactical display and engagement control console (TDECC) (fig. 1-8) "Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 1.2.2 cn ICC/IPCP DESCRIPTION AND DATA contains the controls, indicators, CRT display, logic modules and power supplies necessary for! automatic engagement control of the HAWK 5) tem when deployed in the improved assault fn unit ( AFU) configuration. Console electronig are modular and monitored by builtin test equi ment (BITE) to provide fault isolation, and mize repeir and maintenance time. h, Multichannel Communications Station. US. Army multichannel communications statior (fig. 1-9) and the USMC multichaniel communi tions station (fig. 1-10) consist of one 12 cl (US. Army) or two 8 channel (USMC) comm nications systems. A patch panel and patch cor are included in the assemblies to provide ad flexibility by permitting rapid channel reallocatic All of the radio equipment items can be remo’ for maintenance purposes. i TAS Equipment *(AE)’ (PCP Only). The TAS} equipment in the PCP consists of a control unit (9, | fig. 1-5) and display unit (7, fig. 1-6). The control unit is located on the TDECC shelf and is within the RO’s primary control area. The display unit is mounted on the wall next to the TDECC and permits viewing within the RO’s primary or secondary visual area. Refer to TM $—1430—1536—13 for additional phys ical description of the TAS. 1-7. Functional Deseri a. General. The PCP serves as the platoon command post. The ICC and PCP function as net: control stations, communications terminal, and IFF portion of the system control loop. These func tions are accomplished in either the automatic or manual assist engagement mode of system operation. The PCP can also be used as an ICC if necessary. With a minimum amount of change- over, the PCP can be configured and deployed asan ICC in an HAWK battery. b. TDECC ( PCP Only). The TDECC displays and provides control of data interfacing with the cw acquisition radar (CWAR), high-powered illuminator radar (HIPIR), modified ADP, and IFF interrogator set AN/TPX.46 (V) 1 equipment. The controls and indicators enable the operators to command the platoon, designate and engage targets, execute a fire command, and to control the acquisition and tracking, the IFF, and the display setup.‘TO OUTBOARD RADIO SETS TRC-145_ { TO INBOARD RADIO. = ANTENNA A8-1852/GRC-103 1-Bracket for stow position (IFF antenna) ‘2-Lifting bracket S-IFF antenna and pedestal assembly (roof-mounted) 4CTFF communication unit 5-Antenna hoisting unit €-Whip antennas (not wed and to be discontinued *(D)*) ‘7-Ghelter iting and tiedown fittings Communication 0-inboard radio antenna M—Outboard radio set TRC-145 cable *Reter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. Figure 1-1. ICC/IPCP emplaced (U.S. Army)—3/4 front view. TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 311779 12~Ground rods (2) 13—Remote IFF cables and reel 14—Trailer M390 (modified) or MS90C (modified) y \d IPCP’s without TDECC’s) 17-4FF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch 18~GND attach point E1 19—Main cable entry panel 20—Automatic data processor (ADP) air intake vent 21—iren (IPCP only) 22—ADP air exhaust ventsTH 9—1430—1535—12—1 ‘A8-2236 OR AS-2861 1—Bracket for stow position (IFF antenna) 2—Lifting bracket ‘S-IFF antenna and pedestal assembly (roof-mounted) 4-4FF communication unit ‘5—Antenne hoisting unit ‘no. 1 multichannel radio receive whip antenna ‘7—BSystem no. 2 multichannel radio receive whip antenna 8--Ghelter lifting and tiedown fittings ‘9-Roof ladder 10—Communication termination unit (CTU) 11—Remote radio antenna cables MS 311780 12~Ground rods (2) 18—Remote IFF cables and reel 14—Trailer M390 (modified) or M890C (modified) 16—Battery box 16-Ballast plates (ICC's, and IPCP's without TDECC’s) 17—IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch 18-GND attach point EL 19~Main cable entry panel 20—Automatic data processor (ADP) air intake vent 21—Giren (IPCP only) 22—ADP air exhaust vents Figure 1-2. ICC/IPCP emplaced (USMC)—3/4 front view. 14TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Ww MS 311781 1-Whip antenna (not used U.S. Army and to be discontinued *(D)") 11-1FF remote connector 25 2-IFF antenna cable entry enclosure 12—Stowage clips for air conditioner ‘travel cover 3-Whip antenna (not used U.S. Army and to be discontinued *(D)") 13—Air conditioner travel cover 4-iren (IPCP's only) 14—Air conditioner rf filter 5—Antenna stowage clamp 15—Stow bracket for IFF antenna and pedestal assembly ADP air exhaust vents 16—Antenna stowage clamp ‘1—Pressure air vent 17—AZ DRIVE switch 8—Access door 18—IFF antenna data cable 4.11 m (13.5 ft) ‘9-ADP air intake vent 19-4FF antenna rf cables 4.11 m (13.5 ft) 10-Stepladder Figure 1-3. ICC/IPCP ready for travel—3/4 rear view. ‘Refer to Appendix E for serial number effectivity. VsTH 9—1430—1535—12—1 APRifte rack 2- EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch 3-NORMAL LIGHTING switch 4-OVERRIDE switch 5—Utilty outleta 6-IFF antenna tripod ‘THIF coder-decoder group? 8-IFF receiver-transmitter group 9-Helmet rack 10—Emergency lamps 11—Normal lamps 12—Air conditioner? 13—Communications operator's chair Air conditioner remote control box Utility outlets Figure 1-4. ICC/IPCP—right side cutaway view. * Auxiliary equipment, refer to table 2-22. MS 311782A 16—Communications unit 17—Auxiliary control unit ‘18—IFF interrogator control unit" 19—Switchboard 2° 20—Emergency lamps 21—Normal lamps 22—KG-30 encryption unit (USMC) 23—Multichannel communications station (USMC) 24—Utility outlets 25—Multichannel communications station (U.S, Army) 26—Transformer T1 27—Switchboard 17 28—Storage compartment 29-Fire extinguisherC10 TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 IST N Nez iS MS 311783 1-Blectric space heaters 9—TAS control unit *(AE)! 2-Fire extinguisher 10—TDECC_ 3—Clock 11—Tactical officer's (T.0.) chair ‘4—Headset hanger 12—Relay-terminal board 5—Normal lamps 13—-Normal lamps 6—Spare parts cabinet 14—Power distribution cabinet ‘TATAS display unit *(AE)! 15—ADP 8—Radar operator's (RO) chair Figure 1-5. ICC/IPCP—left side cutaway view. TRafer to appendix E. for serial number effectivity. 7 GoogleTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 157042 I-IFF antenna (tripod- mounted) 8—Leg retainer handimob 2-Level indicators ‘9—Leg length locking handknob 3—Sum channel cable 10—Ground straps and ground rod 4—Ditference channel cable 11—Leveling handknobs 5—Receiver-transmitter group 12—Tripod 6-¥ data cable 3.7 m (12 ft) 13—Bolt assembly handknob ‘T—Data cable 114 m (375 ft) including 22.9 m (76 ft) cable __-‘14—Pedestal assembly Figure 1-6. IFF antenna (tripod-mounted).‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 ae MI 70670 1—Data takeott (PTO) wR ai 6—Reader-printer drawer 2-DTO DWR #: ‘1—Golid state/punched tape reader *(R) S-pro Dwr #3! 8—Output printer 1(P) 4—Central Processing unit (CPU)* 9—ADP ac power distribution drawer 5—Memory wt “Alphabetic area designations on the drawers refer to. parent plates in the ADP. Figure 1-7. ADP.1430—1535—12-1 1 Ww 1—Central communication unit (RO) 2~Control logic assembly? ‘3—Relay antenna control 4—Control logic assembly? 5—Central communication unit (T.0.) 67.0. control panel 1-PPI drawer assembly 8-T.0. headset connector 9-Power distribution panel 10—Coordinate computer les e[ of| ea po 8— "ns 311784 11—Synchro bus transformer 12—Digital assembly* 13—Power supply drawer 44—TAS control unit *(AE)* 15—RO control panel 16—BITE switch panel 1 17-4HIPIR spectrum analyzer 18—Access cover 19—Status panel Figure 1-8. TDECC. 1 Alphabetic area designations on the assemblies refer to parent plates in the TDECC. l 2 Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 1-10 ciTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1 MS 311785ATM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1-Patch panel 2-Modem MD-791/GCC. ‘§—Terminal set control C-7827/VCC 4—Modem MD-791/GCC 5—Terminal set control C-7827/VCC 6—Telephone telegraph terminal TH-81/GCC ‘7-Radio set R-442/VRC and mount MT-1898 MS 166245 8~Power supply C-7674/VCC 9—Radio set RT-524/VRC and mount MT-1029 10Radio set RT-524/VRC and mount MT-1029 11-Radio set RT-442/VRC and mount MT-1898 12—Power supply C-7674/VCC 18Telephone /telegraph terminal TH-81/GCC Figure 1-10, Multichannel communications station (USMC). Googlecio ¢. ADP. Target data is received from the IFF, HIPIR, and the CWAR radars. This data is pro- cemed by the ADP which then generates data to permit either automatic or manual engagement of hostile targets. d. Communications. The ICC/ PCP contains equipment which provides for automatic two-way digital data transmission of target engagement and battery status data, and also for voice communications between higher, adjacent, and subordinate system elements. For the U.S. Army, the multi- ‘Rater to appendix E for serial number effectivity. TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 channel communications equipment is compatible with both fire coordination system AN/TSQ-73 and the Battalion Operations Central (BOC). For the USMC, the equipment is compatible with the AN/TSQ-89 and the Tactical Air Operations Center (TAOC). ¢. IFF. Provisions are made for IFF compatibility by the inclusion of IFF system AN/TPX-46 (V) 1. This IFF system is operated automatically by the ADP, or remotely from the BCC or TDECC.T 9—1430—1535—12—1 f TAS *(AE)' (PCP Only). The RO has the option of visually acquiring, tracking, and identifying a target by using the closed-circuit television features of the TAS. From the PCP, the RO manually controls the azimuth and elevation, movement of the TAS video camera and telescope located at the HIPIR, and subsequently selects the camera/ antenna tracking modes necessary for electro- optical track of the target. The RO can also control the HIPIR radiation mode by utilizing the emission ce control (EMCON) feature of the TAS. This enables the radar to remain “silent” while target acquisition, tracking, and identification is being accomplished Refer to TM 9—1430—1596—18 for an addition! functional description of the TAS. 1-8. Data ‘Data concerning the ICC/ PCP is given in table 1-2. For additional operating data, refer to TM 9- 1425-1625. ‘Table 1-2. ICC/IPCP Physical and Operating Data Icc/ POP Weight With trailer chassis Leas trailer chassis Height TFF antenna stowed IFF antenna emplaced Radio antenns raised (USMC only) Width Length Emplaced ‘Travel Max slope emplacement Operating power ‘Trailer Chassis IFF Antenna Assembly (Roof-Mounted) Weight Height Width Length Operating power "Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 114 Data 4505 kg (9,910 Ib.) ICC (US Army) 4778 kg (10,500 Ib.) PCP (US Army) 4505 kg (9,910 Ib.) ICC (USMC) 4773 kg (10,500 Ib.) PCP (USMC) 8009 kg (6,620 Ib.) ICC (US Army) 9227 kg (7,100 Ib.) PCP (US Army) 8009 kg (6,620 Ib.) ICC (USMC) 8227 kg (7,100 Ib.) PCP (USMC) 383 em (181 in.) 482 em (170 in.) 617 em (243 in.) o 244 em (96 in.) 596 em (234 in.) 521 em (208 in.) 10 deg. 416 mac, 400 Hz, 36, 12.15 kw (24 kw with ADP and personnel heaters) ‘TM 9~2330—235—-14 68 kg (150 Ib.) 88.8 em (33 in.) 49.5 om (19.6 in.) 216 cm (86 in.) 208 vac, 3, 400 Hz; 116 vac, phase ' B, 400 Hz; and 28 wie |TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 ‘Table 1-2. ICC/IPCP Physical and Operating Dato—Continued a IFF Antenna Pedestal IPF Antenna Pedestal ‘Tripod Weight Height IFF Interrogator Set AN/TPX-46(V)1 IPF Receiver-Transmitter Group OR-85/TPX-46(V) IFF Remote Cables Data Weight Length Data (extension) Weight Length Y Data Weight Length ‘TDECC (IPCP's only) Weight Height Length Depth ‘Operating power Weight Height Depth Widen Operating power Switchboards 1 and 2 SB-22A/PT TM 11-6895—632—-12 19 kg (42 Ib.) 165 em (61 in.) TM 11-6895-632-12 TM 11-6895—-632—12 109 kg (270 Ib.) 91.4 m (800 ft.) 80.4 kg (67 Ib.) 22.9 m(75 ft) 6.8 kg (16 Ib.) 8.7 m (12 ft.) 863.6 kg (800 Ib.) 186.4 em (73.87 in.) 141.8 em (55.84 in.) 1101.6 em (40 in.) 28 vde, 416 vac, 400 Hz, 36 ; 650 watts; 28 vac, 400 Hz, 3, 350 watts 659 kg (1,450 Ib.) 182.4 em (71.8 in.) 71.12 em (28 in.) 168.9 em (66.5 in.) 28 vde, 416 vac, 400 Hz, 36, 3.65 kw (11 kw wth heaters) T™M 11-6805—262-12TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 1-2. ICC/IPCP Physical and Operating Data—Continued = ‘Communication Termination Unit (CTU) Height Width Depth Air Conditioner CE20VALA (Trane) F18T4-2 (Keco) CV-20-4-08 (Hottle) Heaters (3) Total heating capacity Operating power Multichannel Communications Station (US Army) Converter CV-1648/G Multiplexer TD-660/G Order Wire RT-773 Receiver R-1329 AMPL CONV AM-4316 ‘Transmitter T-983 AMPL FREQ MULTR Multichannel Communications Station (USMC) Control, Power Supply -7674/vCC Control, Terminal Set ©-7827/VCC Modem MD-791/GCC ‘Mount MT-1898/VRC Receiver, R-442/VRC Receiver/Transmitter RT-524/VRC ‘Terminal, Telephone-Telegraph ‘TH-81/GCC Data 50.8 cm (20.5 in.) 26 em (9.88 in.) 16.5 cm (6.6 in.) TM 6—4120—222- 14 ‘TM 54120-30715 ‘TM 5—4120-307-15 High—15,364 btuyhr ‘Med—10,236 btu/hr Low—6,118 btu/hr 416 vac, 400 Hz, 39 ‘TM 11-5805-367-12 TM 11-6805—382-12 TM 11-5820-540-12 T™M 11-5820-640-12 ‘TM 11-6820-640-12 TM 06667A~35 TM 06667A—35 TM 06667A—35 ‘TM 11-5820-409-35 ‘TM 11-5820—409-35, TM 11-6805—401-34-2 T™ 11-5805—471-35Sectien Ill. E This section contains descriptive data for the AFU electrical cables. The use of the cable identi- leation test receptacle located on certain major ems of the LAFU is also discussed. For descrip- ion of the ICC cabling, refer to TM 9-1480— 526-12-1. 110, 1APU Electrical Cables The electrical cables used to connect the various major items of the IHAWK system into an [AFU consist of 6 power cable assemblies and 8 data cable assemblies. These cables are procured from the OA-8951/G or OA-8952/G cable assembly bets. a. The power cable is made up of four No. 8 AWG conductors. The data cable consists of 42 sonductors: forty No. 20 AWG, and two 73-ohm soaxial conductors. b. The power cable assembly is 114 m (375 ft) long, and has a four-prong male connector on the end which plugs into the generator. The other end has a four-contact female connector which plugs into any of the major items. ¢ The data cable assembly is 114 m (375 ft) long, and has female connectors on both ends. These connectors can be plugged into any major tem data cable receptacle which has the correct umber of conductors. d. Chapters 4 and 5 describe inspection and maintenance for the cable assemblies. e. Table 1-3 contains a list of the cable assem- olies used in an IAFU configuration. Detailed procedures for interconnecting the major items of in IAFU are described in chapter 7, section III. 11. Conductor Functions For IAFU conductor functions, refer to TM 9— 1480-1525—12-5. 1-12, Test Receptacles Each major item of equipment, except the ICWAR and ILCHR, is equipped with a test receptacle, located on the cable entry panel, which is used to identify data cable runs and origins. The IPCP has two test receptacles: one for the 114 m (875 ft) 42 conductor data cables, and the other for the 10.7 (86 ft) 43 conductor data cables TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 ICAL CABLES DESCRIPTION AND DATA which connect the IPCP and IBCC when the IPCP is used as an ICC. The data cable can be quickly and easily inserted into the test receptacle. A 28.vde indicator lamp, located close to the data receptacle it identifies, is wired in series with certain contacts in the test receptacle. The 28-vde lamp source originates in the major item. When a data cable is inserted into the test receptacle, the indicating lamp that illuminates is dependent upon the wiring arrangement of the receptacle. Because of different wiring arrangements (jumpers) for data cable receptacles, only the lamp which indicates the true origin of the data cable inserted into the test receptacle will be illuminated, Stencilled markings near each receptacle identify the origin of the data cable that should be connected to it. @. Items Connected by a Single Cable, Because the ICWAR and ILCHR are connected by a single cable, they do not require test receptacle indicator lamps. b. IAFU Major Items Connected by Dual Cable Runs. The IHIPIR is connected to the IPCP by three data cables. The three data cables are identical, and interchangeable. To insure that the same data cable is connected to the proper connector at the IHIPIR and IPCP, a test receptacle is provided on the IPCP cable entry panel (fig. 2-8) and IHIPIR cable entry panel. When data cable installation begins, one end of each data cable may be connected to either receptacle at the IHIPIR, or to the two corresponding connectors at the IPCP. Normally, one end of each data cable is connected to the receptacles located on the IHIPIR. At the IPCP, prior to connection, the opposite end of each cable is first connected to the test receptacle. Because of the origin of the cable, a cable identification lamp on the IPCP cable entry panel illuminates indicating the proper receptacle to which the cable in the test receptacle should be connected. 1-17TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 1-3. Cable Assembly Data (IAFU) 14m 9178555 613.6 kg (875 ft) Power (1350 fb) 14m 10108181-1 . 883.6 kg (875 ft) Data (944 By 118TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 CHAPTER 2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS —_— Section |. CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 2-1. ICC/IPCP Controls and Indicators 2-2. Auxillary Equipment (AUX EQUIP) ‘The controls and indicators are illustrated in Controls and Indicators gures 2-1 through 2-19, and are described in The auxiliary equipment location is referenced in table 2-22. Table 1-2 references the TM’s in tbles 2-1 through 2-19. The key numbers in the e tbles refer to the callout references in the figures. which the AUX EQUIP controls and indicators lacarded items are indicated by upper-case let- _are illustrated. m. 1 234 5 6 7 8 9 10 W an \ Sipane sage! es a 6"5"S \S \STS iS yo 0 0 \S°S"S 46 5S 15'S’ 1 1 L | | | | th TOO 00000 66000000000 |: ncneast ! san powen muse i on OMTOR 4 VOLTS. NOKATOR — ADAMI DIFF — pea. Hy (me B20 | Tram one | | v wows mu o a AA Y 2 2 200 (19 8 7 3 15 4 3 MS 311787 Figure 2-1. Power distribution cabinet —controls and indicators. Power Distribution Cabinet—Controle and Indicators (Fig. -1) Connects primary 416-vac, 400-Hz, 34 power to the ICC/IPCP. Connects the output of the 28-vde power supply to the load. MAIN POWER circuit breaker 28V PS circuit breaker Provides 24 vde for the siren, and emergency 24 vde for the radio power supplies, emergency lighting, and cable identi- ffeation (ID) indicators. Provides 28-vde input power to the battery charger assembly. Connects 115-vac, 400-Hz power to the ICC/IPCP door interlock controlling the forward and rear compart: ment BAT 24V cireuit breaker BAT CHARGE circuit breaker LIGHTS circuit breaker a1TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table £-1. Power Distribution Cabinet—Controle and Indicators (Fig. 2-1) ~Continued Key ‘Control or Indicator Function u. 12. 18. Mu 16. 16. a. 18. 19. 20. a1, OUTLETS circuit breaker RADIO circuit breaker Spare circuit breaker AIR CONDITIONER cireuit breaker AUX LOW HEAT circuit breaker! AUX MEDIUM HEAT circuit breaker! DIMMER control ADL circuit breaker IFF circuit breaker ILLUM-A/OFF/ILLUM-B switch ADP/HPI DIFF meter ‘TP1, TP2 test jacks PHASE INDICATOR lamp MONITOR 416 VOLTS meter TROUBLE LIGHTS awiteh SIREN switch (IPCP only) MAIN POWER ON lamp Connects 116-vac, 400-Hz power to the utility outlets. Connects 115-vac, 400:Hz power to multichannel com munication station. Not used, ‘Connects 208-vac, 400-Hz, 3¢ power to the air conditioner. Connects primary 416-vac, 400-Hz 8» power to the 0.6-kw ing coils of auxiliary heaters, Connects primary 416-vac, 400-Hz, 3¢ power to the L-kw heating coils of the auxiliary heaters, Varies the brilliance of the ICC/IPCP shelter lights. Connects 115-vac, 400-Hz power to KG-30 USMC. Not ‘used for U.S. Army. Connects 116-vac, 400-Hz power to the IFF AN/TPX-46 system. ILLUM-A~ Selects IHIPIR for ground potential difference ‘measurements, ILLUM-B~ Not used in IPCP. Indicates ground potential difference between the IHIPIE and ADP, Used for calibration of the ADP/HPI DIFF meter. Tiluminates when phase of input power is correct. ‘Monitors the primary 416-vac, 400-Hz, 3¢ power source. Provides 28-vde power to the ICC/IPCP trouble lights. ‘Turns on the siren in the IPCP (via the 28-volt battery power supply). | Mluminates when the main power is applied to ICC/IPCP. "The combined use of the AUX LOW HEAT and AUX MEDIUM HEAT circuit breakers provides high heat (4.5 kw).TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 POWER SUPPLY MONITOR MS 157045 Figure 2-2. Auxiliary control unit—controls and indicators. Table 2-2. Auxiliary Controt Unit IFF INTLK lamp Indicates that the IFF antenna interlock cireuit is open or that the IFF BITE equipment has detected an IFF failure. Panel light lamp Provides illumination of front panel. ADP FAILURE lamp Indicates an ADP catastrophic failure or that the ADP BCC A/D switch is in the TEST position,TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-2. Auxiliary Control Unit—Controle and Indicators (Fig. 2-2) -Continued 10. a. 12. 13, a 15. 16. 1 18, 1. 21, 23. 24 ‘Control or indicator Function POWER SUPPLY MONITOR meter Power supply monitor selector switch RING HOT pushbutton Hot selector switch HOT PRIM label HOT SEC label IRR SEC label IRR PRIM label IRRsselector switch LAMP TEST pushbutton HOT LISTEN OFF switch SWBD TALK HOT TALK switch RADIO TALK LISTEN switch EARLY WARNING VOLUME control IFF control selector switch BCC label ICC label CW ROTATE label CASUALTY label CASUALTY/CW ROTATE indicator Provides swi tek Monitors the radio power supply voltage, or batters charger current as selected by the position of the selector switch, Selects the voltages or current to be monitored by the POWER SUPPLY MONITOR meter. Provides a ring signal on the hot communications network via the ICC'IPCP multichannel radio communica: tions station. HOT PRIM position — Places the TDECC operator on the hot primary communications network via the IPCP multichannel radio communications station. HOT SEC position — Places the TDECC operator on the he secondary communications network via the remote AN GRC 106 radio ser. Indicates that the hot primary communication system is being used, Indicates that the hot secondary communie being used. jon system is Indicates that the IRR secondary communication system is being used. Indicates that the intelligence and radar reporting (IRRy primary communication system is being used, IRR PRIM position — Places the TDECC operator on the IRR primary communications network via the IPCP multichannel communications station. IRR SEC position — Places the TDECC operator on the IRR secondary communications network via the remote AN/GRC-106 radio set. Provides a test voltage to all the indicator lamps. Provides the switchboard operator with hot loop listening capability. SWBD TALK-Provides for switchboard talking capability. HOT TALK-Provides the switchboard operator with hot loop talking capability. RADIO TALK-Provides for radio talking capability. LISTEN-Provides for telephone and radio listening caps- bility. Not used, Not used. Not used, Not used. Indicates that the ICWAR is supplying the master azimuth reference. Indicates that the IFF is supplying the master azimuth reference. hing of the master azimuth reference.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 10. MI 70673 Figure 28. ADP ac power distribution drawer—controls and indicators. Table 2- DTO DWR NO. 1 circuit breaker DTO DWR NO. 2 circuit breaker DTO DWR NO. 3 circuit breaker CPU circuit breaker MEMORY NO. 1 circuit breaker HTRS ON lamp MEMORY NO. 2 circuit breaker READER circuit bresker ELAPSED TIME meter SPARE circuit breaker ADP Ac Power Distribution Drawer—Controls and Indicators (Fig. 8-8) Provides 208-vae power to DTO DWR #1. Provides 208-vac power to DTO DWR #2. Provides 208-vac power to DTO DWR #8. Provides 208-vac power to the CPU. Provides 208-vac power to memory drawer 1. Indicates that the contactor supplying 416-vac, 89 power to heaters inside the ADP pedestal has been energized. Not used. Provides 115-vac power to the tape reader. Records the number of hours the CPU has operated. Spare.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 \! v7. e/ 35: uM = omy nore: paren ro apeenone Care 4 | ” "v) see wore | MS 31178 Figure 2-4. DTO DWR #1, #2, and #3 — controls and indicators, i 3 2610. au. a Mw 16, "1, 18, 19. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table s-. DTO DWR #1, #2, and #8—Controls and Indicators (Fig. ‘Control or indicator POWER SUPPLY FAULT lamp HPI-B AZ RATE FAULT lamp HPL-A AZ RATE FAULT lamp HPI-A EL RATE FAULT lamp HPI-B EL RATE FAULT lamp HPI-A RNG RATE FAULT lamp HPI-B RNG RATE FAULT lamp BATTERY LATITUDE initialization dial switches BATTERY LONGITUDE initialization dial switches DLRP LATITUDE initialization dial switches DLRP LONGITUDE initialization dial switches POWER SUPPLY FAULT lamp STATION initialization dial switches D/A LOCAL FAULT lamp POWER SUPPLY FAULT lamp D/A FAULT switch BCC A/D lamp Register display lamps REGISTER DISPLAY witch BCC A/D TEST ONE-ZERO indicator-switch MANUAL RESET indicator-switch LAMP TEST indiestor-switch MODEM LOOP BACK indicator-switch LOCAL TEST lamp +28VDC LOCAL TEST switch TEST AZ (IFF) switch LOCAL/REMOTE switch Indicates an out-of-tolerance voltage from the DTO 1 power supply. Indicates a fault in the IHIPIR-B azimuth rate channel. Indicates a fault in the IHIPIR-A azimuth rate channel. Indicates a fault in the IHIPIR-A elevation rate channel. Indicates a fault in the IHIPIR-B elevation rate channel. Indicates a fault in the IHIPIR-A range rate channel. Indicates a fault in the IHIPIR-B range rate channel. = * Set to the latitude of the site (+ = North, — = South). ‘Set to the longitude of the site (+ = East, — = West). Set to the latitude of the data link reference point. ‘Set to the longitude of the data link reference point. Indicates an out-of-tolerance voltage from the DTO 8 power supply. Set to the alpha code assigned to the battery. Indicates a fault in the channel selected by the digital-to- analog (D/A) selector switch. Indicates an out-of-tolerance voltage from the DTO 2 power supply. Selects the D/A functions to be monitored for fault isolation. Indicates that the BCC A/D selector is in the TEST position. Display the data content of the selected storage registers corresponding to the register display switch settings. Selects the DTO input/output (1/0) registers to be monitored. Inserts a test command of all ones or all zeros into the IBCC channels, Provides for manually resetting all data registers in the DTO. Provides for testing all DTO indicator lamps. Places modem in internal loopback test, Indicates that the DTO is in LOCAL TEST. Provides a local fire section available signal for the TDECC D/A channels, Provides an IFF azimuth synchro input from the IFF ped ‘estal when the IPCP is in local. Used in conjunction with the LOCAL-REMOTE switch. LOCAL—Removes the system reference voltages and provides internal reference voltages for test purposes. REMOTE-Enables system reference voltages required for operation of the ICC/IPCP.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-4. DTO DWR #1, #2, and #8—Controls and Indicators (Fig. £-4)—Continued 28. | BCCA/D switch 29°(W)'| ADP inhibit switch 29%(V)'] Battery configuration switch 80. | D/A CHANNEL FAULT lamp 31, | AZIMUTH SECTOR STOP switch 32, | ALT x 100 PT initialization dial switches 88. | AZIMUTH SECTOR START switch 34. | SECTORGATE lamp 36. | IPARINHIBIT indicator-ewitch 36. | ICWAR INHIBIT indicator-switch 37, | MODEM RCV lamp 38, | MODEM XMIT lamp 89, | ICWARCLOCK lamp 40, | STROBE ERROR lamp 41, | 80H: ERROR lamp @. | SHIFT ERROR lamp I “Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 28 OPERATE-The position used normally. ‘TEST—The position used during IBCC channel testing. Als provides an ADP failure signal to the auxiliary cont unit and to the TDECC. Functions only when the IPAR INHIBIT (35) andia ICWAR INHIBIT (36) indicatorwitch is on (illuminated) REPORT INHIBIT—enables ADP acquisition radar dit processing and inhibits ATDL reporting. PROCESS & REPORT INHIBIT—inhibits both AD? acquisition radar data processing and ATDL reporting BATTERY MINUS FSA-instructs the ADP not to forwan any fire section A (FSA) data via the data link since PSL in not emplaced. BATTERY FULL—instructs the ADP to forward all dataty the data link since both fire sections are emplaced. BATTERY MINUS FSB~instructs the ADP not to forwar’ any FSB data via the data link since FSB is not emplaced Indicates a fault in the D/A channels. Sets the end of the azimuth sector. Set to the altitude of the site above sea level. Seta the start of the azimuth sector. Indicates that the acquisition radar azimuth data is in th sector-of-interest. '¢(W)! Disables the IPAR channels from processing any PAL data in the manner established by the ADP inhibit switt (29)). ‘*(V)! Disables the IPAR channels from processing any IPA data, '*(W)! Disables the ICWAR channels from processing «| ICWAR data in the manner established by the ADP it hibit ewiteh (29)). ‘#(V)!_Disables the ICWAR channels from processing ss} ICWAR data. ‘When illuminated, indicates the ADP is not receiving sit nals from the modem. When illuminated, indicates the ADP is not providing sit nals to the modem. ‘When illuminated, indicates that the ADP is not recetving the ICWAR clock signal. Indicates that the ICWAR strobe signal has been found i error by either the minor or major DTO diagnostic. Indicates lack of the 80 Hz clock signal. Thus, there is* failure in the DTO clock eireuits. Indicates that a shift error has been detected in the ICWAB celreuita by either the minor or major diagnostics.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 of 08: © 0 afosoroj of © 0 offor orf MS 157047 Figure $-. CPU—controls and indicators.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-5. CPU-Controls ond Indicators (Fig. 8-5) INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches (bank of eight) DATA INPUT dial switches (bank of eight) POWER ON lamp SINGLE PULSE indicator-switch (back-lighted) PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch (back-lighted) DISPLAY REGISTER lamps (24) TIMING PULSE lamps Ay Ty Ty t) (By Ey By Ey) CONTROL lamps 10. SYNCHRONIZE lamps 2-10 Allow instructions to be manually loaded from the contr panel. Allow data to be manually loaded from the control panel Indicates the presence of power. Places the computer in the single pulee mode of operation. ‘lows content of program eountar to be dieplayed on th INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps. Provides power for all but the failure indicator and POWER ON display lamps. Octally arranged display of the contents of the register or ‘memory location selected. In the single pulse mode, the arithmetic unit (AU) bus is displayed. INSTRUCTION CYCLE-Usable only in the single pule ‘mode (SPM), Indicates the four mutually exclusive timing intervals available to fetch an instruction from memory (Fy Fa Fy Fy) EXECUTION CYCLE—Usable only in the SPM. Indicates the mutually exclusive timing intervals available to perform an instruction fetched from memory. Indicate the state of the control fip-flops, RUN-Indicates that the computer is performing on instructions and has not halted. ‘TRAP-Indicates that the trap fip-flop is set. INT-Indicates that the interrupt fip-ftop is set. END-Indicates that an instruction is completed, ‘MUL—Indieates that the multiply instruction is being performed. DIV—Indicates that the division instruction is being performed. RTI-Indicates that the real time interrupt (enable) flip- flop is energized. ‘Spare—Not used. Indicate the state of the synchronization flip-flops which control the data transfer between the CPU and memory. MEM BUFFER-Indicates that the memory data avail able flip-flop is set. MEM ADDR-Indicates that the memory available flip-fop inset. EXT~Indicates that the external device has responded. CLOCK INHIB-Indicates that the clock inhibit fiip-fop inset. CFF-Indicates that the computer is in a branch operation.TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 Table 2-5. CPU—Controls and Indicators (Fig. 2-5)—Continued Key (Control or indicator 10. Cont. 11. FAULT INDICATORS lamps 12. LAMP TEST pushbutton 13. Device address code and BITE indicator lamps 'See footnote at end of table. Function FET-Indicates that the computer is in a fetch extended mode, HING-Indicates that the computer is in hung condition, Unmarked—Indicates that operator assistance is required (OAR). Used in the DTO testa, MEM PARITY-Indicates detection of a memory parity READER PARITY-Indicates detection of a reader parity error. POWER SUPPLY-Indicates detection of a CPU power supply failure. DTO TEST-Indicates detection of » DTO fault by the ‘minor diagnostic program. CPU TEST-Indicates detection of a CPU fault by the ‘minor diagnostic program. OVER FLOW- Indicates occurrence of an overflow or arith- ‘metic error, If the overflow is not programmed, the CPU ‘TEST lamp also illuminates. DP-Indieates double precision operation (double-length) ‘words are being processed). ‘Spare—Not used. Provides for testing the CPU front panel lamps except for spares. Provide indication that proper peripheral device is selected. ‘The following indicators are useful in the single pulse mode. ES—External as a source. ED-External as a destination. ‘SEL-Select instruction decoded. EAV-External available. EBSY-—External busy. ‘MS—Memory buffer register as a source. ‘MD—Memory buffer register as a destination, aTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-5. CPU—Controls and Indicators (Fig. 2-6)—Continued ‘LD—Memory location register as a destination. 13. oe WAR ENABLE, PAR ENABLE, IFF ENABLE, BCC 1 ENABLE, and BCC 2 ENABLE-Indicate which DT0 channels are enabled for processing. Me INSTRUCTION REGISTER Octally arranged; display the contents of the instruction lamps (24) register or program counter. 18. RESET pushbutton Resets all computer registers, displays, and critical control flip-flops, overrides all other controls and places. the com puter in the operate mode. 16. START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton Causes the computer to execute the instruction word stored in the memory location designated by the program counter register contents. a. SINGLE INSTRUCTION Places the computer in the single instruction mode of oper. indicator-switch ‘ation, 18, OPERATE indicator-switch Places the computer in the automatic mode of operation. 19. EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION Causes the computer to execute the instruction dialed in the pushbutton instruction input switches, re located within DTO 1/0 DWR #8.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 ® MEMORY @ MS 311789 igure #4, Memory unit—controls end indlestors.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-6. Memory Unit—Controls and Indicators (fig. 2-6) PARITY ERROR lamp Indicates that a parity error exists, POWER SUPPLY FAILURE lamp Indicates failure of the memory power supply. | MEMORY DISABLE indicator switch Indicates that the battery is disconnected from the pow bus, and data output is disabled. ‘When pressed, permits testing of memory lamps. released, resets the parity error cireuitry via a ‘edge interrupt, PARITY ERROR RESET AND LAMP TEST pushbutton TAPE neAoce Powe om 2-14BEGIN lamp END lamp SELECTION dial switches POWER lamp LAMP TEST pushbutton Power ON/OFF circuit breaker ‘TAPE READER POWER ON/OFF awiteh ADV switch AUTO switch, TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-7. Telaprinter—Solid State Reader—Controls and Indicators (Fig. 2-7) Mluminates when the CPU commands a rewind and the Proper SSR program selection. Tluminates when the SSR has completed « program load. Provides the address selection to obtain a program. Tluminates when the power ON/OFF switch is set to ON. Muminates the BEGIN and END lamps. ‘The circuit provides 5-nie to the solid state reader. Provides 116 vac to the punched tape reader. Advances paper at a rate of 2.5 inches per second. Provides power to the output printer only when in the ON (down) position. Figure 2.8, Reoder-printer drawer—controls and indicators.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-8. Reader-Printer Drawer—Controls and Indicators (Fig. 2-8) AUTO switch Provides power to the output printer only when in the (down) position. ADV switch, Advances paper at a rate of 2.6 inches per second. SPOOLING switch Provides 28 vde to the reel spool motors. READER POWER switch ‘Master power switch for the punched tape reader; 115 vae. U MS 311791 Figure 2-9. Main cable entry panel—controls and indicators,TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-9. Main Cable Entry Panel—Controls and Indicators (Fig. 2-9) 1 ‘Test indicator lamp 2. Test indicator lamp a. Test indicator lamp “ Test indicator lamp ‘Test indicator lamp 6. ‘Test indicator lamp LAMP TEST switch 8 ‘Test indicator lamp 9% Test indicator lamp 10. Test indicator lamp 1. Test indicator lamp Indicates the proper connection for BCC RUN NO. 6 312". Indicates the proper connection for BCC RUN NO. 7 J14!, Indicates the proper connection for BCC RUN NO. 4 55". Indicates the proper connector for HPI NO. 3 J13. Not ‘used when the IPCP is connected as an ICC. Indicates the proper connection for HPI NO. 2 J9'. Not used when the IPCP is connected as an ICC. Indicates the proper connection for HPI NO. 1 J8". Not ‘used when the IPCP is connected as an ICC. ‘Tests the lamps on the main cable entry panel. Indicates the proper connection for BCC RUN NO. 1 J7'. Indicates the proper connection for ICWAR J6. Indicates the proper connection for BCC RUN NO. 8 J4!. Indicates the proper connection for BCC RUN NO.2 33" "Used only when the IPCP is connected as an ICC. REAR VIEW vor; LRAT Rn, MS 311792 FRONT VIEW Figure 2-10. Communications station—controls and indieatore,TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-10. Communications Unit—Controls and Indicators (Fig. 2-10) VOL control RING switch Adjusts the volume level in the headset. Initiates ring signal to the IFF communications unit and TTDECC communications unit. When an IPCP is connected to an IFF, the ring signal is sent to the IBCC control communications unit (CCU) and to any selected intrabattery communication unit via the CCU. It is used in conjunction with the 8B-22A/PT switchboard. Applies 28 vde to the unit. POWER switch with 10288848 PWR ewiteh with 10201990 1A125V fuse Provides 28-rde protection for the ICC/IPCP so that if a failure oceurs in the module, the ICC/IPCP 28-vde power supply will not he affected. ‘Provides a connection for a headset. Provides an audible tone to alert the unit operator of an in- ‘coming call from the IFF. Provides a connection for a headset. 6TM 9—1430—1835—12—1 MS 157050 Figure 2-11. TDECC power distribution panel—controls and indicators (IPCP only).1M 9—1430—1535—12—1 ‘Table 2-11. TDECC Power Distribution Panel—Controls and Indicators (IPCP only) (Fig. 2-11) 8. a 10. 1, 12, 13, Me 16, 16, Service lamp PPI DISPLAY circuit breaker RUNNING TIME meter 100 VDC circuit breaker +20 VDC circuit breaker —20 VDC cireuit breaker +260 VDC circuit breaker 250 VDC circuit breaker SPECTRUM ANALYZER circuit breaker J1 connector MAIN POWER circuit breaker BLOWERS circuit breaker 28 VDC cireuit breaker 15 VDC cirevit breaker +15 VDC circuit breaker +100 VDC circuit breaker Function Iiuminates the power distribution panel. Controls 116 vac to the PPI display circuits, Records the operating time of the TDECC in hours. Controls 416 vac to the —100-vde power supply. Controls 116 vac to the 20-vde power supply. Controls 116 vac to the ~20-vde power supply. Controls 116 vac to the 250-vde power supply. Controls 116 vac to the —250-vde power supply. Controls 116 vac to the spectrum analyser display. Provides cable connections between the power distribution panel and the IPCP. Controls the application of 416-vac 8¢, 400-Hz power to the TDECC. Controls 208-vac, 39, 400-Hz power to the blowers in the ‘power supply assembly and digital assembly; it is also part of the TDECC power interlock circuit, When open, it prevents application of 416-vac, 89, 400-Hz, primary power to the TDECC power suppli Controls 416-vac, 8¢, 400-Hz power to the 28-vde power supply. Controls 416-vac, 3, 400-Hz power to the —16-vde power supply. Controls 416-vac, 34, 400-Hz pow supply. Controls 416-vac, 84, 400-Hz power to the 100-vde power supply. to the 15-vde powero2 TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 10 1243 7 18 19 1416 Oe i 20 21 42, Low aH Tar Ta TU0g, c] 23 41 40 99 38 37 36 35 34 339231 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 MS 311793A Figure 2-12. Status panel—controls and indicators (IPCP only). Table 2-12. Status Panel—Controls and Indicators (IPCP only) (Fig. 2-12) 1 CONSOLE ON indicator-switch Provides 28 vde to energize display, provided all interlocks ‘are closed. 2 FIRE SECTION STANDBY indicator. Places the IHIPIR and ILCHR in the standby mode. switch 3% HPI ACTIVATE indieator-switch Places the IHIPIR in the radiate mode, The ILCHR remains in the standby mode. ‘“ ICWAR STANDBY indicator-switch Places the ICWAR in the standby mode. 8 ICWAR RADIATE indicator-switch Places the ICWAR in the radiate mode. 6 ASI NORMAL/ASI APPROACH ASI NORMAL-~Allows both approaching and receding tar- indicator-switch gets to be displayed on the ASI portion of the PPI display. (Approach: 2/8 of display. Recede: 1/3 of display.) ASI APPROACH Allows only approaching targets to be displayed (all of ASI display). 1 AUTO CHALLENGE OFF indicator- Inhibits automatic IPF challenging by the ADP. switch a CW ROTATE label Indicates that the ICWAR is providing the master azimuth (normal operation). a IFF ROTATE label Flashes to indicate that the IFF is providing the master azimuth (casualty mode). 2-21TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-12. Status Pane!—Controls and Indicators (IPCP only) (Fig. 2-12)—Continued netion| Key Control or 10. ADP label a. HPI label 2, Mode switch, 18, ADP LOOP TEST indicator-switch uM PLATOON TEST indicator-switeh 15. TEST ROTATE indieator-switch 16, HPI BITE/TEST OK indicator-switch 1. LAMP TEST indicator-switch 18, AUTO FIRE/TEST FIRE OK indicator- switch 19, MISSILE COUNT switch 2-22 Mluminates when the mode switch (12) is in the ADP pos tion (normal position). Flashes when the mode switch is in the HPI position (ADP not operational). ADP—Normal position. The ADP is operative. Normal and ‘auto fire modes can be utilized. HPI — Manual mode is used when the ADP is inoperative. ‘Only manual engagement can then be processed. PLATOON TEST-Initiates simulated engagement using « simulated target with preselected range, range rate and ‘azimuth position. When the IHIPIR locks, the IHIPIR BITE target replaces simulated target. TEST-—Disconnects the TDECC from the ILCHR and er- ables the test functions, except those enabled by the PLA- TOON TEST indicator-switch, Provides « preprogrammed display of all ADP symbols on the TDECC CRT. Flashes when pressed, and checks operation of the engage ‘ment sequence up to missile firing by initiating the ADP canned engagement. Also initiates the IHIPIR BITE tert. The TEST FIRE OK label flashes to indicate a successful test. Provides sweep when the ICWAR sweep positioning date is not available, Provides a test fire section available sign! to the ADP. Initiates the IHIPIR BITE test. The TEST OK lamp illuminates, indicating a successful BITE test of the HPI. Maminates all lamps that are not pre-illuminated. When pressed during the test mode, performs the auto fre check, If the firing cireuits are OK, the TEST FIRE OK Inbel flashes. NONE-No missile count teat voltage is present; all missile indicator lamps are extinguished. A—The missile count test voltage equals 9 vde. All A missile indicator lamps illuminate, AB—The mimile count test voltage equals 18 wde, All A and B missile indicator lamps illuminate. ABC—The missile count test voltage equals 28 vde. All A, By and C missile indicator lamps illuminate, NORMAL-Normal operating position.2 TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-12. Status PanelControle and Indicators (IPCP only) (Fig. 2-12)—Continued 20. TEST label Flashes to indicate that one of the following conditions exinta: ‘The TEST ROTATE indicator-ewitch (15) is pressed (illuminated). ‘The mode switch (12) is set to PLATOON TEST or TEST. ‘The PLATOON TEST indicator-ewitch (14) is premed (illuminated). ‘The MISSILE COUNT switch (19) is than NORMAL, Flashes simultaneously with the illuminated ALT METER label (21) when the height driver OPERATE/CALI- BRATE switch (10, fig. 3-18) is not set to OPERATE, with the illuminated COORD CMPTR label (22) when the coordinate computer OPERATE/TEST switch (3, fig. 3-20) is set to TEST, with the illuminated HP! DSPL label (25) when the spectrum analyzer MODE switch (2, fig. 3-17) is not set to OPERATE, and with the illuminated DSPL OP/TST label (26) when the BITE switch panel DISPLAY OPERATE/TEST switch (2, fig. 2-17) in not set to OPERATE. in any position other a. ALT METER label Iluminates to indicate that the OPERATE/CALIBRATE switch on the height driver is not set to OPERATE. 2. COORD CMPTR label Iiluminates to indicate that the coordinate computer OPER- ATE/TEST switch is set to TEST. 23, ADCP ALTITUDE meter Indicates the height of the target designated by the AADCP. 24. ALTITUDE UNKNOWN label Iluminates when the AADCP does not have altitude infor- ‘mation on the target designated for engagement. ts HPI DSPL label Mluminates to indicate that the spectrum analyzer MODE switch is not set to OPERATE. 26, DSPL OP/TEST Iabel Mluminates to indicate that the DISPLAY OPERATE/ TEST switch on the BITE switch panel is not set to OPERATE. 21. HIGH ALTITUDE meter Indicates that the altitude of the target tracked by the IHIPIR is between 3-20 km, Illuminates after delay lock. LOW ALTITUDE meter Indicates that the altitude of the target tracked by the THIPIR in between 0-3 km. [lumi tes after delay lock. 29, GROUND SPEED meter Indicates the ground speed of the target tracked by the THIPIR in km/hr. Iuminates after delay lock. 30. ICWAR FAILURE label Flashes to indicate that a failure has been detected in the ICWAR. a1, ADCP DATA LINK FAILURE label Flashes to indicate that a failure has been detected in the ‘ADCP data link. 32, ADP PAILURE label Flashes to indicate that a failure has been detected in the ‘ADP. 33, IFF SYNCH FAILURE label Flashes to indicate the loss of the IFF trigger. m. LVPS FAILURE label Flashes to indicate that one or more of the low-voltage Power supplies has failed (28 vde not included).TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 39. 40. a. 42, 43. 2-24 Table 2-12. Status Panel—Controls and Indicatore (Fig. 2-12)—Continued HVPS FAILURE label IFF FAILURE label SERIAL DATA BITE OK lamp ICWAR VOLUME control ICWAR OFF indicator-switch HPI VOLUME control VOICE/DOPPLER switch FIRE SECTION OFF indicator-switch MODULE INTERLOCK OPEN label POWER INTERLOCK OPEN label Flashes to indicate that a failure has been detected in the 14-kv power supply. Flashes to indicate that a failure has been detected in the IFF. Tluminates to indicate a positive test condition during the programmed test of the serial date interface electronica Adjusts the audio level of the ICWAR doppler signal to the RO headset. Places the ICWAR to off. Adjusts the audio level of the IHIPIR doppler to the RO headset. VOICE~Eliminates the doppler inputs from the RO headset VOICE/HPI-Allows the RO to receive voice and IHIPIR doppler audio, VOICE/ICWAR-Allows the RO to monitor voice and ICWAR doppler audio. Places the IHIPIR and ILCHR’s to off. Flashes to indicate that a critical module(s) has been re moved from the digital assembly, or that the SAFE/OP- ERATE switch on the PPI drawer assembly (3, fig. 3-15) is in the SAFE position. Indicates that the power interlock is open.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 311794 Figure 2-13. 7.0. control pane!—controls and indicators (IPCP only). Table 2-18. T.0. Control Panet—Controls and Indicators (IPCP only) (Fig. 2-13) Flashes when the IHIPIR is being jammed, Remains continuously illuminated when the IHIPIR is under manual range control. Flashes when the IHIPIR is in a box search for a target. Flashes when the THIPIR has teraporarily lost lock on the target. Provides real delay of tactlal engagement, incloing the IFF and ICWAR sweeps, targets, cursor, range ringe, and ADP and AADCP designation symbols. 2-25TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-18. 1.0. Control Panel—Controls and Indicators ' (PCP only) (Fig. 2-18)—Continued 10, nL 18, Ty 16, 1 REFUSE indicator-switch ADP REQUEST/ACCEPT indicator-switch CEASE ENGAGE label HOLD FIRE label CEASE FIRE label ENGAGE label COVER label ID CONFLICT label ALERT labels ACKNOWLEDGE indicator-ewitch ADCP POINTER INITIATE indicator-switch OUT OF ACTION/READY indicator-ewitch NORMAL MODE indicator-switch ‘Cancels the ADP's request for engagement. The ADP my then assign a new priority I target. Flashes to indicate: AUTO fire mode: For category I targets (does not illuminate). For category II targets, a request for confirmation of the ADP's automatic assignment. NORMAL fire modi For category I targets, a request for confirmation of the ADP's automatic assignment. For category I targets, a request for amignment to ADPs top priority target. Sends the sccept signal to the ADP.*(AD)' enables HIPIR radiation. Directs T.0, to cease engagement, but not to destruct any missiles in flight. | Directa the 7.0. to cease the engagement and destroy any missiles in flight. Directa the 0. to cease fire, but not to destruct any mis. tiles in flight. Directa the 7.0. to engage the AADCP designated target ‘When flashing, alerts the 7.0, to employ a ripple fire mode of missile engagement, ‘Not used tactically, Indicates a major discrepancy between local and remotely ‘separated identification on a specified target. Indicates an alert status from the AADCP. RED-Attack by hostile aircraft or missiles is imminent or in progress, YELLOW-Attack by hostile aireraft or missiles is probable. WHITE—Attack by hostile aireraft or missiles is not considered immediately probable or imminent. ends an acknowledge signal to the AADCP indicating that the engage, cover, cease engage, hold fire, or cease fire command will be implemented. Remains illuminated until the engagement is terminated. While illuminated, | the indication on the AADCP ALTITUDE meter (28, fig. 2-12) remains constant. ‘Activates the pointer symbol display at the AADCP. Permits alternate action; sends either ready or out-of-setion ‘commands to the AADCP. The AADCP sends back com- ‘mands to illuminate the appropriate label. It also enables 1 fire section available signal to the ADP. For category I targets (symbol flashing), permita the ADP ‘to automatically assign the target and request engagement confirmation from the T.0. For category II targets, the ADP requests assignment of the HIPIR. i10 1s 1. a1, a1, TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-18. 1.0. Control Panel—Controls and Indicators AUTO FIRE MODE indicator-switch ADCP POINTER CLEAR indicator-switch TARGET READOUT indicator-switch DISPLAY FRIENDS indicator-awitch DISPLAY HOSTILES/UNKNOWNS, indicator-switch DISPLAY LOCALS indicator-awitch DISPLAY REMOTES indicator-switch REJECT indicator-switch MANUAL ASSIGN indicator-switch SWEEP control RANGE RINGS control ENGAGE OTHER indicator-switch SYMBOLS control PIV control IFF VIDEO control CWAR VIDEO control FRIEND indicator-switch UNKNOWN indicator-switch HOSTILE indicator-switch ‘Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. For category I targets (symbol flashing), permits the ADP to automatically acquire and engage a target and fire one missile, Subsequent firings are under T.O. control. For eategory II targets (symbol steady), permits the ADP to automatically acquire the target and request engagement confirmation from the T.O. One missile is fired automatically after confirmation with subsequent firings under 7.0. control. Clears the AADCP generated pointer symbol from the PPI display. Commands the ADP to display all information in its file on ‘a target specified by the tracking lever aymbol position. Commands the ADP to display all FRIEND targets in ita file. Commands the ADP to display all HOSTILE and UN- KNOWN targets in its file, Commands the ADP to display all local targets in its file. Commands the ADP to display all REMOTELY reported targets in its fle, Sends a cannot-comply message to the AADCP indicating that the specified AADCP command cannot be implemented. Sends the manual assign command to the ADP, preventing ‘automatic designation. Also illuminates the ASSIGNED Inbel on the RO panel and enables tactical interlock of firing cireuits, Adjusta the intensity of the sweep on the T.O, CRT display. Adjusts the intensity of the range rings on the 7.0. CRT display. Signifies that the LO. has selected a target for ADP assignment ‘as determined by the position of the hook symbol. *(AD)' enables HIPIR radiation. Adjusts the intensity of the symbols displayed on the T.O. CRT displ ‘Adjusts the intensity of the predicted intercept veetor on the CRT display. Adjusta the intensity of the IFF target video on the T.0. CRT display. ‘Adjusts the intensity of the CWAR target video on the T.O. CRT display. Places a selected target into the ADP's FRIEND file, if reased when the hook symbol is over the selected target. ‘Commands the ADP to identify as an unknown, that target ‘which the tracking lever symbol is positioned over. Commands the ADP to identify as a hostile, that target ‘which the tracking lever symbol is positioned over. 2-27TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-18. 17.0. Control Panel—Controls and Indicators (IPCP only) (Fig. Continued ‘Control or indicator Function a, 42, 4“ a, 49. 50. BL. 82. 2-28 VITAL AREA CALL indicator-switch ‘Tracking lever (Joystick) VITAL AREA INSERT indicator-switch ALL/SIF REPLIES CODED indicator-switch MODE switch and 1/2/8/4 labels RESUME FIRE/CEASE FIRE indicator- switch IN RANGE label LAUNCHERS 8/A/B/C indicator-ewitch LAUNCHERS 2/A/B/C indicator-switch FIRE indicator-switch LAUNCHERS 1/A/B/C indicator-switch FIRING label MISFIRE label DESTROY indicator-switch CHALLENGE indicator-switch AZIMUTH handwheel Displays the tracking lever manual target hook symbol to indicate the position of the off-site vital area on the T.O. PPI display. Manually positions the tracking lever symbol on the T.0. display. Inserts into the ADP the coordinates of the vital area as selected by the position of the hook symbol. ALL~AII SIF replies of the selected mode, regardless of the code setting, are displayed on the .O. PPI display. SIF REPLIES CODED-Only replies of the selected SIP code and mode are displayed on the 7.0. PPI display. Selects one of the interrogation modes to which specific aircraft transponders are interrogated by the IFF system. ‘The selected mode label illuminates. ‘When pressed to illuminate the RESUME FIRE label, the firing circuits are enabled and miasiles may be fired. ‘When pressed to illuminate the CEASE FIRE label, the firing clreuits are interrupted to prevent the firing of missiles. Tiuminates when the in-range signal is received from the ADP or IHIPIR, depending on the mode of operation. Selects launcher No. 8 for firing, provided at least one mis sile i present. ‘The A, B, and C labels illuminate to indicate that each mit sile is present. Selects launcher No, 2 for firing, provided at least one mix tile is present, The A, B, and C labels illuminate to indicate that each mis- sil is present, In the normal and manual modes pressing this indicator- ‘awitch fires the missile, provided the launch logic is complete. ‘The FIRE label illuminates when the firing circuits are ready, and extinguishes when the FIRE indicator-switch is pressed. Selects launcher No. 1 for firing, provided at least one mis- sie is present. The A, B, and C labels illuminate to indicate that each missile is present. TMluminates when a missile is fired and remains illuminated until end of firing eyele. Flashes to indicate that the missile failed to leave the launcher. Sends the destruct command to a missile in flight. Tum nates when activated. Initiates the IFF challenge of the target and illuminates the CHALLENGE label. ‘Simultaneously positions the cursor on the T.O. display and commands the IHIPIR antenna to the same azimuth prov vided the IHIPIR is not locked on a target.Table 2-18. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1.0. Control Panel—Controls and Indicators ( PCP only) (Fig. $-18)~Continued AZIMUTH counter TERMINATE ENGAGE indicator-switch KILL indieator-switch NO KILL indicator-switch AFC HOLD indieator-switch MISSILE CODE indicator-switch (CCM OVERRIDE indieator-switch FRIENDLY TARGET label Neler to appendix E for serial number effectivity. Indicates the azimuth of the cursor in mils. Returns operation to the pre-engagement status. Terminates the ‘ADP generated engagement. *(AD)' terminates HIPIR radiation. Indicates to the AADCP that the target engagement was effective. (AD)! terminates HIPIR radiation. Indicates to the AADCP that the target engagement was not effective and has been discontinued. °(AD)' terminates HIPIR sabe Used to counter jammers. When depressed, sends HOJ enable command to the missile in flight. ‘Used in engaging helicopters and very slow aircraft. Places the home-on-helicopter (HOH) command in the missile message. Prevents the HIPIR from going into the CCM mode of operation, ‘When illuminated, it indicates that the target under engage- ‘ment has been interrogated by the IFF challenge and has given the correct response, indicating a friendly target. ‘Operator action is now required. ‘When flashing, indicates a missile has been fired.TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 aan 1s “4 13 12 11 MS 157053 Figure 2-14, RO control panel—controls and indicators (IPCP only). 2-3010, nL. 1B “ 1, Ty m T™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-14. RO Control Pane!—Controls and Indicators (IPCP only) (Fig. 2-14) ELEVATION MILS meter SIGNAL STRENGTH meter IHIPIR spectrum analyzer MANY indicator-awiteh AUTO SPEED/MANUAL SPEED indicator-ewitch FEW indicator-switch ‘Manual speed control ONE indicator-awitch AUTO label ASSIGNED label ROTATE indicator-ewitch WIDE indicator-switch NARROW indicator-switch MANUAL AZ/EL indicator-ewitch ‘LOW indicator-switch ELEVATION thumbwheel HIGH indicator-switch MANUAL-Indicates the setting of the ELEVATION thumbwheel in mils. HPI—Indicates the THIPIR antenna elevation position in mils, Indicates the doppler signal strength reflected from the target being tracked by the IHIPIR. The scale ia illuminated when the IHIPIR is locked or coasting. Provides a visual display of the IHIPIR doppler spectrum. Sends a raid size estimate (many) to the AADCP, which acknowledges it by returning a signal to illuminate the MANY label. AUTO SPEED-Permits the IHIPIR to receive auto speed control from the ADP. MANUAL SPEED-Permits the operator to assist the IHIPIR in acquiring the target by supplying manual speed from the manual speed control. Enables the ECCM MIS- SILE CODE pushbutton on the T.O. control panel. When pressed, the operator must fire the missiles manually. Sends a raid size estimate (few) to the AADCP, which acknowledges it by returning a signal to illuminate the FEW abel. Provides control voltage to the IHIPIR speedgate for manual speed track of the target, Also positions the intensified marker on the IHIPIR spectrum analyser, Sends an estimate of raid size (one) to the ADCP, which Iiluminates when the target has been automatically assigned by the ADP. TMuminates when an assignment is manually made by the To. Commands the IHIPIR antenna to rotate at a 3 rpm rate, (Used when the ICWAR is inoperative.) Commands the IHIPIR antenna to search a wide azimuth sector centered by the position of the AZIMUTH hand- ‘wheel on the 7.0. control panel. Commands the IHIPIR antenna to search a narrow azimuth sector centered by the position of the AZIMUTH handwheel on the 7.0. control panel. Permits manual azimuth and elevation control of the [HIPIR ‘antenna, When an engagement is terminated, the manual ‘mode is automatically enabled. Commands the IHIPIR antenna to search a narrow sector in elevation, the center of which is predetermined by a CX in the relay antenna control chassis, Manually positions the IHIPIR antenna from —200 to 1600 mils in elevation, Commands the IHIPIR antenna to search a wide sector in elevation, the center of which is predetermined by a CX in the relay antenna control. 2-31TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 18, 19, 21. Table 2-14. RO Control Panel—Controls and Indicators (IPCP only) (Fig. 2-14)—Continued | BREAKLOCK indicator-ewitch Range control APPROACH/RECEDE indicator-switch AUTO RANGE/MANUAL RANGE indicator-switch Flashes to indicate that the ADP has automatically brotm lock and commanded the IHIPIR antenna to a desired ax. muth position, Flashing ceases when the antenna reaches the command position. When pressed by the operator. t sends a bresklock command to IHIPIR, but does not illo. minate the BREAKLOCK label. Manually sets the estimated target range into the IHIPIR ‘when in the manual range mode. APPROACH Normal condition. Allows the operator to con. dition the IHIPIR for an approaching target during the manual range mode. RECEDE-When pressed, allows the operator to conditior the IHIPIR for a receding target during the manual range mode, AUTO RANGE-When pressed, allows range informatica to be automatically determined, (Normal position.) MANUAL RANGE-When pressed, allows range informs-| tion to be controlied by the operator using the range control. ‘Access cover to supplemental controls and adjustments (fig. 3-19).™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 13 MS 157054 ‘Figure 2-16. 7.0. communications panel—controls and indicators (PCP only). 2-33TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Key 10, ML. 12. 13, “a 15. 16, Um 18, ] ‘eter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2-34 Table 2-16. 1.0. Communications Panel—Controls and Indicators (IPCP only) (Fig. 2-15) IFF call lamp IFF bus switch ICWAR call lamp ICWAR bus switch FIRE SECT call lamp FIRE SECT bus switch VOL L control VOL R control HOT RING/XMIT pushbutton HOT CALL lamp *(AB)! HOT SEC MODE lamp RING BTRY pushbutton BUS TALK SELECTOR switch RADIO XMIT pushbutton ICC bus switch ICC call lamp Bus switch Call lamp Function Indicates a call from the IFF antenna communication station. Connects the IFF antenna communications station to one of three communication bus lines. Indicates a call from the ICWAR communications station Connects the ICWAR communications ‘three communications bus lines, tion to one of Indicates a call from the firing section communications stations (IHIPIR, ILSCB, and ILCHR’s). Connects the firing section communications stations to one of three communication bus lines. Adjusts the volume of the hot line communications heard in the T.O, left earpiece. Adjust the volume of platoon communications heard in the T.O. right earpiece. Provides a call in the hot primary mode, or keys the remote AN/GRC-106 transmitter (push-to-talk, release-to-listen) in the hot secondary mode. Miuminates when the BOC calls the platoon on the HOT primary network. Iluminates when the hot secondary communications cir cuits have been selected at the auxiliary control unit. Provides a ring signal to the selected platoon communics- tions station, Provides T.0. communications over the hot line, or platoon communications over one of three bus lines. Not used. Connects the IPCP switchboard to one of three communication bus lines, Indicates a call from the IPCP switchboard. Spare. Spare.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 HOT an Oo 7 RING 00) ee T\C) icc SS E© OF = 0 Oy 16 5 iE 9/9) G|Q}- ; "Ms 157055 Figure 2-16. RO communications panel—controls and indicators (IPCP only). 2-35 GoogleTH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-16. RO Communications Pane!—Controls and Indicators (IPCP only) (Fig. 2-16) Control ur indicator Function ®. 10. 1 2 13. u 15. 16, a. I 18. 19, 1 ‘Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. VOL Leontrol VOL Recontrol FIRE SECT call lamp FIRE SECT bus switch ICWAR call lamp ICWAR bus switch IFF call lamp IFF bus switch Call lamp Bus switch ICC call lamp ICC bus switch POWER pushbutton RADIO XMIT pushbutton BUS TALK SELECTOR switch RING BTRY pushbutton IRR SEC MODE lamp IRR CALL lamp *(AB)! IRR RING XMIT pushbutton Adjusts the volume of the IRR network communications ot hot line communications heard in the RO left earpiece Adjusts the volume of inter-platoon communications, ICWAR or IHIPIR doppler, and tone burst signal hear in the RO right earpiece. Indicates a call from the firing section communications st. tions (IHIPIR, ILSCB, and ILCHR’s Connects the firing section to one of three communication ‘bus lines. Indicates a call from the ICWAR communications station Connects the ICWAR communications station to one of ‘three communications bus lines. Indicates a call from the IFF antenna communications sts. ti Connects the IFF antenna communications station to ont of three communications bus lines. Spare. Spare. Indicates a call from the IPCP switchboard. Connects the IPCP switchboard to one of three communicy ‘tions bus lines. Provides power to the RO and T.O, communications unit. hot line, or inter-platoon communications over one of three bus lines. Provides @ tions stations 1g signal to selected interplatoon communics- Iluminates when the IRR network secondary communics- circuits have been selected at the auxiliary control Mluminates when the BOC calls the platoon on the IRE primary network. Provides a call in the IRR primary mode, or keys the re mote AN/GRO-106 transmitter (push-to-talk, release-to- listen,TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 SERIAL DATA TEST/OPERATE SYMBOL CHECK DISPLAY OPERATE / TEST HEADSET Figure 2-17. BITE switch ponel—controls and indicators (IPCP only). MS 311795 2-37TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-17. SYMBOL CHECK selector switch bration markers for display during test. DISPLAY OPERATE/TEST switch OPERATE-Normal position. SYMBOL CHECK-Allows symbol stroke selected by § BOL CHECK selector switch to be displayed. PROGRAMMED TEST-Provides complete check of clreuita using pre-programmed inputs. HEADSET connector Provides connection for RO’s headset. SERIAL DATA TEST/OPERATE switch | OPERATE-Normal position. TEST 1, 2, 8, 4-Four test positions for complete B checkout of the serial data interface electronics. | Figure 18. TAS control uni %(AB)'—controls ond indicators (PCP Only) J] ieter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2.3810 T™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 EMCON/FORCED SILENT indicator-ewitch EMOON — Places the system in the emcon mode of operation en- tabling the HIPIR to radiate in response to emcon logic. FORCED SILENT — Disables the mode of system operation by in- hibiting HIPIR radiation under all circumstances. PI OFFSET control Offsets HIPIR illumination from the TAS line of sight when operating in the preferential illumination mode. PI ON/PI OFF indicator-switch PION — Places the HIPIR into the preferential illumination mode of ‘operation when the HIPIR is slaved to TAS. Forces the HIPIR an- tanna into an offset position from that of the TAS line of sight, a designated by the PI OFFSET control. PL OFF — Disables the preferential illumi SLAVED — During manual and auto track slaves the HIPIR antenna, to the TAS system line of sight. INDEP — Allows the HIPIR antennna to function independently of the TAS while TAS is tracking another target within 25 degrees of the HIPIR LOS. AUTO ACQ ON/AUTO ACQ OF ‘AUTO ACQ ON — Enables automatic acquisition of a target within indieator-ewiteh, the automatic acquisition window in the narrow field of view of the ‘TAS. Auto-track indicator will appear on the TAS display unit when automatic acquisition lock-on of target is accomplished. AUTO ACQ OFF — Disables the automatic target acquisition features of the TAS. SMALL GATE/LARGE GATE SMALL GATE — Enables manual target acquisition within the TAS indieator-switeh narrow track window. Displays the small tracker gate on the TAS display unit. LARGE GATE — Selects the wide track window for manual target engagement. Displays the large tracker gate on the TAS display unit. Resets the TAS AUTO ACQ to OFF. NFOV/WFOV indicator-ewitch [NFOV — Selects a narrow field of view on the TAS display unit. WFOV — Selecta a wide field of view on the TAS display unit with two vertical markers to indicate the narrow field of view boundaries within the WFOV. CAGED indieator-ewitch Positions the TAS gimbal to the HIPIR line of sight. Disables any ongoing TAS functions and removes all TAS symbology from the ‘TAS display unit. Resets TAS to NFOV, SMALL GATE, INDEP, AUTO ACQ OFF, and EMCON. OPERATE — Provides power to energize the TAS. READY — When illuminated, provides ac power to the heater bis eta in sensor unit on the HIPIR. Permita selected de power to maintain an instant-on capability for the TAS. PWR ON/FAIL indicator-switeh PWR ON — Provides (or removes) standby power to the TAS, PAIL — illuminates when a failure occurs in one of the circuits monitored by the fail detection circuits when the system isin the OPER- ATE condition. ion mode, ‘Reter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2-39TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 cw Table 2-18. TAS Control Unit *(AE)'—Controls and Indicators (PCP Only) (Fig. 2-18)—Continued u 12 u 6 16 cu 8 rt ‘TRACKER JOYSTICK (see caution) Controls the azimuth and elevation positioning of the TAS telex located on the HIPIR. Positioning the lever up and down causes telescope to pan up and down respectively. Positioning the levers tthe right and left causes the telescope to pan to right and left. ‘The TRACKER JOYSTICK must be positioned up and down, and right and left only. Attempting > rotate the TRACKER JOYSTICK ew or cew may cause damage and premature failure of the assembly. ‘ACQ BUTTON switch Provides a control capability in two modes of operations. Manual track mode - Pressing the ACQ BUTTON, when in th CAGED mode, places the TAS in manual track using the TRACKE JOYSTICK. ‘Tracking mode - Pressing the ACQ BUTTON a second time plac TAS in the automatic acquisition mode, enabling the acquisition targeta within the large or amall tracker gate. An auto track ind cator is displayed in the lower right corner of the display. Presa the ACQ BUTTON during the tracking mode will reset TAS tot ‘manual track mode. Gireuit bresker Disables power to the TAS if the current being drawn excess I amperes. LAMP TEST indicator-switch ‘Teats illumination of all lamps on the TAS control unit when exe- ‘ized, LIGHT INTEN variable resistor Controls the light intensity of all lamps except PWR ON/FAIL wt READY/OPERATE. PITRIM EL variable resistor ‘Adjusts the elevation of the offest angle of the HIPIR. boresight # relation to TAS line-of-sight. PITRIM AZ variable resistor ‘Adjusts the azimuth of the offset angle of the HIPIR boresight i relation to TAS line-of-sight. ‘Adjusts the elevation of the TAS line-of-sight in relation to th HIPIR boresight. BRST TRIM AZ variable resistor ‘Adjusts the azimuth of the TAS line-of-sight in relation to the HIPIE Doresight. STICK EL variable resistor Permits trim adjustment of the elevation null position of ti ‘TRACKER JOYSTICK. BRST TRIM EL variable resi ‘STICK AZ variable resistor Permits trim adjustment of the azimuth null position of the ‘TRACKER JOYSTICK. []_ tRetor to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2-40c10 RESET TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 ‘CONTRAST MAN HI AUTO MAN ADU! a 6 5 4 3 2 1 MS 432130 Figure 2-19. TAS display wnit (ARV (PCP only), let side — controls and indicators Table 2-19. TAS Display Unit *(AE)' (PCP only) Left Side—Controls and Indicators (Fig. 2-19) x Cone ietor Fenton 1 [BRT control Used in conjunction with the CONTRAST MAN ADS control (key 2) to provide video drive to the display presentation. The BRT control seta the overall brightness level ofthe display, while the CONTRAST MAN ADJ control sets the contrast ratio between the black and white levels of the display. In a set background of light condition, for example, itis best to adjust the BRT control down (ccw) and the CONTRAST MAN ADJ control up (ew) until the desired contrast and brightness display levels are obtained. 2 CONTRAST MAN ADJ control ‘See BRT control (Key 1) for explanation. 3 CONTRAST AUTO/MAN switch ‘AUTO — Enhances targets of low contrast appearing in a display ‘scene of flat contrasts such as a hazy sky. MAN — Normal position for display scenes of varied contrast. ‘4 CONTRAST MAN HI/LO switch HI — Normal position for display brightness. LO — Compresses the “whites” ofthe display scene, which may be desirable in a high contrast background. 5 RESET circuit breaker ‘When pressed, reconnects 28 vde power to the display unit. PANEL DIMMER control! ‘Adjusts the light intensity of the panel labels. 1 CONT ENHMT (contrast enhancement) ‘Adjusts the display to enhance targets by inereasing the contrast, control? between the background and target. Adjustment can only be made with the CONTRAST AUTO/MAN switch set to AUTO. "Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. "Shown with cover removed. These controls should be adjusted by maintenance personnel only. 241co + CORSA pu husy “s'1) 7006 sev000 pond yoqod wownye euosjooyununicn 1ouNDYOHTAA “OEE Cun lh 2p2991 SW \ S00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 _00 00 00 00 DOYO0 00 00 00000000 © Yad tearped i bs 0.00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 oo o 090 00 00 00 90 0000 00 fo tad bud hd _‘od ‘odd 9 00 00 00 00 9 09 09 09 99 z TH 9—1430—1535—12—TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table £-20A, Multichannel Communications Station Patch Panel Access Jacks (US. Army) (Fig. 2-20) ‘The patch panel need not be externally patched for normal multichannel radio operation if the radio terminal channelization convention is adapted between the inboard radio and ‘outboard radio systems no. 1 and no. 2. The patch panel does, however, provide a means for accessing various channels for rerouting purposes when tactical situations require channel substitution (par. 2-27). The information given in this table describes the functions for the various jacks as they are hand wired. INBOARD RADIOS access jacks (CH1—Provides access to BOC automatic data link (ADL) A channel, Breaks internal patch panel connection’ going to local ADP. (CH2—Provides access to BOC ADL platoon 1 (PLT 1) chan- ‘nel, Breaks internal patch panel connection’ going to remote PLT 1 ADP via OUTBOARD RADIOS system no, 1, cH. (CH8_Same as CH2 except for platoon 2 (PLT 2) via OUT- BOARD RADIOS system no. 2. (CH4—Provides access to BOC HOT communications A channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to local auxiliary control box. CHS—Provides access to BOC HOT PLT 1 channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to remote PLT 1 auxiliary control box via OUTBOARD RADIOS system no. 1, CHA. (CH6—Same as CHS except for PLT 2 via OUTBOARD ‘RADIOS system no. 2, CH4. (CHT—Provides access to BOC maintenance talephone (MNT TEL) A channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! to local switchboard no. 1, tel drop 1 line pack. (CH8—Provides access to BOC MNT TEL PLT 1 channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection: going to remote PLT 1 switchboard via OUTBOARD RADIOS system no. 1, CHT. CHoSame as CHS except for PLT 2 via OUTBOARD RADIOS system no. 2, CHT. (CH10—Provides access to BOC intelligence radar reporting (IRR) channel, Breaks internal patch panel connection! ‘going to local auxiliary control box. (CH11—Provides access to BOC administration (ADM) channel, Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to local switchboard no. 1, line pack 6. (CH12—Provides access to BOC ADM PLT 1 channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to remote PLT 1 switchboard via OUTBOARD RADIOS aystam no. 1, CH11. 2 | Not used & | System no. 2 OUTBOARD RADIOS access Provides access to all 12 channels of PLT 2 via CTU connec- jacks tlon 3162 (9, fig. 21). The first eight channels are wired to the CTU binding posts, but are not normally used by the US. Army. Mater to fg. 2-96 for patch panel wiring diagram. 2-43TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-804, System no. 2 OUTBOARD RADIOS access Cont.| jacks ‘Switchboard telephone drops and CTU 2- and ‘d-wire spares access jacks ADP and auxiliary control box access jacks ‘Refer to fig. 2-25 for patch panel wiring diagram. 2-44 ‘Multichannel Communications Station Patch Panel— Access Jacke (U.S. Army) (Fig. 2-£0)—Continued CH1—Provides access to remote PLT 2 BOC ADL chanaa| Breaks internal patch panel connection’ going to BOC vs INBOARD RADIOS system, CH8. (CH2, CH8—Provides access to remote PLT 2 spare channei| CH4—Provides access to remote PLT 2 BOC HOT channa| Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to BOC vis INBOARD RADIOS system, CHS. (CHS, CH6—Provides access to remote PLT 2 spare channel (CHT-Provides access to remote PLT 2 BOC MNT TEL| channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection? going » BOC via INBOARD RADIOS system, CH9. (CHS, CH9—Provides access to remote PLT 2 spare channel (CH10—Provides access to remote PLT 2 IRR channel. Brea internal patch panel connection! going to local auxiliary| control box IRR communications. (CH11—Provides access to PLT 2 ADM TEL channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to PLT 1 ADM TEL via OUTBOARD RADIOS system, CH12. | (CH12—Provides access to remote PLT 2 spare channel. TELEPHONE DROP 1-Provides access to MNT TEL lie pack 1 on local switchboard no. 1. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to BOC via INBOARD RADIOS system, CHT. TELEPHONE DROP 2—Provides access to spare line pact 2 on switchboard no, 1. TELEPHONE DROP 5-Provides access to ADM TEL line pack & on local switchboard no, 1. Breaks internal patch Panel connection! going to BOC via INBOARD RADIOS system, CH11, TELEPHONE DROPS 6, 10, and 12—Provides access to the ‘spare line packs on switchboard no, 1. SPARE 4 WIRE-Provides access to a 4-wire remote location via the CTU, Wired to the CTU spare 4-wire binding posts (7, fig. 2-21). ‘SP2W-Provides access to a 2-wire remote location via the CTU, Wired to the CTU spare 2-wire binding posts (10, fig. 2-21). ADL A-Provides access to local ADP ADL communications. Breaks internal patch panel connection going to BOC ADL Avia INBOARD RADIOS system, CH1. ADLI-Not used. ADL2—Not used. HOT-Provides access to local auziliary control box HOT line primary communications. Breaks internal patch panel connection: going to BOC HOT A via INBOARD RADIOS system, CHA.Table 2-804. Access Jacks (U.S. Army) (Fit TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Multichannel Communications Station Patch Panel— £-20)—Continued —— ke Teck Function ADP and auxiliary control box access jacks IRR-Provides access to local auxiliary control box IRR pri- Cont. mary communications. Breaks internal patch panel connee- ‘System no. 1 OUTBOARD RADIOS access Sacks tion! going to BOC IRR via INBOARD RADIOS system, CHO, and remote PLT 1 and PLT 2 via OUTBOARD RADIOS systems no, 1 and no. 2, CH10. BN~Provides access to local auxiliary control box IRR. communications, Breaks internal patch panel connection? going to BOC IRR via INBOARD RADIOS system, CH10. PLT 1-Provides access to auxiliary control box IRR. com- ‘munteations, Breaks internal patch panel connection? going to PLT 1 auxiliary control box via OUTBOARD RADIOS system no. 1, CH10. PLT 2-Same as above except for system no. 2. Provides access to all 12 channels of PLT 1 via CTU connection J11 (8, fig. 2-21). Eight channels are wired to the CTU binding posts, but are not normally used by the U.S. Army. CH1-Provides access to remote PLT 1 BOC ADL channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to BOC via INBOARD RADIOS system, CH. (CH2, CH8—Provides access to remote PLT 1 spare channel. (CH4-Provides access to remote PLT 1 BOC HOT channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to BOC via INBOARD RADIOS system, CHB. (CHS, CH6—Provides access to remote PLT 1 spare channels. CH7—Provides access to remote PLT 1 BOC MNT TEL channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection’ going to BOC via INBOARD RADIOS system, CH8. (CHS, CH9—Provides acceas to remote PLT 1 spare channels. (CH10—Provides access to remote PLT 1 IRR channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection going to local auxiliary control box IRR communications. CH11—Provides access to remote PLT 1 BOC ADM TEL channel, Breaks internal patch panel connection? going to BOC via INBOARD RADIOS system, CH12. CH12—Provides access to remote PLT 1 ADM channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to remote PLT 2 switchboard via OUTBOARD RADIOS system no. 2, CHIL. te 2-45Ta 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-20B, Multichannel Communications Station Patch Panel— i Access Jacks (USMC) (Fig. 2-20) ‘The patch panel need not be externally patched for normal multichannel radio operstia ‘ifthe radio terminal channelization convention is adapted between inboard radios system no. 1 and no. 2. The patch panel does, however, provide a means for accessing varieu channels for rerouting purposes when tactical situations require channel substitatin (par. 2-29), The information given in this table describes the functions for the varia Jacks as they are hand wired. 1. | System no, 1 INBOARD RADIOS access jacks | CH1—Provides access to TAOC automatic data link (ADL) ‘A channel, Breaks internal patch panel connection? going to local ADP. (CH2—Provides access to TAOC ADL B channel, Breaks b- ternal patch panel connection! going to remote platoc (PLT) ADP via INBOARD RADIOS system no. 2, CH1. i (CH8—Provides access to TAOC HOT A channel. Breaks t- tarnal patch panel connection! going to local auxiliary eon trol box. (CH4-Provides access to TAOC HOT PLT channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to remote PLT via INBOARD RADIOS system no. 2, CH8. (CH5—Provides access to TAOC IRR (AA1) channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection’ going to local auxiliary control box and remote PLT auxiliary control box via IN- BOARD RADIOS system no. 2, CHS. CH6—Provides access to TAOC maintenance telephow (MNT TEL) A channel. Breaks internal patch panel com nection! going to local switchboard no, 1, line pack 1. CHTProvides access to TAOC maintenance telephooe (MNT TEL) PLT channel. Breaks internal patch pand connection? going to remote PLT via INBOARD RADIOS system no. 2, CH6. (CH8—-Provides access to TAOC administration (ADM) TEL channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going te local switchboard no. 2 line pack 6 and remote PLT vis INBOARD RADIOS system no. 2, CHS (see note). 2, | System no.2 INBOARD RADIOS access jacks | CH9 through CH12—Not used. BL-Not used. CH1~Provides access to remote PLT TAOC ADL channel. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to TAOC vis INBOARD RADIOS system no, 1, CH2. CH2—Not used. (CH8—Provides access to remote PLT TAOC HOT channel, ‘Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to TAOC vis INBOARD RADIOS system no. 1, CH4. (CHA-Not used. CHS—Provides access to remote PLT TAOC IRR (AAl) ehannel, Breaks internal patch panel connection! going local auxiliary control box and TAOC via INBOARD RADIOS aystem no. 1. CHS. Refer to fig. 2-20 for patch panel wiring diagram. 2-462. | System no. 2 INBOARD RADIOS access jacks Cont, 8, | System no,2 OUTBOARD RADIOS access jacks 4. | Switchboard talephone drops and CTU 2- and ‘-wire spares access jacks 5, | ADP and auxiliary control box access jacks Refer to fig. 2-29 for patch panel wiring diagram. TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-20B, Multichannel Communications Station Patch Panel— ‘Acoses Jacks (USMC) (Fig. £-£0)—Continued CH6—Provides access to remote PLT TAOC MNT TEL channel. Breake internal patch panel connection? going to TAOC via system no. 1, CHT. (CHT—Not used. CH8—Provides access to remote PLT ADM TEL channel. ‘Breaks internal patch panel connection’ going to local ‘switchboard no, 2 line pack 2 and TAOC via INBOARD RADIOS system no. 1, CH8. Provides access to eight remote stations via the CTU. CHI through CH8 are wired to CTU system no. 2, channels 1 through 8 binding posts. All 12 channels are wired to CTU connector J162 (8, fig. 2-21), but are not normally used by the USMC. TELEPHONE DROP 1-Provides access to MNT TEL line pack 1 on switchboard no, 1. Breaks internal patch panel, conneetion! going to TAOC via INBOARD RADIOS system no. 1, CH6. TELEPHONE DROP 2—Provides access to spare line pack on switchboard no. 1. ‘TELEPHONE DROP 5-Provides access to ADM TEL line pack 5 on switheboard no, 1. Breaks internal patch panel ‘connection! going to TAOC and remote PLT via INBOARD RADIOS system no. 1 and 2, CH8. TELEPHONE DROPS 6, 10, and 12—Provides access to the ‘spare line packs on switchboard no. 1. SPARE 4 WIRE~Provides access to a 4-wire remote location via the CTU. Wired to the CTU spare 4-wire binding posta (7, fig. 2-21). ‘SP2W-Provides access to a 2-wire remote location via the CTU. Wired to the CTU spare 2-wire binding posts (10, fig. 2.21). ADL A-Provides access to local ADP ADL communtcations. Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to TAOC ADL A via INBOARD RADIOS system no. 1, CH1. ADL 1-Not used, ADL 2-Not used. ‘HOT—Provides access to local auxiliary control box HOT Une communications. Breaks internal patch panel tion? going to TAOC HOT A via INBOARD RADIOS aystem no, 1, CHB. IRR-Provides access to local auxiliary control box IRR (AA1) communications, Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to TAOC and PLT IRR (AA1) via IN- BOARD RADIOS system no. 1 and 2, CHB. BN-Provides access to local auxiliary control box IRR. (AA1) communications, Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to TAOC IRR (AA1) via INBOARD RA- DIOS system no, 1, CHB. PLT 1—Provides access to local auxiliary control box IRR (AA1) communications, Breaks internal patch panel connection! going to remote PLT IRR (AA1) via INBOARD RADIOS system no. 2, CHS. 2-47TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table £-20B. Multichannel Communications Station Patch Ponsl— Access Jacks (USMC) (Fig. £-£0)—Continued Provides access to eight remote stations via the CTU. Ci! through CHS are wired to the CTU system no. 1 chums 1 through 8 binding posta, All 12 channels are wird » CTU connector 31 (0, Ae. 240, Dut are not normal oa by the System no. 1 OUTBOARD RADIOS access jacks. @@|6e:ee7 @@/8 6:88 @8/98:6e @e/ee-e@ |) @@/O8:@6 @6|®e@-e@e S@/08'e@e | al] @-@1@@-@@ eeleo- oe 2 @@/@6:e8 @@ |©8:@@ > S28 |©8-0@ ; e0|©0-06" [L- O@/@8+e@ @-@ , ce"9) 2 (S22 | ‘Vp 283 J || (2:8) =O © Lr c J ® O~@ © nore: tear rn LS [L_use 8 re ena Figure #-#1. CTU panel-connectors (U.S. Army and USMC).®. 10, a. 12, TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-814. CTU Panel Connectors (US. Army) (Fig. 4-81) ‘System no, 14 WIRE RCV and XMIT binding posts ANTENNA no. 1 connector ANTENNA no. 2 connector ‘System no. 2 4 WIRE RCV and XMIT binding posta ANTENNA no. 8 connector ADL 1 and ADL 2 4-wire binding posts SPARE 4-wire binding posta ‘Connector J162 SPARE 2-wire binding posts ADC and IRR secondary communications ‘-wire binding posts ‘Telephone 2-wire binding posta Provides for connection between 8 remote 4-wire communications channels and patch panel system no. 1 OUTBOARD RADIOS jacks (6, fig. 2-20) (Not normally used). ‘Not used by U.S. Army. Not used by U.8. Army. Provides for connection between 8 remote 4-wire communications channels and patch panel system no, 2 OUTBOARD RADIOS jacks (8, fig. 2-20) (Not normally used). Provides connection between remote antenna and INBOARD RADIO system. ADL 1-Not used. ADL 2-Not used, Provides for connection between 2 spare 4-wire channels and atch panel SPARE 4 WIRE jacks (4, fig. 2-20). Provides for cable connection between remote TRC-148 radio set and patch panel system no. 2 OUTBOARD RADIOS Jacks, Provides for cable connection between remote TRC-145 radio ‘set and patch panel system no, 1 OUTBOARD RADIOS Jacks. Provides for connection between 2 spare 2-wire channels and atch panel SP2W jacks (4, fig. 2-20), Provides for connection between ADC and IRR 2-wire channels and switchboard no, 1 line packs 7 and 8. Provides for connection between 17 remote telephone 2-wire channels and switchboard no, 2 line packs 18 through 29 (1, fig. 8-4), 2-49TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-18. CTU Panal Connectors (USMC) (Fig. #-#1) Xe Z — Fanction 1, | System no, 14 WIRE RCV and XMIT Provides for binding post connections between & rent ‘binding posts 4-wire communications channel and patch panel sya no. 1 OUTBOARD RADIOS jacks (6, ig. 2-20). 2. | ANTENNA no. 1 connector Provides connection for multichannel radio system no, 17 ‘mote antenna. 8. | ANTENNA no. 2 connector Provides connection for multichannel radio system no. 21+ ‘mote antenna. 4. | System no. 24 WIRE RCV and XMIT Provides for connection between 8 remote 4-wire commu binding posts cations channels to the patch panel system no, 2 OUT: BOARD RADIOS jacks (8, fig. 2-20). 5. | ANTENNA no. 8 connector Not used by USMC. 6 | ADL1and ADL 2 4-wire binding posts ADL 1-Not used. ADL2—Not used. 1. | SPARE 4-wire binding posts Provides for connection between 2 spare 4-wire channels anf patch panel SPARE 4 WIRE jacks (4, fig. 2-16.3). 8. | Connector J162 Provides for cable connection between 12 remote ¢-win channels and patch panel system no. 2 OUTBOARD Bi DIOS jacks. (Not normally used by USMC.) 9. | Connector 311 Provides for connection between 12 remote ¢-wire chant and patch panel system no, 1 OUTBOARD RADIOS jee (Not normally used by USMC.) 10. | SPARE 2-wire binding posta Provides for connection between 2 spare 2-wire channels the patch panel SP2W jacks (4, fig. 2-20). 11, | ADCand IRR secondary communications Provides for connection between 2 telephone 2-wire drops S-wire binding posta ‘switchboard no. 1 line packs 7 and 8 respectively. 12, | Telephone 2-wire binding posts Provides connection for 17 telephone 2-wire drops at swith board no. line packs 18 through 29 (1, fig. 8-4). Table 2-28. Auriliary Equipment Table 2-22. Auxiliary Equipment—Continued ‘Transmitter T-988(P) /GRC-108(") ‘Air conditioner MIL-A-52767-I-C-2 ‘Multichannel Communieations Stati 14 IFF Coder-Decoder Group OX.1(V)1/TPX-46(V) (usMc) a1 IFF Interrogator Control Unit 110 ‘Modem MD-191/GCC (C1870/TPX-46(V) 110 Mount MT-1898-VRC IFF Receiver-Transmitter Group 1-10 ‘Mount MT-1020/VRC OR-86/TPX-46(V) 1-10 Power Supply C-7674/VOC ‘Multichannel Communications Station 110 Radio Set R-442/VRC (U.S. Army) 1-10 Radio Set RT-524/VRC 19 Converter CV-1548/G 110 ‘Terminal Set Control C-7827/VOC 19 Multiplexer TD-660/G 110 ‘Telephone-Telegraph Terminal 19 Receiver-Transmitter ‘TH-81/GCC ‘RT-778/GRC-108(V) ‘Switehboards SB-22A/PR(2) 19 Receiver R-1829(P)/GRC-108(V)Section I. 3. General ‘This section describes the procedures used dur- ag the ADP and IHIPIR modes of operation. AFU operation in the ADP mode is divided into hree different methods of engagement: normal, utomatic, or manual. The IHIPIR mode, which sa completely manual operation, is used when the \DP is inoperative. Each engagement method iffers mainly in the amount of control the ADP xercises and the degree of participation pro- ided by the operators. These procedures apply ostly to the TDECC. In the assignment of a tar- et to the IHIPIR, it is assumed that the IHIPIR is vailable. In describing the missile firing proce- ure the RESUME FIRE/CEASE FIRE switch s set to the RESUME FIRE position. During tactical operation, do not set the CHALLENGE switch (8, fig. 8-5) to the TEST position as the program track file will be altered and several scans will be required to reestablish the file. -4, Operational Modes a. Mode Selection, Selection of the ADP or HIPIR is determined by the position of the MODE witch on the TDECC status panel. In the ADP aode, a normal or automatic method is selected y pushing either the NORMAL MODE indicator witch or the AUTO FIRE MODE indicator-switch n the T.O. control panel. b. ADP Mode. (1) Normal method of engagement. (a) Category I target. For high-threat tar- ets the ADP automatically assigns the IHIPIR nd requests T.O. acceptance of the assignment efore firing, Once confirmation is received, the ‘0. manually fires a missile when the target is rithin range of the missile, Additional missiles Iso require a manual fire command. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS (b) Category II target. For low-threat targets the ADP requests IHIPIR assignment from the T.0. If the T.O. accept the ADP’s request for assignment, the ADP assigns the IHIPIR and the T.0. manually fires a missile when the target is in-range. Additional missiles also require a manual fire command. (2) Automatic method of engagement. (a) Category I target. In this method of engagement, when the target is classified as a high threat, the ADP automatically assigns the IHIPIR (if available) and fires the first missile without operator intervention. Additional missiles, however, require a manual fire command. (b) Category II target. When the target is classified as a low-threat, category Il, target, the ADP assigns the IHIPIR (if available) and requests confirmation of the assignment before firing. Once confirmation is received, the ADP fires @ missile when the target is in range. Additional ‘missiles require a manual command. (8) Manual method of engagement. In the automatic and riormal methods of engagement, targets outside the ADP's sector of interest, or those targets the T.O. decides are of higher priority than the ADP priority targets, can be engaged manually. In this case, the T.O. manually selects and assigns a target to the fire section. The ADP monitors the engagement and issues an in- range condition for manual fire. (4) Engage-other Function. In the ADP mode of engagement, the T.O, can use the engage- other function to direct the ADP to engage any target in its target file, This method can be employed for out-of-sector targets (for which ATDL. data has been received) as well as for in-sector targets. When this function is used, missiles are fired manually by the T.0. ¢. IHIPIR Mode, In this mode, the T.O. engages the target without the aid of the ADP. The target is assigned by the T.O., and target intercept calcu- lation and in range is provided by the IHIPIR. Missiles are fired manually by the T.O.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 2-5. Functions Performed at the TDECC (IPCP Only) ‘The primary functions performed at the TDECC are to evaluate targets detected by the radars and processed by the ADP including tracking, identifying, assigning, and firing at any target threatening the platoon or offsite vital area (OSVA). a, ADP Mode. (1) Normat method of engagement. (a) Detecting. Target data acquired by the ICWAR is simultaneously processed by the ADP and displayed on the speed band portion of the TDECC CRT. If targets are within the ADP sector of coverage (predetermined azimuth and speed limits), ADP synthetic symbols are displayed on the TDECC PPI CRT display. If the ICWAR targets are not within the ADP sector of coverage, and the T.0. decides to engage these targets, a manual engagement is undertaken or, it ATDL data is available, the engage-other function may be used. (b) Threat ordering. After the target data is evaluated by the ADP, a threat file is established that indicates the criticality of unassigned threats, The local target presenting the greatest single threat to the OSVA defended by the platoon, is displayed as a priority aymbol (4) on the PPI. The local target presenting the greatest threat to the platoon is displayed as a platoon threat symbol (©). Either of the symbols indicates the category of the target by displaying the following: category I-flashing symbol; category II-steady symbol. ‘The other threatening targets (local and remote) are classified at a lower priority and are displayed (or not displayed) based on their threat order. (c) Identifying targets. During the threat ordering sequence, the ADP automatically commands the IFF equipment to interrogate the four most threatening targets in the threat order file. The results are displayed on the PPI and correla. ted with those in the ADP file. If the challenged target is determined to be friendly, the ADP automatically inhibits engagement and assignment of that particular target. If the T.O. appropriately determines that the target is friendly, but has not been so designated by the IFF, he “hooks” it with the tracking lever and issues a friend command to the ADP. The target is then classified as a friend by the ADP. However, if the target is hostile the ADP permits the engagement sequence to continue, Targets displayed are identified as being 2-52 either friendly, unknown or hostile. The ATD! data also indicates whether the target is bey engaged by another tactical unit. All ATDLa formation is furnished to the ADP through AADCP. (d) Assigning targets. If the ADP-dei nated target is a category I (flashing symbil threat, the ADP automatically assigns the [HIP to the target; however, continuation of the engagt ment depends upon the T.0.'s acceptance of th ADP assignment. In the event the IHIPIR is w. available, target assignment will proceed simi: to a category II engagement; that is, the ADP vil request 'T.0. acceptance prior to ADP assignin) the IHIPIR to the target. Targets designated 1 category II (steady symbol) threats are assign to the IHIPIR only after acceptance by the T.0. the T.O. accepts the ADP-designated target m quest, the engagement sequence continues. If th T.0, does not accept the ADP-designated tarp! request, but observes another target with a hight threat priority, the higher threat target is assign manually or is commanded to the ADP for assign ment with the engage-other function. (e) Tracking targets. Once the target i assigned, the T.O. monitors the tracking symbol the IHIPIR slews toward the designated tant and locks. The IHIPIR track symbol then moves a position on the PPI which indicates the azimud and range of the target. The ADP further cm putes the predicted intercept point, and displays! predicted intercept vector line (PIV) extendix from the IHIPIR tracking symbol to the approt mate spot where the missile will intercept the ta get. The RO listens to the doppler audio and deta mines how many aircraft constitute the threat, at whether they are propeller-driven or jet-powere The target video displayed on the IHIPIR spe trum analyzer is also observed. After estimatit the raid size (one, few, or many targets), the B presses the appropriate pushbutton for ATDL? porting purposes. If the ADP determines that 1 unassigned target represents a higher priori threat to the OSVA than the presently assign target, it will perform preemption criteria tes to determine if a preemption request should ! made to engage the unassigned threat. A pr emption request is made by flashing the AD Request/Accept indicator-switch on the T.O. Co! trol Panel and displaying the requested target ¢ the PPI with the OSVA priority symbol. The 2 must then decide whether to accept the AD? preemption request.(f) Targets maneuvering through zero ppler. A target maneuvering into the zero dop- or region requires the operator to manually track e HIPIR speedgate utilizing the RO speed con- al. As the target audio doppler tone decreases in equency, the operator observes the target video splayed on the HIPIR spectrum analyzer. By mipulating the speed control, he maintains the eed cursor on the target video. The target video ill move to the left with respect to the speed rsor, if the cursor is allowed to remain sta- mary. The manual speed mode is then selected id the operator manually tracks the target into e zero doppler region. When the target re- wpears, the operator again tracks it with the eed control until the doppler frequency increases a point where the HIPIR can achieve and aintain normal lock. The operator then selects e automatic speed mode in order to restore lock d automatic speed tracking to the HIPIR. (9) LCHR selection. Any LCHR may be lected automatically, provided there is at least emissile present, The T.O, however, has the con- ols necessary to override the automatic function dselect the LCHR he desires. (h) Missile firing. Once the target under ack has been accepted by the T.O., the first mis- lecan be fired manually when the ADP indicates \ in-range condition and the FIRE indicator- riteh illuminates. Subsequent missiles can be ed manually when the FIRE pushbutton again uminates, The T.O. verifies that a missile has en fired by observing that the FIRE indicator- ‘itch has extinguished, the FIRING indicator s illuminated, and the missile count has been duced by one. (i) Engagement evaluation. After the mis- eis fired, the RO monitors the appropriate in- zators which provide target speed, altitude, ai J strength, and doppler frequency. If there is y significant change in these readings which dicates a kill, the RO presses the KILL pushbut- n informing the T.O. and AADCP of the kill. If 2 target was not intercepted and the T.O. decides tto continue the engagement, he presses the NO ‘LL pushbutton which informs AADCP of the -Kill and that engagement of this target has en discontinued. If the target was not inter- pted but is still engageable, subsequent missiles e fired as directed by the T.O. The T.O. uses the 3SUME FIRE/CEASE FIRE switch to either sxcontinue or resume firing on a target. When an gagement onda. the T.O. presses the TERM- TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 INATE ENGAGE pushbutton to return the operation to a pre-engagement status. (2) Automatic method of engagement. If the automatic method of engagement is selected by the T.O., the ADP takes full control in assigning a target. If the target is classified as a category I threat, the ADP will automatically fire the first missile without operator action. If the target is classified as a category II threat, the T.O. must accept the ADP assignment before the first missile can be automatically fired, Any subsequent missiles fired at the same target must be manually fired. At any time prior to missile fire, the T.O. can intercede to prevent missile firing by setting the RESUME FIRE/CEASE FIRE switch to the CEASE FIRE position. (8) Manual method of engagement. In the automatic and normal engagement methods, targets outside the ADP’s sector of interest, or targets the T.O. decides are of higher priority than the ADP’s selected targets, can be engaged manually. For an ADP target other than the priority target, the T.O. manually “hooks” the desired ADP target symbol with the tracking lever and then presses the ENGAGE OTHER indicator-switch. The coordinates of the hooked target are then sent to the ADP, which, in turn, assigns the HIPIR to the target. Once lock is achieved, the ADP automatically provides target intercept evaluation (TIE) and in range, Missiles are then fired manually by the RO. If the T.O. decides that a target outside the ADP sector of interest which has not been ATDL reported has a higher priority than the ADP-designated target, he refuses the ADP assignment. Then either the RO or T.O. positions the azimuth cursor over the target video in the speed band on the TDECC display and presses the MANUAL ASSIGN pushbutton, causing the HIPIR to slew to the target azimuth. The RO then selects a manual or an automatic HIPIR search mode. When the HIPIR locks on target, the HIPIR track symbol on the TDECC PPI display moves to the azimuth and range of the tracked target. Missile firing and kill evaluation proceed in the same sequence described for the normal method of engagement. b. HIPIR Mode. In this mode, the system operates without the aid of the ADP for threat ordering and target assignment. Target assignment is the same as that described for non ADP targets engaged during the manual method of engagement of the ADP mode, TIE and in-range is provided by the HIPIR. Missiles are fired manually by the T.O. 2-53TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 2.5.1. Functions Performed with the TAS *(AE)' (PCP only) Using the TAS, the RO interfaces with the HIPIR, to perform required optical target acquisition and tracking operations. Various manual and semi- automatic TAS and HIPIR control methods are provided to enable the RO to adapt to target acquisiti and tracking operations to a particular tactical environment. TAS and HIPIR interact; therefore, TAS can be “caged” to the HIPIR, the HIPIR can be “slaved” to the TAS, or each can be operated independently. An overview. of the primary TAS control states is described below. Refer to TM 9—1490— 1536—18 for the detailed descriptions and operating instructions of the TAS system. . TASCaged. In this state, the TAS camera system is locked to the HIPIR antenna line of sight (LOS) to allow for optical detection and evaluation of target(s) designated for possible engagement. The ‘TAS can then be switched from the caged state to the independent state for optical tracking. TAS caged to HIPIR LOS. b. TAS Independent. This control state permits the target displayed within the optical field of view (FOV) of the TAS to be tracked independently of the HIPIR tracking system. This feature allows the TAS to track on target (at angles of up to 25 degrees from the HIPIR LOS) while the HIPIR tracks another target. After engaging the HIPIR target, the HIPIR can be quickly slaved to the TAS LOS for engagement of the TAS target. Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2-54 TAS tracking independent of HIPIR. ¢. HIPIR Slaved to TAS. While TAS is optical tracking a target, the HIPIR may be slaved tot! TAS LOS. This feature allows HIPIR radar energy’ continue to illuminate the target during those pr ods when the HIPIR is unable to maintain lock u track on targets due to certain enemy courte measure techniques. This control state is also w when absolute silent track of a target is desired (» EMCON par. 2-5.2). In this state, the HIPIR does radiate and remains passive while the TAS seardt acquires, and tracks targets electro-optically. HIPIR slaved to TAS LOS.d. Preferential Mumination (PI). This control sate enables the HIPIR to preferentially illuminate xe target rather than another, particularly when rgets are flying in close formation. When PI is se- cted, the HIPIR LOS and radar beam are offset 1 xgree from the TAS LOS. The beam can be rotated 50 degrees around the TAS LOS in order to greatly ‘duce the illumination on the undesirable target(s), hile maintaining sufficient illumination on the TAS, get for both HIPIR and missile lock and track. his causes the missile to home toward the TAS tar- t rather than “hunt” between the targets in the rmation which could result in a larger intercept iss distance, and lower single shot kill possibility efer to TM 9—1425— 1525 for further discussion). HIPIR preferential illumination. ‘5.2. HIPIR Emission Control (EMCON) *(AD)' (PCP only) The emission control (EMCON) feature provides r silent (i, non-radiating) operation of the HIPIR all times, except when the mission scenario explic- ly commands the HIPIR into the radiate state. The IPIR contains EMCON circuits which control the diate state with or without the presence or use of ve tracking adjunct system (TAS) *(AE)’. EMCON ormally operates independently of TAS. However, hen TAS is installed and operating, the RO, using ve EMCON/FORCED SILENT indicator-switch ‘ounted on the TAS control unit, can override the »rmal EMCON radiate control logic and force the IPIR to the silent mode. When returned to the EM- ON condition, radar silence or radiation is estab- shed in accordance with HIPIR EMCON control gic rules. Operation of the PCP and HIPIR switch- ontrolled logic establishes the rules of radiation and Rafer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 non-radiation. The HAWK system switch actions which affect the EMCON function are listed below. a. Radiate. The following actions allow the HIPIR to radiate provided that the radar is in REMOTE. © ADP assign (ADP auto mode) © T.O. accept (ADP normal mode) © TO. engage other © RO elevation high/ow (Fire section not under ADP assignment) © RO azimuth wide/narrow (Fire section not under ADP assignment) © RO rotate (Fire section not under ADP assignment) © RO manual az/el (Manual assign only) ». EMCON. The following actions inhibit RF transmission by the HIPIR. @ New ADP assignment (while antenna is slewing to new assigned azimuth) © ADP drops target assignment © T.0. manual assign © T.0/RO terminate engage © TO. engage other (while antenna is slewing to new assigned azimuth) © RF forced silent (TAS only) © RO kill/no kill ©. Radiate Condition. A positive indication of the HIPIR radiate or non-radiate condition is provided to the PCP operators by disabling the HIPIR doppler spectrum display on the RO panel spectrum analyzer when the radar is non-radiating and enabling the display when the radar is radiating. 2-5.3. Operating Procedures a. ADP Mode. A series of ADP mode operating procedures at the TDECC during a sample engagement is given in table 2-23. For a normal engagement method, only the procedures printed on gray, and those which are unshaded, are performed. If an automatic engagement method is preferred, only the procedures printed on black, and those which are unshaded, are performed. The TAS *(AE)', PCP, and all other system major items must be properly emplaced, energized, and adjusted, and ready for operation. 2.54.1TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 NOTE If main power to the PCP is interrupted during system operation, the HIPIR will also deenergize. Immediately direct the HIPIR operator toset the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL and reener- ize the radar to local full radiate. This procedure will conserve system energizing time after main power is restored to the PCP. ’. HIPIR Mode. A series of HIPIR mode operating procedures at the TDECC during a sample engagement without the ADP is given in table 2-24. NOTE These procedures are for information only ‘and are not to be considered indicative of tactical doctrine, 2-6. TDECC CRT Marking During normal operation of the PCP, the TDECC operators can write on the face of the ow TDECC CRT using a special marker-type fountay pen and a non-smearing waterproof ink. With ead emplacement of the PCP, information pertain to that area can be written on the TDECC CRT This semi-permanent information may cont firing zones, IFF traffic corridors, territord boundaries, and other battery locations. Wit these semi-permanent markings, evaluation an tracking of targets can be made more effectively When a target enters the tracking zone, th TDECC operator can track each target by usin a grease pencil. When the target leaves the trad ing zone, the grease pencil markings are remov. with a dry soft cloth, leaving the semi-permanet marking intact. For information on the spect marker fountain pens, types, refer to appendix! TM 740—1625. When the CRT semi-permane, markings require removal, apply solvent (naphth MIL—N—16178 to a soft cloth and rub the CR lightly until it is free of ink and wax pencil resida Table 2.28. ADP Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC will be 3. *(AD)' Operating with EMCON: Make certain that the system is operating in the cease fire mode, CEASE FIRE label (42, fig. 2-13) illuminated. During tactical operation do not sét the CHALLENGE switch (8, fig. 8-6) to the TEST position as the program track file will be altered and several scans wired to reestablish the file. ‘The HIPIR does not radiate until assigned and searching (see note). NOTE Equipment EMCON logic automatically suppresses HIPIR radiation until the radar is either ADP or manually assigned and commences search on a designated target. ‘iRefer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2-54.26 TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-23. ADP Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued Operation Btep ‘Neral tediontion 4.*(AE)' | In special circumstances requiring radar silence perform the following. Otherwise, proceed to step 5. a RO: Press the TAS ACQ BUTTON one time. b RO: Press the TAS SLAVED/INDEP indicator-switch to SLAVED. e. RO: Press the TAS EMCON/FORCED SILENT indicator-switch to FORCED SILENT. ADP control of the HIPIR is inhibited and a TAS tracking message is sent to the ‘ADCP. 5 For AADCP-designated targets: ‘T.0.: Observe that the ADCP ENGAGE label flashes and that the AADCP circular symbol appears over the designated target. The ADCP TARGET ALTITUDE meter may indicate target altitude. a. 7.0: If the AADCP-designated target can be engaged, press the ADCP ACKNOWLEDGE indicator-switeh (14, fig. 2-13). ‘The ADCP ENGAGE label stops flasking and the FIRE SECTION STANDBY indicator-switeh illuminates. b .0: If the AADCP-designated target is not displayed with the OSVA priority symbol, hook the target with the tracking lever symbol and press the ENGAGE OTHER indicator-switch (29, fig. 2-18). ‘The neuter _’ symbol (HIPIR assigned, accepted, but not locked), appears at the hooked target position. ‘The HIPIR is assigned, and ceases radiaiton *(AD)' while designated target. wring toward the Jf « .0.: If the AADCP-designated target is displayed with the OSVA priority symbol, proceed to step 18 for target assignment in the AUTO MODE and to step 15 for target assignment in the normal mode. 4 1 pS if the AADCP-designated target cannot be engaged, press the ADCP REJECT indicator switch. 6 When a target is designated by the ADP: « If a target is classified as category I: The OSVA threat symbol flashes. b If category II: ‘The OSVA threat symbol does not flash. 1 Correlate the ADP-displayed targets with the CWAR detections using the azimuth cursor , handwheel to evaluate target radial speeds. eter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. I 2.55TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table 2-28. ADP Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued ‘Operation Step Normal ndletion Corrective procedure 8. Evaluate the ADP selected target (OSVA priority symbol) relative to the other dik threats. 9. If the OSVA priority target is determined to be friendly: ‘The threat symbol disappears from the CRT. ‘The FRIENDLY TARGET label (60, fig. 2-13) illuminates for 6 IFF true friend return is displayed just beyond the target. 10. If the target does not properly respond to IFF interrogation : During tactical operation do not set the CHALLENGE switch (8, fig. $5) to the TEST position as the program track file will be altered and scans will be required to re-establish the file. a. T.O.: If the IFF returns continue to be void, select, in turn, each of the other IFF. and continue to challenge. b T.0.: Correlate target with known flight plans to assist in identification per TSOP. ce If HIPIR data is available, analyze the target ground speed, altitude, position, and het ing. Compare these parameters with those specified in the tactical TSOP to further ast in target identification. I d. TAS system data *(AB)', if available, may assist in target identification (steps 22 through il. T.O.: If the target is determined friendly by other than an ADP friend indication a Manipulate the tracking lever to hook the target. b. Press the FRIEND indicator-switch. NOTE ‘This categorizes the target as a FRIEND in the ADP track file for future threat orderi purposes. WARNING Some seal Before proceeding, make certain that the target designated for engagement a valid target and not a system false alarm. Refer to paragraph 2-8 for a description of ADP symbol display on the TDECC CRT. eee Om ecr cen Caran RO: The AUTO lamp illuminates. RUM eee emote osmt er cme es are] MOMELUV CeO Pettey mie GORE IT Dieter to appendix E for serial number effectivity, 2-56: TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table #-8. ADP Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC-Continued Operation If the target is not acceptable: T.O.: Press the REFUSE indicator-switch to allow the next target in the ADP file to be processed. T.O.: If a target other than the one designated by the ADP is more desirable for engagement, hook it with the tracking lever symbol and then press the ENGAGE OTHER indicator-switch. T.O.: The neuter.’ symbol is displayed over the new target. T.0.: If an ENGAGE OTHER command is given, all missiles must be fired manually. ‘When the HIPIR is assigned: ‘The HIPIR automatically slews to the designated azimuth, begins radiating *(AD)', | and searches for the target. Make certain that the HIPIR does not lock on a false target or specter (par. 2-8). When the HIPIR locks: The neuter (7 symbol disappears. ‘The SIGNAL STRENGTH, GROUND SPEED and ALTITUDE meters illuminate and the SEARCH label extinguishes. Doppler tone is audible and the HIPIR tracking symbol and predicted intercept vector are displayed at the proper range and azimuth position on the PPI portion of the CRT. The predicted intercept vector is displayed, indicating the intereept point if the missile is fired at that time. ‘ler to appendix E for serial number effectivity. I 2-57TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-28. ADP Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued a 21. Ifthe HIPIR does not lock: If the HIPIR does not lock on the designated target, it is possible that the target i maneuvering at speeds low enough to require manual HIPIR tracking. Examine th CRT display for a low-speed target. If a low-speed target is present, proceed to table 2-24, step 18 and assign the target mu ually. ‘LCHR selection: Launcher selection is random, provided at least one missile is present. NOTE Any launcher can be manually selected provided at least one missile is present. 22. (AB) 23. *(AE)' To view the target on the TAS display unit: RO: Press the TAS CAGED indicator-switch. ‘The TAS is slaved to the HIPIR LOS. When multiple targets are visible on the TAS display unit, proceed to step 28. 24, *(AE)' 25. (AE) a. 26. *(AB)' a To establish TAS auto track on the target: RO: Press the AUTO ACQ ON/AUTO OFF indicator-switch to AUTO ACQ ON. ‘The large tracker gate appears, adapts to the size of the target, and moves toward tt center of the display. Auto track oceurs automatically. ‘The auto track indicator appears on the TAS display unit. If TAS auto track is not acquired on the target: RO: Press the TAS ACQ BUTTON one time on the TRACKER JOYSTICK. RO: Press the TAS SMALL GATE/LARGE GATE indicator-switch to LARGE GATE. RO: Manipulate the TRACKER JOYSTICK until the target is positioned within the track gate. RO: Press the ACQ BUTTON a second time. Auto track occurs on the target. ‘The auto track indicator appears on the TAS display unit. If the target is acquired in auto track: RO: Press the SLAVED/INDEP indicator-switch to SLAVED. ‘The HIPIR antenna is slaved to the TAS LOS. RO: If radar silence is required, press the EMCON/FORCED SILENT indicator-switeh © FORCED SILENT. H iReter to appendix E for serial number effectivity.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 228. ADP Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued Operation NOTES ‘When the HIPIR is in the SLAVED mode, the TAS tracking errors will drive the HIPIR, Do not permit the TAS to auto track targets passing directly overhead. The HIPIR antenna will not follow, and both HIPIR and TAS may love lock and go into coast. As a result, the target will not be rescquired automatically and target redesignation procedures shall be required. If TAS loves auto track while the HIPIR maintains a speedgate lock, the system will return to HIPIR independent operation and TAS will cage to the HIPIR pointing angle. Press the CAGED indicator- switch to clear the TAS control logic. In a short range track condition, TAS may input rates in excess of the HIPIR's ability to follow. The radar will break lock and the beam will lag TAS LOS until they are separated by 25 degrees. At that point, TAS will exceed its gimbal limits and will cage to the radar pointing angle. The HIPIR will ‘no longer be slaved but will go into a normal coast mode of operation. The target will be so far from the radar beam that the HIPIR will be unable to reacquire the target and must be reassigned immediately to the same target or a different target. For loss of TAS auto track situations involving HIPIR SLAVED operation, proceed to step $8. RO: RO: RO: RO: RO: RO: RO: Determine the raid size from the audio doppler tones, HIPIR spectrum analyzer display, and TAS display “(AE)'. Press the appropriate ONE, FEW, or MANY indicator-switch. ‘*(AE)' RO: Continue to monitor the target on the TAS display unit. Report target type, weapon stores, and target maneuver if discernible. If more than one target is visible on the TAS display unit: Manually acquire an outlying target (a target at the edge of the formation) using the small gate target acquisition procedure (step 25). Press the TAS ACQ BUTTON one time. Press the TAS SLAVED/INDEP indicator-switch to SLAVED. Press the TAS PI ON/OFF indicator-switch to PI ON. Rotate the TAS PI OFF SET control to place the solid cross away from the center of the target cluster. Maintain PI orientation until target intercept. NOTES When the HIPIR ia in the slaved mode, the TAS tracking errors will drive the HIPIR. If TAS loves auto track while the HIPIR maintains a speedgate lock, the system will return to HIPIR independent operation and TAS will cage to the HIPIR pointing angle. Press the CAGED indicator- ‘switch to clear the TAS control logic. ‘hort range track condition, TAS may input rates in excess of the HIPIR’s ability to follow. The ‘will break lock and the beam will lag TAS LOS until they are separated by 25 degrees. At that point, TAS will exceed its gimbal limits and will ‘cage to the radar pointing angle. The HIPIR will xo longer be slaved but will go into a normal coast mode of operation. The target will be so far from the radar beam that the HIPIR will be unable to reacquire the target and must be reassigned immediately to the same target or a different target. Do not permit the TAS to auto track targets passing directly overhead. The HIPIR antenna will not follow, and both the HIPIR and TAS may lose lock and go into coast. As a result, the target will ot be reacquired automatically and target redesignation procedures shall be required. ‘Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 clo Table 2.28, ADP Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued ° NOTE *(AE)' ‘The HIPIR must be in radiate before a missile is fired. If the radiation has been suppressed by the TAS FORCED SILENT function, press the TAS EMCON/FORCED SILENT indicator-switeh to EMOON, For a category I target: ‘T.0.: Press the flashing ADP REQUEST/ACCEPT indicator-switeh. ‘The IN RANGE label illuminates when the target is within the effective of the missile. For a category Il target: ‘The IN RANGE label illuminates when the target is within the effective of the missile. T.O.: If the decision to fire is made, press the RESUME FIRE indicator-switch. ‘The FIRE indicator-switch illuminates. T.O.; Press and hold the FIRE indicator-switeh. ‘The FIRE indicator-switch extinguishes. ‘The FIRING label illuminates when a missile is fired, and then ext tetra ood ener osm ety a Te EAA eee ene ee Teer at eter ose Certs P.O. : Press the flashing ADP REQU SOS aot T.O.: If the decision to fire is made, press the RESUME FIRE indicator-switch aL eM Ce LLC coed After a missile is fired: RO: Monitor the engagement status. The doppler audio tone remains steady and the COAST lamp remains extinguished. Continue to monitor the HIPIR target data for signal strength, speed, altitude, and its effective range status, Listen fot tone burst prior to intercept. Determine and report the raid size. *(AE)' Select the preferential illumination (PI) function if necessary (step 28). |] eter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2-60° TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Toble £-88, ADP Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued - = 32, | ‘T.O.: Manually fire the second and subsequent missiles as needed. 33.*(AE)'| Loss of TAS system auto track: NOTE Do not permit the TAS to auto track targets passing directly overhead. The HIPIR antenna will not follow, and both HIPIR and TAS may lose lock and go into coast. As a result, the target will not be reacquired automatically and target redesignation procedures shall be required. a If the target is visible, reacquire target (step 24) or maintain TAS manual track (steps 25a through d). b If the target is visible and the HIPIR is locked on the target, press the TAS CAGED indicator- switch and reacquire the target (steps 24 through 26). If operating in the PI mode, perform step 2. e If the target is not visible and the HIPIR is not locked on the target (i.e., target is in a zero doppler turn), proceed to table 2-24, step 4a and process the target manually. a If the HIPIR is in the FORCED SILENT and SLAVED mode, and the target is not visible: (1) | Adjust the azimuth cursor to the azimuth location of the target, if known. (2) Press the CAGED indicator-switch. ‘The TAS cages and the HIPIR radiates in the search mode last used. ‘The HIPIR locks on the target. (3) If the HIPIR does not lock, proceed to table 2-24, step 13. Mater to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2-60.1Table £-£8. ADP Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued Beep al Narra indication, NOTES ‘When the HIPIR is in the SLAVED mode, TAS tracking errora will drive the HIPIR. If the HIPIR is in the SLAVED and FORCED SILENT mode, and the ADP is inhibited from sending ‘updated designations to the radar, pressing the CAGED indicator-switch releases the HIPIR to respond to the procedures in table 2-24, step 18. *(AE)' If the HIPIR is in the FORCED SILENT and INDEP mode and the target is tracked to short range causing TAS to exceed its gimbal limits and cage automatically, proceed to table 2-28, step 24. NOTE *(AE)' In short range track conditions, TAS may input rates in excess of the HIPIR’s ability to follow. TAS will track away from the antenna pointing angle until TAS exceeds its gimbal limita. TAS will then cage to the HIPIR, The radar will const for 10 seconds, then start to radiate and search but the target will be so far removed from the ADP designation inputs that it can not be reacquired. The radar must be reassigned via search radar designation data, If the engagement must be terminated: J.0.: If missile(s) in flight must be destroyed, press and hold the DESTROY indicator- switch. Missile(s) in flight are destroyed. T.0.: Press and hold the TERMINATE ENGAGE indicator-switch. RO: Press the BREAKLOCK indicator-switeh. The HIPIR breaks lock on the target. *(AE)' RO: Press the TAS CAGED indicator-switch. RO: If target intercept was effective: ‘A drop in doppler tone is heard and target break-up is observed on the HIPIR ‘spectrum analyzer, and *(AE)' may he visible on the TAS display unit. ‘The HIPIR may lose lock. NOTE If the HIPIR remains locked on target debris, press and hold the BREAKLOCK indieator- switch as required. RO: Press the KILL pushbutton. If target intercept was ineffective, manually fire more missiles as directed until the target is destroyed or is beyond the effective range of the missile, or is in a position where firing is impossible. If still ineffective, RO: press the NO KILL indicator-switch. RO: If the engagement is to continue following a kill, update the raid size by pressing the appropriate ONE, FEW, or MANY indicator-switch. RO: If the engagement has ended, press the TERMINATE ENGAGE and the TAS CAGED *(AE)' indicator-switch. "Rater to appendix E for serial number effectivity.TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 cw Table £.25 HIPIR Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC Nel ndirtinn T.0: Press the NORMAL indicator-switch. NOTE *(AD)' Equipment EMCON logic automatically suppresses HIPIR radiation wi ‘Any TDECC AZIMUTH or ELEVATION search indicator-switeh must HIPIR radiation when operating in the HIPIR (non-ADP) mode. re & a r For CWAR detected targets: Press the ASI APPROACH indicator-switch. ‘Target video is observed in the approach speed band on the CRT. RO: Set the VOICE/DOPPLER selector to VOICE CWAR and adjust the CWAR VOLUME control until: CWAR doppler is heard in the headset. Determine target validity by examining the target video on three successive scans. Use the azimuth cursor to help calculate the radial distance between two successive blips. This mea- surement provides an approximate target range indication. Correlate the CWAR detections with any AADCP target iriformation received on the hot line For HIPIR detected targets: RO: Set the VOICE/DOPPLER selector to VOICE/HPI. ‘When assigning targets the following actions must occur. T.0.:: Position the azimuth cursor to the selected azimuth, then press the MANUAL ASSIGN indicator-switch. ‘The ASSIGNED lamp illuminates. 7.0. Classify targets displaying any ECM as hostile. 7.0: Observe flight parameters based on tactical TSOP’s. RO: If HIPIR data is available, use ground speed, altitude, and ranging information to determine the threat of a particular target. If more than one target threatens, assign the highest threat to that target which would reach the defended area first. When searching manually in both elevation and azimuth: RO: Press the MANUAL AZ/EL indicator-switch, and use the azimuth handwheel snd elevation thumbwheel to operate the HIPIR antenna for lock on the designated target. Use the HIPIR doppler tone as a guide, and press the BREAKLOCK indicator-switch if necessary terminate lock on undesirable targets or noise. [| Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity.310 ™9—1 —1535—12—1 Table $24, HIPIR Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued When searching using the HIPIR automatic search modes: RO: Place the HIPIR into the search mode of operation. If the ROTATE, NARROW, or WIDE mode is selected, vary the antenna elevation with the ELEVATION thumbwheel. If the HIGH or LOW search mode is selected, use the AZIMUTH handwheel to manually vary the HIPIR antenna azimuth. ‘The HPI SEARCH indicator is illuminated. When the HIPIR achieves lock: ‘The ELEVATION MILS, SIGNAL STRENGTH, GROUND SPEED, and ALTITUDE. meters illuminate. ‘The HIPIR track symbol is displayed at the proper azimuth and range on the CRT. ‘The HIPIR target signal is displayed on the HIPIR spectram analyser CRT. 7. *(AE)' | To view the target on the TAS display unit: RO: Observe that the TAS CAGED indicator-switch is illuminated. ‘The TAS is slaved to the HIPIR LOS. 8. %(AE)' | When multiple targets are visible on the TAS display unit, perform table 2-23, step 28. 9. (AE)! | To establish TAS auto track on the target: RO: Press the AUTO ACQ OFF/AUTO ACQ ON indicator-switch on the TAS control unit to AUTO ACQ ON. ‘The large tracker gate appears, adapts to the size of the target, and moves toward the center of the display. ‘Auto track occurs automatically. ‘The auto track indicator appears on the TAS display. If TAS auto track is not required on the target: a RO: Press the ACQ BUTTON one time on the TRACKER JOYSTICK. a RO: Press the TAS SMALL GATE/LARGE GATE indicator-switch to LARGE GATE. a RO: Move the TRACKER JOYSTICK until the target is positioned within the tracker gate. a RO: Press the ACQ BUTTON a second time. ‘Auto track occurs om the target. ‘The auto track indicator appears on the display. inate SScipeiee Re tesa oer 2-6311. (AE)! 12a, q@ @) 430—1535—12—1 7) Table 2-24, HIPIR Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued Go ermal dren If the target is acquired and in auto track: RO: Press the TAS SLAVED/INDEP indicator-switch to SLAV! ‘The HIPIR antenna is slaved to the TAS LOS (see notes below). NOTES For loss of TAS auto track situations involving HIPIR operation, proceed to step 22. ‘When the HIPIR is in the SLAVED mode, TAS tracking errors will drive the HIPIR. Do not permit the TAS to auto track targets passing directly overhead. The HIPIR antenna will not follow, and both HIPIR and TAS may lose lock and go into coast. As a result, the target will not bbe reacquired automatically and target redesignation procedures shall be required. If TAS loves lock while the HIPIR maintains a speedgate lock, the system will return to HIPIR. independent operation and TAS will cage to the HIPIR pointing angle. RO: press the CAGED indicator-switeh to clear the TAS control logic. In a short range track condition, TAS may input rates in excess of HIPIR ability to follow. The radar will break lock and the beam will lag TAS LOS until they are separated hy 25 degrees. At that point, ‘TAS will exceed its gimbal limita and will cage to the radar pointing angle. The HIPIR will no longer be slaved but will go into a normal COAST mode of operation. The target will be so far from the radar beam that the HIPIR will be unable to reacquire the target and must be reassigned immediataly to the same target or a different target. RO: If target maneuvers toward zero doppler: ‘The audible doppler tone decreases in frequency. ‘The target video observed on the HIPIR spectrum analyzer approaches the extreme left edge of the display. ‘The rate with which the speed contro! must be adjusted to keep the speed pedestal centered on the target video increases considerably. When possible, use manual speed mode to track the target through zero doppler as follows. Otherwise, proceed to step c or d and use the TAS *(AE)'. *(AE)' Press the CAGE indicator-switch if the HIPIR is slaved to the TAS. ‘When the left speed marker disappears from the HIPIR spectrum analyzer, make certain that the intensified marker is centered on the target video, and then press and release the MANUAL SPEED indicator-switch. *(AD)! Pressing the MANUAL SPEED indicator-switch conditions the HIPIR for tracking in a foreed lock mode at 40 km which may cause erroneous in-range and ready-to- fire indications. Also, the HIPIR lock indication observed must not be regarded as ‘8 positive target lock at this time. | iheter to eppencix B for serial number effectivity. 2-6410 TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 Table £24, HIPIR Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued SN 126. (3) Cont. (4) (5) ©) @m (8) (9) (10) a) Continue adjusting the speed control to keep the target video positioned between the speed markers while maintaining maximum deflection on the SIGNAL STRENGTH meter. Once the doppler signal decreases to a point below the audible region, or when the video displayed on the HIPIR spectrum analyzer degenerates from a single target pip to a number of rapidly fluctuating pips, allow the speed control to remain set at the last position where a maximum indication was obtained on the SIGNAL STRENGTH meter. Do not attempt to ‘maintain maximum signal strength once the target is in the zero doppler region. During target maneuver through zero doppler. ‘The audible doppler indication is observed as a low buzz without tone. ‘The HIPIR continues to track in azimuth and elevation without any indication of doppler being present. The display observed on the HIPIR spectrum analyzer consists of several rapidly fluctuating target pips displaced from each other in frequency. NOTE Notify the T.0. if tracking in the zero doppler region extends beyond 90 seconds. After target maneuver through zero doppler: ‘An audible doppler tone, increasing in frequency, reappears. A distinet target reappears on the HIPIR spectrum analyzer. When the audible doppler tone is again present, maintain the SIGNAL STRENGTH meter indication at maximum by continuously adjusting the speed control. When the doppler tone has increased to a point where both speed markers are visible, press and release the AUTO SPEED indicator-switch. ‘The HIPIR maintains lock on the target. If the HIPIR does not maintain lock on the target, press and release the MAN SPEED indicator-switeh, and readjust for maximum indication on the SIGNAL STRENGTH meter. Press and release the AUTO SPEED indicator-switch again. Once the HIPIR achieves lock on the target, immediately adjust the speed control to keep the intensified marker centered on the target video, and be prepared to repeat the procedure (switching between manual speed and auto speed) in order to maintain lock on the target in the auto speed mode. If the video does not reappear, continue tracking the target manually as long as an audible doppler tone is present. And remember, do not attempt to track with the SIGNAL STRENGTH meter if the doppler tone is not present. c. *(AE)'| If the TAS is in auto track with the HIPIR slaved: qa) After target maneuver through zero doppler: ‘An audible doppler tone, increasing in frequency, reappears. A distinet target pip reappears on the HIPIR spectrum analyzer. Rafer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2-65TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table 2-21, HIPIR Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued ‘Step a Normal indication 12c(2) | When the audible doppler tone is again present, maintain the SIGNAL STRENGTH mea Cont. indication at maximum by continuously adjusting the speed control. (3) _| When the doppler tone has increased to a point where both speed markers are visible, prea and release the AUTO SPEED indicator-switch. ‘The HIPIR locks on the target. (4) | If the HIPIR does not maintain lock on the target, press and release the MAN SPEH indicator-switch, and readjust for maximum indication on the SIGNAL STRENGTH me Press and release the AUTO SPEED incicator-switch again. (5) _| Once the HIPIR achieves lock on the target, immediately adjust the speed control to keep th intensified marker centered on the target video, and be prepared to repeat the procedin (switching between manual speed and auto speed) in order to maintain lock on the target it the auto speed mode. (6) _| If the video does not reappear, continue tracking the target manually as long as an audibi doppler tone is present. And remember, do not attempt to track with the SIGNAL STRENGT! meter if the doppler tone is not present. Proceed to step 24. @. *(AE)'| If the target is maneuvering toward zero doppler and is visible on the TAS display unit, bt beyond the TAS auto track range: (1) | Press the ACQ BUTTON for manual control of the TAS. (2) | Manipulate the TRACKER JOYSTICK to maintain the target in the center of the TAS displ unit. (8) _ | Press the TAS SLAVED/INDEP indicator-switch to SLAVED. (4) | Maintain TAS manual track control through zero doppler until an audio doppler ton, increasing in frequency, indicates that the HIPIR has regained lock on the target. (5) | When the SIGNAL STRENGTH meter illuminates (indicating HIPIR delay lock), press tht TAS CAGED indicator-switch. The HIPIR resumes track on the target. (6) _| Proceed to step 24. When the HIPIR searches and locks: The SEARCH lamp stays illuminated while the HIPIR searches for the targel- ‘When the HIPIR locks, the SIGNAL STRENGTH, GROUND SPEED, and ALT! ‘TUDE meters illuminate. ‘The HIPIR tracking symbol is displayed at the target range on the PPI portios 4 the CRT. _ oO __ [| iteter to appendix Efor serial number effectivity. 2-66TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2.24, HIPIR Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued 14. ) @ *(AE)’ & *(AE)" q@) (2) (3) 4) (5) If the HIPIR loses lock: If the TAS has auto track on the target, proceed to step 11. If the TAS does not have auto track on the target, but the target is still visible on the TAS display unit, perform the following: Press the ACQ BUTTON for manual control of the TAS. Manipulate the TRACKER JOYSTICK to maintain the target in the center of the TAS display unit. Press the SLAVED/INDEP indicator-switch to SLAVED. Maintain the TAS manual track control until an audio doppler tone, increasing in frequency, indicates that the HIPIR has regained lock on the target. When the SIGNAL STRENGTH meter illuminates (indicating HIPIR delay lock), press the TAS CAGED indicator-switch. The HIPIR resumes track on the target. NOTE If the target is not visible on the TAS display, and HIPIR lock is not reestablished during the 10-second ‘coast period, the HIPIR will revert back to its previous search mode. Insure that the HIPIR tracking symbol is at the proper azimuth. RO: Adjust the elevation thumbwheel until the indications on the ELEVATION MANUAL and ELEVATION HPI scales are the same. RO: Press the MANUAL AZ/EL indicator-switch for manual control of the HIPIR. *(AD)' HIPIR radiation is enabled. RO: Press the BREAKLOCK indicator-switch if necessary to terminate lock on any undesirable target or noise. RO: When the HIPIR is in the 10-second coast period after a loss of lock, observe for indications that the HIPIR has regained lock. ‘The COAST indicator stops flashing. The signal strength meter indicates an increase in target signal strength. The audible doppler tone is distinetly heard. A distinct target pip reappears on the HIPIR spectrum analyzer. NOTE RO: If lock is not reestablished during the 10-second coast period, the HIPIR will revert back to ita previous search mode. The SEARCH indieator will then flash until HIPIR lock is regained. When the HIPIR has regained lock, evaluate the target under track. 1.0: Insure that the HIPIR is at the proper target azimuth by correlating the track symbol with the CWAR target displayed data in the PSI rings. RO: Press the BREAKLOCK indicator-switch, if necessary, to terminate lock on any undesirable target or noise. —t->>>>+~SOTO ‘Meter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2-67TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 cn I Table #-£1. HIPIR Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued RO: A helicopter is present when: Propeller chopping is present in the HIPIR audio doppler. ‘The GROUND SPEED and SIGNAL STRENGTH meters may fluctuate. The tracked target displays a broad frequency spectram on the HIPIR spectran analyzer. *(AE)' For TAS tracking of helicopters and multiple targets, proceed to step 16. For other engagements, proceed to step 19. RO: When tracking helicopters: If the helicopter is within the TAS system automatic tracking range, perform steps 7 through 12 above before proceeding further. Adjust the speed control until the intensity marker (speed pedestal) is centered on the target on the HIPIR spectrum analyzer. Press the MANUAL SPEED indicator-switch. . Estimate the helicopter range, and then set the range control (19, fig. 2-14) selector to that range. Press the MANUAL RANGE indicator-switch. If the target is receding, press the RECEDE indicator-switch. Press the MISSILE CODE indicator-switch. RO: Determine the raid size from the audio doppler tones, HIPIR spectrum analyzer display, and TAS monitor display *(AE)' (if le). Press the appropriate ONE, FEW, or MANY indicator-switch. : *(AE)' Continue to monitor the target on the TAS display unit. Report target type, weapons stores, and target maneuver if discernible. | 18.°(AE)! If more than one target is visible on the TAS display unit: | 1ire an outlying target (a target at the edge of the formation) using the small | \ mn procedure (step 9). RO: Press the TAS SLAVED/INDEP indicator-switch to SLAVED. RO: Press the TAS PI ON/PI OFF indicator-switch to PI ON. RO: Rotate the TAS PI OFFSET control to place the solid cross away from the center of the target cluster. RO: Maintain PI orientation until target intercept. LCHR selection: 1.0.: Press the RESUME FIRE indicator-switch. Select LCHR 1, 2, or 8. If no preference is made, and LCHR containing at least one missile will automatically be selected. T ieter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2-6810 TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 ‘Table 2-24. HIPIR Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued ep a Nermal indicetion 20. Firing missiles: NOTE*(AE)’ For TAS-equipped batteries where HIPIR radiation has been suppressed (forced-silent) and the HIPIR- is slaved to TAS, the RO must press the TAS EMCON/FORCED SILENT indicator-switeh to EMCON to enable HIPIR radiation during target engagement. a. When the target is within the effective range of the missile: ‘The IN RANGE label illuminates. b Press the FIRE indicator-ewitch. ‘The FIRE indieator-switch extinguishes and the FIRING lamp flashes. a. ‘After a missile is fired: a. Monitor the engagement status. ‘The doppler audio tone remains steady and the COAST lamp remains extinguished. & Continue to monitor the HIPIR target data for signal strength, speed, altitude, and its effective range status. 22°(AE)' | Loss of TAS auto track: Do not permit the TAS to auto track targets passing directly overhead. The HIPIR antenna will not follow, and both HIPIR and TAS may lose lock and go into coast. As a result, the target will not bbe rescquired automatically and target redesignation procedures shall be required. Hf the target is visible, reacquire target (steps 9 through 11) and maintain TAS manual track (step 10a through d). If the target is visible and the HIPIR is locked on the target, press the TAS CAGED indicator- switch and reacquire target (steps 9 through 11). If operating in the PI mode, perform table 2-28, step 28. If the target is not visible and the HIPIR is not locked on the target (ie., target is in a zero doppler turn), proceed to step 12b and process the target manually. If the HIPIR: the FORCED SILENT and SLAVED mode and the target is not visible, press the TAS CAGED indicator-switch and proceed to step 14. NOTES When the HIPIR is in the SLAVED mode, TAS tracking errors will drive the HIPIR. If the HIPIR is also in the FORCED SILENT mode, the ADP is inhibited from sending updated designations to the radar. Pressing the TAS CAGED indicator-switch releases the HIPIR to respond to the procedures in step 18 and resets the HIPIR from FORCED SILENT to the EMCON state. ‘Rater to appendix E for serial number effectivity. z 2-69TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1) I Table 2-4, HIPIR Mode Operating Procedures Performed at the TDECC—Continued Operation 22e, If the HIPIR is in the FORCED SILENT and SLAVED mode and the target is tracked to short Cont. range causing TAS to exceed its gimbal limits and cage automatically, proceed to step 13. NOTE In short range track conditions, TAS may input rates in excess of the HIPIR’s ability to follow. TAS will track away from the antenna pointing angle until TAS exceeds its gimbal limits. TAS will cage to the HIPIR. The radar will coast for 10 seconds, then start to radiate and search but the target will be so far removed from the ADP designation inputs that it cannot be reacquired. The radar must be reassigned via search radar designation data. 23, Fire the second and subsequent missiles per TSOP. a. If the engagement must be terminated and missiles in flight destroyed: a. T.0: Press and hold the DESTROY indicator-switch. Missile(s) in flight are destroyed. o R.O: Press the BREAKLOCK indicator-switeh. ‘The HIPIR breaks lock on the target. cm *(AE) R.0: Press the TAS CAGED indicator-switch. 25, RO: If target intercept was effective: ‘A loss of doppler tone is heard and target break-up is observed on the HIPIR spectrum analyzer, and *(AE)' may be visible on the TAS display. The HIPIR may lose lock. NOTE If the HIPIR remains locked on target debris, press and hold the BREAKLOCK indicator-awitch as required. Press the KILL indicator-switch. *(AD)! HIPIR radiation is terminated. If target intercept was ineffective, fire more missiles as directed by TSOP until the target is destroyed, or beyond the effective range of the missile, or is in a position where firing is impossible. If still ineffective, RO: press the NO KILL indicator-switch. *(AD)! HIPIR radiation is terminated. 27. RO: If the engagement is to continue following a kill, update the raid size by pressing the appropriate ONE, FEW, or MANY indicator-switeh. *(AD)! HIPIR radiation is terminated. 2B. RO: If the engagement has ended, press the TERMINATE ENGAGE, and *(AE)' the TAS CAGED indicator-switches. I 1Reter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 2.70 .2-6.1. RO Operational Guidelines ‘The table below provides the RO operator with ‘some operational guidelines for achieving and m taining HIPIR lock and track under various em ronmental conditions. The Observations column Presents key visual and audible indications that can ‘or may be observed at the FC console as the HIPIR attempts to lock and track. The RO action column contains the RO actions to be taken in order to provide an engagement capability and reduce system reaction time. To further reduce system reaction time, observe the following: @. Throughout the engagement, prepare for Possible loss of lock as follows: © Follow the PPI and/or ASI target with the azimuth cursor. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Follow the spectrum analyzer HIPIR target video signal with the manual speed cursor using the manual speed control. Position the ELEVATION control between 0 and 60 mils. b, If CWAR or AADCP range is not available, adjust the HIPIR track box to between 20 and 80 km using the RANGE control. ¢, HIPIR pause-locks occur normally at the rate of 5 to 16 per minute and can be observed on the spectrum anelyzer as the lock indicators appear and disappear repeatedly. NOTE Detailed procedures for RO operational guidelines are located in TM 9—1425—1525-12-8, table 6-1. Table £-24.1. RO Operational Guidelines © Normal target on PPI and/or ASI. © Lock indicators appear repeatedly at location of target video on spectrum analyzer. (© Jam strobe on ASI. © HIPIR pause-lock rate is normal. © Acquire target manually as follows: Position asimuth eursor on target. Press MANUAL AZ/EL indicator-switeh. Rotate ELEVATION thumbwheel from 0 to 100 (or 800) if assigned levation sector was low (or high) until doppler or abrupt change in audio level can be heard, Adjust AZIMUTH handwheel to peak target video on spectrum analyzer. ‘Adjust speed control to posi ton intensified marker over target video. Preas AUTO SPEED/MANUAL SPEED indicator-switch to MANUAL SPEED. ‘Adjust speed control to maintain lock indicators centered on target video. Adjust speed control for peak indication on the SIGNAL STRENGTH meter. Press AFC HOLD indicator-switeh to on. If SIGNAL STRENGTH meter indication exceeds mid-scale, press ‘AUTO SPEED/MANUAL SPEED indicator-switch to AUTO SPEED. © If helicopter is recognized, do not transfer to auto speed control, but continue to track using manual speed control. Press MSL CODE indicator-ewiteh to on. Alert 7.0. of possible false tar Gets, or targets out of HIPIR 2-70.10Acquires doppler target and remains locked. ‘Acquires doppler target, then loses tock. Acquires jamming target and remains locked. ‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table £-24.1. RO Operational Guidelines—Continued (© Speed lock indicators bracket strong target video on spectrum analyzer. Weak fluctuating target video signals may appear at a fixed distance from strong target video. (© May recognize characteristic sound of jet or propeller aireraft. © Continue tracking valid target. ‘© Speed lock indicators bracket weak target video ‘signal at a fixed distance from a strong target video. (© May recognize characteristic sound of jet or propeller aireraft. © Pres AUTO SPEED/MANUAL SPEED indieator-ewitch to MANUAL SPEED and use manual speed control to bracket strong target video. Transfer to auto speed. (© Track box range is unstable or differs from PPI target by more than 10 pereent. © GROUND SPEED meter sweeps at a slow rate, and the sequence repeats. © Very strong target video and lock indicators sweep at a slow rate on spectrum analyzer, and the sequence repeats. (© Baseline noise has very low level or disappears on ‘spectrum analyzer. ‘© A variable beat freqeuncy may be heard. ‘© Track box range is unstable. ‘© HIPIR lock is indicated and JAMMED label is flashing. ‘© GROUND SPEED, SIGNAL STRENGTH, and ALTITUDE meters may have erratic indications. © Obtain range (in order listed) from CWAR, ADCP, or insert dummy range. © Press AUTO SPEED/MANUAL SPEED indicatorewitch to MANUAL SPEED. and press AFC HOLD indicator-switeh. Using manual speed control, bracket strong target video at the beginning location of slow sweep. © Adjust speed control for peak indication on the SIGNAL STRENGTH meter. © Maintain azimuth cursor on (or very near) target on PPI and/or ASI. If target video is not visible on spectrum analyzer, press BREAKLOCK indicatorewitch and attempt to reacquire target. (© Obtain range (in order listed) from CWAR, ADCP, or insert dummy range. © Continue tracking valid target. © Obtain range (in order listed) from CWAR, ADCP, or insert dummy range. 70.3TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 o Table 2-21.1. RO Operational Guidelines—Continued HIPIR wate Observations RO action 5. Acquires jamming target, | COAST label flashes (only in auto speed mode). ‘© Ifa missile has not been fired: | then loses lock. ‘© Track box drifts from target or jam strobe azimuth. Request manual assignment. | ¢ ALTITUDE meter rapidly changes. Press BREAKLOCK indicator-svith | Preas ELEVATION LOW (or HIGéi indicator-ewiteh. Reacquire target (acquire target manually if automatic acquisition does not occur within 5 scans). Press AUTO SPEED/MANUAL SPEED indicator-switch to MANUAL SPEED and then immediately press CCM OVERRIDE indicator-switch to on. If necessary, obtain range (in order listed) from CWAR, ADCP, or insert dummy range. Press AFC HOLD indicator-switeh Press MANUAL AZ/EL indicator-switeh. ¢ Ifa missile has been fired: Press AFC HOLD indicator-switch » Request manual assignment. Press BREAKLOCK indicator-switch Press MANUAL AZ/EL indicator-switeh. Press AFC HOLD indicator-switeh on. Press CCM OVERRIDE indicator-switeh to on. 2-70.47 1-7. Tactical Firing Operations Figure 2-22 summarizes target engagement ‘rom initial detection to intercept. The summary neludes the handling of targets in the ADP mode ‘or both the normal and automatic methods of en- agement. a. Typical Engagement. Targets detected by the ‘CWAR are processed by the ADP and displayed ymbolically within the sector of interest area on he CRT. (1) Normal engagement method. The ADP mmediately assigns a category I target to the HIPIR and the engagement sequence automat- cally begins. At this time, the T.O. ean either iecept or reject the ADP’s request to engage the arget. If the target being engaged is classified as ‘ategory II, the ADP does not assign the IHIPIR. until the T.O. accepts the ADP’s request to engage. The T.O. can override any ADP request and select another target by “hooking” it with the tracking lever, and pressing the ENGAGE OTHER indi- tator-switch. ATDL reported targets can also be engaged by this method. Once the IHIPIR is tssigned, it slews to the designated azimuth and dlevation, searches, and ultimately locks on the target. The raid size is determined by listening to the target doppler, and monitoring the CRT speed band and IHIPIR spectrum analyzer. When the target enters into the effective range of the missile, the ADP forwards a fire command enable to the TDECC; the T.O. then manually issues the fire command from the TDECC to the ILCHR. The ILCHR automatically selected for the engagement becomes fully accivated and slews to the azimuth and elevation of the IHIPIR. Simultaneously, a missile receives missile message commands, is TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 agmed, activated both electrically and hydrauli- cally, and acquires rear-signal lock on the IHIPIR. The ILCHR then requests leadangle and superelevation from the ADP to position itself in the proper direction for launching. The ILCHR will further augment these lead angles if it is positioned in an obstruction zone. In this event, the ILCHR shoot-around circuits calculate the new angles and reposition the ILCHR accordingly. The ILCHR then generates the signal which ignites the missile motor, thereby launching the first missile. After a missile is fired, the lead angle and superelevation ‘are removed from the ILCHR and it returns to standby. The second and subsequent missiles are fired manually by pressing the FIRE indicator- switch. Missiles are also fired manually for those targets designated by the ENGAGE OTHER function, The firing sequence as described ‘above is repeated. (2) Automatic engagement method. For category I targets, the ADP performs the entire engagement without assistance from the T. cluding the firing of the first missle. For category II targets, the sequence progresses to where a missile is ready to fire. Only when the T.O. confirms target acceptance does the ADP forward a fire command to the firing section. b. IHIPIR Mode. For a IHIPIR mode engagement, without the ADP, more time is required to engage the target because the operators must evaluate and track the target, and fire missiles. Afer the T.O. assigns the target, the RO must manually slew the IHIPIR to the azimuth of the designated target and allow it to search the azimuth and elevation until lock occurs. Raid size is estimated and reported, When the target is within effective range and the FIRE indicator-switch illuminates, the T.O. presses the FIRE indicator-switch to launch 2-71TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 co TYPICAL FRING SEQUENCE EVALUATE cwAR AND emocESS cwAR OCTECTEO SKE OAENES fiocrs FEATS TAR ne aes SRSLY sean RADIATE "IAC) (SEE NOTED stavooy resent MOMTORTRACKNG ——OESNATE AZIMUTH SLEWS IN AIMIUTH. STARS. suanoey presen Fee Ae Ame AD ELEVATION FOR TARGET LOCKS ON AN TRACKS TARGET sranoey resent | ests wo neronr Races TARGET sraNoey present away sue Teaces TARGET ACTIVATES AND SLES | MESLE MESSAGE MEERTED ° OP GATTERY AND HYORAULICS, Seas arena staBUI2ED OSS AT SUPER ELEVATION WeseRTED. raat arouno nsenneo HERDS ReMES LEA ANGLE ano sven NOTE REFER To APPENDIX & HERTS eve MS 311794A Figure 2-22, Typical firing sequence. 2-72first and, if necessary, second and subsequent issiles. The firing sequence at the ILCHR, after e command to fire is given, is the same as that ‘scribed in a (1) above. 8. ADP Symbol Display During Normal Engagomonts ‘The following information is provided since it Possible for system false alarms or specters to ypear as valid targets. In some instances, all of ¢ conditions required for firing can be satisfied 1 these false targets, and missile firing could cur automatically. This information will enable 'e T.O. and RO to recognize these conditions and 1 9—1430—1535—12—-1 take appropriate action to preclude firing. The ADP does have the capability to recognize that the IHIPIR is locked on a specter rather than a real target. Thus, for most cases, automatic missile firing on specters will be prevented by the ADP. Nevertheless, all the precautions described in this section should still be performed. @, ADP Symbol Display. ADP local symbols displayed on the TDECC CRT result from automatic detection processing by the ADP. The ADP symbols are generally stable during an engagement, but will periodically appear erratic due to multiple targets and local site disturbances. Inherent radar noise, combined with the ADP detection 2-72.41reess, will produce system false alarms. A sys- n false alarm is characterized by the sudden pearance of a symbol on the TDECC CRT, and 2 subsequent IHIPIR designation to a target ich does not exist. The average rate of occur- ace for the display of erratic symbols and sys- 1 false alarms is about one every half-hour. This te, however, varies with local air traffic density d weather conditions. Short-term increases with rate of three per half-hour can be expected. ing-term increases in rate, however, are most ely due to increased false alarm rates at the WAR, or an ADP failure (par. (3) below). In is case, maintenance action is required. Proper :ing of the ICWAR, relative to the other major sms and sector-of-interest, will help eliminate oblems from specter sources (generators, vehi- ‘8, etc.) and false jam strobes. The following bparagraphs describe and illustrate the various rms of ADP symbol display on the TDECC CRT, id provide operating procedures necessary to pe with them, (1) Stable ADP symbols. These symbols are splayed steadily on the PPI for at least three ans, and move in azimuth and range consistent ith detected target position (fig. 2-23). (2) Erratic ADP aymbols, (a) Valid targets, Erratic symbol display 1a valid detected target occurs when an ADP ack file correlation is made between the detected rget and a second target, radar false alarm, vecter, or clutter, This type of detection is norm- lly indicated by range jumps at approximately ve same azimuth by the aymbol on each scan. The Inge jumps may be either inbound or outbound, (0) Specters. Specter returns are those mitted from rotating or vibrating objects near he ICWAR. These sources are generally in the ite area, and can come from generators, air con- litioners, and moving vehicles. They may produce rratic ADP symbols, or more likely, jam strobes vith the attendant 80-km symbol. (3) False alarms. The inherent normal false larm rate of the ICWAR. combined with the ADP tan-to-scan detection process, will produce sys- em false alarms. The normal system average false arm rate is one every half-hour at which time a tymbol is displayed on the PPI for approximately three scans. An abnormally high system false arm rate is assumed if one or more system fares ar within a 10-minute average period. , an abnormally low system false alarm nate is assumed if one or leas than one system ‘alarm occurs within an eight-hour average period. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 b. Operating Procedures. Table 2-25 provides an operating procedure for erratic ADP symbol detections on the TDECC CRT. Operate the system in the cease fire mode (RESUME FIRE/CEASE FIRE switch set to CEASE FIRE) until final target assessment has been made and the IHIPIR has obtained proper lock on the target. 2-8.1, ADP Looping Procoduro If ADP looping occurs during normal operation the operator must reset the ADP and reinitialize the operational program. ADP looping takes place when the ADP does not react to console switching commands and when all ADP-generated symbology “freezes” on the CRT display. An ADP failure is also generated. The following procedure verifies the presence of ADP looping, resets the ADP, and then reinitializes the operational program. a. Observe that the D/A CHANNEL FAULT lamp (30 fig. 2-4) is illuminated on DTO #2. b. Rotate the D/A FAULT switch (16, fig. 2-4) to position 10 and observe that the D/A LOCAL FAULT lamp (14, fig. 2-4) illuminates (indicating that the computer is not running). c. Notify responsible battery personnel that ADP looping has occured. NOTE (AN/T8Q-78) d. Press the SINGLE INSTRUCTION indicator- switch (17, fig. 2-5) on the CPU. e. Press the MANUAL RESET indicator-switch (21, fig. 2-4). f. Press the RESET pushbutton (15, fig. 2-5) on the CPU. 4. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton (16, fig. 2-6) twice on the CPU. h, Observe that the D/A FAULT lamps are extinguished and the ADP operates. 2-73TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 STABLE RANGE (SCANS) MS 157058 Figure 2-23. Target and specter detection. Table 2-25. Operating Procedures for Erratic ADP Symbol Detections ADP symbol display ‘One or more symbols jumping in range at approximately the same azimuth. Symbols at 80 km repeatedly occurring at azimuth of ICWAR jam strobe. Erratic symbols and/or flash jam strobe (80 km) sud- denly appear at a high rate of occurrence, usually moving rapidly in azimuth. Erratic symbols and/or jam strobe symbols (80 km the same azimuth repeatedly with higher than normal ‘occurrence rate for extended periods of time. No symbols at lower than normal occurrence rate. Erratic symbols and/or false jam strobes at specific ‘azimuths oceuring at a high rate. Lines visible in the CRT speed band covering several degrees azimuth. 2-74 T.O, observes display. If ADP symbol lasts more than three scans, accept ADP assignment in the CEASE FIRE mode and manually engage if IHIPIR cannot lock, Return to RESUME FIRE mode only if the THIPIR achieves valid lock on the target. Resite or shield the offending item. Refuse any ADP assignment, Clear vehicle from area if situation persists, Perform ICWAR daily checks. Perform ADP DTO disg- nostic check and ADP ICWAR radar data coupler sd- justment. Perform ICWAR daily checks.Section Itt. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 OPERATION OF MATERIEL USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE IPCP Platoon Communications atoon communications consist of a mainte- e loop, a firing section loop, an operational rol line, an intelligence line, and an adminis- ve and maintenance line, The end instruments headsets, telephones, and speakers. Two com- ications panels, located on the TDECC, are ‘ated by the T.O. and the RO, and contain the rols necessary to interface all battery and alion communication links. All telephone lines, pt field lines, are carried in the platoon data es, The field lines are laid separately using dard Signal Corps field wire. A more detailed anation of the lines and their hookup is given M9-1425—1525. 0. Maintonance Loop he maintenance loop is completed by assigning ICWAR and IFF to a common bus line at the and RO communications panels. Since the irs are unattended during tactical operations, loop is provided for use during emplacement maintenance operations. 1. Firing Section Loop imilarly, the firing section loop is completed by gning the IHTPIR, the improved launching sec- control box (ILSCB), and the ILCHR’s to a amon bus line. Since the firing section ILCHR’s | the THIPIR are unattended during tactical rations, the loop is provided for use during placement and maintenance operations. The firing section’s ILSCB is manned by the crew chief who reports tactical operations information directly to the RO. 2-12, Operational Control Line ‘The operational control line (hot line) connects the IPCP with the AADCP. This line is continuously monitored by the T.O. since it is used during tactical operations, It can also be monitored by the RO, when selected. 2-13. Intelligence Line The intelligence line (IRR) connects the IPCP with the ADCP. This line is continuously monitored by the RO since it also is used during tactical operations. 2-14. Administrative and Maintenance Line A platoon administrative and maintenance field line is connected through the communication termination unit (CTU) to the switchboard in the IPCP. It is intended for administrative and maintenance purposes, and does not interfere with tactical operations. 2-15, Internal communication between the IPCP operators is achieved by assigning each operator to a common bus line at the T.O. and RO communications panels. Internal Lin Section IV. OPERATION UNDER EMERGENCY CONDITIONS 16. General nan emergency situation when the ADP, the WAR, or the IFF is not functioning, the IPCP sapable of limited operation. A target may be ected and engaged by the platoon by using op- ting procedures described in paragraphs 2-17 ough 2-19. Procedures may be revised at the cretion of the tactical commander to conform varying tactical situations. NOTE For operating instructions for the counter- ‘countermeasure (CCM) facilities of the im- Proved assault fi , Part of the HAWK airdefense guided-missile system, refer to (C) TM 9—-1425—1525-12-3. 2-17. ADP inoperative a. General, With the ADP inoperative, the operation is similar to engagement procedures for manually detected targets that do not meet the criteria for automatic processing in the automatic or normal modes. Target data is still available from the ICWAR and displayed on the TO. control panel PPI display. The IHIPIR, however, must first be conditioned to furnish in-range information to the TDECC and lead angle information to the ILCHR’s. b. Procedures. The mode switch on the TDECC status panel must be set to the HPI position. De- tect, evaluate, and engage targets as described in paragraph 2-5¢, and in the procedures contained in table 2-19. 2-75TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 2-18. ICWAR Inoperative a. General. With the ICWAR inoperative, the IFF provides the master azimuth for the platoon and the IHIPIR may be used to detect targets. It may be necessary to readjust the PPI CRT in accordance with the procedures in TM 9143 1535-12-3. The ADP, although operational, is used only to provide target interception evaluation (TIE) when the ICWAR is inoperative. NOTE Selecting the IFF as the master azimuth, as described in b below, may require readjustment of the TDECC PPI sweep presentation. If readjustment is necessary, refer to the TDECC presentation circuits’ fault isolation procedures in TM 9—1430—1535—-12—3, b. Procedures. Press the auxiliary control unit CASUALTY/CW ROTATE indicator-switch in order to command the IFF to supply the master azimuth. Using the AZIMUTH handwheel, designate an azimuth sector for the IHIPIR search, and press the ELEVATION LOW indicator-switch. Allow the IHIPIR to search in low elevation for at least three seconds. Then press the ELEVATION HIGH indicator-switch on the TDECC RO panel, and allow the IHIPIR to search in high elevation for approximately seven seconds. Move the azimuth of the IHIPIR approximately 25 mils, and repeat. Monitor the IHIPIR track symbol on th PPI display. This method of searching is continue: until the IHIPIR locks on a target or the assign sector is searched, Mark the approximate azimutt, | speed, range, and elevation of detected targets x | the PPI display. Engage all high-priority threx | targets as described in paragraph 2-5c and the procedures contained in table 2-24. An alters procedure may be used where the IHIPIR is searched through 360 degrees in azimuth. This is | performed by pressing the AZIMUTH ROTATE | indicator-switch on the TDECC RO control pane. \ 2-19. ICWAR and IFF inoperative ‘ With both the ICWAR and the IFF inoperative! the operation is identical to that described in pars graph 2-18, However, it is not necessary to pred the auxiliary control unit CASUALTY/CW RO, TATE indicator-switch. To prevent damage ta the CRT phosphor in this condition the TEST ROTATE indicator-switch is pressed to provided sweep rotation, or the PPI DISPLAY circuit breaker is set to OFF. t 2-20. Removing a Defective Missile ( Refer to TM 9—1440— 531—12—1 for remonl procedures. Section V. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS 2-21. High-Velocity Winds The ICC/IPCP can be operated in gusts of wind up to 80 km (50 miles) per hour, and steady winds up to 64 km (40 miles) per hour. If winds exceed these limits, deenergize the ICC/IPCP (chapter 3) and perform the following steps, or evacuate the ICC/IPCP to a protected area. 4, Stow all loose equipment. b. Close all vents and access doors. ¢. Secure the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly (1, fig. 5-5) to the stow position by releasing the bolt assembly handknobs (6, fig. 5-4) and securing the stow bolt assembly handknobs (9, fig. 5-4). d. If the IFF antenna is installed remotely, place sandbags on each leg of the antenna tripod. 2-76 e. Lower the leveling j until the weight of the ICC/IPCP is equally distributed between the jacks and the wheels. f. Place sandbags or other weights across th jack pads (use a minimum of 600 pounds per jact) or tie the trailer securely to four ground anchot which are driven five feet into the ground. 2-22. Extreme Cold and Hot Weather Operation ‘The ICC/IPCP can be operated satisfactorily a temperatures as low as —31.7° C (—25° F) for at least three days, and as high as 41° C (106° F) for at least four hours.‘WARNING } High surface temperatures may be present on the three shelter electric heaters (1, fig. 1-5). Use extreme care to avoid contact when the heaters are operating. ADP Temperature Control *(J)*. During 4 weather operation, the ADP heaters located the base of the ADP tum on at 4.4° C (40° F) U shut off at 12.8° C (55° F). During warm ather operation, the roof-mounted blower turns at 21.1° C (70° F) and shuts off at 10° C F). . ADP Temperature Control *(H)?. During d weather operation with temperatures at 0° C ® F) and below, the ADP heaters located in the e of the ADP operate and the shelter roof- unted blower does not operate. At temperatures we 0° C (32° F), the ADP heaters do not oper- and the roof-mounted blower operates to main- 1 the correct ADP operating temperature, ¢. At temperatures below —31.7° C (—25° F), it, not possible to store programs in the memory ait without a warmup time of one hour. i At low temperatures, place the AUX LOW BAT and AUX MEDIUM HEAT circuit breakers O and 11, fig. 2-1) to ON. Set the TEMP control + fig. 8-3) fully clockwise and the selector switch : fig. 3-3) to either LO HEAT or HI HEAT. ose the pressure air vent (7, fig. 1-3). Section VI. 426. Goneral The ICC/IPCP contains multichannel communications equipment to provide an interface between the improved IHAWK battery firing units, other firing units to its left and right, and the BOC. The system is comprised of an inboard AN/GRC-103 radio set and other equipment for communication with the BOC, and an outboard AN/TRC- 145 radio terminal set for communications with two remote platoons. 1-27. Multichannel Operation The multichannel communications equipment, including the CTU hookup to a co-displayed AN/ TRC-145 is operated and maintained by the radio ey attendant assigned to the battery or IAFU. ic information pertaining to the CTU inter- Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Do not make any ADP power supply adjustments until the equipment has been energized for a minimum of 30 minutes. 2-23. Baremetric Pressure The ICC/IPCP can be operated satisfactorily at atmospheric pressures from sea level up to 3.05 km (10,000 feet) above sea level. 2-24, Humidity The ICC/IPCP can be operated satisfactorily at a relative humidity of 100 per cent provided the temperature does not exceed 32° C (90° F). 2-25. Rein a. A period of rain may create an accumulation of water on the ICC/IPCP roof. Removal is necessary as a safety precaution and may be accomplished with a broom, or by lowering one of the rear leveling jacks. Make certain that the antenna SAFE/ OPERATE switch (17, fig. 1-1) is set to SAFE before climbing to the roof. b. Relevel the ICC/IPCP in accordance with the procedures contained in chapter 7. OPERATION OF MULTICHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS (US ARMY) face, patch panel operation, and channel utilization plans are provided here for reference purposes, a. Communications Termination Unit (CTU) Interface. The CTU (fig. 2-24) is the interface Point between the ICC/IPCP and a co-displayed AN/TRC-145 radio relay terminal. It contains two “bottle” shaped cable connectors and several push-type binding posts which provide for 2- and 4-wire connections from remote locations. Seventeen 2-wire telephone circuits are provided between the CTU and switchboard. Tele- phone drops 13 through 29 of switchboard No. 2 are wired to corresponding connectors 18 through 29 on the CTU panel. The interface to two 12- channel 4-wire outboard radio systems are also wired to the CTU from the multichannel system 2.77TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 no. 1 OUTBOARD RADIOS jacks. These go to “bottle” connector J11 which connects to the system No. 1 TRC-146, and system no. 2 nects to J162. Eight of the 12 channels of system are wired to the 4-wire binding posts the CTU but are not normally used by th Army. The normal interface is made via a 26 pair cable, A detailed explanation of the CTU front panel is given in table 2-214, b, Patch Panel Operation. The patch panel provides flexibility in multichannel operation by allowing automatic or manual system selection and channel allocation. The patch panel requires no external patch cord patching when operating under the normal channel utilization plan because the channels are automatically routed through an internal hardwiring network. Figure 2-25 shows these internal connections, If tactical operations require modification of the normal channel utilization plan, the channel reallocation could be done manually with the patch cords supplied with the ICC/IPCP. Any channel modification must be reported to the distant interfacing radio terminal so corresponding changes can‘be made and recorded on DD Form 1441 for reference purposes. If, for example, it were required to reroute the ADL A communications to BOC through CH8 of IN- BOARD RADIOS system no. 1, instead of normally assigned CH 1, a patch cord would be plugged into the ADL A jacks and the CH 8 (PLT 1 MNT TEL) jacks. This would interrupt the connection leading to the CH 1 jack from the ADL A jack, and the connection leading from the CH 8 jack to the system no. 2 OUTBOARD RADIOS CH 7 jack. The local ADP communications would then be routed through the ADL A jack, patch cord, and CH 8 jack to the BOC over the previous PLT MNT TEL channel. Because the ADL A is a 4-wire circuit and the gabe 2-78 MNT TEL a 2-wire circuit, the channel 8 seks tor switch on the inboard system converter CV. 1548/G must be switched from the 2-wire to te 4-wite position for proper operation. A detail explanation of the patch panel front pane + given in table 2-20A. ¢. Channel Utilization Plans. Standard chm nel utilization plans are specified for ICC/IP@ multichannel communications with the BOC. I the operational eevironment requires amodiiaia to a plan, the channels are manually reallocated at the multichannel communications station pata panel with externally connected patch cords as er plained in paragraph 6 above. (1) ICC/IPCP to BOC or Remote Repesta Station (fig. 2-26). Five channels of the ICC/IPQ inboard radios multichannel system are dedicata for use with the BOC or remote ICC/IPCP repeats station, ADL communications with the loa ADP are internally hardwired (fig. 2-25) throw the patch panel to channel 1. Similarly, the HO! and IRR communications from the local auxilim control box are provided through channels 4 ani 10. The MNT and ADM TEL communication troa the local switchboard (TEL DROPS 1 and 5) provided through channels 7 and 11. (2) ICC/IPCP as Repeater Station (fig. 2211 Seven channels of the ICC/IPCP inboard radia multichannel system are dedicated for repeater ti tion operation. Channels 2, 6, 8, and 12 provie ADL, HOT, MNT TEL and ADM TEL routing tween the BOC and remote PLT 1 via system No.1 OUTBOARD RADIOS channels 1, 4, 7, and IL Channels 3,6, and 9, provide ADL, HOT, and MNT TEL routing via system No, 2 OUTBOARD Rk DIOS channels 1, 4, and 7. The IRR communice tions are conferenced through channels 10 of bo OUTBOARD RADIOS systems and the paid panel IRR, PLT 1, and PLT 2 jacks.TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 PATCH PANEL SHITCHBOARD WO? 00 00 cur-cns (SEE NoTE) eo 00 URED BY US. ARMY. CoeecnoKs, MS 311798 Figure 3-24. CTU interface diagram (U.S. Army). 2-79tgoane, POs ieey wee Shetten {Abe Ano, auxiliary conTROL Box) iecspce SHELTER iSwircnBoano, AL AOL AOL HOT HOT A puri mre "aa wer wwe nr tom wor Te Tee TEL som ee ere “a puri pcre me Tee eur 00 a nor 09090 ° 00 90 00 00 en piri _eure 00 00 onoe onoP . ° roa em SSrRET RE ERT Sno err 2 © 00 90 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 60 00 Figure 2-26. Patch pane GoogleTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 PATCH PANEL | | | | FROM/TO BOC OR ICC/IPCP | REPEATER INTERNAL HARDWIRE CONNECTIONS | | | | | | | | | | | | GRC- 103 | | | | | | | | MS 311800 Figure 2-26. ICC/IPCP to BOC or remote station—channel utilization plan (U.S. Army).TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 © sr 4 1 | msgs q 1 1 ! 1 | meme, I Pca Leteihetns (a. ' | ! 1 1 1 | oe fb __] ne 1 1 1 1 te ' i | on P——J a, \ ! | tayo || eno. fo va} he ' I Be) | 1] cm fp _} ois 1 =| ta | wm | en Le rou ur 1 1 on | 1 VT cus, een {of} ca |! I 1 t| ow war TEL PLT i oe i, Rae oe woes | J, [ES 1 1 | '} os | it eww | | f 1 es | I] owe bY cue | | Hl | 1 os eS ! | sos | 1 can | I 1 | ! 7 | ! i 1 i MA? we LL, A i 1 ferewrg i ; a, I wernt? aa |! | 1 1 vent TEL PLT. ' on | I ' MS 311801 Figure 2-27. ICC/IPCP as a repeater station—channel utilization plan (U.S. Army).Section VII. 28. General ‘he ICC/IPCP contains multichannel communi- ions equipment to provide an interface between . improved HAWK battery firing units, other ng units to its left and right, and the TAOC. e system is comprised of two separate inboard io terminals VCC-2/VRC-47 to provide this vice. 29. Multichannel Operation The multichannel communications equipment, luding the CTU hookup to a co-displayed N/TRC-145, is operated and maintained by the tio relay attendant assigned to the battery. Basic formation pertaining to the CTU interface, patch nel operation, and channel utilization plans are ovided here for reference purposes. 2. Communications Termination Unit (CTU) terface. The CTU (fig. 2-28) is the interface vint between the ICC/IPCP and a co-displayed N/TRC-145 radio relay terminal. It contains sh-type binding posts which provide for several and 4-wire connections from remote locations. wenteen 2-wire telephone circuits are provided aween the CTU and switchboard No, 2. Tele- hone drops 13 through 29 of switchboard No. 2 ‘e wired to corresponding connectors 13 through 9 on the CTU panel. The interface to two 8- tannel 4-wire outboard radio systems are also ‘ited to the CTU from the multichannel system o. 1 OUTBOARD RADIOS jacks. These go to he corresponding system no. 1, channels 1 through connectors, and system no. 2 OUTBOARD \ADIOS jacks go to the system no. 2 connectors. \ detailed explanation of the CTU is given in able 2218. ». Patch Panel Operation. The patch panel pro- ides flexibility in multichannel operation by al- owing automatic or manual system selection and thannel allocation. The patch panel requires no sxtemal patch cord patching when operating under che normal channel utilization plan because the channels are automatically routed through an intemal hardwired network. Figure 2-29 shows these internal connections. If tactical operations Tequire modification of the normal channel utili- tation plan, the channel reallocation would be done manually with the patch cords supplied with the ICC/IPCP. Any channel modification TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 OPERATION OF MULTICHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS (USMC) must be reported to the distant interfacing radio terminal so corresponding changes can be made and recorded on DD Form 1441 for reference purposes. If, for example, it were required to reroute the ADL A communications to TAOC through CH 7 of INBOARD RADIOS system no. 1, instead of normally-assigned CH 1, a patch cord would be plugged into the ADL A jacks and the CH 7 (MNT TEL) jacks. This would interrupt the connection leading to the CH 1 jack from the ADL A jack, and the connection leading from the CH 7 jack to the system no. 2 INBOARD RADIOS CH 6 jack. The local ADP communications would then be routed through the ADL A jack, patch cord, and CH 7 jack to the TAOC over the previous MNT TEL channel. Because the ADL A is a 4-wire circuit and the MNT TEL a 2-wire circuit, the channel 7 selector switch on the system no. 1 TH-81/GCC terminal must be switched from the 2-wire to the 4-wire position for proper operation. A detailed explanation of the patch panel is given in table 2-20B. ¢c. Channel Utilization Plans, Standard channel utilization plans are specified for ICC/IPCP multichannel communications with the TAOC. If the operational environment requires a modification to a plan, the channels are manually reallocated at the multichannel communications station patch panel with externally connected patch cords as explained in paragraph b above, (1) ICC/IPCP to TAOC remote station (fig. 2.30). Five channels of the system no, 1 inboard radio circuits are dedicated for use with a remote TAOC multichannel communications station, The ADL communications from the ICC/IPCP are internally hardwired (fig. 2-29) to inboard radios CH 1 via the patch panel. Similarly, the HOT and IRR (AA1) communications from’ tne auxuary control box are routed through CH 3 and CH 5. Maintenance and administration telephone communications are provided through CH 6 and CH 8 from switchboard telephone drops 1 and 5, respectively. (2) ICC/PCP as repeater station (fig. 2-31). Three additional channels of the system no. 1 inboard radios and the five channels of the system no. 2 inboard radios are dedicated for repeater station operation. The ADL A communications 2-85TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 for the remote platoon are routed between system no. 1 CH 2 and system no. 2 CH 1. The HOT communications for the remote platoon go between CH 4 and CH 3. The IRR (AA1) communications go between CH 5 of both systems via the patch panel BN, IRR, and IRR PLT 1 loop jacks. The ADM telephone communications are routed between CH 8 of both systems, including switchboard telephone drop 5, respectively. (3) ICC/IPCP to repeater station (fig. 2-32). This channel utilization plan is used if communications with the TAOC through inboard radio syse: no. 1 are inoperative. Some extemal patch cok must be used at the patch panel to override tie normal channel assignments for system no. 2. 1 patch cord is connected between the ADL A zi CH 1 jacks of system no. 2, another bet ween ti! HOT and CH 3 jacks, and still another betwes TEL DROP 1 (MNT) and CH 6. The IRR a TEL DROP 5 (ADM) are connected internally x: CH 6 and CH 8 at the patch panel and require a external patching. PATCH PANEL 1 t ¥ 2WIRE e° oo 8° ‘SYS za cen rae eaae? 4 13 THRU 29 aaa 4 Nove: 1 Used BY USMC. Le | MS 311802 Figure 2-28. CTU interface diagram (USMC). 2-86TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 wwooano' wpoano i, O00 00 lana cursoano 7 EM ooo one | oursoaro gurvoano 7 eM a RNP OR RT sverew 56666 00 0000 ft me ier 00 00 00 OO OO fn siaee Gor At gg, D OO OO 00 00 00 aon) WEL 1 THRU 8 WIRED TO CTU BINDING POSTS. HAMELS WIRED To CTU "BOTTLES cTORS i FOR SYSTEM WO |, AND JI6E FOR \ea'wo —_—_—_——S— Seer |} ————_—________ Gmrewoaro OO OO OO 00 CO foc MS 311803 2-87s0ogle ..TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 PATCH PANEL | | | |} RavIos | | =———_ | | | SYSTEM NO} |NTERNAL HARDWIRE CONNECTIONS. FROM /TO TAOC vcc-2 sys NO.1 MS 311804 Figure 2-30. ICC/IPCP to TAOC or remote station—channel utilization plan (USMC). 2-89TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Vperwmnes 7 INBOARD RADIOS SYSTEM NO. cur ADL a cua fej HoT FROM /TO AOE cus jie (any (RR LOOP) INBOARD RADIOS SYSTEM NO.2 | | ! | | I | | | | | | | ! vec-2 SYS NOL cuz cna cant TEL cHT Li ~~ +--+ +—~---- ons a11005 Figure 2-31. ICC/IPCP as a repeater station—channel utilization plan (USMC).TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 | INBOARD | | RADIOS | FROM/TO | SYSTEM NO2 REMOTE ICC/IPCP | PATCH CORD SYS NO2 bee LEE MS 311806 Figure 2-32, ICC/IPCP to remote repeater station—channel utilization plan (USMC).ogle‘TM 9—1430—1535—12— CHAPTER 3 PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS Section |. The purpose of preventive maintenance is to ect the first signs of electrical and mechanical lures, and to insure that appropriate corrective ion is taken before expensive and time-consum- ; repairs or replacements are required. This item ia based on frequent inspections and ser- es accomplished by operators or maintenance rsonnel under active supervision by all comman- rs and supervisors. 2. Responsibility Operators and crew chiefs are personally sponsible for assigned materiel. Section and pla- mleaders are charged with supervisory respon- ility for materiel pertaining to their commands. iit and organization commanders are required to wure that materiel issued or assigned to their mmands is properly maintained. 3. Intervals The principal criteria for determining the fre- ney of preventive maintenance services are verating hours and road movement. Since these innot be accurately predicted, prescribed inter- ils will be used. Operation under adverse condi- ns such as extreme temperature or inclement ‘eather may require that preventive maintenance wvices be performed more frequently. Reduce 2 intervals when environmental conditions indi- Me the need. Do not exceed the intervals unless uthorized to do 20. 14. General Procedures for All Serviei Inspections Refer to TM 9—1425—625—12—4 for informa- f on general procedures for all services and and PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SERVICES 3-5. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Ser- vices a. These checks and services are to be performed by the organizational maintenance mechanic and the operator. Only those procedures beyond the responsibilities of the operator will be performed by the mechanic. The battery maintenance supervisor will determine the specific areas of responsibility. }. The daily preventive maintenance checks are a systematic inspection of IPCP each day and after each time it is emplaced so that defects may be discovered and corrected before they result in serious damage or failure. ¢. Daily checks are to be performed before the weekly checks. Daily checks and then weekly checks are to be performed before doing the monthly checks, ete. d. Ifthe equipment must be kept in continuous operation, check and service only those items that can be checked and serviced without endangering personnel and without disturbing operation. Make the complete checks and services when the equipment can be shut down. ¢. Report any deficiencies using the proper forms (see TM 38—750). Any defects noted that are beyond the scope of the organizational maintenance mechanic will be reported immediately to the maintenance supervisor. f The specific checks and services for the IPCP are listed in table 3-1. The personnel responsible for performing the checks and services at the various intervals are as follows Interval Responsible Personnel Daily Operator Weekly Operator, organizational Monthly Operator, organizational Quarterly Operator, organizational 120-Day Direct Support Semiannually Operator, organizational, and direct support Annually Operator, organizational ‘After transport Operator, organizationalTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 3-6. IAFU Electrical Cable Assembly Set OA- 8951/G Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services Preventive maintenance for the cable assembly set consists of keeping the equipment free of moisture, dirt, and grease and checking for con- tinuity, shorts, cracks, and firm connections. The cleaning may be done with a dry-cleaning solvent, or soap and water. A 2.54 em (1 in.) brush is used to clean between and around, pins and jacks. The specific checks and services for the cable assent set are listed in table 3-2. The personnel respos- ble for performing the checks and services at y various intervals are as follows: Interval Responsible personnal Monthly Operator, organization Semiannually Operator, organization, and direct support After transport Operator, organization! Table 3-1. ICC/IPCP Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services D=Daty M= Menly DY=Dens ‘A= Asoually Wa Weakly @=Qururly 8 Senlanoually {T= Afee Tranport maa Prosar: Ch rodeos a Item D ave njunted, repaired or saupment tw not red we. || w) m| av] 8] 4] Team a be apace place aa required svalable f= General inspection | During normal operations, inspect exterior sur- | Weekly cheek pri faces for dirt, rust, corrosion, defective paint, | cedures cannot be pet and shelter damage. Check interior equipment | formed. for loose or missing hardware, broken meter faces, chipped paint, loose connections, defec- ive insulation, and improper type fuse holders. (TM 9—1425—525—12—4) 1 |e IFF Antenna Loose handknobs on base assembly (ocal) or tripod (remote). Unlevel (par. 7-5) e| |e Lubricate (TM 11—5895—532~12), 2 | |e ADP Air Intake and | Unsmootn operation of the vent handle, Exhaust Venta linkage, and locking mechanism. Unlubricated 3a | |e ‘Air Conditioner _| Dirt, corrosion, damage (TM 5—4120—222— Filters and Air 14, TM 5—4120—307—15, TM 11—6896— Filters (ADPand | 632-12) IFF Intake) . External Storage | Improper electrolyte level, loose connections Battery corrosion (TM 9—6140—200—12) 6. ‘| | Cable Assemblies | Loose connections, defective insulation. and Wiring Harnesses 6 | le Communication | Corrosion Batteries 1. . Equipment Cabinets Moisture in TDECC if equipment has beer deenergized over 24 hours (Chap. 4) 8 | Fuses Improper type or rating. 9. . Parent Platesand | Dirt, dust 1 Modules (PM 9—1425—525—-12—4) D DywM}Qpy|sfal Tr 3-2TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-1. ICCIIPCP Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services -Continued ay M = Monty DY = Days ‘A= Annually euly @= Qaarterty 8 = Semiannualy T= Aer Transport ‘Procedures: Check for and clean, For readiness reporting have adjusted, repaired or ‘equipment ia not ready! replace av required vallable if: Lubrication Digital Multimeter «acc) Panel Meters Digital Clock Pulse Generator Module (TDECC) BBAIAILAAA187 Pulse Generator Modules 58A1A2A1A2A48 SBA1A2A4A2A59 Antenna Hoisting Unit ‘Trailer 290 or 3900 DTO and CPU Clock (LO 9—1480—1685—12) Send to DS maintenance for A level calibration (TB 43-180). Request DS maintenance perform periodic test Procedure every 120 days. (TM 9—4935— 1648-14). Request DS maintenance perform periodic test Procedure every 120 days. (TM 9—4935— 1548-14), Request DS maintenance perform periodic test Procedure every 240 days. (TM 9—4935— 1648—14), B6ALALA2A1A2A48 BGALALAZA4A2A59 Request DS maintenance perform theload test procedure (TM 9—1430-1535—34—2—1). Lubrication and preventive maintenance checks and services (TM 9—2880—285—14) Table 3-2, IAFU Electrical Cable Assembly Set 0A-8951/E Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services Them tbe napected 8 = Semianmualy To Aner Transport ‘replace an required Cable Assembly Set Dirt, pits, burns, corrosion, on connector contacts, Bent, broken, loose, or missing pins. Ungrounded shielding, loose grounding connections, Defective, or loose assembly caps, wire ropes, or clamps. Frayed or cracked cable sheath. Oi or grease on rubber parts. Evidence of arcing, burning, mildew, or fungus. Request DS maintenance personnel to check for shorts and opens in conductors, using cable tester AN/GSM-45 or ohmmeter ZM- 21B/U (TM 9~4985—262-14, TM 11— 6625-298-14),TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Section OPERATIONAL CHECKS 3-7. General 3-9. Procedures Prior to Application of Powe This section contains the energizing, deenergizing, and organizational check procedures in tabular form, and all the information necessary to EN Ae aaa Make certain that the ICC/IPCP is pro- ena perly emplaced and that the ground rod and stray tly installed (chay 3-8, External Test Equipment Required f eanaeeiinen iene Table 3-5 lists the external test equipment required for performing the check procedures. Table $-8. Eternal Test Equipment Required Make certain that the SAFE-ARM handle on each missile is set to SAFE, that all umbilical cables are disconnected from launchers with missiles, and that the umbilical shorting plugs have been installed to prevent accidental firing or injury to personnel while applying power. a. Check that all plug-in chassis are seated and locked in position. ®. Check that all panels are in place and ft tened so that the interlock circuits are closed. ¢. Before applying power to the ICC/IPC?, perform the procedures listed in table 8-4. Digital multimeter 10177187 Miniature guided-mimile simulators 10671013 (3) ‘Remote radio set RT-624/VRC Table -s. Procedures Prior to Application of Power ‘Make certain that the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch (18, fig. 1-1) and the AZ DRIVE switch (14, fig. 1-2) are set to the SAFE position. a ® ICC/IPCP ground cable Securely fastened between the 1! | TPCP and the ground red. | m1 8 TCC/IPCP ground rod Properly installed and ground 1! cable is securely fastened to th TCC/IPCP. 12478 Data and power cables Insure all cables are securely ft tened to cable entry panels. MM s TRF antenna and pedestal assembly (roof-mounted) | Raised and secured 16 1,16 | IPF antenna and pedestal assembly Secured on tripod (tripod mounted) 8 4a Radio antennas Raised 1 Pressure air vent Opened ° ADP air intake vent Opened 3-4ADP air intake vent ADP air exhaust vents ‘Air conditioner travel cover ‘Access door 1s 18 T.0, headset [eaunon TM 9—1430—1535—12—-1 Table 3-4. Procedures Prior to Application of Power —Continued ‘Removed and stowed Closed. Open, if OVERRIDE switch (4, fig. 1-4) is set to the on (up) position, Connected to HEADSET connector located on left-side panel of ‘TDECC bite ewiteh panel Connected to HEADSET connector located on right aide of TDECC shelf assembly ‘Make certain that the 10288848 POWER or 10291990 PWR switch on the communications station is set to off before connecting the headset as directed below. ‘Switchboard operator headset 16 a Relay-terminal board a Power distribution cabinet: 2B PHASE INDICATOR lamp 2» MONITOR 416 VOLTS meter Connected to J28 connector below ‘the communications unit (16, fig. 14) ‘TB1-10 jumpered to TB1-14 (IPCP mode) ‘TB1-10 jumpered to TB1-16 (ICC mode) THuminated Indicates green area Insure that the IFF program connectors, installed in the coder-decoder signal processor drawer (4, fig. 8-1) and the electrical synchronizer drawer (6, fig. 8-1), are per the theater required admission criteria (refer to ‘TM 11—6805-582-12). ‘When interrogator computer KIR-1A/TSEC is installed in the IF F coder-decoder group cabinet, make certain the jumper wire connected between TBS-14 and TB9-17 on the cable entry panel relay-terminal board (12, fig. 1-6) is removed. 2-10. Position of Controls Prior to Application of Power « Before applying power to the ICC/IPCP, set the controls to the positions given in table 8-5. Controls not listed may be set to any position as they do not directly affect the energizing procedure, Make certain that controls are correctly wet before the energizing or check procedures are performed. ». During extreme weather conditions (heat, humidity, or cold, the AIR CONDITIONER, | AUX LOW HEAT, and AUX MEDIUM HEAT circuit breakers (9, 10, and 11, fig. 2-1) may be left on for protection of the equipment. ¢. For operation of the air conditioner, refer to TM 5—4120-210-16. d. If simulator station AN/TPQ-29 is connected, instruct the operator to switch it out (mode 1). ¢. During operation with simulator station AN/ ‘TPQ-29 connected and in mode 8, ICWAR FAIL- URE label (80, fig. 2-12) will flash continuously. 3-5TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-5. Position of Controls Prior to Application of Power Control Contra ting Power distribution cabinet | MAIN POWER cireuit ON breaker 5 LIGHTS circuit breaker ON 12 DIMMER control As required 2 28V PS circuit breaker OFF 8 BAT 24V circuit breaker OFF 4 BAT CHARGE cireuit OFF breaker 6 OUTLETS circuit breaker | OFF 7 RADIO circuit breaker OFF 9 AIR CONDITIONER As required circuit breaker 10 AUX LOWHEAT cireuit | As required breaker 11 AUX MEDIUM HEAT As required circuit breaker TROUBLE LIGHTS OFF switch ILLUM-A/OFF/ILLUM-B| OFF switch 14 IFF cireuit breaker OFF 18 ADLecireuit breaker OFF 14 2 | Shelter wall EMERGENCY LIGHT- On (up) ING switch 3 NORMAL LIGHTING On (up) switch 4 OVERRIDE switch Off (down) (close shelter door) 88 2 | Airconditioner remote Selector switch As required control box 22 7 | Auxiliary control unit Hot selector switch HOT PRIM (cw) 12 IRR selector switch IRR PRIM (cew) 5 Power supply monitor OFF selector switch 14 HOT LISTEN/OFF switch | OFF 15 SWBD TALK/HOTTALK | HOT TALK switch 3-6Bk 36 MT 89 $10 TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-5. Position of Controle Prior t0 Application of Power—Continued Central Contre etting Switchboard no. 1 Alarm switch OFF IFF interrogator set POWER switch OFF control STROBE switch OFF PANEL illumination DIM switch PROCESSOR switch IN MODE 4 switch Aor Bas required for operation (TM 11-5895- 582-12) MODE SELECT switch As required for operation IFF coder- decoder group POWER switch ON electrical synchronizer panel COUNT DOWN switch NORMAL METER selector switch OUT IFF TRIG SELECT switch | EXT NOTE Open the IFF coder-decoder group electrical synchronizer assembly drawer. |IFF coder-decoder group electrical synchronizer assembly Close and secure the IF IIFF coder-decoder group power control panel Mode 4 test plug IF coder-decoder group signal processor panel TAIL/EYELASH switch EYELASH (IPCP) TAIL (ICC) DELAY switch OUT PARALLEL/SERIAL PARALLEL switch SPECIAL/NORMAL NORMAL switch NOTE 'F coder-decoder group eletrical synchronizer assembly drawer. SYSTEM POWER switch | ON TEST SEL switch STBY POWER switch ON METER SELECT switch ouT 3-7TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-5. Position of Controls Prior to Application of Power—Continued 8-12 8-18 3-14 3-8 9 | IFF coder-decoder group antenna control panel am oa 1 |IFF coder-decoder group ‘antenna control assembly ” IFF receiver-transmitter group 2 8 4 5 16 | IFF receiver- transmitter group u ADP ac power distribution drawer POWER ewitch POWER ECA switch ANT SYNC switch INT ANT SYNC switch METER selector switch NOTE EXT REF FREQ switch SYNCHRO REF switch NOTE MOD switch RCVR GATE switch GTC switch CHANNELawitch XMTR PWR switch NOTE POWER circuit breaker TEST SELECTOR switch| DTO DWR NO. Lcireuit breaker DTO DWR NO. 2 circuit breaker DTO DWR NO. 8cireuit breaker CPU circuit breaker MEMORY NO. I circuit breaker READER circuit breaker 20RPM CW OUT (Open the IFF coder-decoder group antenna control assembly drawer. 400 HZ, EXT Close and secure the IF F coder-decoder group antenna control assembly drawer and open the IFF receiver-transmitter group. ON STOP PULSE ON DUAL —84B Close and secure the IFF receiver-transmitter group. ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ONTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-5. Position of Controls Prior to Application of Power—Continued Lecation ontrot Contra setng Solid State Reader READER power switch | OFF Reader-printer drawer READER POWER switch | OFF DTO DWR #1 LOCAL/REMOTE ewitch | LOCAL TEST AZ (IFF) switch | OFF DTODWR #2 BCC A/D switch OPERATE Module A28 600/1200 baud rate switch | 1200 Module A80 Attenuator switches All zeros (0) Roof IFF antenna SAFE/ SAFE OPERATE switch : IFF antenna pedestal AZ DRIVE switch SAFE TDECC power distribution | PPI DISPLAY circuit OFF panel breaker —100 VDC cireuit breaker | ON +20 VDC circuit breaker | ON —20 VDC circuit breaker | ON +250 VDCcireuit breaker | ON —250 VDC circuit breaker | ON SPECTRUM ANALYZER | ON circuit breaker MAIN POWER circuit ON breaker BLOWERS circuit breaker | ON 28 VDC cireuit breaker ON —16 VDCcireuit breaker | ON +15 VDC circuit breaker | ON +100 VDC cireuit breaker | ON Status panel Mode switch ADP MISSILE COUNT switch | NORMAL VOICE/DOPPLER switch | VOICE BITE switch panel SERIALDATATEST/ | OPERATE OPERATE switch DISPLAY OPERATE/ OPERATE TEST switchTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 8-15 8-16 3-16 8-17 818 8-19 3-20 . 10) 10 10 Table 3-8. Position of Controle Prior to Application of Power—Continued coutt Conta etn NOTE Open the PPI drawer assembly (7, fig. 1-8). PPI drawer assembly |OPERATE/SAFE switch | OPERATE NOTE Close the PPI drawer assembly and open the outer door of the digital assembly (12, fig. 18). Digital assembly BITE ISER DATA ELEC BITE 00000 panel switches /PPI/SWP GEN BITE 00000 switches SYMGEN BITE switches | 0000000000 TMG GEN BITE switches | 0000000000 NOTE “(AE)' Clove the digital assembly door. Remove the TAS control unit and then open the RO contro! panel. Spectrum analyzer BITE MODE switch 1 (OPERATE) panel RO control panel (rear) |OPERATE/CALIBRATE | OPERATE switch NOTE “(AE)' Close the RO control panel. Replace the TAS control unit and then open the access cover (22, fig. 2-14) on the front of the RO panel. RO control panel |operate/calibrate switch | 1 (OPERATE) NOTE Open the coordinate computer drawer (10, fig. 1-8). Coordinate computer BITE jorsRaTE/rEst switch | OPERATE panel NOTE Clove and coordinate computer drawer. ‘Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-5. Position af Controls Prior to Application af Power — Continued In Mid-position Mid-position MAN MAN HI Cireuit breaker BRT control CONTRAST MAN ADJ CONTRAST AUTO/MAN CONTRAST MAN HI/LO JAB) TAS control unit *(AE)' TAS display unit NOTE ‘The following position of controls pertain to the US Army multichannel communications station equipment (fig. 1-9). The controls are set by the radio relay attendant assigned to the ICC/ PCP. {er to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-10.1vowwesw Google ..--*3-34 1 | Converter CV-1548/G 3-85 US Army) Multiplexer TD-660/G 10 Sy 12 18 8-36 6 | Transmitter T-983(P)/ (US Army) | GRC-103(V) 4 387 Receiver R-1829(P)/ (US Army) GRC-108(V) = 16 to the ICC/IPCP. ‘Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity.’ NOTE POWER awitch 2W/4W channel switches (12) SIGNAL MODE switches (12) (located on plug-in modules) POWER switch 2WIRE/4 WIRE switch MODE switch MASTER/SLAVE switch AUX switch I switch Iswitch III switch IV switch XMTR CHANNEL control XMTR TUNE control AC POWER switch RCVR CHANNEL control RCVR SIG control XMTR DUPL control AC POWER switch NOTE T™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-5. Position of Controle Prior to Application of Power—Continued Control setting OFF 4W (except for CH4 and CH10 *(AB)') AC OFF AW (CH 1 thru 6, and 10; Loosen the captive acrews securing the converter CV-1548/G perforated inner front cover (18, fig. 8-84), and then remove the cover. ) 2W (CH 7 thru 9, 11 and 12) 12CH MASTER or SLAVE based on wpm agreement with interfacing radio relay terminal ouT OFF OFF OFF OFF Assigned channel Assigned channel OFF Assigned channel Assigned channel Assigned channel OFF The following position of controls pertain to the USMC multichannel communication station equipment (fig. 1-10). The controls are set by the radio relay attendant assignedTH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $.5. Position of Controls Prior to Application of Power—Continued 340 (USMC) 8-41 (USMC) 8-42 (USMC) 3-89 (USMC) 3-12 » oom nH eann . Location ‘Terminal set control C- ‘7827/VCC (system No. 1) Telephone/telegraph terminal TH-81/GCC (both top units) Telephone/telegraph terminal TH-81/GCC (both bottom units) Power supply C-7674/VCC (both units) Radio set No. 1 R-442/VRC Contrel MODE switch Channel 1 switch (channel 5) Channel 2 switch (channel 6) Channel 8 switch (channel 7) Channel 4 switch (channel 8) HANDSET switch MONITOR switch MODE switch SYNC switch Channel 1 switch (channel 1) Channel 2 switch (channel 2) Channel 8 switch (channel 8) Channel 4 switch (channel 4) HANDSET switch MONITOR switch MODE switch SYNC switch POWER switch TUNE controls SQUELCH switch VOLUME control POWER switch 4WNC 2W 2w 2w MON OFF MUX LOC (or REMOTE depending on operator agreement as to unit is master station. 4w aw 4WNC 4WNC MON OFF MUX Loc 115 VAC Authorized frequency OLD-OFF Cow OFFTH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-5, Position of Controle Prior to Application of Power—Continued 3-39 7 | Radio set No.2 R-442/VRC | POWER switch OFF (USMC) 4 TUNE controls Authorized frequency 5 SQUELCH switch OLD-OFF 6 VOLUME control Cow 888 4 | Radioset No. 2 RT-524/VRC| POWER switch OFF (USMC) 8 TUNE controls Authorized frequency 8 SQUELCH switch OLD-OFF 1 VOLUME control Cow 3:88 4 | Radioset No. 1 RT-524/VRC | POWER switch OFF (USMC) TUNE controls, Authorized frequency SQUELCH OLD-OFF VOLUME control Cew 3-11. Energizing Procedure NOTE The energizing procedures for the ICC/ PCP All references to meter colored areas are for re contained in tables 8-6 and 8-7. When perform- colors as seen during daylight conditions. ing the check procedures, the energizing proced- Figure $2 illustrates all of the meters and ure may be omitted, as it is included as an integral thelr colored areas. part of the check procedures. Table 3-6. Energizing Procedures—Shutdown to Standby NOTE If « normal indication is not obtained during the performance of the energising procedures, immediately perform the fault isolation procedures in TM 9-1490—1585—12-8. Set the SAFE/ARM levers to SAFE. Disconnect all missile umbilicals, and install shorting plugs on all missiles, Clear all personnel from radars and LCHR’s before performing energizing procedures, 1 Observe the PHASE INDICATOR lamp (18, fig. | Illuminated, 2-1) on the power distribution cabinet.™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-6, Energizing Procedures—Shutdown to Standby—Continued 1 un. 12, 18, ua qs 15. qs Army) Procedere Observe the MONITOR 416 VOLTS meter (19, fig. 2-1). Set the BAT 24V circuit breaker (8, fig. 2-1) to ON. Set the BAT CHARGE circuit breaker (4, fig. 2-1) toON. Set the 28V PS circuit breaker (2, fig. 2-1) to ON. Press the DTO MANUAL RESET pushbatton (21, fig. 2-4) and the CPU RESET pushbutton and DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch (15 and 6, fig. 2-5). Press the CONSOLE ON indicator-switch (1, fig. 2-12) on the status panel, Press the TEST ROTATE indicator-switch (16, fig. 2-12) on the status panel to on (fully illuminated), Set the PPI DISPLAY cireuit breaker (2, fig. 2-11) to ON. Deleted. (AB)! Press and release the TAS PWR ON indicator-switeh (10, fig. 2-18). Set the RADIO cireuit breaker (7, fig. 2-1) én the power distribution eabinet to ON. Set the ADL circuit breaker (18, fig. 2-1) on the power distribution cabinet to ON. US Army Multichannel Procedures: Set the POWER switch (1, fig. 9-84) on converter ‘CV-1648/G to ON. ‘Set the POWER switch (1, fig, 8-85) on multiplexer ‘'TD-660/G to ON. ‘Normal Indication ‘The meter indicates in the green area. The blowers in both the TDECC power supply drave| (AB) and digital assembly (A4) are operating erly. ‘The POWER ON lamp (8, fig. 2-5) illuminates on | ‘ADP CPU. ‘The ADP energizes, ‘The CONSOLE ON indicator-switch illuminates ani the TDECC energizes. ‘The TEST label is flashing (20, fig. 2-12). After approximately one minute, the PPI sweep i) displayed (adjust SWEEP control (27, fig. 2-18) fe proper intensity), 1 ‘The READY label (9, fig, 2-18) illuminates within # to 60 seconds on the TAS local control unit. ‘The POWER lamp (2, fig. 9-84) illuminates, ‘The POWER lamp (2, fig, 8-85) illuminates (wt note below). If the audible burzer activates and the F1 ALARM lamp (7, fig. 9-86) illuminates, preas the BUZZER OFF pushbutton (8, fg. 8-85). I] iReterto appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-14Table $-8. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Energizing Procedures—Shutdown to Standby—Continued 16. cus, Army) 1 cus. Army) Set the AC POWER switch (14, fig. 8-86) on transmitter T-988 (P)/GRC-103(V) to ON RESET. Set the AC POWER switch (15, fig. 9-87) on receiver R-1329(P)/GRC-108(V) to ON, USMC Multichannel Procedure: The AC POWER, ALARMS LOW POWER, and ALARMS SYNC lamps (18, 12, and 10, fig. 3-86) illuminate, ‘The audible buszer sounds and the blower operates (Press the BUZZER OFF pushbutton (11, fig. 8 36). ‘The AC POWER, ALARMS LOW SIGNAL, and ALARMS SYNC lamps (14, 18, and 12, fig. 8-87) illuminate, ‘The audible buzzer sounds (Press the BUZZER OFF pushbutton (10, fig. 8-87). ‘The POWER lamp (4, fig. 8-88) on receiver-transmitter RT-778/GRC-103(V) illuminates. NOTE Perform the following energizing procedures on both system no. 1 and system no, 2 (fig. 1-10). ‘Make certain that the two remote antenna cables (11, fig. 12) are connected to the ANTENNA NO. 1 and NO. 2 connectors on the side of the CTU (2 and 8, fig. 2-21). Set the POWER switch (4, fig. 9-88) on radio set RT-524/VRC to HIGH or LOW as required by distance conditions, Set the POWER switch (7, fig. 8-89) on radio set R-442/VRC to ON-RESET. Press the POWER pushbutton (18, fig. 2-16) to ON ‘on the RO communications panel. Set the IFF cireuit breaker (14, fig. 2-1) on the power distribution cabinet to ON. ‘The dial lamp illuminates. ‘The dial lamp illuminates. ‘The POWER pushbutton illuminates. ‘The SYSTEM POWER lamp (4, fig. 8-8) illuminates, NOTE During the IFF energizing procedure, allow a minimum of two minutes time for clearing all IFF system FAULT indict 80-second delay. is. The receiver-transmitter group contains an During this period the R/T self test fault indicator lamp (15, fig. 8-5) ‘will remain illuminated, If no faults are present in the receiver-transmitter group, the lamp will extinguish after 80 seconds. Set the IFF interrogator control unit POWER awiteh (18, fig. 8-5) to ON. Press the CASUALTY/CW ROTATE indicator- switch (28, fig, 2-2) on the auxiliary control unit to illuminate the CW ROTATE label (21, fig. 2-2). ‘Load the operational program by performing the procedures in table 8-16 if the SSR is installed or table 8-17 if the tape reader is installed, Direct the HIPIR and ICWAR operators to ener- tite the radars to local standby. ‘The POWER lamp (14, fig. 8-6) illuminates. ‘The IHIPIR and ICWAR operators confirm local standby operation. 3-15TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1. 10. nL. 12. Table 8-7. Energising Procedure—Standby to Operate NOTE cedures, immediately perform the fault isolation procedures in TM 9—1480—1585—12-8. Failure to perform step 1 below may result fn injury to personnel. | Clear the LCHRS and radars. Direct the HIPIR and CWAR operators to energize the radars to local radiate operation. | | If « normal indication is not obtained during the performance of the energizing pro- | The HIPIR and CWAR operators confirm loa radiate operation, If the CWAR antenna ceases to rotate while the CWAR is in remote full radiate, immediate action is necessary to prevent possible radiation hazard to personnel. Press the TDECC ICWAR STANDBY indieator-ewitch. Direct the CWAR operator to set the LOCAL/ REMOTE switch to REMOTE, ‘Momentarily preas the TEST ROTATE indicatorwitch on the status panel. ‘The ICWAR STANDBY and RADIATE indicstor-| switches (4 and 5, fig. 2-12) illuminate. ‘The TEST ROTATE switch returns to pre-ilfumi- tion, the TEST label extinguishes, and the PP ‘sweep rotates in synchronization with the CWAE antenna, Make certain that personnel are clear of the IF F antenna rotation radius. Set the AZ DRIVE switch (17, fg. 1-8) to ON on the IFF antenna pedestal, Set the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch (1, fig. 1-1) to OPERATE, Direct tht HIPIR operator to set the LOCAL/ REMOTE switch to REMOTE. Press the SYSTEM OUT OF ACTION/READY indicator-ewiteh (16, fig. 2-13) on the T.0. control panel. *(AE)! Allow the TAS a 5-minute warmup period in the standby mode and then press and release the TAS OPERATE/READY indicator-switch (9, fig. 2-18). *(A)! Adjust the BRT and CONTRAST controls ($ thru 6, fig. 3-19) optimum picture-peaking of the video scene ‘on the TAS display unit. *(AE)! Press and release the TAS EMCON/FORCED SILENT indicator-switeh. Press the LOW indicator-ewitch (16, fig. 2-14) on the RO panel. J iReter oappendix E for serial number effectivity. ‘The IFF antenna rotates in synchronization with the CWAR antenna. ‘The HPI ACTIVATE indicator-switch (8, fig. 212) illuminates. ‘The READY label illuminates. ‘The TAS OPERATE label illuminates. Video raster appeet on the TAS display unit within 2 seconds. ‘The FORCED SILENT label extinguishes and the EMO Inbel illuminates.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Tables-7. Energising Procedure—Standby to Operate Continued 8. Press the HPI BITE/TEST OK indicator-switch (16, fig. 2-12) on the status panel. h Press the HPI BITE/TEST OK indicator-switch. 5 “(AE Press the TAS EMCON/FORCED SILENT Indieator-switeh, US Army Multichannel Procedure: 3 ‘Remove the order-wire handset from receiver-trans- us mitter RT-778 (P)/GRC-108(V) storage compart- my) ment (8, fig. 8-88). 1 Press the RING pushbutton (2, fig. 8-88) on re- us ceiver-transmitter RT-773(P)/GRC-108(V) and \rmy) | establish order-wire communications with » distant operator per the channel utilization plan assigned to the PCP. USMC Multichannel Procedure: 8 Set the switches on the telephone/telegraph TH- 81/GCC (fig. 8-41) for system no. 1 as follows: MODE switch (6) to MUX. HANDSET switch (2) to OW/TALK. MONITOR switch (4) to OW. 8 Operate the press-to-talk switch on the handset and establish order-wire communications with a distant operator per the channel utilization plan assigned to the ICC/IPCP for system no. 1. 0. Repeat 18 and 19 for system no. 2. ‘The HPI BITE label illuminates, and after 16 seconds the TEST OK label illuminates. ‘The EMCON label extinguishes and the FORCED SILENT illuminates. ‘Order-wire communications are established with a distant operator. Order-wire communications are established with a distant operator. 12. Deenergizing Procedure The deenergizing procedures for the ICC/ PCP te contained in tables 3-8 and 3-9. NOTE ‘Under emergency conditions the ICC/ PCP may be deenergized immediately by setting the MAIN POWER circuit breaker (1, fig. 21) on the pewer distribution cabinet to OFF. Table $-8. Deenergising Procedure—Operate to Standby Frovetare ‘Normal indication Direct the HIPIR operator to set the LOCAL/ radar to local standby operation. ‘(AB)’ Press the TAS OPERATE/READY indicator- switch (, fig. 218). Direct the CWAR operator to set the LOCAL/ REMOTE switch to LOCAL and deenergize the radar to local standby operation, Press and release the TEST ROTATE indicator- swith (16, fig. 2-12), REMOTE switch to LOCAL and deenergize the ‘The HPI ACTIVATE indicator-switch (8, fig. 2-12) ‘extinguishes and the HIPIR operator confirms local standby operation, ‘The OPERATE label extinguishes and the READY label illuminates, ‘The ICWAR RADIATE and STANDBY indicator. ‘switches (5 and 4, fig. 2-12) extinguish and the CWAR operator confirms local standby operation. ‘The TEST ROTATE indicator-switch illuminates, Maer to sppendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-17T 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-9. ce Deenergising Procedure—Standby to Shutdown L I: 2 1 “ 5 « 10. 1 12, ue 16. 16, Direct the HIPIR and CWAR operators to deenergize the radars to off. (AE)! Presa the TAS PWR ON indicator-ewitch (10, fig. 218). Set the PPI DISPLAY circuit breaker (2, fig. 2-11) on the TDECC POWER distribution panel to OFF. The HIPIR and CWAR operators confirm that th radars are off, ‘The TAS control and display units deenergise. [enmon Failure to allow at least a 10-second delay in step 4 below may result in phosphor burns on the CRT face which will reduce the useful life of the CRT. ‘Wait at least 10 seconds and then press and release the CONSOLE ON indicator-switeh (1, fig. 2-12) on the status panel, Set the IFF interrogator control unit POWER switch (18, fig. 8-5) to OFF. Set the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch (17, fig. 1-1) to SAFE. Set the AZ DRIVE switch (17, fig. 1-8) on the IFF antenna pedestal to SAFE OFF. Presa the SINGLE INSTRUCTION indicator- switch (17, fig. 25) on the CPU. Press the RESET pushbutton (16, fig. 2-5) on the PU. Set the DTO DWR #1 LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL, Press the MANUAL RESET indicator-switch (21, fig. 2-4) on the DTO. Set the RADIO cireuit breaker (7, fig. 2-1) on the power distribution cabinet to OFF. Set the ADL circuit breaker (18, fig. 2-1) on the ower distribution cabinet to OFF, Momentarily press the POWER pushbutton (18, fig. 2-16) on the RO communications panel. Set the 28V PS circuit breaker (2, fig. 2-1) on the power distribution cabinet to OFF. Set all other circuit breakers on the power distribution cabinet to OFF. ‘The CONSOLE ON indicator-switch extinguishes, ‘The POWER lamp (14, fig. 8-5) extinguishes. ‘The multichannel communications station deee izes. ‘The POWER pushbutton extinguishes. ‘The POWER ON lamp (8, fig, 2-5) extinguishes o the ADP CPU. ‘The PCP deenergizes. a [| *Retor to appendix E for serial number effectivity.3-13. Check Procedures a. The check procedures are to be performed 10 make certain that the ICC/IPCP and the IAFU ire operating correctly. The major item daily shecks need not be performed following the integrated system checks (ISCs) unless the follow- ng conditions exist: (1) The ISCs indicate a fail- are in the major item area. (2) Maintenance has veen performed requiring performance checkout. 'f @ normal indication is not obtained when per- ‘orming the checks as listed, make certain that T™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 the correct procedure is being used and that the external test equipment and radar system being used is operating correctly before troubleshooting for defective units. b. The following sample table explains the layout of the check procedure tables. Notice that the operations, normal indications, and corrective procedures are indented so that they line up with their respective headings, as indicated in the sample by vertical arrows. Sample Table ¢. Tables 8-10 through 8-28 contain the daily ind weekly check procedures. To perform the daily thecks, follow only those procedures shaded in gray. If there are no daily checks on the following page, the last daily check on a page will have 2 rotation ,‘proceed to step ( )” or “proceed to able (_)” on the right-hand side of the page. The weekly checks consist of all the steps in the tables oth shaded and unshaded. The check procedures, inless otherwise specified, have been written for orderly progression through the entire electrical checkout, 4. The daily checks are normally performed by the operator except for the unshaded corrective procedures, which are performed by organizational maintenance personnel. The weekly checks are also performed by organizational maintenance person- el with assistance from an operator. At men are required for safety and conv performing checks. During periods of continuous aperation, selected checks may be performed more frequently than once a day to make certain that the squipment is operating at optimum capability. [Cheek (Step Name) Sequence and step name of the check. (OPERATION) Sequential opprations required to obtain a normal indication. ‘NORMAL INDICATION) Normal system or circuit responses. (CORRECTIVE PROCEDURE) Adjustment listing if applicable. e. It should be noted that the IPCP can be used in place of an ICC in the IHAWK battery. If it is, perform the ADP checks contained in table 3-12 of this manual. Once the major item checks have been completed, perform the integrated system checks specified in chapter 11. J. Although operational tolerances are specified, in many cases during the checks an attempt should be made to adjust for optimum operation within tolerances. “Peaking” within tolerances will provide reasonable assurance that the equipment will operate satisfactorily between maintenance services. Operator personnel must be able to recognize less-than-optimum performance during normal operation and operator checks. When the corrective action is beyond operator capability, it should be reported to maintenance personnel. Necessary adjustments, including those listed in the corrective procedure portion, are a normal part of the checks and do not indicate equipment mal- funetions.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 q Table 3-10. Main Power Distribution and Illumination Check Operation Step Corrective procedure NOTE If an abnormal indication occurs while performing the following check procedures, goto the appropriate Branch and Flow fault isolation table listed below in the corrective procedure column. Unless otherwise indicated, the table appears in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—1. Check 416-Vae Line Voltage. The MONITOR 416 VOLTS meter indicates in the Go to table 2-2. ‘The PHASE INDICATOR lamp is illuminated. Go to table 2-3. Go to table 2-4. ‘The MAIN POWER lamp illuminates. . Go to table 2-5. Proceed to table 3-14, step 1 for the 2, Check Shelter Hlumination (Normal Power). a Insure that the LIGHTS circuit breaker (5, fig. 2-1) is set to ON. Go to table 2-26. ‘The front and rear normal shelter lamps (11 and 21, fig. 1-4,and 5 and 13,fig ! minated (adjust DIMMER control (12, fig. 2-1) for intes Go to table 2-7 (front lamps). Go to table 2-8 (rear lamps). 6 Set the 28V PS circuit breaker (2, fig. 2-1) to ON. Go to table 2-9. MAIN POWER circuit breaker remains on. Go to table 2-9. The clock lamps (3, fig. 1-5) illuminate (adjust dimmer control as required). Go to table 2-10. ‘The ADP exhaust blower (6, fig. 1-3) operates above 21.1°C (70°F). Go to table 2-11. ce Set the OVERRIDE switch (4, fig. 1-4) to OFF (down) and then open and close the shelter do 3-20 GoogleTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-10, Main Power Distribution and Illumination Check—Continued Nem tatitine—Caeretie procadare ‘The front and rear normal shelter lamps momentarily extinguish and then remain illuminated. Go to table 2-12. Set the OVERRIDE switch to on (up), and then open the shelter door. The front and rear normal shelter lamps remain illuminated. Go to table 2-13. Set the TROUBLE LIGHTS switch (20, fig. 2-1) to on (up). The front and rear emergency shelter lamps (10 and 20, fig. 1-4) illuminate. Go to table 2-14. Set the EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch (2, fig. 1-4) to off (down). The front and rear emergency shelter lamps extinguish. Go to table 2-15. Close the shelter door. ft. Check Air Conditioner. Set the AIR CONDITIONER circuit breaker (9, fig. 2-1) to ON. Go to table 2-16. Set the selector switch (2, fig. 8-8) on the air conditioner remote control box to VENTI- LATE. The air conditioner blower activates, drawing in air at the bottom and exhausting air at the top. Go to table 2-17. Set the selector switch to COOL and rotate the TEMP control (1, fig. 8-8) fully counter- clockwise. After approximately two minutes, cool air exhausts from the top of the air conditioner. ‘Set the selector switch to HI HEAT and rotate the TEMP control fully clockwise. After approximately one minute, warm air exhausts from the top of the air conditioner. ‘On the Keco or Hottle model air conditioners, set the fan control switch (8, fig. 8-8) to the HI SPEED and then the LO SPEED position. The air conditioner fan changes speed accordingly. Set the selector switch to the desired position.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-10. Main Power Distribution and Illumination Check —Continued a Norma ndiaion Corrective procedure WARNING } Use extreme care to avoid contact when the heaters are operating. (Check Heaters. Set the AUX LOW HEAT circuit breaker (10, fig. 2-1) to ON, and the AUX MEDIUM HEAT circuit breaker to OFF. The three electric shelter heaters operate. Go to table 2-18. Set the AUX MEDIUM HEAT circuit breaker to ON. The heat of the three electric heaters increases. Go to table 2-19, Set the air conditioner or heater controls to obtain a comfortable condition within the IPCP. Table 3-11. Emergency Power Distribution and Illumination Check Corrective procedure NOTE ‘Ifanabnormal indication occurs while performing the following check procedures, goto the appropriate Branch and Flow fault isolation table listed below in the corrective procedure column. Unless otherwise indicated, the table appears in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—1. Check Emergency Power Battery Supply. Set the BAT 24V circuit breaker (3, fig. 2-1) to ON. Go to table 2-20. Set the BAT CHARGE circuit breaker to ON. Go to table 2-21. Do not leave the power supply monitor selector switch in either the BATTERY AMPS or BATTERY VOLTS positions for an extended period of time as this will discharge the batteries.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-11. Emergency Power Distribution and Illumination Check—Continued ‘Operation ermal indices Coerective procedure Set the auxiliary control unit power supply monitor selector switch (5, fig. 2-2) to BATTERY VOLTS and observe the POWER SUPPLY MONITOR meter (4, fig. 2-2). ‘The meter indicates 20.0 to 26.5 vde. Go to table 2:22. I L ‘Set the power supply monitor selector switch to BATTERY AMPS and observe the POWER SUPPLY MONITOR meter. - NOTE A low battery charging rate is normal when the battery voltage is high, and a high charging rate is normal when the battery voltage is low. The meter indicates 0 to 3 amperes (charging condition). Go to table 2-28, I Set the selector switch to OFF. » Cheek Shelter Illumination. Set the EMERGENCY LIGHTING switch to on (up). b Set the MAIN POWER circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet to OFF. The front and rear emergency shelter lamps (10 and 20, fig. 1-4) illuminate. Go to table 2-24, The front and rear normal shelter lamps extinguish. ‘ ‘Check Communications. Do not connect or disconnect the RO or T.0. headsets from their respective connectors unless the RO pushbutton on the RO communications panel is off (extinguished). a Press and release the POWER pushbutton (13, fig. 2-16) on the RO communications panel. ‘The POWER pushbutton illuminates. Go to table 2-1. I 4 Set the BUS TALK SELECTOR switches (18 and 15, figs. 2-15 and 2-16) to the red color positions (refer to the note below). NOTE ‘The following communications checks specify the red color positions for the various bus selector switches on the T.O. and RO communications panels. Periodically, the other bus selector positions (green and amber) should also be selected when performing the checks. « Adjust the VOL R controls (8 and 2, figs. 2-15 and 2-16) to midposition.TH 914: Table 3-11. Emergency Power Distribution and Illumination Check—Continued Operation Neral edition Corrective procedure Press and lock the push-to-talk switch on the T.O. and RO headset cables. Communications are established between the T.O. and RO and heard in therig earpieces. Go to table 2-6. Sidetone is present in the right earpieces. Go to table 2-6. Press the POWER pushbutton on the RO communications panel. ‘The POWER pushbutton extinguishes. Go to table 6-28. Set the MAIN POWER circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet to ON. Normal shelter power is restored. Cheek Siren, (IPCP only.) Momentarily hold the SIREN switch (21, fig. 2-1) to up (on). The siren operates when the switch is up. Go to table 2-25. Table $-12. ADP Check Corrective procedure 3-24 @ 8) @) NOTE ‘The TDECC checks (table 3-14) and the following ADP checks may be performed simultaneously. NOTE Ifan abnormal indication occurs while performing the following check procedures, go to the appropriate Branch and Flow fault isolation table listed below in the corrective procedure column. Unless otherwise indicated, the table appears in TM 9—1430—1585—12—4—3. Check ADP Power. Verify the following: The ADP air exhaust vents (22, fig. 1-1) on the roof of the shelter are open. ‘The ADP air intake vents at the rear (9, fig. 1-8) and side (20, fig. 1-1) of the shelter areop® ‘The MONITOR 416 VOLTS meter indicates in the green area. ‘The 28V PS circuit breaker (2, fig. 2-1) is set to ON. Go to table 6-39,Table 8-12 ADP Check—Continued TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (6) Norma edition Corrective procure ‘The ADP is energized and the roof-mounted exhaust blower activates, (with temperatures above 21.1°C (70°F) exhausting air from the ADP). Go to table 2-11 (TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—1). The HTRS ON lamp (6, fig. 2-3) illuminates (with temperatures below 4.4°C (OF). Go to table 6-46. The DTO DWRNO. 1, DWR NO. 2, and DWR NO. 8 circuit breakers (1, 2, and 8, fig. 2-3) are set to on (up). Go to table 6-36. Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switch (21, fig. 2-4). Insure that the CPU circuit breaker (4, fig. 2-3) is set to ON. Go to table 6-37. ‘The CPU POWER ON lamp (3, fig. 2-5) is illuminated. Go to table 6-48. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton (15, fig. 2-5). Insure that the MEMORY NO. 1 (5, fig. 2-3) and READER (8, fig. 2-3) circuit breakers areset to ON. Go to table 6-38. Check DTO #1 Power Supply. NOTE Prior to performing the following checks insure that the ADP has been operating for a minimum of 80 minutes. High voltages are present inside the DTO drawers. Use care to prevent contact when performing the following checks. Open the DTO #1 drawer (fig. 2-4). Rotate the voltage selector switch (2, fig. 3-21) on the DTO #1 power supply through all positions and observe monitor meter M1 (1, fig. 3-21). Meter M1 indicates within one major di position. Go to table 6-1. ion center scale for each switch Observe the POWER SUPPLY FAULT lamp (1, fig. 2-4) on the DTO #1 drawer front panel. The lamp remains extinguished. Go to table 6-2. 3-25TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table $-12, ADP Check—Continued up a arma edition Corrective procure 2d. Cheek that each of the three blowers is taking in air. . Go to table 6-71. Close and secure the DTO #1 drawer. - ‘Cheek DTO #2 Power Supply. High voltages are present inside the DTO drawers. Use care to prevent contact when performing the following checks. Open the DTO #2 drawer (fig. 2-4). Rotate the voltage selector switch (2, fig. 3-21) on the DTO #2 power supply through al positions and observe monitor meter M1 (1, fig. 3-21). Meter M1 indieates within one major division center scale for each switeh position. Go to table 6-3. Observe the POWER SUPPLY FAULT lamp (1, fig. 2-4) on the DTO #2 drawer front put ‘The lamp remains extinguished. Go to table 6-4. Check that each of the three blowers is taking in air. Go to table 6-72. Close and secure the DTO #2 drawer. Check DTO #3 Power Supply. WARNING } High voltages are present inside the DTO drawers. Use care to prevent contact when performing the following checks. | Open the DTO #8 drawer (fig. 2-4). Rotate the voltage selector switch (2, fig. 3-21) on the DTO #3 power supply throu i! positions and observe monitor meter M1 (1, fig. 3-21). Meter M1 indicates within one major division center scale for each switch position. Go to table 6-5.TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 Table 3-12. ADP Check — Continued Corrective procedare Observe the POWER SUPPLY FAULT lamp (1, fig. 2-4) on the DTO #8 drawer front panel. ‘The lamp remains extinguished. Go to table 6-6. Check that each of the three blowers is taking in air. Go to table 6-73, Close and secure the DTO #8 drawer. Check CPU Power Supply. High voltages are present inside the CPU drawers. Use care to prevent contact when performing the following checks. 3-261Digit .T™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-12, ADP Check—Continued Nema aon ture Open the CPU drawer (fig. 2-5). NOTE ‘The air conditioner or the auxiliary heater is energized to provide an operating load for the Power generator. Set either the AIR CONDITIONER or the AUX LOW HEAT or the AUX MEDIUM HEAT circuit breaker (9 through 11, fig. 2-1) to on (up). Observe the MONITOR 416 V meter (fig. 3-2) indication on the power distribution cabinet. The MONITOR 416 V meter indicates red line center in the green area, Direct the power generator personnel to adjust the generator output voltage. Observe the output voltage meter (2, fig. 3-23) on the CPU power supply. The meter indicates 4.8 to 5.1 vde. Go to table 6-7. Check that each of the three blowers is taking in air. Go to table 6-46, Close and secure the CPU drawer and observe that the POWER SUPPLY FAULT INDICATOR lamp (11, fig. 2-5) remains extinguished. Go to table 6-8. Cheek Memory Supply. High voltages are present inside the memory unit drawer. Use care to prevent contact when performing the following checks. Open the memory unit drawer (fig. 2-6). Set the memory power supply VOLTAGE MONITOR selector switch (1, fig. 3-22) to +5.4V and observe monitor meter M1 (2, fig. 3-22). Meter M1 indicates within one major scale division of center scale. Go to table 6-61. Check that each of the three blowers is taking in air. Go to table 6-47. 3-27TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 A Table 8-18, ADP Check—Continued ed omen Normal tedication Corrective procedure 6d. Close and secure the memory unit drawer and observe that the POWER SUPPLY FAILURE indicator (2, fig. 2-6) remains extinguished. Go to table 6-61. ah Load CPU/MEMORY Diagnostic Program with SSR. NOTE If a punched tape reader is installed in the ADP, proceed to step 8. NOTE Disregard all lamps not mentioned. a Power down the DTO drawers. If illuminated, Press the MEMORY DISABLE indicator-switch (3, fig. 2-6) to off (extn. guished). & abe hold the memory PARITY ERROR RESET AND LAMP TEST pushbutton (4 The MEMORY DISABLE indicator-switch and the PARITY ERROR # POWER SUPPLY FAILURE lamps (1, and 2, fig. 2-6) illuminate. Go to table 6-9. « Release the memory PARITY ERROR RESET AND LAMP TEST pushbutton. The PARITY ERROR lamp extinguish. Go to table 6-10. 4 Press the CPU RESET pushbutton (16, fig. 2-5). All CPU lamps and indicator-switches extinguish except for the POWER lamp (3, fig. 2-5) and the OPERATE indicator-switch (18, fig. 2-5). Go to table 6-11. @ Press and hold the CPU LAMP TEST pushbutton (12, fig. 2-5). AIL CPU lamps and indicator-switches illuminate except for spare lamp tot Fight of the DP lamp. Go to table 6-24. el Release the CPU LAMP TEST pushbutton. Set the SSR power switch to ON. The SSR POWER lamp illuminates. Go to table 6-65. 0. Press and hold the SSR LAMP TEST pushbutton (5, fig. 2-7). The SSR PROGRAM BEGIN and END lamps (1 and 2, fig. 2-7) illuminst. Go to table 6-13. h Release the SSR LAMP TEST pushbutton. 3-281 9—1430. Table $-12, ADP Check—Continued Operation Nema indition ——_Carrctive procedure Set the printer AUTO switch (9, fig. 2-7) to ON (down). ‘The printer does not print. Go to table 6-12. Momentarily hold the printer ADV switch (8, fig. 2-7) to ADV. ‘The printer paper moves. Go to table 6-14. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and then press the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch 6, fig. 2-5). The printer does not print. Go to table 6-69, Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches (1, fig. 2-5) to 06044100. Set the DATA INPUT dial switches (2, fig. 2-5) to 00000000. Set the SSR PROGRAM SELECTION dial switches to 120, NOTE Go to table 6-51 in TM 9—1480—1535—12—4—8 if an abnormal indication occurs in step o below. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton (19, fig. 2-6). The SSR PROGRAM BEGIN lamp is illuminated, ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps (14, fig. 2-5) display 06044100. The END, CADO1 and CADO4 lamps (9 and 13, fig. 2-5) are illuminated. ‘The INSTRUCTION CYCLE 1-4 (11-14), EXECUTION CYCLE 1-4 (E1-E4), RUN, HNG, CADO2, and CADO3 lamps (8, 9, 10, and 13, fig. 2-5) are extinguished. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to 06044022. NOTE Go to table 6-52 in TM 9—1480—1535—12—4—8 if an abnormal indication occurs in step q below. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. The SSR PROGRAM BEGIN lamp extinguishes. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 06044000. ‘The TRAP, END, MEM BUFFER, MEM ADDR, CADO1 and CAD04 lamps are illuminated. The IL14, E1-E4, RUN, CLOCK INHIB, HNG, READER PARITY, CADO2, CAD03, ES and MD lamps are extinguished. 3-29‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 7 Table 3-12, ADP Check—Continued Kontos! ermal ndinon Corrective procedure Ir. Proceed to step 9. - 3-30 Load CPU/Memory Diagnostic Program with Tape Reader. NOTE If an abnormal indication is obtained when performing the following step, perform the fault isolation procedures in chapter 6 of TM 9—1480—1685—12—8. Power down the DTO drawers. Remove the tape reader cover and set the SPOOLING switch (6, fig. 3-24) to DISABLE. Place the CPU/MEMORY diagnostic tape (blue/blue, No. 11510256-4) reel on the left spindle (7, fig. 3-24) and lock the reel in place. Insure that the sprocket holes on the tape: facing toward the back of the reel. Unwind about four feet of leader, then thread the tape around the tape guides and tensi arms (1, 2, and 4, fig. 3-24). Manually wind a portion of the tape onto the take-up reel (6, fig 24) until the punched portion is at the read head (3, fig. 3-24). Insert the tape through the! head by following the guide lines on the tape reader panel. Insure that the sprocket drive gear engages the sprocket holes on the tape. Do not force-pull the tape against the sprocket drive gear as tape damage results. Set the TAPE READER POWER switch (4, fig. 2-8) to ON. Set the SPOOLING switch to ENABLE and observe that the reels momentarily turn tocent, the tension arms. Replace the tape reader cover. Set the printer AUTO switch (1, fig. 2-8) to ON (down). ‘The printer does not print. Momentarily hold the printer ADV switch (2, fig. 2-8) to ADV. ‘The printer paper moves. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton (16, fig. 2-5) and then the DISPLAY ENABLE indicat switch (6, fig. 2-5). The printer does not print. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches (1, fig. 2-5) to read 06044042. Set the DATA INPUT dial switches (2, fig. 2-5) to 00000000. The tape does not advance. |‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-18, ADP Check—Continued ‘Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton (19, fig. 2-5). The tape moves to the beginning of the block mark and then stops. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps (14, fig. 2-5) display 06044042. ‘The END, CADO1 and CADO4 lamps (9 and 13, fig. 2-5) are illuminated. ‘The INSTRUCTION CYCLE 1-4 (11-14), EXECUTION CYCLE 1-4 (E1-E4),. RUN, HNG, CADO2, and CADO3 lamps (8, 9, 10, and 13, fig. 2-5) are” extinguished. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to 06044022, Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. The tape moves forward loading part 1 into the computer memory. As the tape moves, observe that the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 660- XXXXX. Lamps 10 through 23 are changing. ‘The TRAP, CADO1 and CADO4 lamps are illuminated. The El, END MEM BUFFER, MEM ADDR, CLOCK INHIB, HNG, ES and MD lamps are flashing. ‘The 11-18, E2-E4, CADO2, and CADOS lamps are extinguished. Once part 1 has been correctly loaded, the tape stops moving and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 06044000. ‘The TRAP, END, MEM BUFFER, MEM ADDR, CADO1, and CAD04 lamps are illuminated. The 11-14, E1-E4, RUN, CLOCK INHIB, HNG, READER PARITY, CADO2, fj CAD03, ES, and MD lamps are extinguished. Proceed to step 10. Operation of the CPU/MEMORY Diagnostic Routine with SSR. NOTE Disregard all lampe not mentioned. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and then press the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. NOTE ‘Execution of part 1 begins. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER and DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 00000000 and the program register (displayed by the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps when the PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton (5, fig. 2-5) is Pressed and held) contains 00000001. Go to table 6-53. 3-31TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table3-18. ADP Check—Continued Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00000001 and the DISPL! REGISTER lamps display 00000000. Go to table 6-53. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00000002. Go to table 6-68. ‘The DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 00000000. Go to table 6-53. CADO1 lamp is illuminated and CADO2, CADOS, and CADO4 lamps a extinguished. Go to table 6-58. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00000008. Go to table 6-53. The DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 77777777. Go to table 6-58. Set the DATA INPUT dial switches to read 77777777. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The remainder of part 1 is executed. Part 2 is loaded and verified, and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps dicqt| 06044000. Go to table 6-53. Press and hold the PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 62000000. Go to table 6-54. Release the PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ' The upper 8K memory test is executed, and after approximately 8 soconds SSR loads part 3 and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 06044000 Go to table 6-70. Press and hold the PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 62020000. Go to table 6-55. Release the PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-12, ADP Check—Continuad Nermat tndiion Corrective procedure Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The lower 8K memory test is executed. The DISPLAY REGISTER lamps remain extinguished for approximately 8 seconds while the SSR loads part 4, and then the SSR PROGRAM END lamp illuminates. Go to table 6-62. Only the ADDRESS contents of the INSTRUCTION REGISTER, DISPLAY REGISTER, and program register lamps are identical. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00006416. Go to table 6-62. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005000 and the DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 00000000. Go to table 6-67. The RTI, spare (to right of RTI), MEM PARITY, DTO TEST, CPU TEST, OVERFLOW, DP, and CADO1 lamps illuminate. Go to table 6-67. ‘The CADO2, CADOS, and CADO04 lamps are extinguished. Go to table 6-67. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005001. Go to table 6-67. Observe that all the lamps illuminated in step n. above are still illuminated. Go to table 6-67. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005002. Go to table 6-67. Observe that all the lamps illuminated in step n above are extinguished except the CADO1 lamp. Go to table 6-67. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005003. Go to table 6-67. Observe that all the lamps illuminated in step n above remain extinguished except the CADO] lamp. Go to table 6-67. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005004. Go to table 6-67. 3-33TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 o Table 3-12. ADP Check—Continued i toe Normal ndion Corrective procedure \ 3-34 Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The printer clicks and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps disply 00005050. Go to table 6-67. CADO1, CADO3 lamps are illuminated and CADO2, CADO4 lampe are exting uished. Go to table 6-67. Momentarily hold the printer ADV switch to ADV and verify that The printer has printed B. Go to table 6-67. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The printer clicks and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lampe displa| 00005051. Go to table 6-67. Momentarily hold the printer ADV switch to ADV and verify that ‘The printer has printed 8. Go to table 6-67. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The printer clicks and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps displ 00005052. Go to table 6-67. Momentarily hold the printer ADV switch to ADV and verify that The printer has printed BB with no space between characters. Go to table 6-67. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005053. Go to table 6-67. The printer prints: ABC DEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ01234 56789) =)+—$*' END OF TEST. Go to table 6-67. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The 11-14, RUN, MS and LD lamps are illuminated. Go to table 6-67. NOTE ‘The EDP diagnostic is executed continuously in this step to detect intermittent faults in the EDP.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-12, ADP Check—Continued a ays s FF oes Navman Corrective procedure Allow the EDP diagnostic to execute continuously for two (2) minutes. Then press the SINGLE INSTRUCTION indicator-switch. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton. Proceed to step 11. ‘Operation of the CPU/Memory Diagnostic Routine with Tape Reader. NOTE fan abnormal indication is obtained when performing this step, perform the fault isolation procedures in chapter 5 of TM 9—1430—1535—12—3. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and then the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER and DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 00000000 and the program register (displayed by the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps when the PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton (5, fig. 2-5) is pressed and held) contains 00000001. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00000001 and the DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 00000000. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00000002. ‘The DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 00000000. CADO1 lamp is illuminated and CADO2, CADO3, and CADO4 lamps are extinguished. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00000003. The DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 77777777. Set the DATA INPUT dial switches to read 77777777. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. Part 1 is executed and the tape moves. The E2, CLOCK INHIB, HNG, and ES lamps are flashing while part 2 is being loaded and verified. Observe that when the tape stops moving, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps iay 06044000. Press and hold the PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 62000000. Release the PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton. 3-35TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-12, ADP Check—Continued Operation ep Nematic peta 10). Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The upper 8K memory test is executed and, after approximately 8 seconds ix tape reader moves and the E1, CLOCK INHIB and HNG lamps are flashing vik part 3 is being loaded and verified. The tape moves forward loading the lower 8K memory test. When the tape stops moving, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps dire 06044000. k Press and hold the PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 62020000, verifying part3i| loaded correctly. L Release the PROGRAM DISPLAY pushbutton, m. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The lower 8K memory test is executed and, after approximately 8 seconde, tk! tape reader moves and the E1, CLOCK INHIB and HNG lamps are flashing wit part 4 is being loaded and verified. The tape moves forward to the block mark, stops, moves forward again, si) continues loading part 4. { The El, CLOCK INHIB, and HNG lamps extinguish. | During the load, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 660xxxxxlot few seconds, then change to 0000xxxx. The CADO1 and CADO4 lamps iMuminated. Observe that when the tape stops moving, the READER PARITY km iMuminates, and the contents of the INSTRUCTION, DISPLAY, and PROGRA identical, and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps dispht n Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005000 and the DISPLAT REGISTER lamps display 00000000. ‘The RTI, spare (to right of RTI), MEM PARITY, READER PARITY, D1 TEST, CPU TEST, OVERFLOW, DP and CADO1 lamps illuminate. ‘The CADO2, CADO3, and CADO4 lamps are extinguished. 0 Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005001. Observe that all the lamps illuminated in step n above are still illuminated Pp. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. 3-36 The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005002. Observe that all the lamps illuminated in step n above are extinguished exce? the READER PARITY and the CADO1 lamps.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-12, ADP Check—Continued een Norm indention Corrective procedure 8 Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005003. Observe that all the lamps illuminated in step n above remain extinguished except the READER PARITY and the CADO1 lamps. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005004. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The printer clicks and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005050. CADO1, CADO3 lamps are illuminated and CADO2, CADO4 lamps are extinguished. Momentarily hold the printer ADV switch to ADV and verify that The printer has printed B. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The printer clicks and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005051. Momentarily hold the printer ADV switch to ADV and verify that ‘The printer has printed 8. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The printer clicks and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005052. Momentarily hold the printer ADV switch to ADV and verify that ‘The printer has printed BS with no space between characters. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00005053. The printer prints: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 =)+—$*'. END OF TEST. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The 11-14, RUN, MS, and LD lamps are illuminated. NOTE ‘The EDP diagnostic is executed continuously in this step to detect intermittent faults in the EDP. Allow the EDP diagnostic to execute continuously for two (2) minutes. Then press the SINGLE: INSTRUCTION indicator-switch. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton. ‘Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to read 06044122.1430—1535—12. Table $-12, ADP Check—Continued bad Norma edteton Corrective procedure 10ad. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. The tape rewinds. NOTE ‘The tape reader will stop four times, The first three times set the SPOOLING switch to DISABLE, press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton and then set the SPOOLING switch to ENABLE. The fourth time set the SPOOLING switch to DISABLE, remove the tape from the tape read head and rewind the remainder of the tape by hand. ‘The CPU diagnostic tape will rewind onto the left reel. ae, Remove the tape reader cover. af. Set the SPOOLING switch to DISABLE, remove the CPU diagnostic tape from the left uy} reader spindle and store. a9. Set the TAPE READER POWER switch to OFF. iL DTO Diagnostic Initialization. NOTE Prior to loading the DTO diagnostic program, the following series of checks must be completed. Performance of these tests will establish that no faults exist which would interfere with correct loading of the DTO diagnostic program and the execution of tests under program control. NOTE Disregard all lamps not mentioned. a Power up the DTO drawers. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 2-4, unless otherwise indicated. 6 Set the AZIMUTH SECTOR START switch (38) to 00 and the AZIMUTH SECTOR S10?) switch (31) to 00. Set the LOCAL/REMOTE switch (27) to LOCAL. The LOCAL TEST lamp (24) illuminates. Go to table 6-15. a Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switeh (21). ‘The CWAR ENABLE, PAR ENABLE, IFF ENABLE, BCC 1 ENABLE, and BO 2 ENABLE lamps are extinguish Go to table 6-16. e Press the CPU RESET pushbutton. f Press the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-12, ADP Check—Continued (Operation Nemetindiewion corrective procedure Press and hold the DTO LAMP TEST indicator-switch (22). All DTO lamps illuminate except for bit position 0 throngh 3 of the register display (18). Go to table 6-17. Release the DTO LAMP TEST pushbutton. The SECTOR GATE lamp is extinguished. Go to table 6-18. Select positions 1 through 9, 12, and 13 of the REGISTER DISPLAY switch (19). All register display lamps remain extinguished for all switch positions. Go to table 6-20. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 10. Register display lamp 12 is illuminated and lamps 9, 10, 11 and 13 through 23 are extinguished. Go to table 6-21. Set the BCC A/D switch (28) to test. ‘The BCC A/D lamp (17) is illuminated. Go to table 6-22. Register display lamp 4 Go to table 6-22. Press the BCC A/D TEST ONE-ZERO indicator-switch (20) to on (illuminated). Register display lamps 10 and 12 are extinguished and 13 throngh 22 are illuminated. luminated. Go to table 6-25. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 8. Register display lamps 14 through 22 are extinguished. Go to table 6-23. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 10. Press the BCC A/D TEST ONE-ZERO indicator-switch to off (extinguished). Register display lamps 14 through 22 are extinguished. Go to table 6-26. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 11. Register display lamps 9, 10, and 14 through 23 are extinguished. Go to table 6-27. Press the BCC A/D TEST ONE-ZERO indicator-switch to on (illuminated). Register display lamps 14 through 22 are illuminated. Go to table 6-28.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 6 Tables-12. ADP Check—Continued lr. 8 & 3-40 ermal indteason, Corrective procedure ' Set the REGISTER DISPLAY: switch to 8. Register display lamps 14 through 22 are extinguished. Go to table 6-80. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 11. Press the BCC A/D TEST ONE-ZERO indicator-switch to off (extinguished). Register display lamps 14 through 22 are extinguished. Go to table 6-29. Set the BCC A/D switch to OPERATE. The BCC A/D lamp is extiuguished. Go to table 6-31. Register display lamp 4 is extiuguished. Go to table 6-31. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 10. Press the ICWAR INHIBIT indicator-switch (36) to on (illuminated). Register display lamp 23 is illuminated. Go to table 6-82. Press the ICWAR INHIBIT indicator-switch to off (extinguished). Register display lamp 23 is extinguished. Go to table 6-88. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 11. Press the IPAR INHIBIT indicator-switch (86) to on (illuminated). Register display lamp 23 is illuminated. Go to table 6-34, Press the IPAR INHIBIT indicator-awitch to off (extinguished). Register display lamp 23 is extinguished Go to table 6-85. Press the CPU SINGLE PULSE indicator-switch (4, fig. 2-6). Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton twice. All DISPLAY REGISTER lamps are extinguished. Go to table 6-49, Select positions 1 through 10 of the D/A FAULT switch (16). Both the D/A CHANNEL (30) and LOCAL FAULT (14) lamps remsin extinguished for each switch position. Go to table 6-50. With SSR, proceed to step 1:Ar ee reste a TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 ADP Check—Continued Normal tndtestion Corrective procedure DTO Diagnostic Program Loading with SSR. NOTE fan abnormal indication is obtained when performing steps 12a through 12) below, perform table 6-56 of TM 9—1490—1635—12—4—3, NOTE Disregard all lamps not mentioned. Power down the DTO drawers. Set the SSR power switch to ON. Set the printer AUTO switch to ON (down). Momentarily hold the printer ADV switch to ADV. The printer paper advances. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial swiches to 06044100. Set the SSR PROGRAM SELECTION dial switches to 000. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and then the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. The SSR PROGRAM BEGIN lamp illuminates. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to 06044022. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. ‘The SSR loads the program into the computer memory. The SSR PROGRAM END lamp illuminates. When the program is completely and correctly loaded, only the ADDRESS contents of the INSTRUCTION REGISTER, DISPLAY REGISTER and program register lamps are identical. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00037737. Power up the DTO drawers. The DTO TEST lamp is extinguished. Proceed to step 14. 3-40.1TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 6 Table s-12. ADP Check—Continued a su Normal tndteation Corrective prosadure —_ ein 1 1s. so onreme r 2 o. cra 3-40.2 DTO Diagnostic Program Loading with Tape Reader. NOTE If an abnormal indication is obtained when performing the following step, perform the fault iaolation procedures in chapter 6 of TM 9—1430—1635—-12-8. Power down the DTO drawers. Remove the tape reader cover and set the SPOOLING switch to DISABLE. Place the DTO diagnostic tape (green/green No. 11510256-5) reel on the left tape reader spindle and lock the reel in place. Insure that the tape sprocket holes are facing toward the back of the reel. ‘Thread the tape over the tape guides, through the tape head, and onto the take-up reel. If necessary, refer to step 8d for the threading procedure. Set the SPOOLING switch to ENABLE. Set the TAPE READER POWER switch to ON. Replace the tape reader cover. Set the printer AUTO switch to ON (down). ‘Momentarily hold the printer ADV switch to ADV. The printer paper advances. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to 06044042, Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and then the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. ‘The tape moves to the block mark and then stops. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to 06044022. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. The tape moves until the program is read into the computer memory and then stops. When the program is completely and correctly loaded, only the ADDRESS contents of the INSTRUCTION REGISTER, DISPLAY REGISTER, and program register lamps are identical. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00037737. Power up the DTO drawers. The DTO TEST lamp is extinguished. Operation of the DTO Diagnostic Routine. NOTE Ifan abnormal indication is obtained while performing steps 14a through 14e below, perform table 6-60 of TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—3.qa) (2) @) (4) qa) @) (8) @ (5) TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Tables-12. ADP Check—Continued Corrective procedure NOTE ‘As each channel test is started, the operator is kept aware of the diagnostic progress by two indicators: (1) a test sequence number dependent upon the channel being tested is displayed on the CPU DISPLAY REGISTER lamps, and (2), the channel name is printed out. Thus, as the test progresses, the number displayed counts up sequentially and, any time the count stops, the name of the channel being tested is the last name printed out. If operator assistance is required, the spare lamp (OAR) to the right of the RTT lamp will iluminat NOTE Disregard all lamps not mentioned. Execution, Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switch. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and then the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. Set the DATA INPUT dial switches to read 00000000. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. After approximately 30 seconds, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps die- play 00027001. The printout is as follows: 0, DTO, 10, BCC1, BCC2, IFF, S/DA, S/DB, BRD, ARD, RATE, LEAD, RRAT, HGHT, CWAR, DMTI, DPLY, LINK, DA, SECT. Sector Test. Set the AZIMUTH SECTOR START and STOP switches to 15 and 68 respectively. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. After approximately 4 seconds, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps die- play 00027002. ‘Set the AZIMUTH SECTOR START and STOP switches to 31 and 47 respectively. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. After approximately 4 seconds, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps die- play 00027003. Set the AZIMUTH SECTOR START and STOP switches to 63 and 15 respectively. 3-40.3power Google _co) (8) (9) (10) qi) (12) qa) (2) TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-18. ADP Check—Continued Normal tndienion Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. After approximately 4 seconds, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00027004. Set the AZIMUTH SECTOR START and STOP switches to 47 and 48 respectively. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. After approximately 4 seconds, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00027005. Set the AZIMUTH SECTOR START and STOP switches to 28 and 81 respectively. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. After approximately 4 seconds, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00027006. Set the AZIMUTH SECTOR START and STOP switches to 48 and 28 respectively. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. After approximately 4 seconds, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00030001. ‘The printout is as follows: SWCH. Set the AZIMUTH SECTOR START and STOP switches to 00. Initialization Switch Test. Set the initialization switches to the settings given below. Switch Setting BATTERY LATITUDE +00° 02.1" BATTERY LONGITUDE +000° 08.4” DLRP LATITUDE +00° 04.2" DLRP LONGITUDE +000° 10.8” ALT x 100 FT 210 STATION AA ‘*(W)! ADP inhibit PROCESS & REPORT INHIBIT *(V)! Battery Configuration © BATTERY FULL Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00030002. Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-41TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table 3-12. ADP Check—Continued (3) Set the initialization switches to the settings given below. Switch Setting BATTERY LATITUDE +00° 00.0" BATTERY LONGITUDE +000" 00.0° DLRP LATITUDE +00° 00.0 DLRP LONGITUDE +000° 00.07 ALT x 100 FT 000 STATION AA *(W)'ADP inhibit PROCESS & REPORT INHIBIT | *(V)' Battery Configuration BATTERY FULL (4) Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00030003. (5) Set the initialization switches to the settings given below. Switch Setting BATTERY LATITUDE T° 61.7 BATTERY LONGITUDE 177° B17 DLRP LATITUDE TT B17 DLRP LONGITUDE 107 BIT ALT x 100 FT 7 STATION Ww *(W)! ADP inhibit REPORT INHIBIT | *(V)! Battery Configuration © BATTERY MINUS FSA (8) Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00030004, (1) | Set the initialization switches to the settings given below. Switeh Setting BATTERY LATITUDE —88° 28.8" BATTERY LONGITUDE —088° 28.8" DLRP LATITUDE —88° 28.8" DLRP LONGITUDE —088° 28.8" ALT x 100 FT 888 I ‘iRafer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-42TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-12. ADP Check — Continued Operation ep Settee pmnte Me. (7) Cont Switch Setting STATION EE NOTE To verify correct operation of the REPORT INHIBIT switch, set the switch to the REPORT INHIBIT position not selected in step 14 (5) above. *(W)! ADP inhibit REPORT INHIBIT *(V)! Battery Configuration © BATTERY MINUS FSB (8) | *(W)! Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. *(W)! The DTO TEST lamp on the CPU illuminates, and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00030032. The printout is as follows: HALT 00030032. (9) | *(W)! Set the INPUT INSTRUCTION dial switches to 56001430. (10) | *(W)! Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. *(W)' The DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 41044210. Refer to TM 9-1480—-1535—12-8, table 6-5. HALT 30032. (11) | Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. *(W)! The DTO TEST and OAR lamps extinguish. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00031001. The printout is as follows: DAL. Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-42.1davzesy GoogleTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Tables-12. ADP Check—Continued 14d. ql) (2) (8) @) (5) (6) mM (8) @) (10) ay (12) (18) D/A Lamp Test. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 5. Register display lamps 4 through 23 are illuminated. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00031002. Register display lamps 4 through 23 are extinguished. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 9. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00031003. Register display lampe 8 through 22 are illuminated, Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00032001. The printout is as follows: PIO. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 1. Register display lamps 8 through 23 are illuminated. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 2. Register display lamps 8 through 23 are illuminated. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 3. Register display lamps 10 through 23 are illuminated. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 4. Register display lamps 10 through 23 are illuminated. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 5. Register display lamps 4 through 23 are illuminated. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 6. Register display lamps 4 through 23 are illuminated, Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 7. Register display lamps 10 through 23 are illuminated. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 8. Register display lamps 10 through 23 are illuminated. 3-43‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 14d.(14) (15) (16) qa (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (28) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) 3-46 Table $-12. ADP Check—Continued Normal ndiatien Corrective procedure Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 9. Register display lamps 8 through 23 are illuminated. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 12. Register display lamps 15 through 23 are illuminated. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 18. Register display lamps 6 through 23 are illuminated. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00032002. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 1. Register display lamps 13 and 19 through 23 are extinguished. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 2. Register display lamps 13 and 19 through 23 are extinguished. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY awitch to 8, Register display lamps 15 and 20 through 23 are extinguished. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 4. Register display lamps 15 and 20 through 23 are extinguished. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 5. Register display lamps 10 through 13 and 20 through 23 are extinguisbei Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 6. Register display lamps 10 through 13 and 20 through 23 are extinguishei Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 7. Register display lamps 16 and 23 are extinguished. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 8. Register display lamps 16 and 23 are extinguished. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 9. Register display lamp 23 is illuminated and lamps 8 through 22 are exti guished. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 12. Register display lamps 15 through 23 are extinguished. Set the REGISTER DISPLAY switch to 18. Register display lamps 12 through 14 and 21 through 23 are extinguisho Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00032003. ‘The CWAR ENABLE, PAR ENABLE, IFF ENABLE, BCC 1 ENABLE, = BCC 2 ENABLE lamps are illuminated.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-18, ADP Check—Continued Terminate Program. (1) Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switch. (2) Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00077777. ‘The printout is as follows: END. Table 3-13, ADP/Modem Interface Check ‘Check ADP/Modem Interface. Insure the 60/1200 baud rate switch (fig. 3-52) is set to 1200. Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switch. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and then press the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator- switch. Set the DATA INPUT dial switches to 00000006. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps indicate 00060001. Perform the ADP/modem interface check in TM 9—1430— 1885-12-38. If the USMC KG-80 unit is present, press the RESET pushbutton. ‘The MODEM RCV lamp (2, fig. 2-4) on DTO #4 is extinguished. Insure that the proper code has been loaded into the KG-30. Have communications personnel check for proper KG-30 operation. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lampe indicate 00077777. Perform the ADP/modem interface check in TM 9-1430— 1685-12-38.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-14. TDECC Check Corrective procedure NOTE If anabnormal indication occurs while performing the following check procedures, go to the appropriate Branch and Flow fault isolation table listed below in the corrective procedure column. Unless otherwise indicated, the table appears in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—2. Go to table 5-1. Go to table 5-5.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-14. TDECC Check—Continued Normal Indeation se prondure Exercise extreme care to avoid contact with 416 vac when working in the power supply drawer. Failure to observe proper precautions may result in injury or death. i Open the power supply drawer and close the interlock switch. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 3-25, unless otherwise indicated. Observe the 28 VOLTS ON lamp (1). ‘The lamp is illuminated. Go to table 6-6. f Set the voltage selector switch (3) to +5. The VOLTAGE MONITOR meter (2) indicates within the green ares. Adjust 5.4 vde variable resistor R12 (3, fig. 3-26) for center scale. Go to table 5-5, column 7. Us Set the voltage selector switch to +15. The VOLTAGE MONITOR meter indicates within the green area. Adjust the +15 VOLTAGE ADJUST variable resistor (4) for center scale. Go to table 5-5, column 7. 1 Set the voltage selector switch to +20. ‘The VOLTAGE MONITOR meter indicates within the green area. Adjust the +20 VOLTAGE ADJUST variable resistor (5) for center scale. The 20-vde variable resistor (6, fig. 3-26) is not set fully cew on power supply PS6. Go to table 5-5, column 7. Set the voltage selector switch to +100. ‘The VOLTAGE MONITOR meter indicates within the green area. Adjust the +100 VOLTAGE ADJUST variable ré center scale. Go to table 5-5, column 7. Set the voltage selector switch to +250. istor (6) for 3-47TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table $-14. TDECC Check—Continued ad on Nemettetenion caractive procedure i ‘The VOLTAGE MONITOR meter indicates within the green area. ae Adjust the +250 VOLTAGE ADJUST variable resistor (7) for center scale. Go to table 5-5, column 7. k Set the voltage selector switch to —15. ‘The VOLTAGE MONITOR meter indicates within the green area. Adjust the —15 VOLTAGE ADJUST variable resistor (11) for center scale. Go to table 5-5, column 7. L Set the voltage selector switch to —20. ‘The VOLTAGE MONITOR meter indicates within the green area. Adjust the —20 VOLTAGE ADJUST variable resistor (10) for center scale. The —20-vde variable resistor (5, fig. 3-26) is not set fully cew on power supply PS7. Go to table 5-5, column 7. m. Set the voltage selector switch to —100. The VOLTAGE MONITOR meter indicates within the green area. Adjust the —100 VOLTAGE ADJUST variable resistor (9) for center scale. Go to table 5-5, column 7. n Set the voltage selector switch to —250. ‘The VOLTAGE MONITOR meter indicates within the green area. Adjust the —250 VOLTAGE ADJUST variable resistor (8) for center scale. Go to table 5-5, column 7. °. Set the voltage selector switch to the TEST + and TEST — positions. The LVPS FAILURE label on the status panel is flashing. Go to table 5-36. Pp Set the voltage selector switch to OFF. «@ Do not close the power supply drawer. 2 Check Console Illumination. a Observe that the following panel labels and indicator-switches are fully illuminated: 3-48a TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-14. TDECC Check—Continued Oration ~ Meret tetas caret proedre a NOTE ~ The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 2-12 (status panel) unless otherwise indicated. CONSOLE ON indicator-switch (1). Go to table 5-2. I ASI NORMAL label (6). ee the ASI NORMAL/ASI APPROACH indicator-switch Go to table 5-7. I CW ROTATE label (8). Press the CASUALTY/CW ROTATE indicator-switch (28, fig. 2-2) on the auxiliary control unit. Go to table 5-38. ADP label (10). Go to table 5-8. NOTE ‘The key numbers below in parentheses refer to figure 2-13 (T.0. panel). OUT OF ACTION label (16). Go to table 5-9. NORMAL MODE indicator-switeh (17). Go to table 5-10. CEASE FIRE label (42). Press the RESUME FIRE/CEASE FIRE indicator-switch Go to table 6-11. I (1) | Rotate the MODE switeh (41). The 1/2/3/4 labels (41) illuminate accordingly. Go to table 5-14. I (2) | Set the MODE switch as specified by TSOP. (8) | Observe the AZIMUTH counter (63). ‘The AZIMUTH counter Go to table 5-18, I NoTE The key numbers below in parentheses refer to figure 2-14 (RO panel). uminated. 3-49TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table $-14. TDECC Check—Continued ‘ap Nema edition Operation Corrective procedure 2a(4) Observe the following for full illumination: ELEVATION MILS meter edge lamps (1). Go to table 5-15, APPROACH label (20). Press the APPROACH/RECEDE indicator-switch (20). Go to table 5-16. AUTO RANGE label (21). Go to table 5-18. MANUAL AZ/EL indieator-switeh (14). Go to table 5-26. AUTO SPEED label (5). Go to table 5-17. Press (to test) the SER DATA BITE OK lamp (87, fig. 2-12). ‘The SER DATA BITE OK lamp illuminates. Go to table 5-151. Press (to tet) all indicator lamps (except spares (18) and (9) on both the T.O. and RO communications panels (fig. 2-15 and 2-16). Each indicator lamp illuminates. Go to table 5-100. NOTE Go to table 5-39 in TM 9—1430—1585—12—4—2 if none of the indicators listed in step_d below are pre- illuminated. Observe that the indicator-switches and labels listed below are pre-illuminated. The illumination level of the following indicator-switches and labels is low for identification purposes and should not be confused with the illumination level of operating functions (full illumination). NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 2-12 (status panel). HPI ACTIVATE indicator-switch (3). Go to table 5-19. ICWAR RADIATE indicator-switch (5). Go to table 6-20. FIRE SECTION STANDBY indicator-switch (2). Go to table 5-21. ICWAR STANDBY indicator-switch (4). Go to table 5-22.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-14. TDECC Check—Continued Normal indicton Corrective procedure FIRE SECTION OFF indicator-switeh (42). Go to table 5-23. ICWAR OFF indicator-switch (39). Go to table 5-24. AUTO CHALLENGE OFF indicator-switch (7). Press the AUTO CHALLENGE indicator-switch. Go to table 5-25. PLATOON TEST indicator-switeh (14). Go to table 5-54. HPI BITE label (16). Press the HPI BITE/TEST OK indicator-switch (16). Go to table 5-57. ITO FIRE label (18). Go to table 5-62. ADP LOOP TEST indicator-switch (13). Go to table 5-44. TEST ROTATE indicator-switeh (15). Press the TEST ROTATE indicator-switch (15). Go to table 5-40. LAMP TEST indicator-switch (17). Go to table 5-41. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 2-18 (T.O. panel). CCM OVERRIDE indicator-switch (59). Press the CCM OVERRIDE indicator-switch (59). Go to table 5-42. MISSILE CODE indicator-switch (58). Go to table 5-45. AFC HOLD indicator-switeh (57). Go to table 5-45. NO KILL indicator-switch (56). Go to table 5-43. KILL indicator-switch (55). Go to table 5-43. 3-51TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-14. TDECC Check—Continued Sup Norma ndiation Corrective procedure 2d. Cont. 3-52 TERMINATE ENGAGE indicator-switch (54). Go to table 5-46. DESTROY indicator-switch (50). Go to table 5-47. CHALLENGE indicator-switch (51). Go to table 5-48. FIRE indicator-switch (46). Go to table 5-49. VITAL AREA INSERT indicator-switch (39). Go to table 5-50. VITAL AREA CALL indicator-switeh (37). Go to table 5-134. HOSTILE indicator-switch (36). Go to table 6-61. UNKNOWN indicator-switch (35). Go to table 5-138. FRIEND indicator-switch (34). Go to table 5-135. ENGAGE OTHER indicator-s Go to table 5-136. REFUSE indicator-switch (5). Go to table 5-187. MANUAL ASSIGN indicator-switch (26). Go to table 5-58. ACCEPT label (6). Go to table 5-59. REJECT indicator-switch (25). Go to table 5-189, DISPLAY LOCALS indicator-switch (23). Go to table 5-52. DISPLAY REMOTES indicator-switch (24). Go to table 5-143. DISPLAY HOSTILES/UNKNOWNS indicator-switeh (22). Go to table 5-144. h (29).1 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-14, TDECC Check—Continued gy Nera edition Corrective procedure DISPLAY FRIENDS indicator-switch (21). Go to table 5-145. ACKNOWLEDGE indicator-switch (14). Go to table 5-140. ADCP POINTER INITIATE indicator-switeh (15). Go to table 5-141. ADCP POINTER CLEAR indicator-switeh (19). Go to table 6-142. TARGET READOUT indicator-switch (20). Go to table 5-146. AUTO FIRE mode indicator-switeh (18). Go to table 5-10. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 2-14 (RO panel). MANY indicator-switch (4). Go to table 5-53. FEW indicator-switch (6). Go to table 5-53. ONE indicator-switch (8). Go to table 5-53. BREAKLOCK indicator-switch (18). Go to table 5-55. HIGH indicator-switch (17). Go to table 5-26. LOW indicator-switch (15). Go to table 5-26. NARROW indicator-switch (13). Go to table 5-26. WIDE indicator-switeh (12). Go to table 5-26. ROTATE indicator-switch (11). Go to table 5-26. Set pre-illumination switch S2 (1, fig. 3-27) to the BRIGHT, DIM and MED positions. The illumination level of the items in step d above changes accordingly. Go to table 5-148.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-14. TDECC Check—Continued Set the pre-illumination switch to a desirable position. Close the power supply drawer. NOTE Go to table 5-67 in TM 9$-1430—1535—12—4—2 if none of the indicators listed in step A flashing. [cot tbieson [cototabeo Go to table 5-54. Go to table 5-63. Go to table 5-76. Go to table 5-130. Go to table 5-94. Go to table 5-209. Go to table 5-79. Go to table 5-73. Go to table 5-75. Go to table 5-80.; ‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-16, TDECC Check—Continued | Go to table 5-55. NOTE Go to table 5-160 in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—2 if none of the indicators listed in step i below are illuminated. | Go to table 5-9. Go to table 5-90. Go to table 5-91. Go to table 5-92. Go to table 5-43. Go to table 5-43. GoogTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-14. TDECC Check—Comtinued Corrective procedure Go to table 5-89. a pi 0 to table 5-78. : oe ee Go to table 5-53. 0 to table 5-53. |Go to table 5-7. 4‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-14. TDECC Check—Continued ALT METER label (21). Go to table 5-93, COORD CMPTR label (22). Go to table 5-66. HPI DSPL label (25). Go to table 5-76. DSPL OP/TST label (26). Go to table 5-7. LOW ALTITUDE meter (28). Go to table 5-93. GROUND SPEED meter (29). Go to table 5-95. ADCP ALTITUDE meter (23). Go to table 5-147. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 2-18 (T.0. panel). JAMMED label (1). Go to table 5-101. FRIENDLY TARGET label (60). Go to table 5-96. FIRING label (48). Go to table 5-98. LAUNCHERS 1/A/B/C indicator-switeh (47). Go to table 5-64. LAUNCHERS 2/4/B/C indicato Go to table 5-64. LAUNCHERS 3/A/B/C indicator-switch (44). Go to table 5-64. IN RANGE label (43). itch (48). Go to table 5 1/2/3/4 labels (41). Go to table 5-14. ALL label (40). Go to table 5-12.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table -14, TDECC Check—Continued Go to table 5-40., TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-14, TDECC Check—Continued Corrective procedure Go to table 5-40. Go to table 5-128. Cheek Sweep Symmetry. NOTE Adjustment of the sweep length is accomplished during system integration (table 11-9)with the CWAR in remote. Observe the PPI sweep on the PPI display. ‘The sweep starts at the center of the CRT, and is a constant length throughout 6400 mils. Go to table 5-128,column 30. 3-59 Google <TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 o Table 3-14. TDECC Check—Continued indicates 0000 mils. Rotate the SYMBOL CHECK switch to the + (SWEEP CAL Y) position. NOTE Disregard the command track ( (C) ) symbol if present. \ Center the manual target hook @_) symbol on the azimuth cursor at the same range as the center of the HAWK pointer (+) symbol (15, fig. 3-28). ‘The center of the (+) symbol is within the diameter of the ( @__) symbol. Go to table 5-153, column 2, reference A. Set the SYMBOL CHECK to the + (SWEEP CAL X) position. Rotate the AZIMUTH handwheel for 1600 mils on the azimuth counter. Center the ( @ ) symbol on the azimuth cursor at the same range as the center of the (+) symbol. ‘The center of the (+) symbol is within the diameter of the (_ @_) symbol.o TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-14. TDECC Check—Continued AS. Open the door on digital assembly A4 to allow access to the BITE switches (fig. 3-16). l i Set SYM GEN BITE switch J to indicate 1. A series of high speed test targets (16, fig. 3-28) appears near the 80 km range mark. Go to table 5-150. a Set switch J to indicate 0. ke Set the PPI DISPLAY circuit breaker on the TDECC power distribution panel to OFF. ‘The HVPS label flashes. Go to table 5-75. 3-60.1wav Google gleTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-14. TDECC Check—Continued Go to table 5-76. jing Generator BITE. Before removing or installing modules, deenergize the console. Set the DISPLAY OPERATE/TEST switch (2, fig. 2-17) to PROGRAMMED TEST. The DSPL OP/TST label illuminates, and the TEST label (20, fig. 2-12) flashes. Go to table 5-77. Set all the TMG GEN BITE switches on digital assembly A4 to indicate 0. The GO lamp (9, fig. 3-16) flashes. Go to table 5-68. Set switch A to indicate 11. The GO lamp extinguishes. Go to table 5-68. Set switch A to indicate 10. ‘The GO lamp is extinguished. Go to table 5-68. Set switch A to indicate 0. Check Symbol Generator BITE. Before removing or replacing modules, deenergize the console. Set all the SYM GEN BITE switches to indicate 0. The GO lamp (7. fig. 3-16) illuminates, but does not flash. Go to table 5-69. . 3-61 , GoogleTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-14. TDECC Check—Continued ‘Operation Nermettndteion _coractive procedure Set SYM GEN BITE switch A to indicate 1. The GO lamp extinguishes. Go to table 5-69. Set SYM GEN BITE switch A to indicate 0. Set switch J to indicate 1. The {FF SYNCH FAILURE label (33, fig. 2-12) flashes. Go to table 5-73. Set switch J to indicate 0, 10. s Check PPI/Sweep Generator BITE. NOTE Go to table 6-71 in TM 9—1480—1685—12—4—2 if an abnormal indication occurs while performing steps a through g below. Before removing or replacing modules, deenergize the TDECC. Set all the PPI/SWP GEN BITE switches to indicate 0. The GO lamp (5, fig. 3-16) is extinguished. Set PPI/SWP GEN BITE switch C to indicate 11. ‘The GO lamp illuminates, but does not flash. Set PPI/SWP GEN BITE switch B to indicate 11 and switch C to indicate 1. ‘The GO lamp flashes. Set PPI/SWP GEN BITE switch B to indicate 0. The GO lamp extinguishes. Set PPI/SWP GEN BITE switch B to indicate 1. The GO lamp remains extinguished. Set PPI/SWP GEN BITE switches B and C to indicate 0. Set the DISPLAY OPERATE/TEST switch on the BITE panel to OPERATE. The DSPL OP/TST and TEST label Close the door on the digital assembly. extinguish, 3-62—1535—12—1 Table 8-14. TDECC Check—Continued Corrective procedure NOTE Go to table 5-64 in TM 9—1430—1595—12—4—2 if an abnormal indication occurs while performing steps a through e below. ee ee ne Go to table 5-103 in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—2 if an abnormal indication occurs while performing steps a through d below. Adjust the SWEEP VERT variable resistor (8, nes 3-19) until the baseline is slined 2.5 em (1 in.) above the lower edge of the Her to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-63 Google cTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-14. TDECC Check—Continued Adjust the SWEEP LENGTH v: le resistor (5, fig. 3-19). _ Readjust the SWEEP INTENSITY control until the sweepis just visible. Adjust the ASTIGMATISM variable resistor (18, fig. 3-1 ail the Coes chain beclonet Oe Rotate the manual speed control fully cew. Rotate the ms speed control one full turn clockwise. Adjust INTENSITY control (4, fig. 3-19) until the marker is visible. After the marker is located, rotate the manual control until the marker is positioned on the right side oft IHIPIR spectrum analyzer display. Check IHIPIR Spectrum Display BITE. Go to table 5-103 in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—2 if an abnormal indication occurs while performing steps a through ¢ below. Open the RO panel and close the interlock switch. I] eter tosppendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-64TM 9—1430—1535—12 Table 3-15. TDECC Check—Continued Exercise extreme care to avoid contact with high voltage behind the RO panel when performing the following procedures, Failure to obeserve proper precautions may result in injury or death, 6 Set the MODE switch (2, fig. 3-17) on the spectrum analyzer BITE panel to 2 (FAIL). ‘The FAIL lamp (1, fig. 3-17) and the HPI DSPL label (25, fig. 2-12) on the status panel illuminate. The TEST label (20, fig. 2-12) flashes. Replace BITE card Al4 and/or Al5. a Set the MODE switch to 3 (NO FAIL). ‘The FAIL lamp extinguishes, the HPI DSPL label is illuminated, and the TEST label is flashing. Replace BITE card A14 and/or A15 and repeat steps b andc above. e Place the MODE switch to 1 (OPERATE). The HPI DSPL and TEST labels extinguish. 3-64.voveswGoogleTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-15. TDECC Check—Continued ‘Operation Norma indication Corrective procedure Close the RO control panel. *(AE)! Replace the TAS local control unit on the TDECC shelf. Go to table 6-93 in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—2 if an abnormal indication oceurs while performing steps 6 through g below. NOTE Go to table 5-72 in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—2 if an abnormal indication occurs while performing ‘steps 6 through d below. iRefer to appendix E for serial number effectivity.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 s Table t-14. TDR “ontinuedd a 3-66 Check Coordinate Computer. Open the coordinate computer drawer and close the interlock. Set the OPERATE/TEST switch (3, fig. 3-20) on the coordinate computer TEST. ‘The COORD CMPTR label (22. fig. 2-12) illuminates, and the TI fig. 2-12) flashes on the status panel. Go to table 5-66. Set the SELF TEST/CAL switch (2, fig. 3-20) on the coordinate computer BI SELF TEST/CAL. ‘The FAIL lamp (1, fig. 3-20} Go to table 5-83. Rotate the SELF TEST/CAL switch clockwise through its remaining positions. The FAIL indicator does not remain illuminated in each switeh Go to table 5-83. Set the OPERATE/TEST switch to OPERATE. ‘The COORD CMPTR and TEST labels e: Go to table 5-66 Close the coordinate computer drawer. Go to table 5-56 in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—2 if an abnormal indication occurs while performing steps a through / below. Google 4TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-14. TDECC Check—Continned rat initcton corrective procedure GTM 9—1430—1535—12-1 Table 3-14. TDECC Check—Continned ermal indication Go to table 5-43. Go to table 5-76. Check Receiver Logic BITE. NOTE ion occurs while performing steps a through y below, go to table 5-65 in TM9— and perform only the receiver logic checks. Open the digital assembly door and set the SERIAL DATA TEST/OPERATE switch (: 2-17) to TEST 1. The status panel DSPL OP/TST label illuminates and the TEST label Set the SER DATA ELEC BITE code switches (4 fig. 3-16) on the digital assembly panel to indicate all zero’s. The GO lamp (3, fig. 3-16) is extinguished. The SER DATA BITE OK lamp (37, fig. 2-12) on the status extinguished. TRefer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-66.2 Google19¢. Table 8-14. TDECC Chock—Continued ermal tntestion Corrective prosedure TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Set BITE code switches A through E to indicate 1 0 0 0 0 respectively. ‘The GO lamp is illuminated. ‘The SER DATA BITE OK lamp is illuminated. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 0 0 0 0. ‘The GO lamp is extinguished. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 1 0 0 0. ‘The GO lamp is illuminated. NOTE ‘The rate at which the GO lamp flashes may vary in the following checks. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 2 0 0 0. ‘The GO lamp flashes. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 3 0 0 0. ‘The GO lamp flashes. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 40 0 0. The GO lamp flashes. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 5 0 0 0. ‘The GO lamp flashes. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 6 0 0 0. The GO lamp flashes. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 7 0 00. ‘The GO lamp flashes. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 8 0 0 0. ‘The GO lamp flashes. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 9 0 0 0. The GO lamp flashes. Set the BITE code switches to indicate2 10 0 0 0. The GO lamp flashes. Set the SERIAL DATA TEST/OPERATE switch to TEST 2. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 10 1 0 0. The GO lamp flashes. Set the SERIAL DATA TEST/OPERATE switch to TEST 1. Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 10 2 0 0. The GO lamp flashes. 3-66.3TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table 8-14. TDECC Check—Continued Operation sep ermal indieaton Corrective procedare 198, Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 10 3 0 0. ‘The GO lamp flashes. t Set the BITE code switches to indicate2 10 4 0 0. The GO lamp flashes. u Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 10 5 0 0. The GO lamp flashes. ® Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 10 6 0 0. The GO lamp flashes. w. Set the SERIAL DATA TEST/OPERATE switch to TEST 3. 2 The following labels are flashing on the T.. control panel (fig. 2-13): RED, YELLOW, WHITE, ID CONFLICT and ENGAGE (13, 12, and 10). HOLD FIRE, CEASE FIRE, COVER, and CEASE ENGAGE (8, 9, 11, and 7). » ‘The following indicators are flashing on the status panel (fig. 2-12). ADCP DATA LINK FAILURE label (31). ADCP ALTITUDE meter lamp and ALTITUDE UNKNOWN label (23 and 24), #(L)! An audible tone (tone burst) is heard in the right earpiece of the RO headset at a rate equal to that of the flasher signal. 20. Check Transmit Logic BITE. a. Set the SERIAL DATA TEST/OPERATE switch to TEST 4. 6 Set the BITE code switches to indicate 2 10 7 0 0. e Set the MISSILE COUNT switch to NONE. NOTE Go to table 6-85 in TM 9—1480—1685—12—4—2 if an abnormal indication occurs while Performing stepe d through / (81) below. a Slowly rotate the MISSILE COUNT switch to positions A, AB, and ABC and observe the SER DATA BITE OK lampon the status panel for momentary illumination as described in thenote below. NOTE ‘When a rotary or alternate action switch is activated, the SER DATA BITE OK lamp must illuminate and then extinguish to satisfy the normal indication. Wait at least two seconds before changing thestate of the switch. ‘The SER DATA BITE OK lamp momentarily illuminates with the switch ined position. Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-66.410 TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-14. TDECC Check—Continued ‘Operation S00 ermal indleston Corretie pronatare We. Set the MISSILE COUNT switch to NORMAL. el *(AE)' Press the TAS EMCON/FORCED SILENT indicator-switch (1, fig. 2-18) on the TAS control unit to FORCED SILENT. ‘The GO lamp momentarily illuminates. £ Activate the following momentary indicator-switches on the T.O. control panel and observe the SER DATA BITE OK lamp for momentary illumination as described in the note below. NOTE When & momentary indicator-switch is pressed, the SER DATA BITE OK lamp must illuminate and then extinguish. Keep the switch pressed for at 2 seconds to insure that the SER DATA BITE OK lamp does not illuminate, and then release the switch. The lamp must again illuminate and extinguish. Wait at least 2 seconds to insure that the SER DATA BITE OK lamp does not illuminate before proceeding to next switch. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to fig. 2-13 unless otherwise specified. (1) | TERMINATE ENGAGE indicator-switch (54). (2) | KILL indicator-switeh (55). (3) | NO KILL indicator-switch (66). (4) | VITAL AREA INSERT indicator-switch (39). (6) | VITAL AREA CALL indicator-switch (37). (6) | HOSTILE indicator-switch (36). (1) | UNKNOWN indicator-switch (35). (8) | FRIEND indicator-switch (84). (9) | ENGAGE OTHER indicator-switch (29). (10) | REJECT indicator-switch (26). (11) | DISPLAY LOCALS indicator-switeh (23). Rafer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. I 3-66.5TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table$-14. TDECC Check—Continued (iz) qs) (4) (15) (16) an (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (28) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (81) DISPLAY REMOTES indicator-switch (24). ACKNOWLEDGE indicator-switch (14). DISPLAY FRIENDS indicator-switeh (21). DISPLAY HOSTILES/UNKNOWNS indicator-switch (22). ADCP POINTER INITIATE indicator-switch (15). ADCP POINTER CLEAR indicator-switch (19). TARGET READOUT indicator-switch (20). ADP LOOP TEST indicator-switch (18, fig. 2-12). Set MODE switch (41) to the fourth cw position (Mode 4) before proceeding. CHALLENGE indicator-switeh (51). NOTE ‘The SER DATA BITE OK lamp does not illuminate when the following indicatorswitches are released (except the TERMINATE ENGAGE indicatorewitch). Set status panel mode switch (12, fig. 2-12) to PLATOON TEST before proceeding. PLATOON TEST indicator-switch (14, fig. 2-12). ONE indicator-switch (8, fig. 2-14). Press TERMINATE ENGAGE indicator-ewitch. FEW indicator-switch (6, fig. 2-14). Press TERMINATE ENGAGE indicator-switch. MANY indicator-switch (4, fig. 2-14). Press TERMINATE ENGAGE indicator-ewitch. AUTO RANGE/MANUAL RANGE indicator-switch (21, fig. 2-14). AUTO RANGE/MANUAL RANGE indicator-switch to AUTO RANGE. The SER DATA BITE OK lamp momentarily illuminates as each indicator. switch is activated, as specified above. Set the SERIAL DATA TEST/OPERATE switch to OPERATE. Set the BITE code switches to indicate all zeros. 3-67TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 “ 15. ADP/TDECC Interface Check Operation Ll 12 13 14 NOTE Ifanabnormal indication occurs while performing the following check procedures, goto the appropriate Branch and Flow fault isolation table listed below in the corrective procedure column. Unlessotherwine indicated, the table appears in TM 9—1430—1635—12—4—2. Insure that the HIPIR is in LOCAL and that no checks are being performed at the HIPIR. *(AE)! Remove the TAS local control unit from the TDECC shelf. *(AD)! If ON, set the PPI DISPLAY circuit breaker to OFF and wait 10 seconds. *(AD)! Open the RO panel and close the interlock switch. Exercise extreme care to avoid contact with high voltage behind the RO panel when performing the following step. Failure to observe proper precautions may result in injury or death. *(AD)! Set the MODE switch (2, fig. 3-17) on the spectrum analyzer BITE panel to 3 (NOF! I iRefer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-6810 TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-15. ADP/TDECC Interface Check—Continued om Normal tndicaton Corrective prosadure 2 Set the PPI DISPLAY circuit breaker to ON. 3 Set the mode switch to ADP. The ADP label (10, fig. 2-12) is illuminated. Go to table 5-8. Press the TERMINATE ENGAGE indicator-switch. Press the BREAKLOCK indicator-switch. Press the RESUME FIRE/CEASE FIRE indicator-switch to CEASE FIRE. Press the NORMAL MODE indicator-switch to on (illuminated). Insure that the TEST ROTATE indicator-ewitch is off (extinguished). Set the AZIMUTH SECTOR START and AZIMUTH SECTOR STOP switches to 00. Set the ADP LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL. The ADP FAILURE label (32, fig. 2-12) is flashing. Go to table 5-158. L Set the DATA INPUT dial switches to 00000007. 2 Set and hold the +28 VDC LOCAL TEST switch to ON. The ADP FAILURE label is extinguished. Go to table 5-159. Release the +28 VDC LOCAL TEST switch. b Set the ADP LOCAL/REMOTE switch to REMOTE. Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switch. & Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and then the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. i Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. Serna we If it is necessary to terminate this procedure prematurely, the following steps must be performed. a. Press the TERMINATE ENGAGE indicator-switch. 6. Press the SINGLE INSTRUCTION indicator-switch. c. Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switch. d. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton. ¢. To reinitiate this procedure, repeat the steps in this table starting with step 1. 3-69TM 9—1430—1535—12— cc) 15. ADP/TDECC Interface Cheok—Continued ermal ndieation Oorrestive procedure 1 18. 19, 21. 3-70 NOTES ‘The key numbers below in parentheses refer to figure 2-13, unless otherwise specified. Perform the following checks exactly as specified (steps 18 thru 72). Disregard the observance of an extra dot symbol or strobe in the following checks. Press the TEST ROTATE indicator-switch to on (illuminated). NOTE In the following step, the commanded track symbol{©) will be displayed at the first three locations for approximately six (6) seconds. Verify each location with the azimuth mil counter, NOTE Go to table 6-156 in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—2 if an abnormal indication occurs while performing steps 18 through 72 below. Press the ADP LOOP TEST indicator-switch (18, fig. 2-12). The RED alert label illuminates. The commanded track symbol appears first at 700 to 900 mils; then movesto 2300 to 2500 mils; 3900 to 4100 mils; and then 5500 to 5700 mils. Press the DISPLAY REMOTES indicator-switch (24). The YELLOW alert label illuminates and the RED alert label extinguishes. ‘The commanded track symbol disappears. The remote unknown symbol ( \/_) appears at 700 to 900 mils, Press the DISPLAY HOSTILES/UNKNOWNS indicator-switch (22). ‘The WHITE alert label illuminates and the YELLOW alert label extinguishes. ‘The remote unknown symbol disappears. The remote hostile symbol (© —_) appears at 700 to 900 mils. Press the DISPLAY LOCALS indicator-switch (23). ‘The ID CONFLICT label (12) illuminates and the WHITE extinguishes. The local unknown symbol (© _) appears at 70010 900 mils. The remote hostile symbol disappears. Press the DISPLAY FRIENDS indicator-switch (21). ‘The CEASE FIRE label (10) illuminates and the ID, CONFLICT label & tinguishes. The remote friend symbol ( _) appears at 700 to 900 mils. The local unknown symbol disappears.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-15. ADP/TDECC Interface Check—Continued Nera intestion BR Press the TARGET READOUT indicator-switch (20). ‘The ALTITUDE UNKNOWN label (24, fig. 2-12) illuminates and the CEASE FIRE label extinguishes. ‘The command queue symbol ( ~ _) appears at 700 to 900 mile. ‘The remote friend eymbol disappears. Press the UNKNOWN indicator-switch (35). ‘The CEASE ENGAGE label (7) illuminates and the ALTITUDE UNKNOWN label extinguishes. ‘The command queue symbol disappears. Set the MODE switch to 4. If necessary, press the AUTO CHALLENGE OFF indicator-switch (7, fig. 2-12) so that it is pre-illuminated. Press the CHALLENGE indicator-switeh (51). ‘The CEASE ENGAGE label extinguishes. The platoon threat symbol (© _) appears at 700 to 900 mils. Press and hold the TARGET READOUT indicator-switch. The ADCP ALTITUDE meter (23, fig. 2-12) illuminates and indicates 9 to 11 km. The platoon threat symbol remains at 700 to 900 mils. Release the TARGET READOUT indicator-switch. ‘The ADCP ALTITUDE meter extinguishes. Press the HOSTILE indicator-switch (36). ‘The COVER label (11) illuminates. The neuter symbol (_7 ) appears at 700 to 900 mils. The platoon threat symbol disappears. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE indicator-switch (14). ‘The ENGAGE label (10) illuminates and the COVER label extinguishes. ‘The neuter symbol remains at 700 to 900 mils. Press the REJECT indicator-switch (25). ‘The HOLD FIRE label (8) illuminates and the ENGAGE label extinguishes. ‘The neuter symbol disappears. Press the ADCP POINTER INITIATE indicator-switch (18). The HOLD FIRE label extinguishes. The AADCP pointer symbol (+ _) appears at 700 to 900 mi 3-71TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Sep Table 3-15. ADP/TDECC Interface Check —Continued Operation Normal indication Corrective procedure { —.3b ees 84. 36. 87. 39.1 40. 41. 42. 3-72 Pregs the ADCP POINTER CLEAR indicator-switch (19). The ADP REQUEST label (6) is flashing. The AADCP pointer symbol disappears. Press the ADP REQUEST/ACCEPT indicator-switch (6). ‘The ADP REQUEST label extinguishes. The OSVA symbol (> _) appears at 700 to 900 mils, Press the REFUSE indicator-switch (5). The OSVA symbol disappears. The HIPIR track box symbol ( [1] _) appears at 700 t0 900 mils. Press the ENGAGE OTHER indicator-switch (29). ‘The track box symbol disappears. The local hostile symbol (© __) appears at 700 to 900 mils. Press the FRIEND indicator-switch (84). The local hostile symbol disappears. ‘The local friend symbol ( — _) appears at 700 to 900 mils. Press the MANUAL ASSIGN indicator-switch (26). The HAWK pointer symbol (+) appears at the hook symbol position. ‘The local friend symbol disappears. Position the manual target hook symbol ( @ ) to 20 km range at 800 mils azimuth. Press the ADCP POINTER INITIATE indicator-switch (15). The predicted intercept vector (PIV) appears at the center of the dipiy (41/4 inch) and extends to the center of the hook symbol (+ 1/4 iad). Press the VITAL AREA CALL indicator-switch (87). The PIV disappears. ‘The FRIENDLY TARGET label (60) illuminates. Press the AUTO SPEED/MANUAL SPEED indicator-switch (5, fig. 2-14). ‘The MANUAL SPEED label illuminates and the AUTO SPEED label extir guishes. Press the VITAL AREA INSERT indicator-switch (39). ‘The FRIENDLY TARGET label extinguishes. ‘The BREAKLOCK label starts flashing. The AUTO label (9, fig. 2-14) illuminates. The AUTO SPEED label illuminates. The MANUAL AZ/EL label extinguishes.Ui ™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-15. ADP/TDECC Interface Check—Continued Press the MANY indicator-switch (4, fig. 2-14). ‘The MANY label illuminates. ‘The BREAKLOCK label extinguishes. The AUTO label remains illuminated. ‘The MANUAL AZ/EL label remains extinguished. 45. Press the FEW indicator-switch (6, fig. 2-14). The FEW label illuminates. ‘The AUTO label extinguishes. ‘The HIPIR spectrum analyzer is operating in the short sweep mode. (If unable to view the intensified marker (2, fig. 3-29), turn the speed handwheel fully CCW.) 46. Press the ONE indicator-switch (8, fig. 2-14). ‘The ONE label illuminates. The HIPIR spectrum analyzer is operating in the short sweep mode and the intensified marker is moving on the baseline. 47. Set the mode switch to TEST. 48. Set the MISSILE COUNT switch (19, fig. 2-12) to ABC. ‘The A/B/C labels on the LAUNCHERS 1, 2, and 3 indicator-switches (47 45 and 44) illuminate. ‘The ADCP DATA LINK FAILURE label (31, fig. 2-12) starts flashing, 49. Press the RESUME FIRE/CEASE FIRE indicator-switeh (42). ‘The RESUME FIRE label illuminates. 50. Press the LAUNCHERS 1 indicator-switch (47). ‘The 1 label illuminates. 51. Simultaneously press and hold the AUTO RANGE/MANUAL RANGE, and AUTO SPEED/MANUAL SPEED indicator-switches until the AUTO label (9, fig. 2-14) illuminates. ‘The MANUAL RANGE label illuminates. ‘The MANUAL SPEED label illuminates. ‘The TEST FIRE OK label (18, fig. 2-12) starts flashing. ‘The FIRING label (48) illuminates. ‘The marker disappears from the spectrum analyzer sweep. 62. Press the AUTO RANGE/MANUAL RANGE indicator-switch, The AUTO RANGE label illuminates. 3-73TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table 8-15. ADP/TDECC Interface Check—Continued cd omnes orm indication orrestive prosedure 58. Press the AUTO FIRE mode indicator-switch (18). ‘The AUTO FIRE indicator switch illuminates, the TEST FIRE OK and AD? DATA LINK labels extinguish. ‘The FIRE label fully illuminates, 54. Press the LAUNCHERS 2 indicator-switch (45). ‘The 2 label illuminates. 55. Press the NORMAL mode indicator-switch (17). ‘The NORMAL indicator-ewitch illuminates. ‘The TEST FIRE OK label starts flashing. 56. Press the AUTO FIRE mode indicator-switch. ‘The TEST FIRE OK label extinguishes. 5. Press the NORMAL mode indicator-switch. The TEST FIRE OK label starts flashing. 58. Set the MISSILE COUNT switch to AB. ‘The TEST FIRE OK label extinguishes. The A and B labels of the LAUNCHERS 1, 2, and 3 indicators-ewitches Tuminate, and the C label extinguishes. ‘The FIRE label fully illuminates, 59. Press the LAUNCHERS 3 indicator-switch. ‘The 3 label illuminates. 60. Set the MISSILE COUNT switch to A. ‘The A labels of the LAUNCHERS 1, 2, and 3 indicator-ewitches illuminsie and the Band C labels extinguish. ‘The TEST FIRE OK label starts flashing. 61. Set the MISSILE COUNT switch to NONE. Alllabels on the LAUNCHERS 1, 2, and 3 indicator-witches extinguish. ‘The TEST FIRE OK label extinguishes. Deleted. Set the mode switch to PLATOON TEST. Press the PLATOON TEST indicator-switch (14, fig. 2-12). The PLATOON TEST indicator-switch starts flashing. The CEASE FIRE label (9) illuminates. 228 NOTE Insure that the RO communications panel POWER pushbutton is ON (i- luminated) and the RO headset ia connected. 3-7410 TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 Table 3-15. ADP/TDECC Interface Check Continued Operation om Normal indication _ 65. Set the ADP LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL. 66, Press the KILL indicator-switch (55). ‘The KILL indicator-switch illpminates for 8 to 12 seconds, then extinguishes. ‘The CEASE FIRE label is extinguished. ‘*(L)' Tone burst is heard on the RO headset. afer o appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-74110 31 B2 14, 5. 76. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-15. ADP/TDECC Interface Cheok—Continued Set the ADP AZIMUTH SECTOR START switches to 01 and the AZIMUTH SECTOR STOP switches to 16 (88 and 81, fig. 2-4). Press the NO KILL indicator-switch (56). The sector of interest is displayed for at least two scans. ‘The SECTOR GATE lamp (DTO #1) illuminates during sector of interest. The NO KILL indicator-switch illuminates for 8 to 12 seconds, then extinguishes. No tone burst is heard on the RO headset. Press the TERMINATE ENGAGE indicator-switch (64). ‘The CPU INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00077770. ‘The CPU DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 77777777. ‘Press the RESUME FIRE/CEASE FIRE indicator-switch (42). ‘The CEASE FIRE label illuminates. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00077771. ‘The DISPLAY REGISTER lampe display 77777777. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 00077772. ‘The DISPLAY REGISTER lamps display 77777777. Set the MISSILE COUNT switch to NORMAL. *(AD)' Set the MODE switch to 1 (OPERATE). '*(AD)! Close the RO panel. ‘*(AE)! Replace the TAS control unit on the TDECC shelf. If an SSR is installed the interface check is completed. If tape reader is installed, perform steps 75 through 80. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to 06044100. Press the EXECUTE INSTRUCTION pushbutton. The tape rewinds onto the left reel and stops at the block mark (see note). NOTE ‘The tape reader will stop two times. The first time set the SPOOLING switch to DISABLE, press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton, and then set the SPOOLING switch to ENABLE. The second time set the SPOOL- ING switch to DISABLE and remove the tape from the tape read head. Rewind the remainder of tape by hand. Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-75TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a 7. 78. 719. PARA eee 3-76 Table 8-15. “ADP/TDECC Interface Check—Continued Remove the tape reader cover. Set the SPOOLING switch to disable. Remove the tape from the tape read head and rewind the remainder of the tape by hand Remove the tape from the spindle and store. Table $-16. Return ADP to System Operation with SSR erst indestion Corrective prosedre Make certain that the tape printer AUTO switch (9, fig. 2-7) is in the off (up) position. NOTE If punched tape reader is installed in the ADP, proceed to table 8-17. Set the ADP LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL. Set the Solid State READER (SSR) power switch to ON. Power up the DTO drawers. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to 06044100. Set the SSR PROGRAM SELECTION dial switches to 024. Press the memory PARITY ERROR RESET AND LAMP TEST pushbutton. Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switch. Set the CPU RESET pushbutton and then press the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switth NOTE Do not press the CPU LAMP TEST pushbutton during, and following, the loading of the ‘operational program. If either situation should occur, the memory contents will be altered and the operational program must be reloaded. NOTE Fluctuations in input power may alter the contents of the memory. If it is observed or suspected that power fluctuation has occurred, reload the operational program. Goto table 6-57in TMS—-1490—-1635—12—4—Sifan abnormal indication occurs while performings low. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. ‘The SSR PROGRAM BEGIN lamp illuminates. ‘The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 06044100. ‘The CPU END, CADO1, and CADO4 lamps are illuminated, and the CAD ‘CADO3, 11-14, E1-E4, RUN, and HNG lamps are extinguished.10. un. 12, 18. 14. 15. 16. am PAP SA TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-16. Return ADP to System Operation with SSR—Continued ermal tndtestion Corrective procedure Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to read 06044022. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. NOTE Got table 6-58in TM 9—1490—1585—12—4—Bif an abnormal indication occurs while performing step Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. The SSR loads until the program is read into the computer memory. When the program is completely and correctly loaded, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER and DISPLAY REGISTER lamps indicate 00032746*(W)' or 00032442 *(V). ‘The SSR PROGRAM END lamp illuminates. Set the SSR power switch to OFF. Perform step 14 only ‘if operating in the ICC mode (battery configuration). Otherwise proceed to step 15, Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to read 66032225, Set the DATA INPUT dial switches to read 01004243. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to read 66032226. Set the DATA INPUT dial switches to read 50333304. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. Notify the tactical officer (T.O.) that the operational program is loaded and is ready to be activated. Upon direction of the T.O., perform the following procedure. Have the T.O. notify all personnel that the operational program is about to be activated and that radar antennas may slew. Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-761pores GOOIe_ +TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-16, Return ADP to System Operation with SSR — Continued ermal eden Corrective procedure 6a, Set the following switches as directed by the T.O. DTO DWR #1 DTO DWR #2 ICWAR INHIBIT BATTERY LATITUDE IPAR INHIBIT BATTERY LONGITUDE AZIMUTH SECTOR START DLRP LATITUDE AZIMUTH SECTOR STOP DLRP LONGITUDE (W)! ADP inhibit ALT x 100 FT (V)! Battery configuration STATION b Insure that the BCC A/D switch is set to OPERATE. 6. Set the LOCAL/REMOTE switch (27, fig. 2-4) to REMOTE. The SECTOR GATE lamp (34, fig. 2-4) flashes once every three seconds if the ICWAR antenna is rotating. 4 Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switch. *. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton. he Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton twice. The CWAR ENABLE, PAR ENABLE, IFF ENABLE, BCC 1 ENABLE, and BCC 2 ENABLE lamps illuminate, and the INSTRUCTION and DISPLAY REGISTER lamps flicker. Go to par. 2-8.1 and check for ADP looping. Go to table 6-59 in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4— if the above indications are not correct, or if the operational program is not executing properly. i. If the ADP halts, and the CPU TEST and OAR (unmarked) lamps are illuminated due to program integrity check failure, repeat steps 1 through 16. to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-77TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 o 9. 10. Table 3-17. Return ADE to System Operation with Tape Reader Normal ndteston | | Make certain that the tape printer AUTO switch (1, fig. 2-7) is in the off (up) position. Place operational tape 11510256-13 *(W)' or 11510256-11 *(V)' (red/red) reel on thelet tape reader spindle and lock the reel in place. Thread the tape over the tape guides, through the read head, and onto the take-up reel. S« the SPOOLING switch to ENABLE, NOTE If necessary, refer to step 8 in table 8-12 for the tape-threading procedure. Set the READER POWER switch to ON. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to read 06044042. Press the PARITY ERROR RESET/LAMP TEST pushbutton. | Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switch, the CPU RESET pushbutton, and the DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. | NOTE Do not press the CPU LAMP TEST pushbutton during, and following, the loading of the operational program. If either situation should occur, the memory contents will be altered and the operational program must be reloaded, NOTE Fluctuations in input power may alter the contents of the memory. If it is observed or sur pected that a power fluctuation has occurred, reload the operational program. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. ‘The tape reader runs to the first block mark and then stops. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to read 06044022. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. NOTE If the following normal indications are not observed, press the CPU RESET pushbutton and perform the automatic tape loading fault isolation procedures in table 5-46 of TM 9—1430—1535-12-3. I IRefer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-7811. 12, 13. ams Ao ee 4. 15. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-17. Return ADP to System Operation with Tape Reader—Continned Operation Corrective procedure The tape reader runs continuously until the program is read into the computer memory, and then stops. While the program is being read, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER is incre- menting, and the DISPLAY REGISTER is extinguished. When the program is completely and correctly loaded, the tape stops moving and the INSTRUCTION REGISTER and DISPLAY REGISTER lamps indicate 00032746 *(W)!' or 00032442 *(V)'. Set the SPOOLING switch to DISABLE. Set the READER POWER switch to OFF. Perform step 13 only if operating in the ICC mode (battery configuration). Otherwise proceed to step 14. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton and DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-switch. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to read 66032225. Set the DATA INPUT dial switches to read 01004243. Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to read 66032226. Set the DATA INPUT dial switches to read 50333304, Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton. Notify the tactical officer (T.O.) that the operational program is loaded and is ready to be activated. Upon direction of the T.O., perform the following procedure, Have the T.O. notify all personnel that the operational program is about to be activated and that radar antennas may slew. iReler to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-781vores Google __-er TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-17. Return ADP to System Operation with Tape Reader — Continued Set the following switches as directed by the T.O.: DTO DWR #1 DTO DWR #2 ICWAR INHIBIT BATTERY LATITUDE IPAR INHIBIT BATTERY LONGITUDE AZIMUTH SECTOR START DLRP LATITUDE AZIMUTH SECTOR STOP DLRP LONGITUDE (W)! ADP inhibit ALT x 100 FT (V)! Battery configuration STATION Insure that the BCC A/D switch is set to OPERATE. Set the LOCAL/REMOTE switch (27, fig. 2-4) to REMOTE. ‘The SECTOR GATE lamp (34, fig. 2-4) flashes once every three seconds if the ICWAR antenna is rotating, Press the DTO MANUAL RESET indicator-switch. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton. Press the START/STEP/PULSE pushbutton twice. The CWAR ENABLE, PAR ENABLE, IFF ENABLE,BCC 1 ENABLE, and BCC 2 ENABLE lamps illuminate. Go to par. 2-8.1 and check for ADP looping. 16. If the ADP halts, and the CPU TEST and OAR (unmarked) lamps are illuminated due to | program integrity check failure, repeat steps 1 through 15. "Rater to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-79TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table 3-18. IFF Check Nerval indiion Corrective procedure 3-80 NOTE Ifan abnormal indication occurs while performing the check procedures pertaining to the IF F receir- transmitter group, have the fault isolation procedures in TM 11—5895—532—12 performed. Otherwise. 40 to the appropriate Branch and Flow fault isolation table listed below in the corrective procedare column. Unless otherwise indicated, the table appears in TM 9—1490—1635—12—4—1. Do not set the MODE 4 switch (12, fig. 3-5) to the ZERO position unless directed. Check Coder-Decoder Group. Before proceeding with the following check procedures, insure that the IFF controls are set to the positions listed in table 3-5. Set the ANT SYNC switch (3, fig. 3-11) on the IFF antenna set control panel to INT. Make certain that the INT ANT SYNC switch (2, fig. 3-11) is set to 20 RPM CW. Check that the CODE SELECT MODE dial switches (1, fig. 3-5) on the IFF interrogators control panel are set to the proper operating code. Insure that the mode 4 test plug located in the KIR compartment (3, switeh (fig. 8-9) is set to STBY. Set the IFF TRIG SELECT switch (2, fig. 3-6) on the IFF electrical synchronizer panel to Set the IFF circuit breaker (14, fig. 2-1) on the power distribution cabinet to ON. Go to table 4-1. ‘The SYSTEM POWER lamp (4, fig. 3-8) group power control panel. Go to table 4-2. Set the IFF interrogator set control panel assembly POWER switch (13, fig. 3-5) to ON ‘The POWER lamp (14, fig. 3-5) illuminates. ‘The coder-decoder group blower motor operates. ‘The TOTAL HOURS elapsed time meter (1, fig. 3-8) on the power control pat operates. Set the MODE SELECT switch (7, fig. 3-5) to position 1. ‘The CODE SELECT MODE 1 switches (1, fig. 3-5) are illuminated. ‘The CODE SELECT MODE 2 and MODE 3A switches are not illuminaled Set the MODE SELECT switch to position 2. ‘The CODE SELECT MODE 2 switches are illuminated. ‘The CODE SELECT MODE 1 and MODE 3A switches are not illuminated 3-1) TEST SE juminates on the IFF coder-deceTM 9—1430—1535 Table 3-18. IFF Check—Continued Set the MODE SELECT switch to position 8A. ‘The CODE SELECT MODE 3A switches are illuminated. ‘The CODE SELECT MODE 1 and MODE 2 switches are not illuminated. Set the MODE SELECT switch to position 4. All CODE SELECT switches are not illuminated. On the IFF coder-decoder group signal processor panel: ‘The POWER lamp (10, fig. 3-10) is illuminated. NOTE Allow at least a 2-minute warm up period for clearing of all FAULT lamp indications on the signal processor panel. Rotate the METER SELECT switch (8, fig. 3-10) on the signal processor panel through the —5V, +5V and +12V positions. ‘The PWR SUP TEST meter on the signal processor panel indicates in the solid green area in each switch position. Rotate the METER SELECT switch to the MEMORY position. ‘The PWR SUP TEST meter indicates in the green area. Rotate the METER SELECT switch to the OUT position. Momentarily press each of the five FAULT lamps (8 through 7, fig. 8-10). Each FAULT lamp illuminates when pressed. On the IFF coder-decoder group electrical synchronizer panel: The POWER lamp (10, fig. 3-6) is illuminated. NOTE Allow at least » 2-minute warmup period for clearing of all FAULT lamp indications on the electrical synchronizer panel. Rotate the METER selector switch (4, fig. 8-6) through the —12V, +5V, and +12V positions. ‘The PWR SUP TEST meter on the electrical synchronizer panel indicates {in the solid green area in each switch position. Rotate the METER SELECT switch to the OUT position. Momentarily press each of the four FAULT lamps (6 through 8, fig. 8-6). Each FAULT lamp illuminates when pressed. On the IFF coder-decoder group power control panel : ‘The POWER lamp is illuminated. 3-81TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 6 Table $-18. IFF Check—Continuad SS, SO Normal tndtation Corrective procedure 1s, Rotate the METER selector switch (5, fig. 8-11) on the antenna control panel to the -I and +12V positions. The PWR SUP TEST/NULL meter indicates in the solid green area in ext switch position. Rotate the METER SELECT switch to the OUT position. Momentarily set the LAMP TEST switch (4, fig. 8-5) on the IFF interrogator set cain, Panel to the down position (lamp test). The following self test lamps (fig. 3-5) illuminate momentarily: RT (15) SYNC (16) PROC (17) ANT LAG (2) KIR (3) CHALLENGE (9) Set the PANEL illumination switch (6, fig. 3-5) to BRIGHT. ‘The IFF interrogator set control panel illumination increases. Set the PANEL illumination switch to OFF. The panel illumination lamps extinguish. Set the PANEL illumination switch to DIM. Check Receiver-Transmitter Group. Observe the IFF receiver-transmitter group panel: ‘The POWER lamp (17, fig. 3-14) is illuminated. ‘The receiver-transmitter group blower motor is operating. ‘The TOTAL HOURS elapsed time meter (1, fig. 3-14) is operating. Momentarily press each of the five FAULT lamps (8 through 7, fig. 8-14). Each FAULT lamp illuminates when pressed. 3-82TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Tables-18. IFF Check—Continued NOTE ‘The receiver-transmitter group contains an 80-second time delay. During this period, the self test R/T Jamp (15, fig. -6) will remain illuminated. Ifno faults are present in the receiver-transmitter group, the lamp will extinguish after the 80-second delay. Check IFF Antenna Rotation and Safety Switches. Insure that the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch (17, fig. 1-1) is set to SAFE. Set the POWER switch (9, fig. 3-11) on the antenna control panel to OFF. Set the INT ANT SYNC switch (2, fig. 3-11) on the antenna control panel to 0 RPM. Insure that the AZ DRIVE switch (17, fig. 1-3) on the IFF antenna pedestal is OFF. Make certain that the antenna hoisting unit (5, fig. 1-1) is in the stowed position before the IFF antenna is rotated. Set the SAFE/OPERATE switch to operate. Set the antenna control panel POWER switch to ON and the INT ANT SYNC switch to 20 RPM, The IFF antenna does not rotate. Go to table 4-3. ‘The IFF INTLK label (1, fig. 2-2) is illuminated. Go to table 4-4. Set the antenna control panel POWER switch to OFF and the INT ANT SYNC switch to ORPM. Set the SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE. Set the AZ DRIVE switch on the IFF antenna pedestal to ON.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Gs Table 3-18. IFF Check—Continusd sep oven ermal indieston Corrective procedure 3i. etl antenna control panel POWER switch to ON and the INT ANT SYNC switch to The IFF antenna does not rotate. Go to table 4-3. The IFF INTLK label is illuminated. Go to table 4-4. \ i ee ee antenna control panel POWER switch to OFF and the INT ANT SYNC switch to k Set the SAFE/OPERATE switch to OPERATE. Make certain all personnel are clear of the IFF antenna radius of rotation. L Set the antenna control panel POWER switch to ON and the INT ANT SYNC switch to 20 RPM. The IFF antenna rotates. Go to table 4-6. The IFF INTLK label is extinguished. Go to table 4-5. The POWER ECA lamp is illuminated. Go to TM 11-6895-632-12. The ANT LAG lamp is extinguished. Fo to TM 11-5895—632—12. 4 Setup IFF for System Operation. 3-84 Set the INT ANT SYNC ewitch on the antenna control panel to 0 RPM. The IFF antenna stops rotating. Set the ANT SYNC switch on the antenna control panel to EXT.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-18. IFF Check—Continusd Normal tndestion Corrective procedure Set the IFF TRIG SELECT switch to EXT. During tactical operation, do not set the CHALLENGE switch on the interrogator control assembly to the test position. The program track file will be altered and several scans will be required to reestablish the file. Check IFF System Operation. Set the IFF TRIG SELECT switch (2, fig. 3-6) on the coder-decoder group electrical synchronizer panel to EXT. Set the PROCESSOR switch (11, fig. 3-5) on the IFF interrogator set control panel to BYPASS. Set and hold the CHALLENGE switch (8, fig. 3-5) on the IFF interrogator set control panel to TEST. ‘The CHALLENGE lamp (9, fig. 3-5) remains extinguished. Go to table 4-7. All SELF TEST lamps (2, 3, 9, 15, and 17, fig. 3-5) are extinguished. Go to table 4-7. Normal IFF test video (fig. 3-30) is displayed on the TDECC CRT. Go to table 4-7. Release the CHALLENGE switch. Set the PROCESSOR switch to IN. Set and hold the CHALLENGE switch to TEST. ‘The CHALLENGE lamp remains extinguished. All SELF TEST lamps are extinguished. Eyelash IFF test video (fig. 3-31) is di Release the CHALLENGE switch. red on the CRT. 3.84.1TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 6 Table $-19. Multichannel Communications Station Check (US. Army) ‘The following communications station checks are performed by the radio relay attendant as signed to the ICC/IPCP. Fault isolation procedures are provided in TM 11-5895—453—14, NOTE (Checks in unshaded areas are performed monthly. 1 Check GRC-103(V) Radio Set (Fig. 3-36 and 3-37). a. Check that the RCVR CHANNEL, RCVR SIG and XMTR DUPL controls on the R-1329(P)} GRC-103(V) receiver are at the assigned channels. b Check that the XMTR CHANNEL and XMTR TUNE controls on the T-983(P)/GRC-103 (V) transmitter are at the assigned channels. \TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-19. Multichanrie! Communications Station Check (US Army)—Continued “Operation Rotate the transmitter meter selector switch to the 12V, 28V, and 60OV positions. ‘The meter indicates in the green area for each position. Rotate the transmitter meter selector switch to the OSC, DOUBLER, and MULT positions. The meter indicates hetween 25 and 90 percent of full seale in each position. Rotate the transmitter meter selector switch to the DRIVER position. Push in the transmitter PWR OUT PEAK control and tune for maximum indication on the meter (no adjustment for BAND II and III). ‘The meter indicates hetween 25 and 90 percent of full seale. Rotate the transmitter meter selector switch to the PWR OUT position, Pull out the transmitter PWR OUT PEAK knob and tune for maximum indication on the meter (no adjustment for BAND III). The meter indicates hetween 25 and 90 percent of full scale. (If the buzzer sounds, press the BUZZER OFF pushbutton). Rotate the transmitter meter selector switch to the REFL PWR position. ‘Tune the receiver XMTR DUPL control for a minimum indication on the transmitter meter. ‘The transmitter meter should indicate less than 20 percent of full seale. ‘The receiver XMTR CHANNEL ii signed channel number. Rotate the receiver meter selector switch to the XMTR DUPL position. licator is within 10 channels of the as The receiver meter indicates in the green area. , GoogleTH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table s- Multichannel Communications Station Check (US Army)—Continued ‘Operation [ermal tndestion Corrective procedure Rotate the receiver meter selector switch to the REFL PWR position. ‘The receiver meter indicates less than 20 percent of full scale. Rotate the receiver meter selector switch to the +12 V and —12 V}positions. ‘The meter indicates in the green area for each posit NOTE If the ALARMS SYNC lamp illuminates, wait until it extinguishes before proceeding. Rotate the receiver meter selector switch to the OSC and DOUBLER positions. The meter indicates hetween 25 and 90 percent of full seale for each pos: tion. Rotate the receiver meter selector switch to MULT and adjust the MULT PEAK contri for a maximum indication on the meter. ‘The meter indicates between 25 and 90 percent of full seale. ‘The ALARMS LOW SIGNAL lamp extinguishes if signal is being receive and the loud rushing sound heard in the H-60/PT also ceases. (If the bum sounds, press the BUZZER OFF pushbutton). Rotate the receiver meter selector switch to the RCVR SIG position. ‘The meter indicates between 25 and 90 percent of full scale. Refer to KAM-258A/TSEC for organizational maintenance monthly preventive maine nance services. GoogTM 9—1430—1535—12—-1 Table $-19. Multichannel Communications Station Check (US Army}—Continued, Rotate test selector switch I to the following positions and observe TEST ALIGN meter for the normal indications. Position +7. ‘Yellow area indication. Position +12. Hairline indication. Set test selector switch I to the +7 position and make certain the TEST ALIGN meter indicates in the yellow area. Then set the switch to +12 and adjust the 12 V control (loosen locknut first). Positions +4, —12, —6, and —4, Green area indications. Rotate test selector switch I to the SW III position. Rotate test selector switch III to the OSC position, Green area indication. a) (2) (3) 3-87 Google <TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-19. Multichannel Communications Station Check (US Army)—ContinuedTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-19. Multichannel Communications Station Check (US Army)—Continued Operation Seep ermal neato Corrective procedure q@ (2) @) (4) qa) (2) (3) (4) (5) Radio Antenna Alinement and Channel Gain Adjustment. NOTE This step is performed at the discretion of the radio relay attendant. Antenna Alinement. Rotate the receiver meter selector switch to the RCVR SIG position. Press the headset handswitch and request an order wire ring signal from the distant operator. Loosen, and rotate the radio antenna mast until: The receiver meter indicates maximum. Secure the radio antenna mast. Channel Gain Adjustment, Rotate TEST SELECTOR switch III to the MEAS position. Rotate TEST SELECTOR switch IV through all of the channel positions. Hairline indication for each channel except 10. Open the front cover and adjust the AG control on the A11A5 panel for the affected channel. Rotate TEST SELECTOR switch IV to the channel 10 position. Set the 2-WIRE/4-WIRE switch to 2-WIRE. ‘Hairline indication. Open the front cover and adjust the AG control for channel 10. Rotate TEST SELECTOR switches I through IV to the OFF position. Close and secure the front cover if removed. qa) (2) (8) (Check IPCP Operation as Remote Station. NOTE Perform this step when the IPCP is emplaced as a remote communications station. IPCP to ICC Repeater. Use the order-wire handset and establish inboard communications with the ICC radio relay attendant. Converse with the ICC radio relay attendant and coordinate a communications check through each channel of the system. Communications are obtained through each channel. Verify channel assignment of the ADL and voice circuits with the ICC radio relay attendant. Refer to figure 2-26 for the typical remote station channel utilization plan, IPCP to IPCP Repeater. ‘Same as a above except second IPCP is performing as a repeater in place of the ICC. 3-89TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-19. Multichannel Communications Station Check (US Army)—Continued — Beep Operation ermal tndtestion Corrertive procedure ee ee eee es qa) (2) (8) (4) qd) (2) (8) (4) Check IPCP Operation as Repeater Station. NOTE Perform this check if the IPCP is emplaced as a repeater communications station, IPCP to ICC (Outboard System no. 1) Converse with the outboard no, 1 AN/TRC-145 radio relay attendant and coordinate 1 communications check through each AN/TRC-146 radio channel and the IPCP patch pane Communications are obtained between the outboard no. 1 radio chanseh and the IPCP patch panel. ‘Use the order-wire handset and establish communications through the outboard systen no. 1 AN/TRC-145 radio set, to the ICC inboard radio relay attendant. Converse with the ICC radio relay attendant and coordinate a communications chet through each channel of outboard system no. 1. Communications are obtained through each channel of outboard system ms. Jand the ICC. Verify channel assignment of the ADL and voice circuits with the ICC radio relay attendant. Refer to figure 2-27 for the typical repeater station channel utilization plan. IPCP to IPCP (Outboard System no. 2). Perform step a above, utilizing outboard system no. 2 for communications with a rem IPCP. IPCP to BOC (Inboard System). ‘Use the order-wire handset and establish communications with the BOC radio relay atte dant through the IPCP inboard radio system. Converse with the BOC radio relay attendant and coordinate a communications chek through each channel of the inboard aystem. Communications are obtained through each channel of the inboard syste and the BOC. Verify channel assignment of the ADL and voice circuits with the BOC radio relay atte dant. Refer to figure 2-27 for the typical repeater station channel utilization plan, Verify other patch panel connections required for IPCP operation as a repeater station (Figure 2-27).TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-£0. Multichannel Communications Station Checks (USMC) ‘Operation ate Normal tnlestion Corrective procedure NOTE ‘The following communications station checks are performed by the radio relay attendant assigned to the ICC/IPCP. Fault isolation procedures and other information concerning the radio equipment are provided in TM 07272A/07273A-12. NOTE Perform the checks on both system no. 1 and system no. 2 (fig. 1-10). Check Energizing. Make certain that the two remote antenna cables (11, fig. 1-2) are connected to the AN- TENNA NO. 1 and NO. 2 connectors on the side of the CTU (2 and 8, fig, 2-21). Set the RADIO circuit breaker (7, fig. 2-1) on the power distribution control to on (up). Set radio set RT-624/VRC POWER switch (4, fig 8-88) to LOW or HIGH as required by distance conditions, ‘The dial lamps illuminate. NOTE Make certain that the two R-442 antenna cables are connected to shelter whip antennas AT-1829 no. 1 and no. 2 respectively. Set radio set R-442/VRC POWER switch (7, fig. 3-89) to ON-RESET. The dial lamps illuminate. ropes 2 Check Multiplex Local Test. Set the no, 1 (lower) telephone/telegraph terminal TH-81/GCC MODE switch (6, fig. 8-41) to TEST. Make certain all channel switches (1, 3, 6, and 7, fig. 3-41) are set to 4W. Set the HANDSET switch (2, fig. 3-41) to OW/TALK. Press the HANDSET switch and blow into the microphone. Loud sidetone is heard in the headset receiver. Set the HANDSET switch to MON. Set the MONITOR switch (4, fig. 3-41) to TEL 1. Press the HANDSET switch and blow into the microphone, Loud sidetone is heard in the headset receiver. Repeat steps f and g above for the TEL 2, 8, and 4 positions, Loud sidetone is heard in each switch position. Set the MONITOR switch to OFF. Set the HEADSET switch to OW/TALK. Set the MODE switch to MUX. Repeat steps a through k above for the no. 2 (upper) telephone/telegraph terminal TH- 81/GCC. Set the no, 2 telephone/telegraph terminal TH-81/GCC channel switches 2, 3, and 4 to 2W after the checks have been completed. 3-91TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $20. Multichannel Communications Station Checks (USMC)—Continued ‘Operation ermal indication Corrective procedure ‘Check Order-Wire Communications. NOTE If contact cannot be made with the TAOC (system no, 1) or remote platoon (system no. 2) radio relay attendant on the multiplexed order-wire channel, perform the simplex and duplex communications procedures in TM O7272A/07278A-12. Make certain that the terminal set control C-7827/VCC MODE switch (2, fig. 3-40) iswt to position 4. Set the no. 1 telephone/telegraph terminal TH-81/GCC MODE switch to MUX. Set the HANDSET switch to OW/TALK. Set the MONITOR switch to OW. Operate the press-to-talk switch on the handeet. Communications are established with the TAOC or remote platoon rade relay attendant on the order-wire channel. Converse with the radio relay attendant to insure proper switch settings for an order-win ring. ‘Momentarily set the HANDSET switch to OW/RING. ‘The radio relay attendant acknowledges the ring signal. Request a ring from the radio relay attendant. A ring signal is heard in the headset receiver. q@ (2) (a)| (b) (ec) 3-92 Check ICC/IPCP Operation as Remote Platoon Station. NOTE | Perform this step when the ICC/IPCP is emplaced as a remote platoon communications | station. | ICC/IPCP to Repeater Station (System No. 2). | Use the order-wire handset and establish communications with the remote repeater statia radio relay attendant through system no. 2. Coordinate a communications check with the repeater station through each channel ¢ system no. 2 as follows: ‘Transfer the order-wire handset from the terminal set control C-7827/VCC HANDSET TERM 1 RT 1 connector (1, fig. 8-40), to the lower telephone/telegraph terminal TH-1/ GCC HANDSET connector (9, fig. 3-41). Set the lower TH-81/GCC MONITOR switch to position 1. Communications are obtained through channel 1 of system no. 2. Repeat (b) for positions 2 through 4 (channels 2 through 4).40(2) (@) (e) Ca) (9) (8) qd) (2) (8) TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Tabie 8-20. Multichannel Communications Station Checks (USMC)—Continued Xevmal tnitetten Corrective provadare ‘Transfer the order-wire handset to the upper TH-81/GCC HANDSET connector, ‘Set the upper TH-81/GCC MONITOR switch to position 1. Communications are obtained through channel 5 of system no. 2. Repeat (e) above for positions 2 through 4 (channels 6 through 8). ‘Transfer the order-wire handset back to the terminal set control C-7827/VCC HANDSET TERM 1 RT 1 connector. Verify channel assignment of the ADL and voice circuits with the remote repeater station radio relay attendant. Refer to figure 2-32 for the channel utilization plan. Any changes to the normal channel assignments resulting from additional patch panel modifications using patch cords (par. 2-29) must be recorded and forwarded to the remote repeater station. IPCP to TAOC (System No. 1). Perform this step only if the ICC/IPCP aystem no. 2 communications with the remote re- eater station are inoperative (step @ above), ‘Use the order-wire handset and establish communications with the TAOC radio relay attendant through system no. 1. Coordinate a communications check through each channel of system no. 1 with the TAOC radio relay attendant as performed in step a(2) above. Communications are obtained through each channel of system no. 1 and TAOC. Verify channel assignment of the ADL and voice circuits with the TAOC radio relay attendant. Refer to figure 2-80 for the channel utilization plan. Any changes to the normal channel assignments resulting from patch panel modifications using the patch cords (par. 2-29) must be recorded and forwarded to the TAOC. qa) (2) (a) Check ICC/IPCP Operation as Repeater Station. NOTE Perform this step when the ICC/IPCP is emplaced a ICC/IPCP to TAOC (System no. 1). Use the order-wire handset and establish communications with the TAOC radio relay attendant through system no. 1. Coordinate a communications check with the TAOC through each channel of system no, 1 as follows: ‘Transfer the order-wire handset from the terminal set control C-7827/VCC HANDSET TERM 1 RT 1 connector (1, fig. 8-40), to the lower telephone/telegraph terminal TH-81/ GCC HANDSET connector (9, fig. 8-41). repeater communications station.‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-20. Multichannel Communications Station Checks (USMC)—Continued ‘Operation ~ ermal tdhaton Corrective prosadure Sa (2) (b) | Set the lower TH-81/GCC MONITOR switch to position 1. Communications are obtained through channel 1 of system no. 1. (c) | Repeat (b) above for positions 2 through 4 (channels 2 through 4). (a) | Transfer the order-wire handset to the upper TH-81/GCC HANDSET connector. (e) | Set the upper TH-81/GCC MONITOR switch to position 1. Communications are obtained through channel 5 of system no. 1, (1) | Repeat (e) above for positions 2 through 4 (channels 6 through 8). (g) | Transfer the order-wire handset back to the terminal set control C-7827/VCC HANDSEI TERM 1 RT 1 connector. (8) | Verity channel assignment of the ADL and voice circuits with the TAOC radio rehy attendant. Refer to figure 2-81 for the normal repeater station channel utilization phn Any changes to the normal channel utilization plan resulting from patch panel modification using the patch cords (par. 2-29), must be recorded and forwarded to the TAOC. b ICC/IPCP to Remote Platoon Station (System No. 2). (1) | Use the order-wire handset and establish communications with the remote platoon statin radio relay attendant through system no. 2. (2) | Coordinate a communications check through each channel of system no. 2 with the rem | platoon station radio relay attendant as performed in step (2) above. Communications are obtained through each channel of system no. 2 and te | remote platoon station. (8) | Verity channel assignment of the ADL and voice circuits with the remote platoon statin radio relay attendant. Refer to figure 2-31 for the normal repeater station channel utilin- tion plan. Any changes to the normal channel utilization plan resulting from patch pand modifications using the patch cords (par. 2-29), must be forwarded to the remote platom , station, (4) | Verify other patch panel connections required for ICC/IPCP operation as a repeater station (fig. 2-81). 3.94TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 3-21. IPCP Communications Check Nemeltndiewion corrective procure NOTE If an abnormal indication occurs while performing the following check procedures, goto the appropriate Branch and Flow fault isolation table listed below in the correetive procedure column. Unless otherwise indicated, the table appears in TM 9—1430—1535—12—4—1. Do not connect or disconnect the headsets from their respective connectors unless the RO, T.0., IFF, and IPCP communications stations are shut off. Check T.0./RO Loop. Press and release the POWER pushbutton (13, fig. 2-16) on the RO communications panel. The POWER pushbutton illuminates. Go to table 2-1. e BUS TALK SELECTOR switches (13, and 15, figs. 2-15 and 2-16) to the red color Positions (refer to the note below). NOTE ‘The following communications checks specify the red color positions for the various bus selector switches on the T.0. and RO communications panels. Periodically, the other bus selector positions (green and amber) should also be selected when performing the checks. Adjust the VOL R controls (8 and 2, figs. 2-15 and 2-16) to midposition. Press and lock the push-to-talk switch on the T.O. and RO headset cables. Communications are established between the T.0. and RO and heard in the right carpieces. Sidetone is also present in the right earpieces. Go to table 2.6. Check IFF Loop. WARNING Failure to perform the following step may cause injury to personnel. Antenna may rotate. Set the IFF antenna SAFE-OPERATE switch to SAFE and the IFF antenna pedestal AZ DRIVE switch to OFF (SAFE). Set the T.O. and RO communications panels bus selector switches (2, 4,6 and 15, fig. 2-14, and 4, 6, 8 and 12, fig. 2-16) to their off (ecw) positions. Connect a headset to connector J8 (8, fig. 2-10) on the IFF communications station (4, fig. 1-1). Set the IFF communications station 10288848 POWER or 10291990 PWR switch (3, fig. 2-10) to ON. Press and lock the IFF headset cable push-to-talk switch and adjust the IF F communications station VOL control (1, fig. 2-10) for a comfortable level. Go to table 3-1. 3-95TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table $-21. IPCP Communications Check—Continued oa Normal Indication Corrective precede reli 3-96 Set the SWBD TALK/HOT TALK switch (16, fig. 2-2) to SWBD TALK. Set the switchboard alarm switch (4, fig. 3-4) to VIS. Set the IPCP communications station 10288848 (16, fig. 1-4) POWER or 10291990 PWR switch to ON. Press and lock the switchboard operator's headset line cord switch and adjust the communic- tions station VOL control for a comfortable level. Go to table 3-2. Patch the IPCP patch cord (8, fig. 8-4) into the IFF line pack jack (15, fig. 3-4). Set either the T.O. or RO IFF bus selector switch to the red color position. Momentarily press the IPCP communications station RING switch (2, fig. 2-10). Ringing (onalert) is heard at the TDECC, the IFF call lamps (1 and 7, figs.2-15, and 2-16) illuminate, and ringing is heard in the T.O. and RO headsets. Go to table 8-3. Ringing is heard at the IFF communications station and in the IFF operator’ headset. Go to table 3-4. Communications are established between the IFF and switchboard operator. Go to table 3-14. Direct the IFF operator to wait a few seconds and then to momentarily press the RING switch on the IFF communications station. During this time remove the patch cord from the IFF line pack and insert it into the IPCP line pack to reset the flag. Set the IF F bus selector switch to OFF (CCW). ‘The IFF line pack signal flag is activated and the night alarm lamp (6,fig-3-4)is illuminated. Go to table 3-10. Continuous ringing (sonalert) is heard at the TDECC, the IFF lampe sre iMuminated, and ringing is heard in the T.O. and RO headsets. Go to table 9-11. Set the T.0. and RO IFF bus selector switch to the red color position. ‘The ringing stops and the IFF lamps extinguish. Go to table 8-12. Communications are established between the IFF, T.O. and RO. Patch the IPCP patch cord into the IFF line pack. ‘The IFF signal flag is deactivated and the night alarm lamp extinguishes. Go to table 8.13. Communications are established between the switchboard operator, IFF, T.0. and RO, Insure the IFF communications station 10288848 POWER switch is ON.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table $-21. IPCP Communications Cheok—Continued Set the IFF communications station 10291990 PWR switch to OFF. ‘Set the IFF bus selector switches to off (ccw). Cheek TDECC Loop. Patch the IPCP patch cord into the TDECC/IBCC line pack jack (16, fig. 3-4). Momentarily press the IPCP communications station RING switch. Continuous ringing is heard at the TDECC, and the ICC lamps (16 and 11, figs. 2-15 and 2-16) are illuminated. Go to table 3-5. Set the ICC bus selector switch on either the T.O, or RO communications panelsto the red color position. ‘The ringing stops and the ICC lamps extinguish. Go to table 3-6. Communications are established between the switchboard operator, T.O. and RO. Go to table 3-7. Remove IPCP patch cord from TDECC/IBCC line pack and insert it into the IPCP line pack to reset the flag. Momentarily press the RING BTRY pushbutton (12, fig. 2-15) on the T.O. communications panel. The TDECC line pack signal flag is activated and the night alarm lamp illuminates. Go to table 3-8. Patch the IPCP patch cord into the TDECC/IBCC line pack. The TDECC signal flag is deactivated and the night alarm lamp extinguishes. Communications are established between the switchboard operator and T.O. Repeat steps d through f above for the RO. Go to table 3-9. Remove the IPCP patch cord from TDECC/IBCC line pack. Insure the IPCP communications station 10288848 POWER switch is set to ON. Set the IPCP communications station 10291990 PWR switch to OFF. Set the ICC bus selector switch to off (ecw). Check Hot Line Primary Communications. Set the HOT selector switch (7, fig. 2-2) to HOT PRIM. ‘The HOT PRIM label (8, fig. 2-2) illuminates. Go to table 3-15. Set the HOT LISTEN/OFF switch to HOT LISTEN. 3-97TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table 8-21. IPCP Communications Check—Continued Corrective prowdare Set the SWBD TALK/HOT TALK switch to HOT TALK. Contact the BOC per SOP and request communications with the platoon. Go to table 3-16. Inform the BOC of the following ring-up check. Press and hold the RING HOT pushbutton (6, fig. 2-2) on the auxiliary unit for two seconds ‘The BOC receives a ring on the hot line. Go to table 3-17. Set the BUS TALK SELECTOR switches on the T.O. and RO communications panels toH0. Communications are established between the T.O. and RO, and the BOC. Go to table 2-18. Inform the BOC of the following ring-up check. Press and hold the HOT RING pushbutton (9, fig. 2-15) on the T.0. communications panel for two seconds. ‘The BOC receives « ring on the hot line. Go to table 3-19. *(AB)' Direct the BOC to ring the platoon on the HOT line. *(AB)' The HOT CALL lamp (10, fig. 2-15) on the T.0. communication panel flashes. Ringing (sonalert) is heard at the TDECC, and = audible tone is heard in the T.O. right earpiece. Go to table 3-19.1. Inform the BOC that the primary hot line checks are complete. Check IRR Primary Communications. Set the IRR selector switch (12, fig. 2-2) to IRR PRIM. The IRR PRIM label (10, fig. 2-2) illuminates. Go to table 3-20. Contact the BOC per SOP and request communications with the platoon. Set the BUS TALK SELECTOR switch on the RO communications panel to IRR. Communications are established between the RO and BOC. Go to table 3-23. Inform the BOC of the following ring-up check. Press and hold the IRR RING XMIT pushbutton (18, fig. 2-16) on the RO communications panel for two seconds. ‘The BOC receives a ring on the IRR line. Go to table 3-21. “Theater to anoendi | aero tr sr sumer 3-98' TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-21. IPCP Communications Check—Continued f *(AB)' Direct the BOC to ring the platoon on the IRR line. *(AB)' The IRR CALL lamp (18, fig. 2-16) on the RO communications panel flashes. Ringing (sonalert) is heard at the TDECC, and an audible tone is heard in the RO right earpiece. Go to table 3-20.1 0 Inform the BOC that the IRR primary checks are complete. h Set the HOT LISTEN/OFF switch to OFF. i Set the SWBD TALK/HOT TALK switch to SWBD TALK. s Cheek HOT Secondary Communications. a Set the HOT selector switch on the auxiliary control unit to HOT SEC. The HOT SEC label (9, fig. 2-2) on the auxiliary control unit illuminates. Go to table 3-22. The HOT SEC MODE lamp (11, fig. 2-15) on the T.O. communications panel illuminates. Go to table 3-22. 6 Patch the operators cord into the hot secondary line pack (12, fig. 3-4). « Set the switchboard ringing switch to RING BACK and turn the ring crank several times. The HOT CALL lamp on the T.O. communications panel illuminates. Go to table 3-24. a Set the BUS TALK SELECTOR switch on the T.O. communications panel to HOT. ‘Communications are established between the T.O. and switchboard operator. Go to table 3-25. NOTE In the following step the HOT XMIT pushbutton (9, fig. 2-15) on the T.0. communications panel is pressed only when talking. e@ Press the HOT XMIT pushbutton on the T.O. communications panel. Communications between the T.O. and remote AN/GRC-106 radio operator are ‘established on the hot secondary line via the AN/GRA-6. Go to table 3-26, f Set the BUS TALK SELECTOR switch to OFF. go Set the HOT selector switch on the auxiliary control unit to HOT PRIM. afer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 3-98.1TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table 3-21. IPCP Communications Chech—Continued 1 Cheek IRR Secondary Communications. a Set the IRR selector switch on the auxiliary control unit to IRR SEC. ‘The IRR SEC label (10, fig. 2-2) illuminates. Go to table 3-27. ‘The IRR SEC MODE lamp (16, fig. 2-16) on the RO communications pad iluminates. Go to table 3-27, b Patch the operators cord into the IRR secondary line pack (11, fig. 8-4). 3-98.2Th 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 2-81. IPCP Communications Check—Continued Set the switchboard ringing switch to RING BACK and turn the ring crank several times. The IRR CALL lamp (17, fig. 2-16) on the RO communications panel iMluminates, Go to table $28, I Set the BUS TALK SELECTOR switch on the RO communications panel to IRR. Communications are established between the RO and switchboard operator. Go to table 8-29. NOTE In the following step the IRR RING XMIT pushbutton (18, fig. 9-16) on the RO communications panel is pressed only when talking. Press the IRR XMIT pushbutton on the RO communications panel. Communications between the RO and remote AN/GRC-106 radio operator are established on the IRR secondary line. Go to table 8-80. I Set the BUS TALK SELECTOR switch to OFF. Patch the operators cord into the operators line pack. Set the IRR selector switch on the auxiliary control unit to IRR PRIM. 3-99TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table -£2. ICC Communications Check L b 3-100 Normal ndteaton Corrective prosedare NOTE If an abnormal indication is obtained when performing the following check procedures, perform the fault isolation procedures in TM 9—1430—1635—12—3, Cheek Telephone Communications. Make certain that the AZIMUTH DRIVE SAFE switch on the IFF antenna pedestal and the ANT SAFE-OPERATE switch on the battery maintenance and administration net antenna are set to SAFE. Connect a headset to connector J3 (6, fig. 2-10) on the IFF communications station (4, fig. 1-1). Set the IFF communications station 10288848 POWER or 10291990 PWR switch (3, fig. 2-10) to ON. Press and lock the IFF headeet line cord switch and adjust the IFF communications station VOL control (1, fig. 2-10) for a comfortable level. Set the SWBD TALK/HOT TALK switch (15, fig. 2-2) to SWBD TALK. Set the switchboard ALARM switch to VIS. Set the ICC communications station 10288848 (16, fig. 1-4) POWER or 10291990 PWR switch to ON. Press and lock the switchboard operator's headset line cord switch and adjust the ICC communications station VOL control for a comfortable level. Patch the ICC patch cord (8, fig. 8-4) into the IFF line pack jack (15, fig. 3-4). Momentarily press the ICC communication station RING switch (2, fig. 2-10). Ringing is heard at the IFF communications station and in the IFF operster’s headset. Communications are established between the IFF and switchboard operster. Direct the IFF operator to wait a few seconds and then to momentarily press the RING switch. During this time, remove the patch cord from the IFF line pack and insert it inte the ICC line pack to reset the flag. ‘Observe that the IFF signal flag is activated and the night alarm and light switch lamp (6, fig. 3-4) is illuminated. Patch the ICC patch cord into the IFF jack. The IFF signal flag is deactivated, the night alarm and light switch lamp extinguishes and voice communications is established between the IFF ssid the switchboard operator.™ 9 Table $.£2. ICC Communications Cheok—Continued 430—1535—12—1 Insure the POWER switch on the 10288848 IFF communications station is ON. Set the PWR switch on the 10291990 IFF communications station to OFF. Remove the ICC patch cord from the IFF jack. (Check Hot Line Primary Communications. Set the HOT selector switch to HOT PRIM, Set the HOT LISTEN/OFF switch to HOT LISTEN. Set the SWBD TALK/HOT TALK switch to HOT TALK. Contact the BOC per SOP and request communications with the battery. Inform the BOC of the following ring-up check. Press and hold the auxiliary control unit RING HOT pushbutton (6, fig. 2-2) for 10 seconds. ‘The BOC receives a ring indication on the hot line. Cheek Hot Line and IRR Secondary Interface with IBCC. Inform the IBCC of the following checks. Set the HOT selector switch to HOT SEC. Set the HOT LISTEN/OFF switch to OFF. Set the SWBD TALK/HOT TALK switch to SWBD TALK. Patch the operators cord into the HOT SEC line pack. Set the switchboard ringing switch to RING BACK and turn the ring crank several times. At the IBCC the HOT CALL lamp illuminates and communications are established between the IBCC and ICC. Set the IRR selector switch to IRR SEC. Patch the operators cord into the IRR SEC line pack. Set the ringing switch to RING BACK and turn the ring crank several times. At the IBCC the IRR CALL lamp illuminates and communications are established between the IBCC and ICC. Patch the operators line cord to the operators line pack. ? 3-101T 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Section This section contains the illustrations support- possible, according to the requirements of th | ing the operator and organizational maintenance check procedures, to clarify the text and fun check procedures for the ICC/IPCP. The illustra- _iarize the operator with the location of conn tions are presented in logical order, wherever and indicators, ILLUSTRATIONS 3-102TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 oo [74 086 00000 © s 6 2 ° s MI 70694A 1-IFF receiver-transmitter group 5—Coder-decoder group antenna control panel ‘2Coder-decoder group power control panel @Coder-decoder group electrical synchronizer panel ‘3-KIR computer and mode 4 test plug compartment _7—IFF coder-decoder group 4-Coder-decoder group signal processor panel Figure 8-1. IFF assembly. 3-103T™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 RED LINE RED RED RED LINE POWER SUPPLY POWER DISTRIBUTION CABINET BITE METER MONITOR 416V METER (TDECC) (PCP) MS 157059 Figure $-2. Meter colored areas, 3-104TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 KECO/HOTTLE MI 706844, 1-TEMP control Figure $-8. Air conditioner remote control box — controls. 3-105TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 1-Switchboard no. 2 (line packs 13-29 (left to right) go to CTU) 2-Ring crank 3-Ring switch 4—Alarm switch 5—Operator's cord @—Night alarm lamp ‘7—Bpare line pack (goes to patch panel TEL DROP 12 jack) 8HICC/IPCP operator's line pack 9-Patch panel line pack (goes to patch panel TEL DROP 10 jack) 10—Hot (primary) ring line pack LIAR (secondary) radio line pack 12-HOT (secondary) radio line pack 18—Spare line pack (goes to patch panel TEL DROP 6 jack) 14-BOC (TAOC) line pack (goes to patch panel TEL DROP 6 jack) 16—IFF line pack 16~TDECC/IBCC line pack 17—Spare line pack (goes to patch panel TEL DROP 2 jack) 18—-BOC (TAOC) maintenance line pack (goes to patch panel TEL DROP 1 jack) 19-Switchboard no. 1 Figure $-. Switehboard SB-#2A/PT — controle, jacks, and indicators.‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 -—————_ Coo sehect-] MODE 3/4 PROCESSOR SIF REPLIES CHALLENGE IN copes TEST 7 © BYPASS MI 70697 1-CODE SELECT MODE dial switches 10-SIF REPLIES switch 2-ANT LAG lamp 11-PROCESSOR switch 3-KIR lamp 12-MODE 4 switch 4-LAMP TEST ewitch 18-POWER switch 8-STROBE switch 14~POWER lamp 15—Self test R/T lamp 1-MODE SELECT switch 16—Self test SYNC lamp §—CHALLENGE switch 17—Belf test PROC lamp 9—CHALLENGE lamp Figure $-5. IPF interrogator aet control ~ controle and indicators, 3-107T 9—1430—1535—12—1 \FF TRIG SELECT wasup TEST ext 290 440 cyano Lot GH oyizY *8¥ 2, POWER —— FauLT r 4 IEF TRIG TIMING Cope: on DECObe! 10 9 8 7 ‘ 5 4 1-COUNT DOWN switch 2-IFF TRIG SELECT switch }-PWR SUP TEST meter |-METER selector switch 5-INTERFACE FAULT lamp 6-CODER DECODER FAULT lamp 7-TIMING FAULT lamp 8-IFF TRIG FAULT lamp 9_POWER switch 10-POWER lamp Figure 8-6. IFF coder-decoder group electrical synchronizer panel—controle and indicators,TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MI 70701 1-TAIL/EYELASH switch 2-DELAY switch 3-PARALLEL/SERIAL switch 4-SPECIAL/NORMAL switch Figure 3-7. IFF coder-decoder group slectrical synchronizer assembly-internal controle, 3-109TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 SYSTEM POWER /OICE. [—toun—1 1-TOTAL HOURS elapsed time meter 4-VOICE COMM jacks 2-SYSTEM POWER awitch 4-8YSTEM POWER lamp Figure $-8. LFF coder-decoder group power control panel—controls and indiestore. 3-110TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 157653 Figure 8-9, Mode 4 test plug. ao =— ow PRIMA MI 70698 1-PWR SUP TEST meter 2-RESET pushbutton 3—FRIEND FAULT lamp “ARGET FAULT lamp 8-SENSE FAULT lamp 6-INHIBIT FAULT lamp ‘7-TIMING FAULT lamp 8-METER SELECT ewitch 9-POWER switch 10-POWER lamp Figure 3-10. IFF coderdecoder group signal processor pane}controls and indicators.T™ 9—1430—1535—12—-1 ANTISYNC Pwr surfrest/wuLe, a ® M , eee © 0 ovis te seul Tg 2 a8 ” POWER -POWER— FAULT ECA © @ ‘| \ MI 70 1-AZ ADJ synchro 2-INT ANT SYNC awitch, “ANT SYNC switch PWR SUP TEST/NULL meter 5—METER selector switch 6-PAULT ANT LAG lamp 1-POWER ECA switch 8-POWER ECA lamp 9_POWER switch 10-POWER lamp Figure 3-11. IFF coderdecoder group antenna control pene!—controls and indicators. 112TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 CARD PULLER DANGER iS _VAC = ™ : a 4 = I So = Tih MI 70702A IL EXT REF FREQ switch ‘3--A2J1-5 (5th pin from left as viewed from front 2-8YNCHRO REP xwitch of unit) Figure 3-12, IPF coderdecoder group antenna control assembly—intemal controls. 3-113TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a WARNING > - 1@ 5, nw ze S300 oO : 4 @ - © ORE 2 Ty Be sss 2 ae i t A | MY 70708 | 1—MOD switch 3-GTC switch 5-XMTR PWR switch 2-RCVR GATE switch 4-CHANNEL switch Figure 3-13. LFF receiver-tranamitter group—internal controls. 3.114TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 TEL PERE, nF su 19L8 GATE. 2 a 7 MI 70695 1~TOTAL HOURS elapsed time meter 10-38 DIFF ANT jeck 2-Air filter M-SELF TEST switch 8-XMTR FAULT lamp 12-CHAL switch 4-VIDEO FAULT lamp 18-J1 POWER/CONTROL connector S-RCVR FAULT lamp MTEST SELECTOR switch 6-RF SWITCH FAULT lamp 18-TEST TP1 JACK connector 1-LVPS FAULT lamp 16-POWER circuit breaker 8—J4 RF MON~20 db jack 11-POWER lamp Figure 3-14. IFF receiver-transmitter group—controls and indicators. 3-115TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1-FOCUS control Ri 2-CRT 38-OPERATE/SAFE ewiteh 4-14 KV ON 5-¥ ICWAR PED control Bb 6—X ICWAR PED control BT 7-¥ CENTER control 3 |xcOIWTEN x swap am] ea ¥ seg cam 8-X CENTER control BE By 9-Y SWEEP GAIN contra xcehver 10-X SWEEP GAIN control BS A He) 11-BKGD INTEN control Bd Y CORTER \ x 1OWAR PED Ms 157061 Figure 3-15. PPI drawer assembly—controls and edjustments.MS 311808 Figure 3-16, Digital assembly BITE panel—controls and indicators. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1TEST OK ON lamp 2UTEST OK OFF lamp 3-GO lamp 4-SER DATA ELEC BITE switches 5—GO lamp 6—PPI/SWP GEN BITE switches 7-GO lamp @-SYM GEN BITE switches 9-GO lamp 10~TMG GEN BITE switches 3-117TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1 2 3 MS 157063 1-FAIL lamp 2-MODE switch 3-TEST switch Figure 3-17. IHIPIR apectrum analyzer BITE panel—controle and indicators. operate °% () 0-3KM GYRI6 1-0-3KM J8 test jack 6—Height driver subassembly 2-0-SKM R16 variable resistor 7-REF VOLT R8 variable resistor 3-8-20KM RIS variable resistor 8-REF VOLT Jé teat jack 4-32 TP1 test jack 9-8-20KM J8 test jack ‘5-Dual elevation mater subassembly. 10-OPERATE/CALIBRATE switch Figure 3-18. RO control panel (rear view)—supplemental controls and adjustments, 3-118TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 COSINE, 2 Fs ZERO ADJUST HEI MANUAL, WORIZ INTENSITY > VIDEO GAIN 7 16 15 MS 157065 10-Operate/ealibrate switch 2-MARKER CALIBRATE variable resistor 11—Height driver subassembly 3-SWEEP VERT variable resistor 12—Dual elevation meter subassembly 4-MARKER INTENSITY control 13-ZERO ADJUST MANUAL variable resistor 6-SWEEP LENGTH variable resistor 14-ZERO ADJUST HPI variable resistor €-SIN/COSINE switch 16-SWEEP INTENSITY control ‘1-TEST switch 1¢-SWEEP HORIZ variable resistor &-HPI ALTITUDE control 11-VIDEO GAIN control 9-2KM ALTITUDE variable resistor 18-ASTIGMATISM variable resistor Figure 3-19. RO control pane!—supplemental controls and adjustments.‘Ta 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 157066 2-SELF TEST/CAL switch 8-OPERATE/TEST switch Figure 3-20. Coordinate computer BITE pane!—controls. 3-120TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 ‘MI 70686 1-Monitor meter M1 2-Voltage selector switch Figure 3-21. DTO power supply—controls and indicators. e @ @ @ @| ener Samo Otome ume o 2 2 2 2@ Ms 311809 2 VOLTAGE MONITOR sector witch ‘2-Monitor metar Mi Figure 3-22. Memory unit—controls and indicators. 3-121TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 10183494 | MI 70687 1Test point TP2 2-Output voltage meter M1 3—Test point TPS. Figure 8-23. CPU power supply—indicator and test points. 6-SPOOLING switch ‘1—Tape reel spindle ‘8-Tape reel lock 9-Supply reel \ Figure 3-24. Punched tape reader—mechanical controls and tape threading instructions.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 OFF: TEST--\ TEST+— -250— -100-% — Ik +250 ‘ -15 VOLTAGE ADJUST ed MS 157069 1-£8 VOLTS ON lamp ‘1—+260 vde variable resistor RT 2-VOLTAGE MONITOR meter M1 8-250 vde variable resistor RB 3-Voltage selector switch S1 9-100 vde variable resistor BE 4-+15 vde variable resistor RS 10-—20 vde variable resistor R6 ‘5—+20 vde variable resistor RS 11-~16 vde variable resistor RA €-+100 vde variable resistor Ri Figure 3-25. Power supply BITE pane!—controls and indicators. 3-123TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 re P39 (280 voc) |] ¢-280 voc! ps0 IP (28 voe) ——r 6 -® P36 (20 voc) 5 @ (5.4 voc) 3 ps7 (-20v0c) P34 P35 ps2 ps3 1oov0e)| (-100v0c}}|(18v0¢) | « -18 VOC) O MS 311810 NOTE: VOLTAGES IN PARENTHESES ‘ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 1-250-vde variable resistor (fully cew) 4—Cireuit breaker CBL ‘2——260-vde variable resistor (fully ecw) 5-—20-vde variable resistor (fully cew) 8-B.4-vde variable resistor R12 ¢-20-vde variable resistor (fully ecw) Figure 3-26. TDECC power supply drawer (left side vew)—controls.‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1—Local hostile symbol 2-Sector of interest line SHICWAR jam strobe 4-IHIPIR track box and PIV symbol 5—Recede speed band G-ICWAR recede target video 7—-O8VA symbol 8-Zero doppler ring 3-126 MS 311817A ‘2—Approach speed band 10—Azimuth cursor 11-PPI sweep 12~Manual target hook symbol 13—Platoon threat eymbol, 14—Range rings 15—-IHAWK pointer symbol 116—High speed target test video Figure 3-28. PPI CRT presentation.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 BEFORE IHIPIR FORCE - LOCK AFTER IHIPIR FORCE - LOCK Ms 157073 1-Sweep 2—Intensified marker 3—Target video 4-THIPIR lock indicators Figure 3-29, IHIPIR spectrum analyzer display. 3-1271 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 157074 Figure 3-30. Normal IFF test video. 3-128TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 sr \ "0, My “ny, Ms 157075 Figure 3-31. Eyelash IFF test video. 3-129TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 fi 3 { to HANDSET 1—CALL lamp Ms 311812 2-RING pushbutton ‘3Headset storage compartment 4-POWER lamp Figure 3-33. Receiver-tranamitter RT-773/GRC-103 (V). 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 6 Daren aieirnn = umore none some HEGRE EEE at —\— @ 8 @ 9 MS 311813 1-POWER switch 10-CHS 2W/4W ewitch 2-POWER lamp 11—CH6 2W/4W ewitch 3-POLARITY TEST 12-CHT 2W/4W ewitch 4-TEST ALIGN meter 13-CHB 2W/4W awitch 5~TEST ALIGN switch 14—CHO 2W/AW switch, 6—CH1 2W/4W awitch 15—CH10 20/4W ewiteh 7—CHe 2W/4W awiteh 16-CH11 20/4W switch 8-CHS 2W/4W switch 17—CH12 2W/4W ewiteh 9-CHs 2W/4W switch 18-Cover Figure 3-34, Converter CV-1548/G—controls and indicators. n 3-1TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 56 7 8 \ \ Ae + We = pe Mees Is Omeien® = ® s & ° ° ms Stn O @ is @ @ MS 311814 1—POWER switch 8—BUZZER OFF pushbutton 2-POWER lamp ‘9-TEST ALIGN meter 3-2 WIRE/4 WIRE switch 10—I switch 4—MODE switch ‘11—II switch 5—MASTER/SLAVE switch 12—IIl switch 6—AUX switch 18-IV switch 7-F1 ALARM lamp Figure 3-35. Multiplexer TD-660/G—controls and indicators. 3-132TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Reiser < av nN 10 MS 311815 1-INPUT control 8—XMTR TUNE control ‘2-Mater 9-ALARMS OVERHEAT lamp ‘8—Meter selector switch 10—ALARMS 8YNC lamp 4-XMTR TUNE indicator 11—BUZZER OFF pushbutton §—XMTR CHANNEL indicator 12~ALARMB LOW POWER lamp 6—XMTR CHANNEL control 18-AC POWER lamp ‘1-POWER OUT PEAK control 14~AC POWER switch Figure 3-36, Transmitter T-983 (P)/GRC-108 (V)—controls and indicators, 3-133TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 RECEIVER crown -—————auanus———, 1 mos sal gee Slt 229 ‘SANOT t—t 5 413 12 a9 1—Meter 2-Moter selector switch 3-RCVR CHANNEL indicator 4-RCVR CHANNEL control 5—-MULT PEAK control @-RCVR SIG control ‘1-RCVR CHANNEL indicator MS 311816 8—XMTR DUPL control 9—XMTR CHANNEL indicator 10-BUZZER OFF pushbutton 11—ALARMS HIGH SIGNAL lamp 12~ALARMS SYNC lamp 18~ALARMS LOW SIGNAL lamp 14—AC POWER lamp 15—AC POWER switch Figure 3-37, Receiver R-1329 (P}/GRC-103 (V)—controls and indicators. 3-134TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a 6 rT 1-CALL lamp 2-BAND switch 3-TUNE controls 4-POWER switch 8-LIGHT switch 6-SPEAKER switch ‘7-VOLUME control 8-SQUELCH switch Figure 3-38. Radio set RT-524/VRC (USMC)—controls 1-BAND switch ‘and indicators. 2-CALL lamp 7 3-LIGHT switch 4-TUNE controls 5-SQUELCH switch 6-VOLUME control 1-POWER switch Figure 3-39. Radio set R-442/VRC (USMC)—controls and indicators. ' Move smre HANDSET MODE, 2 34a lrosw no. Function + sume D 5 2 SINGLE CHANNEL OUPLEX A:T) TRANSMIT 3 SINGLE-CHANNEL OUPLEXR-T2 TRANGANT tannene-1100KL¥1 4 MULTICHANNEL OUPLEK RTI TRANSMIT SMUCTIOHANNEL UPLEX R-T2 TRANSMIT (annum s0OMLY! MS 166246 1-HEADSET TERM 1 RT 1 connector 2-MODE ewiteh Figure 8-40. Terminal set controt C-7827/VCC (USMC)—control. 3-135‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 9 MS 166247 1—CHANNEL 1 switch 6—MODE switch 2-HANDSET switch 1-CHANNEL 4 switch 3~CHANNEL 2 switch 8-SYNC switch 4-MONITOR switch S-HANDSET connector 5—CHANNEL 8 switch Figure 3-41. Telephone/telegraph terminal TH-81/GCC(USMC)—controls, 3-136TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 166248 1—POWER ewitch Figure 3-42. Power supply C-7674/VCC (USMC)—control. ‘Figures $-48 through $-61. Deleted. 3-137—-3-145Tmo 1430—1535—12—1 005 "Ome nce08 - 3-146 MS 311829 NOTE: MODULE REFERENCE DESIGNATION NUMBERS ARE SHOWN FOR IDENTIFICATION PURPOSES ONLY Figure 352. Modulator and demodulator.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Section |. 41. General Repair parts, special tools, and equipment are issued to the using organization for operating and maintaining the ICC/IPCP, and the IAFU electrical cables, For maintenance instructions not contained in this manual refer to TM 9—1425—525—12—4. 42, Repair Parts Repair parts are supplied to the using organization for replacement of those parts that become wom, damaged, or otherwise unserviceable, provid- Section Il. 14. Scope a. When anew or reconditioned ICC/IPCP is first weeived by the using organization, it is the respon- ibility of the officer-in-charge to determine whe- her the material has been properly prepared for evice, and to insure that it is in condition to per- om its assigned mission when placed in service. ‘or this purpose, a visual inspection will be made fall major components, assemblies, subassem- ies, and accessories to make sure that they are resent, properly assembled, and clean. Equip- yent records will be checked to determine that ye major item has been correctly adjusted and ibricated, 6. This section presents general and detailed vices to be performed upon receipt of the 2C/IPCP. Service upon receipt depends upon ve level of preshipment processing, which is ex- lained in paragraph 4-6. ‘5. General Service Procedures @. TM 38-760 lists the applicable forms, records, vd reports to be used for inspection. Check the rial number of the ICC/IPCP and the number re- REPAIR PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND EQUIPMENT (ICC/IPCP) ing replacement of these parts is within the user's scope. TM 9-1430—1535—24P is the authority for requisitioning replacement parts for the ICC/ IPCP. TM 9-1430—1526—24P is the authority for requisitioning replacement parts for the IAFU electrical cables which are part of the AN/GSA- 180 and AN/GSA-136 cable assembly sets. 4-3. Special Tools and Equipment Module extractors 10183387 and 10676567 are the only special tools required for organizational maintenance within the ICC/IPCP. No special tools are required for the IAFU electrical cables. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT—GENERAL corded in the logbook. Examine the logbook for the ICC/IPCP to determine the general maintenance background of the material. b. Check all tags attached to the material for information pertaining to lubrication required before the adjustment of parts. Check the tags, or other indicators of used or reconditioned equipment, for ‘any changes. Immediately transfer to the system logbook and appropriate manuals all the informa- found on such tags or indicators. ¢. Make certain that all hardware is secure, cabling not frayed, and cable conductors not exposed. d. Make sure that all major component parts are present. Check to insure that leveling jacks are present and in good condition. Look for missing or loose bolts, screws and rivets. Check the shielding and ground connections. Make sure the nameplates are present and secured in the proper places. €. Check all items of equipment to determine whether they are in good operating condition. Check to determine that all exterior surfaces are intact and properly assembled, noting excessive grease, oil, or foreign matter that might interfere with proper operation. 41f. Visual checks of the equipment give an indication of its condition. Stevs (1) through (23) below list these checks. Any deficiencies noted should be corrected before operation of the equipment. (1) Check the material against the accompany- ing lubrication orders for proper lubrication. (2) Make sure the sealing is complete on all sealed parts of the equipment (8) Check all indexes, scales, division and nameplates, warning, danger, and caution plates to see that they are clear and easy to read. (4) Look for bare spots or damaged finish to see if any unprotected metal surfaces are exposed to corrosion or rust. Determine whether a touchup or complete refinishing job should be accomplished. (5) Inspect movable metal parts such as bear- ings, hinges, sliding surfaces, and latches to determine whether they are clean, properly lubricated, and free from rust and foreign matter. (6) Look for moisture or rust producing conditions. (7) Check the service tags of fire extin- guishers for current servicing. (8) Make sure flammable liquids are in authorized containers only. (9) Look for excessive or uneven wear, play, or backlash in geartrains, bearing surfaces, dials and knobs. (10) Check the contacts of connectors for looseness, corrosion, or dirt. (11) Look for solder filings, stray bits of solder, and cold-solder joints. (12) See that the solder connections are not bulky with excess solder but are neat, smooth and shiny, and coated with anti-fungus varnish. (18) Inspect all the insulation for signs of discoloration, carbonization, mildew, or fungus growth. (14) See that there is no chafiing, or possibility of chafing, of the insulation. (15) Look for bent, broken, loose, or missing contacts on plug-in components. Make sure that the contacts are clean. (16) Remove all the dry batteries from equipment not in use. (17) Check the capacitors for evidence of 42 heating (discoloration, swelling, cracked or melt | wax). (18) Check the resistors for discoloratic , cracks, breaks, and signs of overheating. (19) Look for indications of burned, pitte | or corroded contacts on switches, relays, and ci cuit breakers. Check the contacts for cleanlines. Make sure the switch detents have a positive mechanical action. (20) Ceramic parts should be clean and wit - out cracks or breaks. (21) Check the wiring and cabling for prop support where required. Runs should be short aid have only enough slack to relieve stress on leads. | (22) Examine the wires near terminals fir frayed or loose strands that can cause shorts. | (28) Visually inspect the lenses, prisms, ret- | icles, and windows to make sure that they are free of scratches, pits, dirt, and chips which would interfere with the optical performance >f the equipment. Any breakdown or excessive discoloration of cement between elements of the compound lenses which affects optical performance in the field is cause for rejection of the instrument. Do not base rejection on the lack of reflection- reducing coating for the optical elements of instruments already in the field. There must be no parallax, abnormal, or double vision. If errors cannot be brought into specified tolerances as determined by the system alinement requirements, the optical instrument is considered unserviceable. g. Remove the tape from all glass surfaces, such as meter windows, reflectors, instrument dials, lights, and windows over cathode-ray tubes. hh. Remove the sealing tape from vents, doors, covers, and other tape-sealed areas. i. Remove the blocking or bracing used to pre vent consoles, cabinets, and chairs from moving during shipping. Secured chairs can be released by removing the locking device and web strapping found over the chair seats and under the chair base. Remove the cushioning material used to prevent chafing of the chair by the metal shipping strap. Unpack the equipment or spare parts stowed in drawers, If the equipment or spare parts have been secured to prevent movement during transportation, remove the securing material. Remove the tape and web strapping from the rack storage designed equipment. Make certain the equipment is properly positioned.Section Il. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF THE IPCP, IAFU ELECTRICAL CABLE ASSEMBLY SET OA-8951/G, AND THE 60-KW GENERATOR AC OUTPUT RECEPTACLE BOX 6. General ervice upon receipt of the ICC/IPCP, electrical ale assembly set, and 60-kw generator ac output eptacle box depends upon whether it has been reessed for overseas extended storage, or for use thin 30 days by a using organization. The level which an item is shipped is clearly marked on it. e main levels of processing for shipment are wsented in subparagraphs a through ¢ below. a. Level A military package provides preserva- nand packaging for adequate protection against rrosion, deterioration, and physical damage ring shipment, handling, indeterminate storage, d world-wide redistribution. b. Level B limited military package furnished eservation and packaging for adequate pro- stion against corrosion, deterioration, and phy- al damage during multiple domestic shipments, ndling, and covered storage. ¢. Level C minimum military package prepares r preservation and packaging for adequate pro- stion against corrosion, deterioration, and phys- i damage during shipment from the supply arce to the first receiving activity for immedi- 2 use. The supplier’s commercial practice will accepted when such practice meets the require- mts of level C. Care should be exercised in performing service-upon-receipt procedures because many parts damage easily. Damage or exposure to bad weather may require a complete overhaul or cause the equipment to become inactive. 7. Service Upon Receipt of the ICC/IPCP Trailer Chassis Service upon receipt of the M390 (modified) and 390C (moilified) trailers. Refer to TM 9—2330— 14. Service Upon Receipt of the ICC/IPCP yuipment Shelter. When entering the ICC/IPCP, open the vent on ve entrance door and remove the desiccants at- ched to the console, rack structures, or the floor. wpect the automatic data processor (ADP), the 2CP tactical display and engagement control console (TDECC), and the communications equipment for damage. The air conditioner is serviced by the mobility equipment center. Perform the periodic check procedures contained in chapter 3. 4-9. Service Upon Receipt of the ICC/IPCP Identification Friend or Foe (IFF) Equipment ‘The IFF antenna is packed in a shipping contain- er secured to the floor of the ICC/IPCP for level A only. Detailed instructions for service upon receipt procedures are given in TM 11—5895—532— 12. Installation procedures for mounting the antenna on the roof of the ICC/IPCP are provided in chapter 5. Perform the IFF check procedures contained in chapter 3. 4-10. Service Upon Receipt of the ICC/IPCP Batteries WARNING } Avoid contact with the electrolyte; otherwise burns to the skin or damage to clothing may result. The two 12-volt batteries are shipped without electrolyte. Full the batteries with electrolyte (TM 740-1626 table D-1, item XX) as directed fj on the filler plugs. 4-10.1. Service Upon Receipt of the [AFU Electrical Cable Assembly Set OA-8951/G Refer to paragraphs 4-4 and 4-5 for information and procedures for service upon receipt of the electrical cable assembly set. Check to see that all the cables are present, complete, and in good condition. There are 8 data cables and 6 power cables. Table 1-3 provides data on these cables. Cables should be secured to their respective reels by the retaining clamps on each reel. A visual check should be made of the connector contacts, caps, marker bands, insulation shielding, and general appearance. 43TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 4-11. Service Upon Receipt of the 60-Kw Generator Ac Output Receptacle Box a. For operation of the 60-kw generator with the IHAWK, an ac output receptacle box assembly 8035560 must be installed. To install the assembly, proceed as follows: (1) At the generator end, remove the six screws holding the left-hand, long, narrow panel above the tool storage compartment. (2) Install the ac output assembly, using the screws removed in (1) above. Section IV. 4-12. General Lubrication Instructions @. Service intervals specified on the lubrication order are for normal operation and intended for locations where moderate temperature, humidity, and atmospheric conditions prevail. Reduce intervals to compensate for extreme conditions such as sand or dust, high humidity, or high or low temperatures. Intervals may be extended during inactive periods commensurate with adequate preservation. Section V. 4-14. Cleaning The Tapo Reader Moisten a strip of clean, lintfree cloth (TM 740-1525 table D-1, item XX) with isopropyl alcohol (TM 740-1525 table D-1, item 13). Pass this cloth back and forth between the tape reader lamp and photocell assemblies until they are free of dirt. Then repeat the cleaning process with @ piece of lens cleaning paper (TM 740—1525 table D-1, item XX). 4-15. Cleaning Diagnostic and Operational Tapes a. Remove the tape reader cover and set the SPOOLING switch to DISABLE. . Place the tape reel on the left tape reader spindle (7, fig. 3-24) and lock the reel in place. ¢. Unwind about four feet of leader, then thread the tape around the tape guides and tension arms 44 (3) Connect the wiring tap (WT) tiepoints as follows: (a) WT1, WTS, and WT9 to TB5-L1. ( (0) WT2, WT6, and WT10 to TBS-L2. (c) WT3, WTT, and WT11 to TB5-L3. (4) WT4 and WTS to TB5-LO. &, When the generator is removed from the battery for repair or replacement, the ac output assembly is to be removed and retained for installation on the replacement generator. LUBRICATION ®. Clean areas containing contaminated lubri: cants (refer to TM 9—1425—525—12—4). 4-13. Lubrication Order Lubrication order LO 9-1430—1535—12 pre scribes lubricating procedures as to location, intervals, and proper materials for the ICC/IPCP. It also contains the specific procedures to be performed. TAPE READER AND TAPE CLEANING. (fig. 3-24). Manually wind a portion of the tape onto the take-up reel. Do not thread the tape through the read head. d. Set the READER POWER switch to ON. e. Set the SPOOLING switch to ENABLE. NOTE If the tape is excessively dirty, several cleaning cycles (steps / through h below)should be made, first with the cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol (TM 740-1525 table D-1, item 13). f. While holding a piece of clean, lint-free cloth (TM 750-1526 table D-1, item XX) to both surfaces of the tape above the read head, advance the tape by pressing the tekeup tension arm toward the read head.IM 9—1430—1535—12—1 sone cos LO9+1430-1535-12 INFORMATION AND COORDINATION CENTRAL AN/MSQ-110 AND AN/MSQ-111 IMPROVED PLATOON COMMAND POST AN/MSW-13 AND AN/MSW-14 Raeterence: TM 9-1430-1535—12-1 Intervels ore besed on normel operations, Reduce te Warning: The Grycheaning tolvent Televed to below compensate for obnermel operation end severe condi- flammable. Keeo away from heat and open flame. Clesn Hons of contemineted lubricants. During Inactive pert with drycleaning solvent (PO-680, Type 1). Ory before beeating. INTERVAL - LUBRICANT @ GAA REELING MACHINE (2 Lob firings) 1. LUOMIGATION INTEAVALE — Openter may prom 2. For compine Minton newton of th wale, fer Saray eolenan rice ey apes boniioa oFWecBoecasecte iment, Gury and month hbrestin a lS Fe cle vention intact of te FF ann meu tee anes Figure 4-1. ICC/IPCP Lubrication Chart.‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 & Stop the tape near its end by releasing the +h. _ Whille still holding the tape in the cloth,» take-up tension arm. wind the tape by pressing the supply tension am toward the read head. Section VI. PREPUNCHED TAPE REPLACEMENT 416. General (1) Place the reel on the lett reader spinde ‘This section provides the procedure for replac- and lock it in place. ing defective or obsolete prepunched tape. (2) Place the now tape over a round sh (euch as a pencil, with the eraser held against he 4-17. Tape Replacement Procedure reader panel to prevent slipping). a. Remove and discard the unwanted tape from (8) Insure that the edge of the tape cleet its reel. to the sprocket holes is nearest the reader pane. . Wind the new tape on the retained supply (4) Thread the tape onto the supply reel as reel as follows: shown in figure 4-2. ‘ 1-Now tape MS 164720 Figure 4-2, Winding prepunched tape on reel. 46(8) Set the READER POWER switch (4, ig. 28) to ON. (6) Set the SPOOLING switch to ENABLE. (7) Wind the tape onto the supply reel by pressing the left tape tension arm (2, fig. 3-24) ‘ward the read head. Section Vil. 4-18. General Hf the equipment has been deenergized for 24 hours or more, it is possible for moisture to sc- cumulate in the equipment cabinets, especially behind the T.O. panel of the TDECC. This section prescribes the procedure for removal of the moisture. 4-19. Meisture Removal Procedure @ Inspect the air conditioner filter and clean if necessary. b. Insure that the ADP exhaust hood on the shelter roof is open. c. Insure that the ADP air intake vents on the ihelter side and rear are open. Inspect the screen filter in the TDECC power supply drawer and clean if necessary. EQUIPMENT CABII TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (8) Stop the tape near its end by releasing the left tape tension arm. (9) Set the SPOOLING switch to DISABLE. (10) Rewind the remainder of the tape by ¢c. Remove the supply reel with tape from the spindle and store it. T MOISTURE REMOVAL ¢. Close the shelter door. f, At the power distribution cabinet, set the MAIN POWER and 28 VPS circuit breakers to ON. g. Energize the air conditioner or shelter heaters, as desired. h. At the TDECC power distribution panel, set the MAIN POWER and BLOWERS circuit breakers to ON. i. Close all drawers and covers on the TDECC and ADP. 4. Energize the ADP. hk. Observe that all blowers (and ADP heaters if below 0°C (32°F) are operating. L Allow the equipment to operate until all moisture has dissipated. “7DigitTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 CHAPTER 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 1, General This chapter provides maintenance instructions fer authorized organizational maintenance per- wonnel of the ICC/IPCP. $2. Replacement of the Modules in the ADP Refer to TM 9—1425—525—12—4 for information pertaining to the replacement of ADP mod- alee, 5-3. Deenergize Only) Deenergize the TDECC as described in (1) and (2) below. Failure to follow this procedure may result in phosphor bums on the CRT face which will reduce the life of the CRT. (1)_Set the PPI DISPLAY circuit breaker (2, ig. 211) to OFF. Display Circuits (1PCP (2) Wait at least 10 seconds, then press and ‘elease the CONSOLE ON indicator-switch (1, fig. 2.12) to off (extinguished). 5-4. Replacement of the IHIPIR Spectrum Analyzer Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) ‘The MAIN POWER circuit breaker on the TDECC power distribution panel must be OFF during removal and installation procedures, except where otherwise indicated. The spectrum analyzer CRT must be handled with particular care during removal and installation. Gloves and goggles must be ‘worn as protection against heat and particles of glass in case of breakage. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 6-1. a, Removal. (1) Open the RO control panel (15, fig. 1-8) by removing the screws. (2) Disconnect the electrical leads D1 through D4 and A2 from the terminals (1). (8) Remove the four screws (2) from the electron tube bezel (3) and remove the electron tube bezel from the spectrum analyzer. (4) Remove the cable assembly (4) from the CRT (5). (5) Carefully remove the CRT electron tube shield (6). ®, Installation. (1) Carefully install the CRT (5) back onto the electron tube shield (6). (2) Carefully install the cable assembly back into the CRT. (8) Install the electron tube bezel (3) with the four screws (2). (4) Connect the electrical leads D1 through D4 and A2 to the terminals (1). ¢, Test after Installation. Refer to chapter 3 for check procedures. 5-5. Replacement of the PPI Drawer Assembly cat trom the The MAIN POWER switch on the TDECC power distribution panel must be OFF during removal and installation procedures, except where otherwise indicated. The CRT must be handled with particular care during removal and installation. Gloves and goggles must be worn as protection against heat and particles of glass in case of breakage. 1g Ss & a 2 ble assembly ‘5—Cathode ray tbe cat 1—Terminals Df through Dé, and AZ 3—Electron tube berel 6-Electron tube shield (IPCP only). Figure 5-1. Replacement of the IHIPIR spectrum analyser CRTSa To REDDER > 7 \\N MS 157043A ne it i i 8 s g : : gT™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-3, unless otherwise specified. a. Removal. (1) Loosen the stud turnlocks (1 and 5) and pull the PPI drawer assembly (1, fig. 5-2) forward. (2) Disconnect the two clamps (2, fig. 5-2) holding the T.O, control panel harness (3, fig. 5-2) to the PPI drawer assembly by removing the screws and washers (4 and 5, fig. 5-2). Do not allow shims, if any, to drop into the console when removing the screws and washers in step (3) below. (8) Remove the eight screws and washers (9 and 10), and mark and retain all removed shims (1). (4) Remove the T.O. control panel (6, fig. 6-2) and position it on the floor under the TDECC shelf, (refer to fig. 5-2). (5) Remove connector P1 (12) of the 14-kv power supply assembly from the PPI CRT (13). (6) Loosen the screw (14) and separate the wiring harness (15) from the clamp assembly (16). (7) Remove the wiring hamess from the CRT (see caution below). Exercise caution when removing or connecting the CRT wiring harness in order not to damage the bond between the CRT pin base and glass. (8) Remove the clamp assembly (16). (9) Remove the four screws and washers (17, 18, and 19). (10) Remove the ring retainer (20), separating it from the CRT. (11) Remove the CRT. b. Installation. (1) Loosen the four screws (21) supporting the CRT shield (22). (2) Pull the shield forward and finger-tighten the four screws. (3) Line up the 14-kv plug (23) on the CRT with the hole in the shield (22). 5-4 6 (4) Install the CRT in the shield the shield to settle under the weight of the CRt. (6) Apply silicone compound (6850-00-88)- 7616) sparingly around the edge of the PPI CRT, (6) Install the ring retainer (20) with th washers and screws (19, 18, and 17), tightening tie screws in a top right, bottom left, top left, botion right sequence. (7) Tighten the four screws (21) to hold the shield (22) in place. (8) Slide the clamp assembly (16) onto the | cRT. (9) Connect the wiring harness (15) to the crt. (10) Tighten the screw (14). (11) Connect connector P1 (12) to the thr plug (23). (12) Install the T.O. control panel (24) wih the retained shims (11), eight washers, and scren (10 and 9) (see note below). NOTE Install shim(s) as required to properly aline and minimize any space between the ring retainer and the T.O. control panel. (13) Install the two harness clamps (2, fig. 52) with the washers and screws (5 and 4, fig. 52) (14) Secure the PPI drawer assembly with the stud turnlocks (6 and 1). ¢. Test After Installation. Refer to Chapter 3 for check procedures. 5-6. Replacement of the IFF Antenna ond Pedestal Assembly (Roof-Mounted) Make certain that the IFF antenna SAFE-OPERATE switch and the AZ DRIVE switch are set to SAFE. Not more than three persons should occupy the roof at any one time.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1-Stud turnlock jasher 5-Stud turnlock 6—Spring 7-Ring &-Washer 9-Screw 10—Washer 11—Bhim(a) (AR) 12-Conneetor P1 18~PPI CRT MS 157077A 4—Screw 1 15—Wiring harness 16—Clamp assembly 11-Berew 18-Washer 19-Washer 20—Ring retainer 21—Berew (4) 22-CRT shield 23-14-Kr plug 247.0, control pane! Figure 6-3. Replacement of the PPI CRT (IPCP only). NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-4, a, Removal. ‘When in the stowed position, the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly is under spring tension. 5-5TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 (1) If the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly (1) is locked in the stowed position, release the two stow bolt assembly handknobs (9) that secure the antenna pedestal bracket (8), then ease the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly (under spring tension) to the opers Position 7 (2) Position and tighten the two bolt assembly handknobs (6) to secure the antenna pedestal bracket. (3) Disconnect all electrical cables from the tenna hoisting unit (5) to the lifting bracket (2) on the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly. 1-IFF antenna and pedestal assembly 2_Lifting bracket 3—Hook fastener Holst with crank handle ‘5—Antenna hoisting unit Never release the three pedestal bolt ( assembly handknobs unless an antenna hoisting unit is hooked onto the lifting bracket. (5) Release the three pedestal bolt handknobs (7). ae MI 70707A 6-Bolt assembly handknobs ‘7—Pedestal bolt assembly handknobs 8--Antenna pedestal bracket ‘9-Stow bolt assembly handknobs Figure 5-4. Replacement of the IF antenna pedestal assembly (roof-mounted).To prevent damage to the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly during high winds, use guide ropes (one on each side) while lowering it. (6) Using the hoist with the crank handle (4), carefully lift the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly from the antenna pedestal bracket, and then lower itto the ground with the hoist. b, Installation, (1) Carefully insert the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly into the antenna pedestal bracket, and secure the three pedestal bolt assembly handknobs (7). (2) Disconnect the IFF antenna hoist hook fastener. (3) Make certain that the pedestal DRIVE switch is set to OFF (SAFE). (4) Connect the electrical cables to the pedes- AZ ¢ Test After Installation. Refer to chapter 8 for alinement procedures and to chapter 3 for check procedures. 5-7. Roplacement of the IFF Antenna and Pedestal Assembly (Tripod-Meunted) Make certain that the AZ DRIVE switch on the IFF antenna pedestal is set to OFF (SAFE). NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5:5. a. Removal. (1) Disconnect all electrical cables from the FF antenna and pedestal assembly (1), and in- tall the dust covers. (2) Release the three tripod bolt assembly tandknobs (2) securing the pedestal to the tripod 3). (3) Carefully lift the IFF antenna and pedes- al assembly from the tripod. b. Installation. (1) Carefully place the IFF antenna and vedestal assembly (1) on the tripod (3), and se- ure the three tripod bolt assembly handknobs (2). (2) Observe the tripod level indicators, and evel the tripod as required. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (3) Set the IFF antenna pedestal AZ DRIVE switch to OFF (SAFE). (4) Connect the electrical cables to the pedestal. c. Test After Installation, Refer to chapter 8 for alinement procedures and to chapter 3 for check procedures. 5-8. Replacement of the Air Conditioner a. General. The air conditioner used in the ICC/ IPCP is either Trane Model CE20VAL4, Keco Model F18T4-2, or Hottle Model CV-20-4-08. Although the three air conditioners are essentially identical, air conditioner compatibility kit 6421260 (TM 140-1525, appendix D. item 80) is required when the Trane air conditioner is replaced by a conditioner manufactured by either Keco or Hottle. A MI 70708 1-IFF antenna and pedestal assembly 2-Tripod bolt assembly handknob 3-Tripod Figure 6-5. Replacement of the FF antenna pedestal ‘assembly (tripod-mounted), 5-7TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 second compatibility kit, 5421261 (TM 740— 1825, appendix D, item 81), is required when a Keco or Hottle air conditioner is replaced by another Keco or Hottle air conditioner, which has never been modified to accept the air conditioner silencer. In addition, weather seals (TM 740— 126, appendix D, items 150 and 151) (two each) are generally required whenever an air conditioner is replaced. b. Special Instructions. (1) All components removed from the replacement air conditioner should be identified and retained, These components should be reinstalled in the air conditioner when it becomes inoperable and is returned for repairs. (2) All components removed from the ori inally installed air conditioner must also be identified and retained, These components are required when installing replacement air conditioners which are identical to the originally installed equipment. Do not work in a closed area where Refrigerant-22 may be Jeaking unless adequate ventilation is provided. Do not allow Refrigerant-22 to come in contact with the skin. Injuries should be treated for frostbite or freezing. ¢. Removal of the Air Conditioner. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-6, unless otherwise indicated. (1) Make certain that the AIR CONDI- TIONER circuit breaker (9, fig. 2-1) is set to OFF. (2) Disconnect the power cable (1). (3) Remove the register and register box (2 and 3). (4) Remove the duct (4). (5) Remove the grille (5). (6) Remove the thermostat remote bulb (6) from its retaining clamp in the airstream of the silencer (11). (7) Remove the remote control panel assembly and its mounting bracket (7 and 8) as a unit. (8) Remove the control panel assembly from the bracket, and disconnect the remote control cable (9) from the control panel assembly. (9) Disconnect the remote control cable (9) from the bottom right-hand connector on the air conditioner. (10) Remove the silencer. (11) Disconnect the drainage hose (12). (12) Remove the four screws, lockwashen, and flat washers (18, 14, and 15) that secure the air conditioner mounting channels (20). (18) Remove the air conditioner as a unit, (14) Remove the front access panel (22). (15) Remove the cable (23). (16) Remove the blockoff panel (24) and in. stall the control panel assembly (7) on the sir cot ditioner control panel junction box assembly, Re fer to TM 5—4120—807—15 for air conditionen manufactured by Keco and Hottle, or to TM 5- 4120-22214 for air conditioners manufactured by Trane. (17) On Keco model air conditioners only, re move the blockoff covers and nut plates (26 and 21) from each side of the air conditioner. Als, remove fresh air screen 10669014, condenser grile 10287981, and the CBR intake duct cover. (18) Install the front access panel. d. Preparation of Keco and Hottle Model Air Conditioners Prior to Installation. NOTE Refer to TM 6-4120-307—15 for locational views and removal instructions. (1) Replace the fresh air inlet screen with new screen 10669014, (2) Replace the condenser grille with new grille 10287981. (3) Remove the CBR cover and replace the CBR cover gasket with new gasket 10669003. [n- stall the CBR cover. (4) Remove the discharge grille, intake grill, and front access panel. The grilles will not bere placed on the air conditioner. (5) Remove the air intake filter and the re mote control panel assembly. NOTE ‘The 208-vac power receptacle must be located ‘at the lower left-hand corner of the left side of the air conditioner. If the power receptacle ia not at this location, perform steps (6) through (14), otherwise proceed to step (13) and omit step (14). (6) Remove the junction box assembly. De not disconnect the circuit breaker linkage unles it is necessary to completely remove the junction box assembly from the air conditioner to facilitatt the following operations. (7) Remove the blockoff panel located at tht lower forward corner of the left-hand side of air conditioner.™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 157078A Figure 6-6. Replacement of the air conditioner.TH 9—1430—1535—12 5-Grille G—Thermostat remote bulb smote control panel assembly Mounting bracket 9—Remote control cable 10-Special purpose cable 10669024 16--Air conditioner 17Flat washer 18-Lockwasher 19-Serew 20-Mounting channel 21-Spacer 22—Front access panel 28—Special purpose cable 10671876 (Trane) 10869028 (Keco and Hottie) | 24—Blockoff pane! (Keeo and Hottle only) 25-Serew 11-Silencer 26—Blockoff cover 12—Drainage hose 27-Nut plate 18-Serew Seal 14—Lockwasher 29-Seal 15—Flat washer 30—Adapter Figure 5-6—Continued, (8) Relocate the power receptacle from the rear of the air conditioner to the port where the blockoff panel was installed, (9) Install the blockoff panel where the power receptacle was located. (10) Remove the connector blockoff plate from the lower forward corner of the right side of the air conditioner. (11) Install an air blockoff cover and nut plate (26 and 27) at the cutouts at the bottom rear corners of each side of the air conditioner. Use a suitable sealing compound between the covers, the nut plates, and the side panels. If the air blockoff cover and nut plate will not fit in the cutouts, apply sealant MIL-S-8802 or equivalent to seal the openings. (12) Install new special purpose cable assembly 10669028 (23) between the connector port (step (10) above) and the electrical connector which was previously connected to the control panel assembly. (18) Install the control panel blockoff panel (24) (provided with the air conditioner) where the control panel was located. (14) Install the junction box assembly. Recon- nect the circuit breaker linkage if it was disconnected as described in step (6). NOTE Keco and Hottle model air conditi ‘complished by replacing eight cam- ners with nut plates, If the cabinet has been previously modified, proceed to step (22) below. Otherwise, perform steps (15) through (21) to modify the cabinet. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-7. 5-10 (15) Remove the top panel and the mist elim inator (1 and 2). (16) Remove the eight cam-lock fasteners | the locations marked A by drilling out the rivet | which secure them, | (17) Locate the centering pin of template 10869040 in the cam-lock fastener holes, aline the | template vertically, and drill through the template holes, using a No, 80 drill. | (18) Countersink the 16 holes 100 degres from the near side, Remove burrs and sharp edges, and coat the holes with zine chromate 030-72 | 9789 (TM 740-1526, appendix D, item 20). (19) Paint the exposed areas around the bols| with the OD enamel 8010-00-848-9272 (TM 74- 1625, appendix D, item 57). (20) install a new nut plate (8) from the ix side of the cabinet channels, using two blind rivet (4), at each drilled location. (21) Install the mist panel, (22) Install the air filter and the front acces panel. | ¢. Preparation of Trane Model Air Conditioner: Prior to Installation. | nator and the t | NOTE Refer to TM 5—4120-222- 14 for locational views and removal instructions. (1) Perform steps d(2) and (4 through 12) above. (2) Install special purpose cable 1067181 between the connector port (step d(12) abort) and the electrical connector which was previously | connected to the control panel assembly. |1 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 157079‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 f. Installation of the Air Conditioner, NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 6-8, (1) Inspect the inside seals (28 and 29) for deformity and wear. Replace if necessary, as follows: (a) Remove the seals and clean the bars that they adhered to, using solvent Toluene TTT 548 (TM 740-1626, appendix D, item 179) or equivalent. NOTE Insure that the ends of the new seals bonded in step (b) are properly joined to insure a watertight seal. (6) Bond two new seals 10669032-1 (TM 740-1525, appendix D, item 150) and two new seals 10669032-2 (TM 740-1626, appendix D, item 151) to the bars, using adhesive 8040-00-664- 4318 (TM 740-1628, appendix D, item 6). NOTE Insure that the open ends of the channels are facing towards the front of the air conditioner while performing the next step. (2) Install the mounting channels and spac- ers (20 and 21) to the air conditioner. Install the ‘screws (19) finger tight. (8) Install the replacement air conditioner, Pushing it firmly against the seals (28 and 29), Insure that it is in complete contact with the seals. (4) Install the four screws, Jockwashers, and flat washers (13, 14, and 15). Tighten the screws. (5) Install adapter (30), using sealant MIL-S- 8802 (TM 740-1525, appendix D, item XX.X) or equivalent on the threads, and connect the drain age hose (12). NOTE If the replacement air conditioner is a Keco or Hottle model, connect special purpose cable (10) between the remote control cable and the control panel assembly, (6) Connect the remote control cable (9) to the remote control panel assembly, and attach the control panel to its bracket (7 and 8). (7) Install the control panel bracket. (8) Position the control panel thermostat remote bulb downward, in front of the grille (5) opening. (9) Install the silencer (11). (10) Secure the thermostat remote bi retaining clamp in the air stream of the and install the grille (5). (11) Install the duct, register box, and ngs. ter (4, 8, and 2). (12) Connect the opposite end of the reat control cable to the air conditioner. (18) Connect the power cable (1) to thir conditioner. (14) Perform the main power distribution mj ion air conditioner check (table 310), 5-9. Replacement of Switchbeards $B-22Nm @. Removal, Reter to figure 5-8, NOTE Wiring hamesses W18 and W19 (6 and 5, fg 5-8) are retained and used with the new re placement switchboards. Tag wires for ideat- fication. b. Installation, (1) Perform the following operations belon installing the switchboards. (a) Remove the red and blue battery om tact leads from SB-18 and SB-14 inside ed switchboard, (b) Sleeve and dress the leads to the si. cent harness leg. (c) Make certain that the switchboard bi. teries (if supplied) are removed. (2)| Refer to figure 5-8, i ¢. Test after Installation. Refer to chapter 3a check procedures, 5-10. Adjustment ef the Cablo Reel Bra Device NOTE The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5.9. a. Removal. (1) Remove the eight screws and washers (1 and 2) that secure the brake cover (8) to the how- ing (6). (2) Remove the brake cover. (3) Remove only one socket-head adjustment screw and washer (4 and 5) from the brake face plate inside the housing. b, Installation. (1) Apply LOCKTITE sealant (Grade T) (TM 740-1625, appendix D, item XX.X) to the thre: ded end of the socket-head adjustment screw (4).Ms 157081 1-Switchboard &-Not 2-Switchboard (No. 1) ‘9- Washer 3-Switchboard (No. 8) 10-Serew Bracket, 11—Chassis 6-Wiring harness W19 ‘Serew 6—Wiring harness W18 18—Washer - 14¢_Washer Figure 6-8. Replacement of ewitchboards SB-22A/PT.TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 uW / 4 SS) FG ‘ a MI 70970 Figure 5-9. Adjustment of the cable reel brake device.(2) Install the screw and washer. Tighten the screw until the screw head just makes contact with the washer and then back off 14 turn. (8) Repeat the steps above for the two remaining screws and washers. (4) Insure that the cable reel is free wheel- ing. (5) Install the brake cover. 5-11. Replacement of the Electrical Cable Parts NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-10. The cover (3) and wire rope (4) are removed by detaching the band (1) that holds them to the connector. A knife easily removes plastic marker band (2). A new band is attached by wrapping it around the cable sheath, applying liquid cement (TM 740— 1626, appendix D, item XX.X) to the underside where the band overlaps, and holding the band un- tila bond takes place. 5-12. Output Printer Tape Installatien NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-11. 1-Band 2-Marker band &-Cover TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Power to the printer should always be switched off (AUTO switch (8) to center position) when installing the tapes. a, Release the two cover latches (1 and 2) by means of the alide releases and remove the paper cartridge assembly from the printer by pulling the cartridge forward. . Remove the paper tape reel (3), using the two finger holes in the center. Discard the old cardboard core. ¢. Place a new roll of paper tape on the reel. Place the reel of tape on a flat surface and tap to make certain that the tape is flat on the reel. In- stall the paper tape reel, and thread the paper around each of the three rollers and guides (4, 5, and 6) as shown in the illustration. d. Continue feeding the tape through the slot (7), allowing a few inches of tape to extend beyond the slot. Make sure that the tape moves freely through the guides and that it pulls freely. MS 164697 4-Wire rope 5—Rivet Figure 6-10. Replacement of the electrical cable parts—typical.1430—1535—12—1 1-Lateh 2-Latch 3-Paper tape reel 4 -Roller and guide Roller and guide Ms 157080 6-Roller and guide ‘1—Tape slot 8-AUTO switch, 9-ADV switch i Figure 5-11. Output printer tape installation. NOTE ‘The tape should be flat between the guide and the tape slot. Press down on the tape reel. Insure a locked position. Place the cartridge assembly on the printer until it latches. Pull some more tape through the slot. The tape should move freely. Close the two cover latches, and then set the AUTO switch (8) to on (up). Operate the ADV switch (9) to make sure that the paper is advancing properly (2.5 inches per second). | 5-12.1. Replacement of the Status nel ‘Meter Lamps a. Lamp Removal, NOTE ‘The following procedure provides lamp re- Placement instructions for the status panel GROUND SPEED, LOW and HIGH ALTIT- UDE, and ADCP ALTITUDE meters (29, 28, 27 and 28, fig. 2-12). NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-11.1. (1) Press the CONSOLE ON indicator-ewitch to off (extinguished), (2) Remove (pull) the bezel cover (1) from the appropriate meter (2). (3) Loosen the two captive screws (5) until the lamp assembly (4) can be pulled out of the mete (straight out 50 as not to damage the two electrical pin connectors (3)). (4) Grasp the lamp (8) and loosen the knurled locknut (7). (5) Pull the lamp straight out without tuming it.0 5, Lamp Replacement. (1) Insert new lamp NSN 6240—-00—155—8707. (2) Press and hold the lamp against the spring mtact and then tighten the knurled locknut. (8) Carefully aline the lamp assembly and insert into the meter, making certain that the electrical aconnectors mate properly once inside. (4) Tighten the two captive screws. T™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 (5) Press the CONSOLE ON indicator-switch to on (illuminated). (6) Press the LAMP TEST indicator-switch (17, fig. 2-12) and observe that the meter illuminates. Adjust the focus control (6) if necessary. (7) Release the LAMP TEST indicator-switch. (8) Install the bezel cover. 1—Bezel cover 2—Meter ‘8—Electrical pin connector 4—Lamp amembly MS 313699 Figure 6-11.1. Replacement of status panel meter lamps — (typical). 5-161TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 | 5-12.2. TAS. Ditpley Unit Mirror Cleaning *(aey! Do not clean the display unit mirror with rags or other materials that might scratch the surface, and degrade system performance. Use camel-hair brush 8020-00-051-7098 to remove loose particles of dust or lint from the mirror surface. Then wipe the mirror in a circular motion, using lens tissue, either dry or moistened with isopropyl aleohol (TM 740-1525, table D-1, item 18). The mirror can be wiped again with another clean lens tissue moistened with distilled water (TM 740-1525, table D-1, item 190). If dirt, lint, or smears remain I Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 5-16.2 oH on the mirror, wrap a piece of lens tissue arvwitle end of an orange stick (or equivalent) to fm: swab. Beginning at the center of the mirror, mi with a circular motion while applying a light pre sure. Gradually increase the radius of the area bey cleaned until the entire mirror has been coversi ii necessary, use a rubber syringe to blow amay uy remaining dust or lint. 5-13. Remeval er Replacement of Additions Units Refer to table 5-1 for removal or replace of the units listed. The check procedures that mt be performed after installation are located inher appropriate table or tables as specified, Th shaded areas in figures 5-12 through 5-34 indict the replaceable organizational units, The lead associated with the figures list only these re. able units.clo TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 5-1. Removal or Replacement of Additional Unite Thatation Major amembly Unit removed or replaced Part no, Finxe Key (Chack procedure table iccy PCP ‘Auxiliary control unit 10288668 54 244 3-10 through 8-14, 8-18, 8-21, and 11-6, 11-7 Battery box 10677402, 513 105 341 Battery charger assembly 10287923, 524 45 341 ‘Glock 10179379 515 261 341 ‘Communications termination unit 10671717 513 93 3.19 Distribution box subassembly 10292579 5-24 59 8-10, 3-11 IFF communications station 10288848 *(F)] 5-12 2 3-21 10281990 *a)}} ICC/ PCP communications station 10288848 *(F)!| 5-14 2 3-21 10291990 *(G)" Power distribution cabinet 11610978 617 293 3-10, 3-11, $18, 919 Power supply subassembly 10671694 5-24 56 8:10, 3:11 Relay assembly 10288650 5-16 270 Reeling machine 10183484 513 102 app ‘ADP power distribution drawer 10288052 5.18 20 32 cru 11567718, 518 13 342 CPU cooler assembly 10675808, 5-20 48 312 CPU power supply 10288024 5-20 27 312 DTO DWR #1 11670627 *(w)'| 5-18 1 3:12 11810723 *(Vv)" DTO DwR #2 11510735 518 8 312 DTO DwR #3 11810748 5-18 9 342 DTO 1 through 3 cooler assembly 10183341 18 gaz DTO 1 through 3 power supply 11665823, 10 3.12 Memory 11610696 5:18 ul gaz Memory cooler assembly 10678020 5-22 82 342 Memory power supply 11610968 5-21 1 312 Output printer 10670306 5-23 32 342 Punched tape reader 10669600 5-23 6 312 Solid state reader 11670624 *(W)'}] 5-23 6 312 11569928 *(V)! Reader printer drawer 10675387 16 342 ‘Transformer assembly 10288045 39 Esty ‘TDECC ‘Azimuth control assembly 10677800 5-29 4 $414,118 (see note below) NOTE Before performing the check procedures specified in this manual, refer to TM 9-1425~1525—12-5, chapter 8, and perform the Azimuth Handwheel Synchro B1 Alinement Procedures. BITE switch panel Control logic assembly AQ Control logic assembly A11 Coordinate computer Coordinate data control Digital assembly 11510800 11868120 *(AD)* 11510888 *(AC)! 11568549 *(AD)* 11810887 *(AC)* 10677946 9180166 11510709 Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 5-26 5-28 5-29 5-28 1 33 45 85 ety 98 314 314 a4 3-14, 11-4 through 11-8 314 8-14, 11-4 through 11-8 5-17TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 5-1. Removal or Replacement of Additional Unite—Continued ‘Major amembly ‘Unit removed or replaced Part no. Finwe Key (Check procedures table Dual elevation control 10678487 5-81 8 9-14, 11-8 Elevation control 9179004 5-92 6 9-14, 11-8 Height driver 10678589 5-31 10 314,118 HIPIR spectrum analyzer 10677835 5-25 20 14, 11-8 ‘Manual elevation control 10878500 5-34 16 314,118 Power distribution pane! 10677162 5-28 8 aid PPI drawer subsssembly 10677745 5-25 1 B14 Power supply 10677754 5-28 88 aud Relay antenna control 10175984 5-26 26 18 Relay assembly 10678599 5-27 52 8-14, 11-8 RO communication unit 10292065 5-26 u 8-22, 11-6, 11-7, 118 RO control panel uusesiie *(ADY | 5-25 a 3-14, 8-16, 118 10677956 *(AC) ‘Status panel 11510777 5-26 29 8-14, 3-16, 11-6 through 114 Synchro bus transformer 10678385 5-28 81 314, 11-5, 118 7.0. communications unit 10292086 5-26 a 8-22, 11-6, 11-7, 18 T.0. panel 11510784 5-25 5 3-14, 8-16, 11-4 through 114 5.4-rde power supply 10182795 5-33 19 314 16-vde power supply 10678454 5-33 “4 314 20-vde power supply 10671414 5-83 2 3-14 (see note below) NOTE Before installing the 20-vde power supply, make certain the variable resistor (5 or 6, fig. 3-26) is set fully cow. 28-vde power supply 10677758 5-38 20 a4 100-vde power supply 10674651 5-33 15 a4 250-vde power supply 10671416 5-33 1 ald (see note below) NOTE Before installing the 250-vde power supply, make fully cow. 14-Kv power supply 10677744 5-30 certain the variable resistor ( (1 or 2, fig. 3-26) is vet 344 Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 5-18T 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 311831 2-IFF communications unit Figure 5-12. ICC/IPCP IFF communications unit. 519 Google‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Sees eee sat Ms 311832 102—Reeling machine 105—Battery box Figure 6-13, ICC/IPCP communications termination unit, reeling machine, and battery bos. Google fiTH 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 311833 2-ICC/IPCP communications unit ‘244—Auziliary control unit ICC/IPCP communications unit, switchboard and auxiliary control unit. Figure 6-14.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 4 e s MS 311834 261—Clock Figure 5-15. ICC/IPCP clock.1M 9—-1430—1535—12—1 Up Te) fe, LY GY MS 311835 270—Relay assembly Figure 5-16. ICC/IPCP relay assembly.‘TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 298—Power distribution cabinet Figure 5-17. ICC/IPCP power distribution cabinet. 5-24TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 311837 13-CPU 1-DTO DWR #1 ‘16—Reader printer drawer 20-ADP power distribution drawer Figure 6-18. ICC/IPCP ADP components. , GoogleTH 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 311838 ICC/IPCP cooler assemblies, transformer assembly, and power supplies. Figure 6-19. Google ‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 311839 27—-CPU power supply 48—-CPU cooler assembly Figure 6-20. ICC/IPCP CPU cooler assembly and power supply.1—-Memory power supply Figure 6-21. ICC/IPCP memory power supply.TH 9—143 3 3 2 2 5-22. ICC/IPCP memory cooler assembly.‘TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 311842 @—Solid state reader/punched tape reader 12-Output printer Figure 6-23. ICC/IPCP output printer, solid state reader, and punched tape reader.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 311843 Figure 6-24. ICC/IPCP battery charger, power supply, and distribution box. 5-31 Google cTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 311844 Figure 6-25. TDECC drawers and panels. 5-32 Google fi‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 45—Control logic assembly A11 34~T.0. communications unit ‘88—Control logic assembly AS ‘a ‘24—RO communications unit ‘26—Relay antenna control ‘39--Gtatus panel Figure §-26. TDECC communications units and assemblies.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 91—Synchro bus transformer 98—Digital assembly. 84—Power distribution panel 85—Coordinate computer 88—Power supply Figure 6-28, TDECC lower panel assemblies. Google cTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 e 1 sr ‘Qboo 20. 47 \ 4—Azimuth control assembly 11—Coordinate data control Figure 5-29. T.O. panel coordinate data control and azimuth control assembly.TM 9~1430—1535—12—1 MS 164742 1-14-Kv power supply Figure 6-30. PPI drawer 14-Ku power supply.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 2 S s 2 Figure 5-31. RO elevation control and height driver.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 164744 Figure 6-32. RO elevation control.T™ 9—1430—1535—12-1 Figure 5-38. TDECC power supplies. 5-40 Google cTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 con Le x | | | | | | | ! | MS 164746 18-Manual elevation control Figure 6-34, Relay-antenna control assembly—manual elevation control.ew Google | .—4TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 CHAPTER 6 PREPARATION FOR TRAVEL Section |. $1. Scope Preparation for travel for the ICC/IPCP and electrical cables is presented in this chapter. Para- graphs 6-4 and 6-5 contain general information on the transportation of the equipment by truck (prime mover), cargo aircraft, and helicopter. Para- graphs 6-8 through 6-10 contain the preparation for travel procedures. Section Il. 54. Transportation by Truck Usually, the ICC/IPCP is towed by the M36 ruck (prime mover) to the battery site. Some of the cables from the electrical cable assembly set we carried on the prime mover while the other ables are carried on the prime movers which tow ‘he remaining major items of the IAFU. $5, Transportation by Air @ Helicopter. The ICC/IPCP and electrical cables can be helicopter-lifted by means of a suspension sling assembly (fig. 6-1 and table 6-1). The storage bag (7, fig. 6-1) is used to stow the remaining components when not in use. The grounding device assembly (1, fig. 6-1) is used to ground the helicopter lifting hook (2, fig. 6-15) before hookup of the ICC/IPCP. Refer to subparagraph b below for fabrication procedures for this device. The spreader bar assembly (fig. 6-5) is wed to prevent the suspension sling assembly legs from bearing against sharp edges, fragile or lightly constructed parts of the equipment being lifted, tnd is fabricated locally. Refer to subparagraph below for fabrication procedures of this assembly. ‘The suspension sling assembly (fig. 6-2) required to lift the ICC/IPCP consists of four nylon web and chain legs connected to a 30.5 cm (1 ft) diameter nylon web ring. Each leg is 7.1 m (28 ft) long and consists of a 4.57 m (15 ft) nylon web leg with an GENERAL 62, Explanation of Procedures ‘The preparation for travel procedures describe ‘the most efficient method of converting the ICC/ IPCP and electrical cables from completely emplaced items into a mobile unit. 6-3. Trailer The ICC/IPCP is supported by either the M390 (modified) or M390C (modified) trailer. METHODS OF TRANSPORTATION 8-Quick-fit tiedown fastener 4-4.5T m (16 ft) tiedown strap &Tape 6-Suspension sling assembly ‘7-Storage bag Figure 6-1. Helicopter lifting components.Table 6-1. Description of Helicopter Lifting Components. Suspension sling assembly (2) 1670-00-902-3080 ‘Nylon and chain leg cargo sling; 7.1 m (23 ft) long; 15,000 Ibs. capacity Nylon cord MIL-C-5040, Nylon cord, 8.18 mm (¥%-in.) Type or IIT diameter Protective padding 8135-00-559-1531 Cellulose wadding, cushioning material Web strap (2) 1670-00-860-0540 Nylon webbing, 4.57 (15 ft) long, 1ply Load binder (2) 8990-00-360-0248 Eccentric takeup, w/lever Strap fastener (2) 1670-00-860-0840 Quick-fit buckle Adhesive tape 8185-00-266-5016 Pressure sensitive, 5.08 cm (2in.) wide, 64.9 m (60 yds) long Storage bag 8460-00-245-6693 Cotton duck, OD, w/zipper Grounding device Fabricated locally Refer to paragraph 6-5) assembly for fabrication instructions ‘Spreader bar assembly Fabricated locally Refer to paragraph 6-5¢ for instructions Nails 10D or 16D 10D 7.62 em (8 in.), 16D 8,89 cm (314 in.) 2.44 m (8 ft) chain assembly bolted to the end of (8) Attach the copper strip to the copper tr lng to combensate forthe center of pavny (WDE with two aelf-threading screws or construction of the item to be lifted. Figure (4) Obtain a piece of copper braid (2) o 6-3 shows a typical chain leg hookup of the sus- other suitable material, which has a minimm pension sling assembly. Instructions for sling prep- length of 7.93 m (26 ft) and fabricate as show aration for the ICC/IPCP are given in section III. inc. b. Grounding Device Assembly. The grounding device assembly (1, fig. 6-1) must be fabricated locally. Detailed procedures for fabricating this (5) Attach one end of the copper braid the copper tubing with a 12.7 mm (‘4 in) bob, lockwasher, and nut. device are as follows. (6) Obtain a 80.5 cm (12 in.) copper rod (8) or other suitable material, and fabricate as show NOTE inD. ‘The letters and key numbers shown below (7) Attach the remaining end of the copper refer to figure 6-4. braid to the copper rod with a 12.7 mm (‘4 in) bolt, lockwasher, and nut. (1) Obtain a 61 cm (2 ft) section of 2.54 em (8) Insulate one-half of the copper tubias (1 in.) copper tubing (1) or other suitable ma- with an insulation tape as shown in A. terial and fabricate as shown in A. ¢. Spreader Bar Assembly, ‘The two spresk (2) Obtain a 2.54 cm (1 in.) strip of copper bar assemblies are fabricated locally. Detaikd material (4) or other suitable material, 25.4 cm procedures for fabricating each assembly (ft. (10 in.) long and fabricate as shown in B. 6-5) are as follows: 6-2MS 156059 1-80.5 em (12 in.) web ring 2-4.57 m (16 ft) nylon web leg 8-Grab link 4-244 m (8 ft) chain leg Figure 6-2. Helicopter suspension aling—typical. (1) Obtain the required number of lengths of 5.08 x 10.16 cm (2 x 4-in.) lumber or other suitable material. (2) Obtain the required nails for construction of the spreader bar assembly (table 6-1). (3) Cut three pieces of lumber as shown in tiew A, figure 6-5. (4) Nail the pieces of lumber together as shown in view B, figure 6-5. d. Cargo Aircraft. When the ICC/IPCP is trans- vorted by cargo aircraft, the preparation for ravel procedure is the same as for the prime nover (par. 6-7). TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 156060 1-Grab link 2-Tie point 8—Taped excess chain Figure 6-8. Suspension sling assembly—typical chain leg hookup. 6-3}O—1535—12—1 — Er penrerrnyen , faareens reuse mom ter 7 ar. HOLE 0.64 om (1/4in,) OUAMMETER Bat te em) sun cu ~ EET su joe==p A fer ott A MOL te nd DMT By MS 164644 1 Copper tobing 3—Copper rod 2-Copper braid eeu nee Figure 6-4. Grounding devices assembly. 6-4TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 164645TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Sectien 1. 6-6. General This section describes the preparation for travel for the ICC/IPCP by prime mover (par. 6-7) and by helicopter (par. 6-8). The ICC/IPCP can be mounted on either the M390 (modified) or M390C (modified) trailer. For the preparation for travel procedures for the trailer, refer to paragraph 6-7d. 67. Preparation for Travel Procedures— Prime Mover If the IPCP is emplaced as part of the IAFU, perform step a below. If the IPCP is emplaced in the IHAWK battery as a substitute for the ICC, perform step b below. Otherwise, to prepare an ICC, perform step ¢ below. a. Steps (1) through (24) below are the detailed procedures for preparing the IPCP for travel when it is emplaced as part of an IAFU. (1) Deenergize the IPCP (chapter 3). (2) Place the six diagnostic and two operational tapes in their storage containers and store the containers in the vicinity of the IPCP. (3) Secure all console covers, drawers, and chassis, . (4) Tum off the communications equipment, and set the POWER on 10288848 or PWR on 10291990 switch on the communications stations located on the IFF antenna and inside the IPCP, to OFF. (5) Disconnect and store the headsets from the switchboard and the tactical display and engagement control console (TDECC). (6) Secure the operator's chairs as described below. NOTE ‘The chair tiedown procedure below is typical for one chair, Normally, the two chairs at the TDECC are secured first. There are two tiedown device attach points, and two strap assemblies, for each chair to be secured. The communications operator's chair is secured only for IPCP's *(E)*. NOTE Set the screwdriver adjustment (2, fig. 6-6) to the PLUG position when the tiedown device hole (3, fig. 6-7) is not in use. (a) Set the screwdriver adjustment to the OPEN position on the tiedown device. Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 6-6 PREPARATION FOR TRAVEL FOR THE ICC/IPCP 1~Brass plug (4 or 6) 2-Serewdriver adjustment 3—Tiedown device hole 4-Hook Figure 6-6. ICC/IPCP—chair tiedown, NOTE ‘Two straps (4, fig. 6-7) are attached to the ring (2, fig. 6-7) and brass plug (1, fig. 6-6). (b) Place the brass plug, with the two smp attached, into the tiedown device hole (3, fig. 64) Failure to perform step (c) below my result in damage to equipment. (c) Set the screwdriver adjustment to the LOCK position, and insure that the brass plug is locked securely in the tiedown device. (d) Insert the straps and buckles throw! the handles of the chair, and engage the bucti with the hook (figs. 6-6 and 6-7). (e) Pull the two straps through the buckle until equal tension is applied. (f) Repeat steps (a) through (e) abow to secure the remaining chair at the TDECC.‘3~Tiedown device (4 or 6) 4-Strap 5-Handle (2) 6-Chair Figure 6-7. ICC/IPCP—chairs secure. (g) For IPCP’s *(D)', do not tie down the mmunications operator’s chair. For IPCP’s £)", repeat steps (a) through (e) above to secure 2 communications operator's chair. Prior to handling a system power cable, insure that the generator main power circuit breaker is set to off. Prior to handling an on-trailer cable of a major item, set the major item main power circuit breaker to off. (7) Disconnect the power and data cables om the main cable entry panel, and cap the nnectors and receptacles. (8) Disconnect the 91.4 cm (3 ft) data cables nnected between J12 and JO12, and between 4 and JO14 of the cable entry panel. Store the bles in the IPCP shelter. (9) Disconnect the ground rod cable from ND attach point E1 (18, fig. 1-1) of the cable ‘try panel. lefer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. ‘TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 NOTE In batteries equipped with the stake puller kit (fig. 6-8), omit step (10) and perform steps (11) and (12) below. (10) Pull up the ground rod and stow it and the cable in the storage location provided at the front end of the IPCP (12, fig. 1-1). (11) Pull up the ground rod as described in (a) through (g) below. NOTE Unless otherwise indicated, the key numbers shown in parentheses below refer to figure 6-9. (a) Position the tripod (1) so that the pulley (6) is directly over the ground rod. (b) Drive the prime mover toward the tripod and hook the retrieving cable (2) to a towing point on the front of the vehicle. (c) Place the ground rod grip (3) on the ground rod (4) and secure the latch. (d) Attach the cable yoke to the eye of the grip. (e) Insure that the other tripod pad is directly under the retrieving cable. (f) Back off the prime mover, stopping when the cable yoke has run to the cable restraining pin (5). (g) If the ground rod has not pulled free, and cannot be removed by hand, unlatch the grip, drive the truck forward, attach the grip on the ground rod, and back off the vehicle once more. (12) Stow the ground rod and ground rod cable in the storage location provided at the front end of the IPCP (12, fig. 1-1). 5 4 MI 70503 1-Ground rod grip 2-Straight-jawed grip 8-Retrieving cable 4-Pulley 5—Tripod (disassembled) Figure 6-8. Stake puller kit. 6-7T™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 Retrieving cable 8-Ground rod grip 4-Ground rod ble restraining pin 6Pulley Figure 6-9. Removal of ground rod. (18) Remove the air conditioner cover (13, fig. 1-3) from the stowed position, and install it on the air conditioner rf filter (14, fig. 1-3). (14) Close the ADP air intake vents on the side (20, fig. 1-1) and rear (9, fig. 1-3) of the IPCP. Failure to comply with step (15) below may result in injury to personnel, (15) Make certain that not more than three persons occupy the IPCP roof at any one time. Failure to perform steps (16) and (17) below may result in injury to personnel, 6-8 (16) If the IFF antenna is installed on tix IPCP roof, set the antenna SAFE/ OPERATE switch (17, fig. 1-1) to SAFE before clinbig onto the roof. (17) Insure that all communications equipmest has been deenergized. (18) Lower the two radio whip antennas tothe stowed position by placing the antennas under the radio antenna stowage clamps (5 and 16, fig. 1.) (19) Close the ADP exhaust vents (22, fy 1-1). NOTE Step (20) below is performed only if the FF antenna is emplaced remotely. (20) Disassemble and stow the remote IFF antenna as described below. Failure to perform steps (a) and (b) may cause injury to personnel, since antenna may rotate. (a) Set the antenna SAFE-OPERATE switch to SAFE. (b) Set the AZ DRIVE switch (17, fig. 15) to OFF (SAFE). NOTE Refer to figure 6-10 for steps (c) through (e) (c) Disconnect and retrieve both the 91.40 (300 ft) and 22.9 m (75 ft) remote IFF data cables connected between IFF remote connector J25 01 the rear of the IPCP and the 3.66 m (12 ft) ¥- data cable at the remote site. (d) Disconnect the 3.66 m (12 ft) Ydaa cable connections at the IFF receiver-transmitte and antenna pedestal. (e) Disconnect the two 4.12 m (13.5 ft) cables connected between the IFF antenna pele stal and the IFF receiver-transmitter. (f) Disconnect the ground cable between the IFF receiver-transmitter ground lug and te ground rod. (g) Disconnect the ground cable betweet the IFF antenna pedestal ground lug and te ground rod.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1FF_ ANTENNA TRIPOD \FF RECEIVER -TRANSMITTER ala ICC/IPCP SHELTER HHH _so.22.9n (7511) REMOTE IFF DATA CABLE ——————_ 41m (13.5 ft) RF CABLE —- ---—-- SHELTER CABLING —e-e-e-e-e 91.4m (300 ft.) REMOTE IFF DATA CABLE MS 31184: HHH 372m ia #1) y-oara caste yea Figure 6-10, IFF antenna interconnections—remote installation.™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 (h) Pull up the ground rod (par. a (11) above), (i) Disassemble the remote IFF antenna as described below. 1. Pull up the antenna tripod stakes securing the IFF antenna tripod. Use extreme caution when handling the IFF antenna tripod assembly to prevent accidental dropping which may result in Personnel injury or equipment damage. 2. Loosen the leg retainer handknob (8, fig. 1-6) and fold the tripod legs, lowering the legs, if necessary, by loosening the leg length locking handknobs (9, fig. 1-6). 3. Carry the IFF antenna tripod assembly to the air conditioner side of the IPCP. (i) Retrieve the 91.4 m (300 ft) IFF remote data cable onto the cable reel (13, fig. 1-1). Secure the cable reel with the crank handle. (k) Transport the receiver-transmitter group, tripod stakes, ground rod and straps, and IFF remote cables to the IPCP area, () Stand the IFF antenna tripod assembly on the tripod legs, with the legs unfolded and tele- scoped to the lowest level, directly below the antenna hoisting unit on the IPCP. (m) Place the IFF antenna hoisting unit into the lifting position. NOTE Use guide ropes to guide the antenna assembly from bumping the IPCP shelter. (n) Using the antenna hoisting unit, connect the hook fastener (3, fig. 5-3) to the lifting bracket on the IFF antenna. Using the hoist, carefully lift the IFF antenna to remove its weight from the tripod. Release the bolt assembly handknobs (13, fig. 1-6) and remove the antenna from the tripod. Carefully lift the IFF antenna to the ICP roof. (0) Place the IFF antenna in the antenna pedestal bracket (8, fig. 5-3). Engage the IFF antenna with the bracket by securing the three pedestal bolt assembly handknobs (7, fig. 5-3). (p) Disconnect the hook fastener of the hoist. (q) Stow and secure the antenna hoisting unit, (r) Stow the tripod and stakes in their 6-10 a storage location in the IPCP, and store the [FP remote cables. NOTE for steps (s) and (w). (s) Connect the following local cables to| the IFF antenna pedestal. (t) Install the IFF receiver-transmitte i) the IPCP, and secure it with the web straps jo- vided, (u) Connect the following shelter cables to the IFF receiver-transmitter. (v) Within the IPCP disconnect the {0l{ lowing shelter eables from the IFF coder-decoe ‘Shelter cable IPF coder-decoder connector receptacle wrPi qo wre ne WTPs a6 (w) Connect the following shelter cabls to the IFF coder-decoder. ‘Shelter cable FF coder-decoder (21) Lower the IFF antenna to the stow pos tion as described below. (a) Release the two base bolt assembly handknobs (6, fig. 5-4), and lower the antenna !¢ the stow position (fig. 1-3). (b) Secure the antenna pedestal bracket in the stow position by tightening the two bok assembly handknobs (9, fig. 5-4).a (22) Close and secure the pressure air vent (7, fig. 1-8) on the access door. (23) Close and lock the access door. (24) Raise and stow the stepladder (10, fig. 13). b, Steps (1) through (13) below are the detailed procedures for preparing the IPCP for travel when t is emplaced to substitute for an ICC as part of in TH battery. (1) Deenergize the IPCP (chapter 3). (2) Place the six diagnostic and operational tapes in their storage containers and store the containers in the vicinity of the IPCP. ICC/IPCP SHELTER vz \FF RECEIVER TRANSMITTER Ala wil wie TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Prior to handling a system power cable, insure that the generator main powex circuit breaker is set to off. Prior to handling an on-trailer cable of a major item, set the major item main power circuit breaker to off. (3) Disconnect all power and data cables from the main cable entry panel (19, fig. 1-1) and cap the connectors and receptacles. IFF_ANTENNA PEDESTAL MS 311850 4.1m (13.511) RF CABLE SHELTER CABLING ~O-0-0-0-0-0- 4,1 m (13.5 ft) IFF DATA CABLE Figure 6-11. IFF antenna interconnections—tocal installation.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (4) Connect the following shelter cables to the TDECC. ‘Sheher cable ‘DECC ‘connector receptacle Pig an Ja3 PL Jaa P2 385 PS 336 PA 387 P5 338 P6 339 Pr (5) Secure all console covers, drawers, and chassis. (6) Turn off the communications equipment and set the PWR switch on the communications station to OFF. (7) Disconnect the headset from the communications module and stow it in the utility drawer. (8) Continue with the preparation for travel procedures described in 6-7a (6), When the procedures are completed, continue with (9) immediately below. (9) For IHAWK battery configuration, disconnect ground strap 9166696-2 (4, fig. 7-1) from between GND attach point E1 (18, fig. 1-1) on the cable entry panel and the ground cable attach point on the IBCC cable entry panel. Stow the strap in the vicinity of the IPCP. (10) Disconnect the IPCP ground cable (9, fig. 7-1) from IPCP GND attach point E1. Pull ‘up the ground rod as described in paragraph a (8). Stow the ground rod and ground cable in its storage location at the front of the IPCP. (11) Insure that all communications cables are disconnected from the communication termination unit (CTU) (8, fig. 1-1). (12) Disassemble and store the colocated multichannel communications AS-1852 antenna (U.S. Army), or AS-2236 or AS-2851 antennas (USMC). (13) Continue with the preparation for travel procedures as described in steps (13) through (24) above. ¢. Steps (1) through (21) below are the detailed procedures for preparing the ICC for travel. (1) Deenergize the ICC (chapter 3). T Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 6-12 (2) Place the six diagnostic and two om. tional tapes in their storage containers and tae the containers in the vicinity of the ICC. (3) Secure all covers, drawers, and chasis, (4) Tum off the communications equi and set the POWER 10288848 or PWR 10261: switch on the communication station on the IT antenna (3, fig. 1-1) and inside the ICC (it, fig. 1-4) to OFF. (5) Disconnect the headset from the swité. board and place it in the storage compartment, (6) For ICC’s *(D)', continue with paragnph (2) below. For ICC's *(2)*, continue immedatay low. NOTE ‘There are two tiedown device attach points and two strap assemblies used to secure the communication operator's chair. NOTE Set screwdriver adjustment (2, fig. 6-6) to the PLUG position when the tiedown device hole (8, fig. 6-6) is not in use. (a) Set the screwdriver adjustment to th OPEN position on the tiedown device. NOTE ‘Two straps are attached to the ring and bras plug (fig. 6-7). (b) Place the brass plug, with the tw straps attached, into the tiedown device hok (3 fig. 6-6). Failure to perform step (c) below may result in damage to equipment. (c) Set the screwdriver adjustment to t LOCK position and insure that the brass phg locked securely in the tiedown device. (d) Insert the straps and buckles throw the handles of the chair and engage the bucke with the hook (fig. 6-6 and 6-7). (e) Pull the two straps through the buck until equal tension is applied. (1)_ Disconnect all power and data cables fra the main cable entry panel (19, fig. 1-1) anda the connectors and receptacles.(8) Disconnect ground strap 9166696-2 (4, - 7-1) from between GND attach point E1 (18, -.1-1) on the cable entry panel and the ground ale attach point on the IBCC cable entry panel. ow the strap in the storage cabinet. (9) Disconnect the ICC ground rod cable (9, }.7-1) from the ICC GND attach point E1. Pull ' the ICC ground rod (8, fig. 7-1) as described in 1) below. Stow the ground rod cable in the »rage location at the front of the ICC. (10) Insure that the 76.2 m (250 ft) communi- tion cable is disconnected from J11 on the mmunication termination unit (CTU) (9, fig. 1) and from distribution box J2317 A/U. (11) Pull up the ground rod as described in ragraph 6-7a (11). (12) Stow the ground rod and the ground rod ble in the storage location provided at the front d of the ICC. (13) Remove the air conditioner cover (13, fig. 3) from the stowed position, and install it on the t conditioner rf filter. (14) Close the ADP air intake vents on the side 0, fig. 1-1) and rear (9, fig. 1-3) of the ICC. ‘WARNING } Failure to comply with step (15) below may result in injury to personnel. (15) Make certain that not more than three srions occupy the ICC roof at any one time. Failure to perform steps (16) and (17) below may result in injury to personnel. (16) If the IFF antenna is installed on the ICC oof, set the antenna SAFE-OPERATE switch (17, g. 1-1) to SAFE before climbing onto the roof. (17) Insure that all communications equipment tas been deenergized. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (18) Lower the two radio whip antennas to the stowed position by placing the antennas under the radio antenna storage clamps (5 and 16, fig. 1-3). (19) Close the two ADP exhaust vents (22, fig. 1-1). NOTE Perform step (20) only if the IFF antenna is ‘emplaced remotely. (20) Disassemble and stow the remote IFF antenna as described below. Failure to perform step (a) below may result in injury to personnel. (a) Set the antenna SAFE-OPERATE switch (17, fig. 1-1) to SAFE and the AZ DRIVE switch (17, fig. 1-8) to OFF (SAFE). NOTE Refer to figure 6-10 for steps (b) through (d). (b) Disconnect and retrieve both the 91.4 m (300 ft) and 22.9 m (75 ft) remote IFF data cables connected between IFF remote connector J25 on the rear of the ICC and the 3.7 m (12 ft) ¥-data cable at the remote site. (c) Disconnect the 3.7 m (12 ft) Y-data cable connections at the IFF receiver-transmitter (31) and antenna pedestal (J5). (d) Disconnect the two 4.1 m (13.5 ft) rf cables connected between the IFF antenna pedestal and the IFF receiver-transmitter. (e) Disconnect the ground rod cable from the IFF receivertransmitter ground lug and the ground rod. (f) Disconnect the ground rod cable from the IFF antenna pedestal ground lug and the ground rod. (g) Pull up the ground rod (paragraph 6-7a (1). (h) Disassemble the remote IFF antenna as described below. 1. Pull up the antenna tripod stakes securing the IFF antenna tripod. 6-131430—1535—12 Use extreme caution when handling the IFF antenna/tripod assembly to prevent accidental dropping which may result in personnel injury or equipment damage. 2. Loosen the leg retainer handknob (8, fig. 1-6) and fold the tripod legs. Lower the legs, if necessary, by loosening the leg length locking handknobs (9, fig. 1-6). 3. Carry the IFF antenna/tripod assembly to the air conditioner side of the ICC. (i) Stand the IFF antenna/tripod assembly on the tripod legs, with the legs unfolded and tele- scoped to the lowest level, next to the air conditioner side and directly below the antenna hoisting unit on the ICC. (j) Retrieve the 91.4 m (300 ft) IFF remote data cable onto the cable reel (13, fig. 1-1). Secure the cable reel with the crank handle. (k) Transport the receiver-transmitter group, tripod stakes, ground rod and straps, and IFF remote cables to the ICC area. ()) Place the IFF antenna hoisting unit into the lifting position. NOTE ‘Use guide ropes to prevent the assembly from ‘bumping into the ICC shelter. (m) Using the antenna hoisting unit, connect the hook fastener (3, fig. 5-4) to the lifting bracket on the IFF antenna. Using the hoist, carefully lift the IFF antenna to remove its weight from the tripod. Release the bolt assembly handknob fasteners (13, fig. 1-6) and remove the antenna from the tripod. Carefully lift the IFF antenna to the ICC roof. (n) Carefully insert the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly into the antenna pedestal bracket (8, fig. 5-4). Secure the three bolt assembly handknobs. (0) Disconnect the hook fastener of the hoist. (p) Stow and secure the antenna hoisting unit. (q) Stow the tripod and tripod spades in their storage location in the ICC, and store te IFF remote cables. (r) Connect the following local cabot IFF antenna pedestal (see fig. 6-11). (s) Install the IFF receiver-transmitter inthe ICC, and secure it with the web straps provided. (t) Connect the following shelter cable te the IFF receiver-transmitter (see fig. 6-11). ‘Shelter cable TFF recetver-teanamiter ‘connector receptacle W11P1 w2 W12P1 33 W24P5 a (u) Within the ICC disconnect the following shelter cables from the IFF coder-decoder (re fig. 6-10). i Shelter cable IFF coder-decode connector receptacle W7P1 d10 w7P2 a2 W7P3 J15, (v) Connect the following shelter cables the IFF coder-decoder. (21) Lower the IFF antenna to the stow por tion as described in paragraph a (21) above. d. Prepare the M390 (modified) or M39 (modified) trailer for travel as described in sets (1) through (10) below.Failure to perform step (1) below may result in injury to personnel or equipment damage. (1) Insure that the front support jack (E3, 1. 6-12) is locked in the down position and that e wheels are resting firmly on the ground. NOTE Unless otherwise indicated, the key numbers shown in steps (1) through (10) below refer to figure 6-12. Failure to perform the following step may cause damage to the stepladder. (2) Raise and stow the stepladder. (3) Remove the leveling jack cranks from eir stow brackets (center rear of trailer) and ition them on the crank shafts (F1) of the two a leveling jacks. (4) Retract the jacks with the cranks until ey are clear of the ground. WARNING Failure to perform step (5) below may result in injury to personnel. (5) Make certain that the rear leveling jacks 2 down. (6) Stow the center leveling jack (6) as de- ‘ibed below. Failure to perform step (a) below may result in injury to personnel (a) Retract the jack by operating the jack ak in half-tum intervals to avoid contact with » front cable reel, TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (b) Remove and stow the jack crank. Be careful not to damage the trailer air brake line when stowing the center leveling jack as described in steps (c) through (h) below. (c) Pull up and hold the jack vertical lock (4). (d) Tilt the jack sideways to approximately 30 degrees and then release the vertical lock. (e) Push down on the jack horizontal lock (5) and swing the jack just enough to clear the horizontal lock detent, and then release the horizontal lock. (f) Carefully swing the jack beneath the trailer while continuing to tilt the jack sideways in order to clear the trailer yoke. Be careful not to bump the air brake line (A7) with the jack. (g) After the trailer yoke is cleared, swing the jack upward until it locks in the vertical stow position. (h) Swing the jack beneath the trailer until it locks in the horizontal stow position. (7) Connect the trailer to the prime mover as described below. (a) Open the pintle hook (D3) on the prime mover by removing the locking pin (D1) and lifting the spring-loaded T-bar lateh (D2). (b) Back the prime mover up to the trailer 0 that the pintle hook is directly under the lunette (D4). (c) Disengage the front support jack crank (E5) from its stowage clip. (d) Engage the lunette on the open pintle hook by retracting the front support jack. (e) Close the pintle hook and insert the locking pin, (f) Remove the trailer airbrake hose (A2) from the dummy coupling (A1). Connect the hose to the service coupling at the rear of the prime mover, and open the service coupling shutoff cock, permitting the operation of the trailer brakes from the prime mover. (g) Remove the intervehicular cable (A3) from the stowage clip. Open the cover on the cable connector, and plug the cable into the receptacle on the rear of the prime mover to provide power for the trailer lights. 6-15TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 1—Center leveling jack cranishaft 2-Handbrake lever 8Center leveling jack horizontal lock 4—Center leveling jack vertical lock 6~Center leveling jack horizontal lock 6—Center leveling jack A 1-Dummy coupling 2-Airbrake hose 3-Intervehicular cable 4-Stowage clip 5-A-frame 6-Leveling jack crank ‘Air brake line 8-Lunette mounting bracket B 1—Rear leveling jack horizontal lock 2-Ground pad c ‘1-Spring-loaded frame handle 2-Safety chain Lifting bars 4-Support wheels D 1—Pintle hook locking pin -—Spring-loaded T-bar latch 3-Pintle hook 4—Lunette 1-Spring-loaded frame handle 2—Stowage clip 3—Front support jack 4—Jack handle Front support jack crank 6—Handbrake lever (2) 7—Bracket and spindle assembly F 1—Rear leveling jack crankshaft 2—Rear leveling jack vertical lock ‘S~Rear leveling jack horizontal lock 4—Ground pad 5—Rear leveling jack (2) Figure 6-12. ICC/IPCP trailer (M390 modified or M390C modified)— Preparation for travel and emplacement.(h) Hook the safety chains (C2) to the appropriate loops at the rear of the prime mover. (8) Stow the ‘front support jack (E3) as jescribed below. (a) Fully retract the jack with the crank. (b) Place the jack crank in the stowage ip. (c) Pull the spring-loaded frame handle (E1) and, using the jack handle (E4), rotate the iack rearward and upward until the frame handle sngages the holes in the top of the lunette mount ng bracket (A8), thus locking the jack in the itowed position. (9) Stow each of the two rear leveling jacks F5) as described below. (a) Fully retract the jack with the crank. (b) Remove and stow the jack crank. (¢) Pull up and hold the vertical lock (F2). (d) Swing the ground pad (F4) rearward nd upward until it is in a horizontal position. telease the vertical lock. (e) Pull up and hold the horizontal lock ). (f) Swing the jack horizontally until it is eneath the trailer. Release the horizontal lock. (10) Release the handbrake levers (2), one on ach side of the A-frame. €. Prior to leaving the area, make the following hhecks. (1) The antenna SAFE/OPERATE ewitch tin the SAFE position. (2) The AZ DRIVE switch is in the OFF SAFE) position. (3) The IFF antenna is installed on the 3C/IPCP roof in its stowed position. (4) The antenna hoisting unit is properly owed. (5) The ground rod and ground rod cable re disconnected and properly stowed. (6) The ADP air intake vents are closed ad secured. (7) The air conditioner cover is installed ad secured. (9) The headsets are stowed in the storage ompartment, (8) The two radio whip antennas are stowed. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (10) The pressure air vent on the door is closed and secured. (11) The door is locked. (12) The stepladder is raised and stowed. (18) The trailer is secured to the prime mover. (14) The front support jack is stowed. (15) All leveling jacks are stowed and secured. (16) All jack cranks are stowed. (17) The trailer lights are working. (18) The handbrakes are released. (19) The trailer brakes are working (move the prime mover a short distance and then stop). 6-8. Preparation for Travel Procedures— Helicopter a. The helicopter lifting kit (fig. 6-1) is provided for each major item in the IHAWK system. The kit contains the items necessary, except for the spreader bar, to form the suspension sling assembly for each major item. The suspension sling assembly required to lift the ICC/IPCP and trailer by helicopter consists of four nylon web and chain legs connected to a 30.5 cm (1 ft) diameter nylon web ring. Each leg is 7.01 m (28 ft) Jong and is made up of a 4.57 m (15 ft) nylon web leg with a 2.44 m (8 ft) chain assembly bolted to the nylon leg. For detailed procedures, refer to dbelow. b. Prepare the ICC/IPCP for helicopter lift as described in paragraph 6-7a, b, or ¢. ¢. Prepare two spreader bars as described in paragraph 6-5¢, d. Prepare the suspension sling as described below. Failure to perform step (1) below may result in injury to personnel or equipment damage. (1) Insure that web legs are free from defects (burns, cut edges, or broken threads). (2) Tape the two radio antennas mounted on top of the shelter securely to their stowage clamps, 6-17(3) Place the entire sling assembly and the two spreader bars on top of the ICC/IPCP. Place the center loop in the center of the roof and lay two legs over the front lifting eyes (4, fig. 6-13). Lay the remaining two legs over the rear corner of the trailer so that they are adjacent to the two rear leveling jacks (3, fig. 6-13). (4) Insert the spreader bar between the forward two legs just above the third nylon loop (counting from the top down) which holds the four straps forming a leg in place. This is approximately 2.21 m (87 in.) from the end of the nylon legs which are connected to the nylon web ring. Tie with nylon cord and tape. (5) Insert the spreader bar between the two rear legs in the same manner as described in step (4) above. Again, tie with nylon cord and tape. NOTE Due to the non-symmetrical weight distribution of the ICC/IPCP, the chain links used to attach the chain legs to the lifting points are not equal in the following steps. The proper chain link is determined by counting from the end link on each chain leg (4, fig. 6-2). (6) Attach the right front chain leg to the ICC/IPCP trailer by passing the chain leg through the right front lifting eye. If the major item is an IPCP, fasten link 56 to its grab link; if an ICC, fasten link 48 to its grab link. (7) In the same manner, insert the left front sling leg through the left front lifting eye and attach chain link 41 (ICC) or 49 (IPCP) to its grab link. (8) At the right rear of the trailer, wrap the chain leg around the leveling-jack bracket (8, fig. 6-13). Insure that the grab link is forward of the jack. Fasten link 24 of the chain leg through ite grab link. (9) In the same manner, wrap the left rear chain leg around the left rear leveling-jack bracket. Fasten link 15 of the chain leg into its grab link. Insure that the grab link is forward of the jack. (10) Fasten loose chain ends with tape to prevent fouling (fig. 6-3). (11) Move the two spreader bars to the center of the roof, pulling all four sling legs taut. Tape the two spreader bars to each other so they will break away during lift (fig. 6-14). 6-18 (12) To prevent fouling of the sling dep be fore hookup, coil all four sling legs together nth roof of the shelter and wrap with tape 1% they will break away during lift. Insure that the say legs are positioned and taped so they will not ng up during helicopter lift. (18) Drive the ground rod of the grounding device assembly into the ground next to the trailer, (14) Place the grounding device (2, fig. 614) with the taped suspension sling on the roof of te shelter. ¢. Prior to helicopter lift, perform the following checks. (1) The trailer has been prepared for travd and the handbrakes are set. (2) All jacks are partially retracted and it the vertical position, (3) The ICC/IPCP is prepared for travel, (4) The four slings are laid out and tapd 8o they will not hang up during helicopter lift. f. The using organization may be required Perform the following helicopter hookup pre cedures. Failure to perform step (1) may result in injury to personnel. (1) The hookup crew must wear protectin devices consisting of helmet liners, shell, and got gles for protection against flying sand, dirt, dut, and debris. The hovering helicopter develops high static voltages in excess of 20,000 volts on the helicopter lifting hook (2, fig. 6-15). Failure to perform steps (2) through (8) below in the exact se quence given may result in injury to personnel. (2) The hookup crew takes a position on tht major item so that the opening of the helicopter lifting hook is to their left. This permits the hot to be grounded from its right side and the nyke assembly to be placed on the hook from the kft side.Failure to perform step (8) may result in injury to personnel. (3) Ground the helicopter lifting hook using the grounding device assembly (1, fig. 6-1). Main- tain the contact between the grounding device and the lifting hook throughout the hookup procedure. If the ground is disconnected before the hookup is completed, the hook must be grounded again before attempting to hook up the sling assembly. (4) Grasp the hook by hand and slip the nylon web ring of the suspension sling onto the hook. 1—Suspension sling assembly 2-Spreader bars TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (5) Make certain that the helicopter lifting hook latch (3, fig. 6-15) has locked the ring into place, (6) Make certain that all hands are clear of the helicopter lifting hook and then remove the grounding device from the hook. Failure to perform step (7) may result in injury to personnel. (7) The hookup crew must leave the major item to the right of the line-of-flight of the helicopter (fig. 6-16) after completion of the hookup. MS 156085 ‘8--Left rear lift point/leveling jack 4-Left front lifting eye Figure 6-18. ICC/IPCP suspension sling assembly secured for helicopter lift.TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 MS 156086, MS 156064 1~80.5 cm (1 ft) nylon web ring 2-Helicopter lifting hook 8_Helicopter lifting hook latch Figure 6-15. Hookup of suspension sling assembly to helicopter lifting hook. 6-20TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (8) Retrieve the grounding devite assembly WARNING and return it to the storage bag. ‘The hookup crew must stay clear of the major item until it is airborne (fig. 6-16). wooK.ur cr atm (204%) 708.1m 3040 DURING HOOK-UP DURING APPROACH, RELEASE AND TAKEOFF win HOOK-UP AREA waenoENcy AEROENCY [ALL GROUND PERSONNEL MOVE RIGHT => & neucorter moves .er MI 705078 Figure 6-16, Position diagram. 6-21TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 oo CABLE RETRIEVING ASSIGNMENT. 1 FOR CREW NO.2 CABLE RETRIEVING ASSIGNMENT FOR CREW NO. LEGEND Soe DATA CABLE, Ilam (875 t0) -0-0- TAS *(AE) (SEE NOTE2) DATA CABLE 14m (37541) DO POWER CABLE 114m (37511) — - = INDICATES SIMILAR OPERATIONS NOTES: LALTERNATE. POWER ‘CONNECTION 2.REFER TO APPENDIXE FOR SERIAL NUMBER EFFECTIVITY LCHR NO? CABLE RETRIEVING ASSIGNMENT FOR LCHR CABLE CREW MS 3118514 Figure 6-17. AFU electrical cables retrieving assignments—typical block diagram. 22TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Section IV. PREPARATION FOR TRAVEL FOR THE ELECTRICAL CABLES -9. General ‘This section describes the procedures used to pre- sare the electrical cables for travel by prime mover Par. 6-11) or by helicopter (par. 6-12). a. Types of Cables. Two types of cables are ‘sed: power cables and data cables. The power ables are 114m (875 ft) long and have a male connector on one end, and a female connector on he other end. The data cables are 114 m (375 ft) ong and have female connectors on both ends. b. Cable Retrieving, Figure 6-17 illustrates typ- cal cable retrieving procedures for the IAFU. Where the cable retrieving operations are identi- tal, the order and directions of the cables to be setrieved are given only once. However, the number of cables to be retrieved is indicated. Prior to handling a system power cable, insure that the generator main power circuit breaker is set to off. Prior to handling an on-trailer cable of a major item, set the major item main power cireuit breaker to off. ¢. Cable Connections, Disconnect all cables connected to the major items before starting the cable retrieving procedures. d. RL-31 Cable Reeler. A typical procedure used by cable crews for retrieving cables with the RL-31 cable reeler (3, fig. 6-18) is described below. (1) With the shaft of the RL-31 cable reeler inserted through the center hole of the cable reel, place the empty cable reel in the cable reeler. (2) Secure the reel in place with the two reel retainers (3, fig. 6-19). (3) Connect the end of the cable to be retrieved to the empty reel with the clamp (1, fig. 618). (4) Reel in the cable. (5) Connect the end of the cable to the reel with the clamp (1, fig. 6-19). 6-10, Typical Cable Retrieving Proceduros (Fig. 6-17) a. The number of cable reels and cable reelers to be loaded on the prime movers for each major item shall be determined by the local loading plan for the battery. NOTE Remove the sandbags or soil which protect the cables before starting the cable retrieving Procedures. b. Cable crew No. 1 retrieves the cables at the IHIPIR in the order listed below. (1) The data cables leading to the ICC/IPCP. (2) The data cable leading to the ILSCB. (3) The power cable leading to the generator. ¢. Cable crew No. 2 retrieves the following cables at the ICC/IPCP. (1) The data cable leading to the ICWAR. (2) The power cable leading to the ICWAR from the generator. (8) The power cable leading to the generator. d. The ILCHR cable crew retrieves the data and power cables at each ILCHR. 6-11. Preparation for Travel Procedures— Prime Mover To prepare the electrical cables for transportation by prime mover, perform the procedures contained in paragraph 6-10. 6-12. Preparation for Travel Procedures— Helicopter a. The helicopter lifting kit (fig. 6-1) is provided for each major item in the IHAWK system. The kit contains the items necessary to form the suspension sling assembly for each major item. The suspension sling assembly required to lift the electrical cables by helicopter consists of four nylon web and chain legs connected to a 30.5 cm (1 ft) diameter nylon web ring and a 3.66 m (12 ft) steel-cable cargo net. Each leg of the suspension sling assembly is 7.1 m (23 ft) long and is made up of a 4.57 m (16 ft) nylon web leg with a 2.44 m (8 ft) chain assembly bolted to the nylon leg. For detailed procedures, refer to paragraph c below. b. Prepare the electrical cables for helicopter lift as described below: (1) Prepare the steel-cable cargo net for use by spreading it flat on the ground in the designated lift area, 6-23™ 9 430—1535—12—1 (2) Perform the procedures described in paragraph 6-10. (3) Load the cable assembly on the cargo net. c. Prepare the suspension sling assembly as described below. Failure to perform step (1) below may result in injury to personnel or equipment damage. (1) Insure that the web legs are free from defects (burns, cut edges, or broken threads). (2) Place the entire suspension sling assembly in the center of the cargo net, on top of the electrical cable assembly. 1-Clamp 2-Handerank 3-RL-B1 cable reeler (3895-00-252-6896) Figure 6-18. Cable crew retrieving cable—typical. 624 1-Clamp 2-Cable reel 3—Reel retainers 4-RL-S1 cable reeler Figure 6-19. Placing cable reel in the RL-31 cable reeler—typical. (8) Lay the four legs of the sling assembly to the corners of the cargo net and pass each chain leg through the corner lifting eyes in the cargo net Pass the chain leg through the grab link and catch at link 54. (4) Tie loose ends of the chain legs with nylon cord and tape to prevent fouling (fig. 6-3). d. To attach the suspension sling assembly to the helicopter hook, refer to paragraph 6-8/.535—12—1 CHAPTER 7 EMPLACEMENT PROCEDURES Section |. |, Seope The detailed emplacement procedures for the ‘O/IPCP and IAFU electrical cables are presented this chapter. Refer to (C) TM 9—1425—1525 information concerning site selection and eval- ion. 1, Explanation of Procedures ‘the procedures for emplacing the ICC/IPCP and Section I, |, General ‘his section describes the emplacement pro- lures for the ICC/IPCP. The procedures begin hh the arrival of the major item at the site by wer prime mover (par. 7-5) or helicopter (par. ). In addition, the procedures for remote em- cement of the IFF antenna are contained in agraph 7-6, + Tools ‘he tools required are a screwdriver and a \ge hammer. « Emplacement Procedures—Prime Mover [esgnon] Insure that the ICC/IPCP is emplaced with the shelter access door faced away from all pulse radars and the sector of interest whenever possible. NOTE If the IPCP is to be emplaced as part of an IAFU, perform steps a, b, and ¢ below. If the ICC/IPCP is to be emplaced as part of an IH ‘battery, perform steps a, b, and d below. The detailed procedures for emplacing the ler are as follows: Ne Unless otherwise indicated, the key numbers in parentheses shown below refer to figure 612. GENERAL IAFU electrical cables describe a typical method of setting up a completely emplaced major item from a mobile unit. These procedures cover arrival by prime mover or helicopter. They continue in sequence until the ICC/IPCP is ready for orientation and alinement. Procedures for orientation and alinement are described in chapter 8. EMPLACEMENT OF THE ICC/IPCP (1) Set the trailer handbrake with the handbrake levers (2) one on each side of the A-frame. (2) Emplace each rear leveling jack (F5) as described below. (a) Pull up and hold the horizontal lock (F8). (b) Turn the jack horizontally until the ground pad (F4) is at the rear of the trailer. Re- lease the horizontal lock. (c) Pull up and hold the vertical lock (F2). (d) Rotate the jack to the vertical position with the ground pad down. Release the vertical lock. (e) Remove a crank from the stow bracket on the rear center of the trailer and place it on the crankshaft (F1). (f) Adjust the jack until the ground pad is just clear of the ground. (8) Lower the front support jack as described below. (a) While supporting the jack (ES) with the jack handle (E4). pull upward on the spring- loaded frame handle (E1). (b) Lower the jack to the down position. Insure that the ends of the spring-loaded frame handle engage the holes in the bracket and spindle assembly (E7). (c) Disengage the jack crank (E5) and turn it clockwise until the support wheels rest firmly on the ground. 7AT 9—1430—1535—12—1 (4) Release the trailer from the prime mover as described below: Failure to perform step (a) below may reault in injury to personnel. (a) Make certain that the rear leveling jacks are down, (b) Disconnect the safety chains and secure them with the turnbuckles. (c) Remove the intervehicular cable assembly (A8) from the receptacle on the prime mover and place it in the stowage clip (A4). (d) Close the service coupling shutoff cock at the rear of the prime mover. Disconnect the trailer airbrake hose from the service coupling and place it on the dummy coupling (A1). (e) Remove the locking pin from the pintle hook on the prime mover (D1). (f) Release the spring-loaded T-bar latch (D2) and open the pintle hook. (g) Turn the front support jack crank clockwise until the lunette (D4) is free of the pintle hook. (k) Move the prime mover forward, close the pintle hook, and insert the locking pin. (5) Lower the front center leveling jack (6) as described below. Be careful not to damage the trailer air brake line (A7) when emplacing the center leveling jack as described in steps (a) through (c) below. (a) Pull up the horizontal lock (5) and swing the jack out from under the trailer until the vertical lock (4) is accessible. (b) Pull up the vertical lock and tilt the jack sideways as required to clear the trailer yoke. Be careful not to bump the air brake line with the jack, (c) Continue positioning the jack verti cally and horizontally until the jack is locked in the emplaced position. 74 a (a) Remove the jack crank (A6) from te stow bracket on the A-frame, and place it on tte jack crankshaft (1). (e) Adjust the jack until the ground pai is just clear of the ground, b, Steps (1) through (19) below are detailed procedures for emplacing the ICC/IPCP, IAPU and IH battery. (1) Obtain the ground rod (12, fig. 1-1) mi cable from its storage location at the front of te Icc/IPcr. (2) Emplace the ICC/IPCP ground rod 1 minimum of 61 cm (2 ft) into the ground near te ICC/IPCP cable entry panel. Connect the groud tod cable between the ICC/IPCP ground rod mi GND attach point E1 (18, fig. 1-1) on the cate entry panel. (3) For IHAWK battery configuration conned the ground strap 9166696-2 (4, fig. 7-1) betwen GND attach point E1 on the cable entry pane! mi the IBCC ground attach point on the IBCC abi entry panel. (3.1) Insure that the resistance to ground f the ground rod is 25 ohms or less. NOTE Refer to TM 9~1426—1525—1, appendix F, for detailed instructions for measuring the resistance of the gound rod. It may be necer sary to use additional ground rods and/or buried wire toachieve 26 ohms or less resistance to ground. Failure to perform step (4) below my result in injury to the hands. (4) Lower the front leveling jack by opt ating the jack crank in half-turn intervals to avo contact with the front cable reel. (5) Lower the front and rear jacks until tt trailer tires are at least one (1) inch off the grou. (6) Raise the IFF antenna from the #¥ Position as described below:a TH 9—1430—1535; Failure to comply with step (a) below Failure to perform steps (b) and (c) may result in injury to personnel. may cause injury to personnel since antenna may rotate. (a) Make certain that not more than three persons occupy the ICC/IPCP roof at any one time. 720pies oy Google. = Dgteedey SIOOR30—1535—12—1 , i} « aril Sana ul i MS 166350 1-Icc/Ipcr point EL 4-ICC/IPCP ground strap 9166696-2 6.1 m (20 ft) S-IBCC ground attach point @-IBCC cable entry panel 7-1BCC SHICC/IPCP ground rod SHICC/IPCP ground cable ‘Figure 7-1. ICC/IPCP and IBCC emplacement ground connections,TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (6) Set the antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch (17, fig. 1-1) to SAFE. (c) Set the AZ DRIVE switch (17, fig. 1-3) to OFF (SAFE). When in the stowed position, the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly are under spring tension. (d) At the antenna pedestal, release the two stow bolt assembly handinobs (9, fig. 5-4) securing the antenna in the stow position. Ease the antenna and pedestal assembly (under spring tension) into the operating position. (e) Secure the antenna pedestal in the operating position by tightening the two bolt assembly handknobs (6, fig. 5-4). (7) Level the ICC/ PCP as described below: (a) View the horizontal spirit levels (1, fig. 7-2), and adjust the leveling jacks, as necessary, ‘until each level bubble is centered. () Adjust the front support jack until the support wheels are resting on the ground. (c) Stow the jack cranks in their stowage clips. NOTE If remote installation of the IFF antenna is desired, refer to paragraph 7-6 for detailed instructions, (8) Open the ADP exhaust vents (22, fig. 1-1). (9) For USMC only, release the two radio whip antennas from the stowage clamps (5 and 16, fig. 1-8) and raise the antennas to the operating position. Prior to handling a system power cable, insure that the generator main power circuit breaker is set to off. Prior to handling an on-trailer cable of a major item, set the major item main power circuit breaker to off. (10) Insure that the power and data cables are connected. [| iReter to-appendts for serial number effectivity. 7-4 cw (11) Remove and stow the air conditioner cover (12, fig. 1-3). (12) Open the ADP air intake vents on the se (20, fig. 1-1) and rear (8, fig. 1-3) of the 10, | PCP. (18) Release and lower the stepladder. (14) Open the pressure air vent (7, fig. 1-3)on the door. (15) Unlock and open the access door. Leaman] Failure to perform step (16) below may result in damage to the headsets. (16) Place each headset on the hook provided near the designated operator station. (17) Connect a headset to the communication module (16, fig. 1-4) on the wall above the aur- liary control unit. (18) For PCP’s only, connect headsets to the receptacles located on the right and left side ofthe TDECC. (19) Connect a headset to the IFF antam communications module (2, fig. 7-2). ¢ Steps (1) through (7) below are detailed po | cedures for emplacing the PCP as part of AFU. (1) Obtain the two 91.4 em (8 ft) data cables from their storage location within the PCP, At the PCP cable entry panel, connect one of the cables between receptacles J12 and JO12, and the other cable between receptacles J14 and JOM. (2) In the main cable entry panel, TBI-10 and -14 must be jumpered together ( PCP open- tion). If TB1-10 and -16 are jumpered (ICC o» eration), transfer the lead from TB1-16 to TBI-. (8) *(AE)' If TAS BRU’s have been received, refer to TM 9—1430—1536—18 for installation. Alo, refer to paragraph 1-1 of this manual. (4) Set the HPI ALTITUDE control (8, fe 8-19) on the TDECC RO control panel to the height above sea level of the site. (5) Set the HIPIR elevation search limits ceate angle adjust control (fig. 7.2.1) in the TDECC pr local TSOP requirements. (6) Set the geographical switches (8, 9, 10 ani 11, fig. 2-4) per local TSOP. (1) Energize the PCP (chapter 3). I @. Steps (1) through (6) are the detailed po | cedures for emplacing the ICC PCP as part of the HAWK battery.TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 (1) In the main cable entry panel, TB1-10 and (2) If the IFF antenna is to be remotely in- } must be jumpered together (ICC operation). stalled, perform the procedures outlined in para- TB1-10 and -14 are jumpered (IPCP operation), graph 7-6. nsfer the lead from TB1-14 to TB1-16. MI 70607 1~Antenna horizontal spirit level 2—Communications station Figure 7-2. IFF antenna,jess GOORTCTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (3) For IPCP’s only, disconnect the following DECC receptacles from the shelter cable connec- Failure to perform step (5) below may result in damage to the IHIPIR’s synchros. (5) Insure that IHIPIR data cables are removed from the IPCP and installed on the IBCC before energizing the IHIPIR. (6) Energize the ICC/IPCP (chapter 8) but disregard the TDECC energizing procedures. 7-6. Remote Installation of the IFF Antenna Failure to perform steps a and b may cause injury to personnel since antenna may rotate. a. Set the antenna SAFE-OPERATE switch to SAFE. b. Set the AZ DRIVE switch to OFF (SAFE). WARNING } Failure to comply with step ¢ below may result in injury to personnel. 7-6 ¢. Make certain that not more than three pe. sons occupy the ICC/IPCP roof at any one time, d, Obtain the IFF antenna tripod from its sor, ‘age area and set it up on the air conditioner side t the ICC/IPCP to its lowest configuration. Renow the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly from ti antenna pedestal bracket (8, fig. 5-4) as descited in steps (1) through (3) below. (1)_ If the IFF antenna is in the stow postin, raise it to the operating position (par. 7-5b (8). (2) Disconnect the local cables from the IF? antenna pedestal (fig. 6-11)as follows: Local cable WisPi wie ‘WioP2 (8) Connect the hook fastener of the antes hoisting unit to the lifting bracket on the IF? antenna, Failure to perform step (4) may cause injury to personnel. (4) Insure that the antenna hoisting unit is hooked onto the lifting bracket. (5) Release the three pedestal bolt assembly handknobs (7, fig. 5-4). NOTE Ure guide ropes to guide the antenna assembly to prevent the assembly from bumping the ICC/IPCP shelter. (6) Using the hoist with crank handle, are fully lift the IFF antenna and pedestal assembly from the antenna pedestal bracket, and lower t to the tripod assembly and secure the antemt pedestal to the tripod using all three (3) bolt sembly handknobs (13, fig. 1-6).€. Within the ICC/IPCP disconnect the following shelter cables (fig. 6-11) from the IFF receiver- transmitter: ‘Sheker cable TPF recelvertranamittar ‘connector receptacle WPL Ja Wi2Pt 33 W2ePs, n J. Remove the web straps securing the IFF receiver-transmitter, and remove the unit from its mounting location. & Within the ICC/IPCP disconnect the following shelter cables (fig. 6-11) from the IFF coder- decoder: ‘Shelter cable TPF coder-decader ‘connector receptacle WaPs amg ‘W2Ps n10 Wupe 6 A. Connect the following shelter cables to the IFF coder-decoder: ‘beter cable TPF coderdecoder connector receptacle WIPt 310 wrpe aig wires a6 i. Obtain the 22.9 m (75 ft) IFF remote data cable, the 3.66 m (12 ft) data cable, the stepstool and the two 4.12 m (13. 5 ft) rf cables from their storage locations. i. Obtain the three tripod spades from their stowage location in the ICC/IPCP. k. Obtain the ground rod and two ground straps from their stowage location in the ICC/IPCP. 1. Remove the end of the 91.4 m (800 ft) IFF remote data cable from the cable reel (10, fig. 1-1). Release the cable reel and lay the cable to the re- note site. At the ICC/IPCP, disconnect the con- ector from the empty reel. Secure the cable reel vandcrank, m. Transport the IFF antenna, ground rod, sround strap, tripod, tripod spades, stepstool, IFF ceceiver-transmitter, and cables to the remote site. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Failure to perform steps n and o below may result in injury to personnel and equipment damage. x, When assembling the IFF antenna tripod, make certain the legs are extended to a height which will prevent injury to personnel when the IFF antenna is rotating. o. Use extreme caution when handling the IFF antenna tripod assembly to prevent accidental dropping. p. Erect the IFF antenna tripod assembly to its operating position as described in (1) through (8) below. (1) While supporting the IFF antenna tripod assembly, spread the tripod legs to their maximum limit and lock the legs using the leg retainer handknob (8, fig. 1-6). (2) While supporting the IFF antenna/tripod assembly, allow the three (3) legs to contact the ground. Using the stepladder, erect the an- tena to its operating position and secure the leg length locking handknobs (9, fig. 1-6). (3) Center the spirit level bubbles in their vials (2, fig. 1-6) using the leveling handknobs (11, fig. 1-6). NOTE The length of each leg may have to be ad- Justed using the leg length locking handknobs if the ground is not level enough to allow the leveling of the antenna using the leveling handknobs. q. Emplace the three tripod spades to secure the antenna pedestal. Failure to perform step r below may result in equipment damage. r. Place sandbags on each leg of the tripod to increase the stability of the tripod during high winds. 4. Check the tripod level indicators and relevel, if necessary, by adjusting the four leveling handknobs as required. 7-7TM 9—1430—1535—12— t, Position the IFF receiver-transmitter near the tripod, and emplace the ground rod between it and the tripod. u. Connect a ground cable between the IFF antenna pedestal ground lug and the ground rod. v. Connect the second ground cable between the ground lug on the IFF receiver-transmitter and the ground rod. w. Connect the two rf cables between the IFF antenna pedestal and receiver-transmitter as shown in figure 6-10. x. Connect the Y-data cable to the IFF antenna pedestal and receiver-transmitter as shown in figure 6-10. y. Connect one end of the IFF data cable to the Y-data cable, and the other end to IFF remote connector J25 on the ICC/IPCP cable entry panel. 7-7. Multichannel! Communicatiens Equip- ment (U.S. Army) NOTE Emplacement of multichannel communications equipment is coordinated with the radio relay attendant aaigned to the IHAWK battery or a. ICC/IPCP Emplaced as Repeater Station. (1) Refer to TM 11—5895—453—-14 for emplacement of the AN/TRC-145 radio terminal set and AS-1852 antennas with accessories. (2) Connect two 76.2 m (250 ft) 26-pair cables between ICC/IPCP CTU connectors J11 (platoon 1) and J162 (platoon 2) (9 and 8, fig. 2-21) and the AN/TRC-145. (3) Emplace a third AS-1852 antenna and ‘accessories for use with the ICC/IPCP inboard (system no. 1) multichannel communications station, and connect it to the CTU ANTENNA NO. 3 connector (5, fig. 2-21). (4) Refer to chapter 2 of this manual for repeater station channel utilization plans. No patch Panel modifications with the patch cords are necessary unless channel reallocation is required. Both the BOC and remote platoons must be notified if any changes are made. (5) Energize and tune-up the AN/TRC-145 per TM 11-5895—453—14 and aline the AS-1852 antennas with the remote platoons. 7-8 (6) Energize and tune-up ICC/IPCP conma. cations station per chapter 3 of this manual. (7) Establish order-wire communications with the BOC (system no. 1) and aline the AS1#&? antenna until a maximum reading is obtained o: the communications station GRC-108 receiver (me ter selector switch in RCVR SIG position). ». ICC/IPCP Emplaced as Remote Station. (1) Refer to TM 11—5820—540—12 for en placement of AS-1852 antenna and accessories, (2) Connect the system no. 1 AS-1852 tenna to the ICC/IPCP CTU ANTENNA NO0.} connector (5, fig. 2-21). (3) Refer to chapter 2 of this manual form mote station channel utilization plans. No pate Panel modifications with the patch cords are neces sary unless channel reallocation is required. Tu BOC must be notified if any changes are made, (4) Energize and tune-up ICC/IPCP comm nications station per chapter 3 of this manual. (8) Establish order-wire communications wit the repeater station (system no, 1) and aline tie AS-1852 antenna until a maximum reading is ob tained on the communication station GRC-103 ceiver (meter selector switch in RCVR SIG poé- tion). 7. Multichannel Communications Equip ment (USMC) NOTE Emplacement of multichannel communications ‘equipment is coordinated with the radio rey attendant assigned to the IH Battery or LAFU. a. ICC/IPCP as Repeater Station. (1) Erect the ICC/IPCP whip antennas (6 and 1, fig. 1-2). (2) Emplace the two colocated AS-2236 o AS-2851 antennas per TM (3) Connect the antenna to be used for system no. 1 (BOC) to ICC/IPCP CTU ANTENNA NO.1 connector (2, fig. 2-21). (4) Connect the antenna to be used for sya no. 2 (remote platoon) to the CTU ANTENNA | NO. 2 connector (3, fig. 2-21).10 (5) Refer to chapter 2 of this manual for re- eater station channel utilization plans. No patch Panel modifications with the patch cords are necessary unless absolutely required. Both the TAOC and remote platoon must be notified if any changes are made. (6) Energize and tune-up the ICC/ PCP communications station per chapter 3 of this manual. (1) Establish order-wire communications with the TAOC and remote platoon and aline the co- Soction III. 7-10. General This section describes the procedures for em- Placement of the AFU electrical cables. a. Cable Layout, Figure 7-3 illustrates typical cable-laying procedures for the AFU. b. RL-$1 Cable Reeler. A typical procedure used by cable crews for laying cables with the RL-31 cable reeler is described below. (1) With the shaft of the RL-31 cable reeler inserted through the cable reel, place the reel in the reeler (fig. 6-19). (2) Secure the reel in place with the reel retainers. (3) Remove the clamp holding the connector associated with the outer layer of the cable. (4) Hold the cable reeler in place, and lay the cable. (5) When the entire cable is laid, release the remaining connector from the reel and remove the empty reel. 7-11. Typical Cable-Laying Procedures (Fig. 7-3) The following typical procedures provide information necessary for laying the cables. NOTE All data cable connections to the LCHR’s are made before the cables are connected to the LSCB. This method allows the crew chief to determine LCHR's 1, 2, and 3 by directing the appropriate cable connections. NOTE ‘The cable-laying procedures listed below are 80 arranged that only the test connectors (cable identification) and indicators at the LSCB and PCP are used. 'Refer to appendix E for serial number effectivity. T 9—1430—1535—12-1 located AS-2236 or AS-2851 antennas for maximum performance. b. ICC/ PCP Emplaced as Remote Station. Same as above, except that only system no. 2 is used. 7-9, Emplacement Procedures — Helicopter a. Remove, disassemble, and stow the suspension sling assembly in the helicopter lifting kit bag. Stow the bag. 6. For emplacement of the ICC/ PCP, refer to paragraphs 7-5a and b. EMPLACEMENT OF THE IAFU ELECTRICAL CABLES Do not coil the power cables other than in a figure eight (8) configuration. The inductive property of a coiled power cable carrying current will cause it to become excessively heated and possibly damaged. a. Unload the cable reels and RL-31 cable reelers from the prime movers per battery loading plan. b. Cable crew No. 1 laya the cables for the firing section as described below. Prior to handling a system power cable, insure that the generator main power circuit breaker is set to off. Prior to handling an on-trailer cable of a major item, set the major item main power circuit breaker to off. (1) At the HIPIR, place a power cable reel in the cable reeler, and lay the cable to the generator. Connect the male connector to one of the four connectors on the generator. At the HIPIR, connect the female end to J1. (2) At the HIPIR, place a data cable reel in the cable reeler, and lay the cable to the PCP. At the HIPIR, connect the cable to J2. (3) At the HIPIR, place a data cable reel in the cable reeler, and lay the cable to the PCP. At the IHIPIR, connect the cable to J8. (4) *(AE)' At the HIPIR, place a data cable reel in the cable reeler, and lay the cable to the PCP. At the HIPIR, connect the cable to J8.TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 cw ? CABLE LAYOUT 3RO 47H 2ND FOR CREW NO. 1 1 DATA CABLE 4m (375 #1) “POO TAS, (AE) SEENOTE 2) | DATA CABLE ' 4m (37541) “HOO POWER CABLE | 14m (37811) ——-- INDICATES SIMILAR 1 OPERATIONS. 2.REFER TO APPENDIX E FOR SERIAL NUMBER EFFECTIVITY ' ur ron tenn crew | MS 3118524 Figure 7-3. IAFU electrical cables layout—typical—block diagram. 7-10(5) At the IHIPIR, place a data cable reel in the cable reeler, and lay the cable to the ILSCB. At the IHIPIR, connect the cable to J4. ¢. Cable crew No. 2 lays the cables for the IPCP and ICWAR as described below. (1) At the IPCP, place a power cable reel in the cable reeler, and lay the cable to the generator. Connect the male connector to one of the four connectors on the generator. At the IPCP, connect the femaile connector to J1. (2) At the ICWAR, place a power cable reel in the cable reeler, and lay the cable to the generator. At the generator, connect the male connector to one of the four connectors, and at the ICWAR connect the female connector to J1. (3) At the IPCP, place a data cable reel in the cable reeler, and lay the cable to the ICWAR. At the IPCP, connect the cable to J6. d. The ILCHR cable crew lays the cables for each ILCHR as described below. (1) At the ILCHR, place a power cable reel ‘in the cable reeler, and lay the cable to the generator. Connect the male connector to one of the four connectors on the generator. At the ILCHR, connect the female connector to J1. (2) At the ILCHR, place a data cable reel in the cable reeler, and lay the cable to the ILSCB. At the ILCHR, connect the cable to J2. e. Perform the procedures described below at the ILSCB. (1) Request the IHIPIR personnel to ener- Size the radar. (2) Set_the HPI CABLE INDENT/OFF switch to HPI CABLE IDENT. Connect each data cable, in turn, to connector J1 on the ILSCB, and observe which cable causes the cable identification (ID) lamp on the ILSCB front panel to illuminate. Connect this cable to connector J1 on the ILSCB. (8) Determine which ILCHR’s are to be designated 1, 2, and 3. TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 (4) Connect the data cables from ILCHR’s 1, 2, and 3 to connectors J2, J8, and J4, respectively, on the ILSCB. f. Perform the procedures described below at the IPCP, (1) At the cable entry panel, press the LAMP TEST switch (7, fig. 2-8) and observe that the indicator lamp adjacent to each data cable connector illuminates. (2) Locate the four 10108181-1 114 m (375 ft) data cables. ‘CAUTION Do not insert 10108181-1 data cables into TEST CONN (46) connector J16 as this will cause an incorrect indicator lamp to illuminate and may also result in equipment damage. (3) Connect one of the10108181-Idata cables to TEST CONN (44) connector J15 on the IPCP cable entry panel, and observe which indicator lamp illuminates. (4) Remove the data cable from TEST CONN, (44) connector J15, and connect it to the connector adjacent to the lamp which illuminated in step (3) above. (5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) above for the two remaining data cables. g. After all cables are laid and connected, they must be protected from missile rocket motor blasts and vehicular traffic. This can be done by burying the cables or covering them with sandbags. 7-12. Emplacement Proceduro — Helicopter The electrical cables are transported by helicopter and will be emplaced at the discretion of the unit commander, 7oy Google a amTM 9—1430—1535—12-1 CHAPTER 8 ORIENTING AND ALINING THE AFU (PCP ONLY) Section I. FI. Purpose a, Accurate target firing data and successful arget engagement largely depend on alinement of he AFU. Alinement of the AFU is accomplished fter the HIPIR has been oriented to a known ‘ference point (KRP). If the proper procedures are vot earefully followed, misleading target informa- ion will be displayed on the major item scopes, and fective target engagement will be degraded. . Normally, the AFU is oriented so that accurate oresentations of north, east, south, and west coordi- tates are shown on the TDECC PPI indicator. How- wver, the orientation to true north is only necessary or the tactical officer (T.O.) or his assistant to ceurately correlate data from an overlay map of the lefended area, or to utilize tactical information from in Army Air Defense Command Post (AADCP). When it is not necessary to correlate data from an werlay map or to utilize information from an ADCP, any available landmark may be used as a ‘eference point for orienting the AFU. 1-2. Methods of Orienting and Alining the AFU Subparagraphs a and b below provide a general leseription of the primary AFU alinement method ind the alternate alinement method, respectively. The alternate method is to be used only when the WAR is not available. a Primary Method. The first step in alining the AFU is to establish the HIPIR as the system refer- snce. After the HIPIR has been oriented to the KRP ind its azimuth mil ring is set, the CWAR is alined with the HIPIR and its azimuth mil ring is set to ORIENTING AND ALINING coincide with the HIPIR’s. With the azimuth mil rings adjusted to a common orientation, the HIPIR and CWAR antenna synchros are independently nulled in the local mode of operation. This allows the HIPIR personnel to proceed to aline the LCHR’s at the same time the CWAR personnel perform the IFF alinement procedure. b, Alternate Method. When the AFU is emplaced, and a CWAR is not available, the IFF antenna is alined with the HIPIR. This is accomplished by the same method employed for the CWAR in a above. With the IFF and HIPIR azimuth mil rings adjusted to a common orientation, the HIPIR proceeds as in the primary alinement method and the IFF antenna synchro is adjusted by rotating the antenna to 0 mils azimuth and adjusting the AZ ADJ control on the antenna control drawer until the casualty mode sweep (as seen on the TDECC PPI) is positioned at 0 mils. NOTE Refer to section II for detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF aximuth mil ring. 8-3. Alinemont Operations Figure 8-1 illustrates the sequence of alinement operations for an AFU from major item preparation going tive to the PCP and Tk FFTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 POP/IFF SELECT Cw ‘SCAN MODE ¥ Bras = wipiR TRACK Ox DISPLAYED ver cunson (ON TDECC(ONILS) cwar SWEEP Bigpuaveo ar omits ON Soece Figure 8-1. Sequence of AFU alinement operations—typical (sheet 1 of 2). Google <TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 PCP/FF OWAR FRONTSIGHT IFE_ ANTENNA ON CWAR TELESCOPE ¥ SET AZIMUTH Mit RING TO AZIMUTH OF CHAR ¥ NULL ANTENNA SYNCHRO y POSITION AZIMUTH CURSOR OVER WAR SWEEP ON TDECE ¥ ANTENNA HEMAINS FRONTSIGHTED ON Ewan TELESCOPE WHEN ENERGIZED + DEENERGIZE ANTENNA SELECT CASUALTY Scan wobe ¥ \EF SWEEP DISPLAYED BY SAME AZIMUTH AS CUnsOR ON TBE BACKSIGHT ON, FF TELESCOPE WAJOR ITEM OPERATIONS wri Loan’ FRONTSIGHT ON TERR TeLescore waar + SECURE AZIMUTH LOCK ‘ON FIRE CUTOUT ASSEMELY NULL SyMCHR [BOOM Stews TD AZIMUT AD ELEVATION OF HIPIR ANTENNA WHEN ENERGIZED Ms 311818A Figure 8-1. Sequence of AFU alinement operarions—typical (sheet 2 of 2). -4. M2 Aiming Circle NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 8-2. The M2 aiming circle (31) is a small, light- eight instrument that is used for calculating timuth angles when any of the altemate non- ne of sight procedures contained in table 8-2 1 8-3 are used. Basically, it consists of a 4-power, wxed-focus telescope mounted on a body that ermits unlimited horizontal and limited vertical tation of the telescope. Azimuth angle measure- aents are recorded on a graduated scale azimuth ail ring (11) and micrometer (18). The aiming ircle has two horizontal rotating motions. The upper (recording) motion changes the readings of the azimuth scale of the instrument; the lower (nonrecording) motion does not. The aiming circle is equipped with leveling screws (12), level vials (6), and a locking lever for the magnetic compass (21), The instrument is mounted on a base plate (13) that serves as the base of the carrying case and is also used in mounting the instrument on a tripod (30). The accessory equipment for the aiming circle consists of the tripod, the carrying case cover (24), and the accessory kit (27). ‘The accessory kit contains the instrument light (23), plumb bob (25), lampholder and remover (29) and backplate (26) and canvas cover (28). Further information concerning the emplacement, operation, and maintenance of the M2 aiming circle is provided in FM 6.2. 8-3TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 1-Elevation knob levation micrometer teflector felescope eyepiece lot for instrument light felescope level vial ireular level 8-Tubular level ‘9-Orienting knob cover 10—Azimuth non-recording orienting knob 11-Azimuth mil ring Figure 8-2. 12-Leveling screw 13-Base plate 14—Notation pad scale 20-Spring plate 21—Locking lever for compass needle irele with accessory equipment, MS 164663 22-Objective 23—Instrument light 24—Cover for aiming circle 25-Plumb bob 26—Back plate 21-Accessory kit 28—Canvas cover 29-Lamp holder and remover 30-Tripod 31-M2 aiming circle, 5. Orientation and Alinement During Blackout Conditions During blackout conditions, any of the methods seussed in paragraph 8-2 above may be employed th the assistance of an M53El instrument light. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 8-8, The M6SE1 instrument light (5) is used in ajunction with the M90F alinement telescope on 2 PCP IFF antenna. The instrument light and escope are stored in the vicinity of the PCP. e instrument light contains a battery power lead ) and a lead with a pen light (8) on the end. e light fits into a bracket (2) which is mounted the alinement telescope (1). The lamps are iminated by a control switch (4). During aline- nt at night the telescopes on the radars and the HR’s are sighted on the pen lights. 6. Preliminary Procedures Before orientation and alinement of the AFU can attempted, steps a through c below must be complished. a. Emplace the PCP as described in paragraphs 5 through 7-9. b, Energize the power generators in accordance th the instructions posted on the inside of each nerator panel, and set the output of the generators 1 425 vac, ¢ Establish inter-unit communications after the 3P has been emplaced. TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 8-7. Synchro Control System Detailed functional schematics of the synchro control system for the AFU are contained in TM 9—1425—1525—12—5. Synchro alinement procedures for each major item are also contained therein. 8-8. AFU Orientation and Alinement lures Perform the procedures in table 8-2 to orient and aline the AFU when the CWAR is available or the procedures in table 8-3 when the CWAR is not available. Tables 8-2 and 8-8 contain procedures to be performed by ICC/PCP personnel. They also contain procedures, or references to procedures, to be performed by personnel at other HAWK major items. Those procedures performed at other major items are contained in the Operator and Organiza- tional Maintenance manual (12-1) for the major item. 8-9. Computer-Aided Synchro Null Verification Computer-aided synchro null verification is a manually inputted modification to the ISC software program that allows the accuracy of antenna synchro alinement to be precisely analyzed on the TDECC PPI. When the patch is entered and selected by the operator, the azimuth repeatback data from the CWAR and HIPIR is measured by the ADP, converted to a symbolic representation, and displayed on the TDECC PPI. The symbols used are crosses (HAWK pointer symbol (15, fig. 3-28) which are displayed on the north/south axis (CWAR synchro) and east/west axis (HIPIR synchro) of the PPI. The accuracy of the synchro alinement is directly proportional to the distance by which the symbol is displaced from the center of the PPI. The 1—Alinement telescope 2-Bracket 3-Pen light 4-Control switch 5—MBSE1 instrument light 6—Battery power lead ‘7-Dovetail fitting MI 70616A Figure 8-8. Mounting the M53E1 instrument light.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-1. Computer-Aided Synchro Null Verification Saftware Patch BRS FEE BES cos aan wwe 19 66000568 3006117 2 6002554 exrT7003 a 66002556 60177004 2 oo2ss7 oeores2 2 66008762 66006445 u 6s00a763 aorrro00 % 6003764 2aoora2 % 6003765 4000s 2 66007213 400254 2 6002575 01443257 2 66000521, oorors70 ry 66000480 05662471 a 6004145 2363646 display is scaled such that a symbol displaced from PPI center by a distance equivalent to that of the 20-km range ring equals a 5-mil alinement error. This feature is intended to be an optional operator ‘aid and can be used during system alinement or for troubleshooting system alinement errors. Refer to paragraph 8-10 and table 8-2, step 6, for the necessary procedural actions. 8-10. Entering the Synchro Null Verificatio Softwoe Petch” . ‘To enter the computer-aided synchro null verification software patch into the ADP, perform the following procedure: a, Insure that the ISC program is loaded and operating (par. 11-18). . Set the DTO DWR #1 LOCAL/REMOTE ‘switch (27, fig. 2-4) to LOCAL. ¢. Press the DTO DWR #2 MANUAL RESET indicator-switch (21, fig. 2-4). d. Press the CPU RESET pushbutton (16, fig. 25) e, Set the CPU INSTRUCTION INPUT and DADA INPUT thumbwheel switches (1, 2, fig. 2-5) tothe input codes found in line 1 of table 8-1. f. Press the CPU EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUC. TION pushbutton (19, fig. 2-5). g. Repeat steps ¢ and / for the remaining 30 lins of code in table 8-1. +h, Press the CPU RESET pushbutton. i Press the CPU START/STEP/PULSE pushbotton (16, fig. 2-5). J. Set the DTO DWR #1 LOCAL/REMOTE switch to REMOTE. k, Press the CPU DISPLAY ENABLE indicator. switch (6, fig. 2-5) and observe the bit 0 lamp of te CPU DISPLAY REGISTER (7, fig. 2-5). A flashing bit 0 lamp indicates proper loading of the major Portion of the software patch. If this indication is | not present, repeat paragraph 8-10.qa) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) @ (8) TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 Table 8-2, AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure with the CWAR Failure to perform step 1a below may result in injury to personnel. Preparation. Direct all radar personnel to insure that the antenna SAFE/OPERATE switches are set to SAFE. Direct the HIPIR personnel to perform the preparation and orientation steps contained in the table for AFU System Orientation and Alinement procedure in TM 9—1430—533—12—1, table 8.7, steps 1 and 2, and to proceed to the CWAR alinement step when the CWAR is available. Direct the CWAR personnel to perform the preparation step contained in the table for the AFU System Orientation and Alinement procedure in TM 9—1430—1528—12—1, table 8-2, step 1, and to await further instruction from HIPIR personnel. Direct the LCHR personnel to perform the preparation step contained in the table for the Orientation and Alinement procedure with the HIPIR in TM 9—-1440—531—12—1. Also, direct the LCHR personnel to perform the procedure for setting the obstruction cutout switches. Insure that the HIPIR and CWAR are on the same commo bus. Press the CASUALTY/CW ROTATE switch to CW ROTATE (23, fig. 2-2). CW ROTATE label is illuminated. Prepare the IFF equipment as follows: Set the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch (17, fig. 1-1) to SAFE and the AZ DRIVE switch (11, fig. 1-3) to OFF (SAFE). Set the ANT SYNC switch (3, fig. 3-11) to EXT. Set the INT ANT SYNC switch (2, fig. 3-11) to 0 RPM. Set the IFF circuit breaker (14, fig. 2-1) to ON. ‘Set the POWER switch (13, fig. 3-5) to ON. If the antenna is roof-mounted, insure that the PCP is level (par. 7-5b (7)). If the antenna is remotely installed, insure that the antenna is level (par. 7-6p (3)). Install the M90F alinement telescope in the frontsight position on the IFF antenna (fig. 8-5). Insure that the IFF antenna tilt angle is set to 25° (see note below). If an adjustment is required, perform step (9) below. If not required, proceed to step 1h. NOTE If holes appear in the IFF coverage on the associated PPI display (example: holes resulting from multipath nolling), it F decrease the tilt angle until the holes disappear. Do not select a tlt angle greater than 30° as degrade IFF detection range beyond acceptable limits. (Refer to TM 91425-1525).TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 0 Table 8-2. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure with the CVAR—Continued Corrective procedare 19.(9) (a) To adjust the tilt of the IFF antenna, proceed as follows: Loosen the antenna upper stud nut (3, fig. 8-4). NOTE ‘The tilt indicator is calibrated to u maximum reading of 10°. Tilt angles greater than 10° most b ‘estimated based upon travel along the TILT ADJUST strut. The tlt angle adjustments between 10° the maximum of 85° are essentially linear. A tilt angle of 25° is obtained by adjusting to a position hich in 60% of the distance between the 10° and 85° positions. (Refer to paragraph 2-51 of TM 11-5896-582—12) (b) | Observe the antenna tilt indicator, and adjust the tilt adjust nut (5, fig. 8-4) to obtain the specific tilt with respect to the horizon. Tighten the upper stud nut, being careful not to change the adjustment. Set the status panel mode switch to ADP. Load and initialize the ISC software program (see par. 11-18). ‘The initialization test pattern is displayed on the TDECC PPI (see table 11-4, sey 1). Adjust the AZIMUTH handwheel (62, fig. 2-13) until the azimuth cursor is centered on the(+) symbol on the PPI. ‘The AZIMUTH counter (53, fig. 2-13) indicates 0 + 10 mils. © Verify HIPIR Antenna Synchro Null. When the HIPIR personnel report completion of the antenna synchro nulling procedure, = the status panel mode switch (12, fig. 2-12) to HPI and observe the following: ‘The HIPIR track box (4, fig. 3-28) appears centered over the azimuth carver al mils on the TDECC PPI. If the track box is displaced 3200 mils from the cursor, false null was obtained at the HIPIR. Direct the HPR Personnel to repeat the antenna synchro nulling procedur. Verify CWAR Antenna Synchro Null. When the CWAR personnel report completion of the antenna synchro nulling procedure, rat the AZIMUTH handwheel until the azimuth cursor is coincident with the sweep on the PPL The AZIMUTH counter indicates 0 + 10 mils. If the sweep is pointing down on the PPI, a false null ns obtained at the CWAR during alinement. Direct the WAR personnel to repeat the antenna synchro nulling procedure.p qa) @) (3) TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-2, AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure with the CWAR—Continued Neral indienton Corrective procedare Aline the IFF Antenna. Direct the CWAR personnel to perform the IFF antenna alinement procedures, If line of sight exists between the IFF and CWAR, proceed directly to step e below. If line of sight does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle. Also refer to the note below. NOTE ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the IFF with the CWAR, the reference point used must, be located at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the CWAR and the IFF. The M2 aiming circle must be located at, this reference point and must be visible to both the CWAR and the IF. Direct the CWAR personnel to emplace and level the M2 aiming circle, and when the M2 aiming circle is emplaced, frontsight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction until the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. o NOTE In high wind, the antenna has to be held in place manually. NOTE If the M2 aiming circle telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IFF antenna must be moved in elevation by loosening the upper stud nut (8, fig. 8-4) or th at nut (5, fig. 8-4) and adjusting the tilt of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the [FF antenna elevation is set correctly per step 19 (8). When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel: Loosen the three lockscrews (7, fig. 8-4) securing the antenna azimuth mil ring and then set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth angle determined at the M2 aiming circle. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF azimuth mil ring, refer to section II. Secure the azimuth mil ring. Manually rotate the antenna in a clockwise direction to the azimuth of the CWAR antenna. Proceed to step g. When directed by the CWAR personnel, frontsight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction on the backsighted CWAR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope is centered on the CWAR telescope. NOTE ‘The IFF antenna must be manually held in place and its telescope crosshair continually centered on the CWAR telescope until the IFF slinement procedures are completed. 8-9TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-2. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure with the CWAR—Continued ee Sap God ermal ndeton Corrective procadare 4e Cont. qa) (2) NOTE If the CWAR alinement telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IFF antenna must be moved in elevation by loosening the upper stud nut (8, fig. 8-4) or the tilt adjust nut (6, fig. 8-4) and adjusting the tilt of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the IFF antenna elevation is wt correctly per step 19 (8). When directed by the CWAR personnel: ‘Loosen the three lockscrews (7, fig. 8-4) securing the antenna azimuth mil ring and then set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth angle indicated by the CWAR azimuth mil ring. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF azimuth mil ring, refer to section II. ‘Tighten the three screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. Open the antenna control drawer (5, fig. 3-1) and connect the ac voltmeter between A2J1-5(3, fig. 8-12) and chassis ground. Open the AZ ADJ access cover on the antenna control drawer and loosen the AZ ADJ LOCK Adjust the AZ ADJ control clockwise until a minimum indication is obtained on the x voltmeter. ‘Tighten the AZ ADJUST LOCK. Secure the access cover. Remove the ac voltmeter leads and close the antenna control drawer. Adjust the AZIMUTH handwheel until the azimuth cursor is coincident with the sweep (80m and beyond) on the TDECC CRT, and record the reading of the AZIMUTH mils counter. Failure to perform steps m and n below may result in injury to personnel and/ or damage to equipment. Clear all personnel from the IFF antenna. Make certain that the antenna hoisting unit (5, fig. 5-8) is in the stowed position before performing the following steps. Set the AZ DRIVE switch to ON and the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch to OPERATE, and then back to SAFE. The vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope remains sighted on the CWAL alinement telescope. If the antenna rotates 3200 mils, a false null was obtained in step i. Set the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE swtich to SAFE. If a line of sight exists, repeat steps e, and g through o abor for the correct null. If a line of sight does not exist, perfom steps c(3), and g through o,TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-2, AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure with the CVAR—Continued 4p. Press and release the CASUALTY/CW ROTATE indicator-switch (28, fig. 2-2) for a CASUALTY indication. @ Set the ANT SYNC switch to INT. rn Adjust the AZIMUTH handwheel until the azimuth cursor is coincident with the sweep on the PPI indicator. ee counter indicates within + 50 mils of the indication recorded in step i ve. Adjust IFF synchro B3 (8, fig. 8-4) located inside the IFF antenna pedestal. When reinstalling the access cover (9) and communications station (10), insure that moisture-proof sealing compound is properly applied. (See figure 8-4 for details.) ® Momentarily press the CASUALTY/CW ROTATE pusbutton for a CW ROTATE indication. t Set the ANT SYNC switch to EXT. os Inform the CWAR personnel that the synchro nulling and alinement procedures have been completed. 2 Remove the M90F alinement telescope and mounting bracket. ww. Set the PWR switch on the IFF communeation module to OFF. n Disconnect and remove the headset. v Secure the IFF communication module door. ‘Adjust the Tactical Elevation Angle Control. a When HIPIR personnel report completion of the HIPIR/LCHR alinement procedure, request them to determine and report the tactical elevation angle. & Open the status panel and set the center angle adjust control (fig. 7-2.1) to the tactical elevation angle, (See the note below.) NOTE ‘The center angle adjust control dial is marked in 10-mil inerements from —120 to 240 mils, o Record the tactical elevation setting. ad Close and secure the status panel. e Direct HIPIR personnel to: q@ Clear the antenna area. @) Energize the antenna. @) ‘Set the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to REMOTE. f Press the TDECC ELEVATION LOW indicator-switch (15, fig. 2-14). o Press and hold the TDECC BREAKLOCK indicator-switch (18, fig. 2-14). ‘The TDECC SEARCH label (2, fig. 2-13) is flashing,TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 ° Table 8-2, AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure with the CWAR—Continued — >. ap Sh. pe ee a Neral indention Corrective procedure Direct HIPIR personnel to verify that: ‘The HIPIR antenna The lower search limit is from —20 to zero mils below the tactical setting. ‘The upper search limit is from 85 to 115 mils above the tactical setting. If the search limits (total excursion) are incorrect, direct the HIPIR operator to place the radar in local and perform the lor search adjustment procedure per TM 9—1430—533—12—1. Release the BREAKLOCK indicator-switch. Press the MANUAL AZ/EL indicator-switch (14, fig. 2-14). Direct the HIPIR personnel to set the antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE, the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL, and to deenergize the antenna. Prepare the PCP for local operation as follows: Press the status panel TEST ROTATE indicator-switch (13, fig. 2-12). Set the IFF antenna control drawer ANT SYNC switch to INT. low box search. (a) (2) (3) (4) (6) qa (2) Me Re 8-12 Computer-Aided Synchro Null Verification (See Note). NOTE ‘This step is an optional operator aid provided to allow visual evaluation of system radar antenna synehro alinement at the TDECC. Direct the HIPIR personnel to: Set the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL. Set the SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE. Insure that the control-indicator panel AZIMUTH HANDWHEEL is set to 0 mils. Manually rotate the antenna to exactly 0 mils azimuth. Engage the azimuth stow lock and insure the antenna remains at 0 mils. Direct the CWAR personnel to: Set the SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE. Manually rotate the antenna ew to exactly 0 mils and prevent it from moving until the test complete. Set the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to REMOTE. Press the TEST ROTATE indicator-switch (15, fig. 2-12) to on. Load the computer-aided null verification software patch into the ADP (see par. 8-10). Rotate the status panel mode switch (12, fig. 2-12) to PLATOON TEST. Press the PLATOON TEST indicator-switch (14, fig. 2-12) and immediately rotate the stems panel mode switch to ADP.9 TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-2. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure with the CWAR—Continued ermal ndeton Coretveprocadere 69. Insure that the CW ROTATE label on the auxiliary control box is illuminated ‘The TDECC PPI dis (+) symbol located along the center vertical axis of the display and another (+) symbol located along the center horizontal axis of the display (see note) NOTE ‘The (+) symbols (vertical axis for the acquisition radar and horizontal axis for the HIPIR) represent the azimuth repeatback data detected at the ADP. Zero mils reference is located at the mid-point of the display. A (+) symbol displaced from center by the distance equivalent to that of the 20-km range ring indicates a nulling error of 5 mils. Direct the HIPIR and/or CWAR personnel to repeat their antenna synchro nulling procedures as required. h Direct the HIPIR personnel to disengage the azimuth stow lock. i Inform the CWAR personnel that the test is complete and direct them to set the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL. i ‘Load and initalize the ADP with the ISC software program. This is necessary to clear memory of the manually inputted patch. Table 8-8. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure without the CWAR cool Normal indication Core procter Failure to perform step 1a below may result in injury to personnel. 1 Preparation. a Direct all radar personnel to insure that the antenna SAFE/OPERATE switches are set to SAFE. b Direct HIPIR personnel to perform the preparation and orientation steps contained in the table for the AFU Orientation and Alinement procedure in TM 9—1430—533—12—1, table 8-7, steps 1 and 2, and to proceed to the IFF alinement step when the IFF is available. e Direct the LCHR personnel to perform the preparation step contained in the table for Orientation and Alinement with the HIPIR in TM 9—1430—581—12—1. Also direct the LCHR personnel to perform the procedure for setting the obstruction cutout switches. 8-13TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 o ld Table 8-8. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure without the CWAR—Continued Normal inden Prepare the IFF equipment for alinement as follows: Set the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch (17, fig. 1-2) to SAFE and the AZ DRIVE switch (17, fig. 1-8) to OFF (SAFE). Set the IFF circuit breaker (14, fig. 2-1) to ON. Set the POWER switch (13, fig. 9-5) on the IFF interrogator panel to ON. Set the ANT SYNC switch (3, fig. 9-11) to INT. Set the INT ANT SYNC switch (2, fig. 8-11) to 0 RPM. Press and release the CASUALTY/CW ROTATE pushbotton (23, fig. 2-2) for a CASUALTY indication. If the IFF antenna is roof-mounted, insure that the PCP is level (par. 7-58). If the antennais remotely installed, insure that the antenna is level (par. 7-6h). Install the M90F alinement telescope on the IFF antenna in the backsight position. Perform steps 1g (8) through 1i of table 8-2, and proceed to step 2 below. Aline the IFF Anteuna. Direct the HIPIR personnel to perform the IFF antenna alinement procedures. If line of sight exists between the IFF and HIPIR, proceed directly to step f below. If line of sight does na exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle. Alm refer to the note below. NOTE ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the IFF with the HIPIR, the reference point used mast be located at least 905m (1000 ft) from the HIPIR and the IFF. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the HIPIR and the IFF. Also, the IPF MSOF alinemeat telescope must be installed in the frontsight position for the alternate method. Direct the HIPIR personnel to emplace and level the M2 aiming circle, and when the M2 aiming circle is emplaced, frontsight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction until the vertial crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. NOTE In high wind, the antenna has to be held in place manually. NOTE If the M2 aiming circle telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IFF antenna must be moved in elevation by loosening the upper stud nut (3, fig. 8-4) or the tilt adjust nut (5, fig. 8-4) and adjusting the tilt of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the IFF antenna elevation is set correctly per step 1g (8) of table 8-2.TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 Table 8-8. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure without the CWAR—Continued a Neve indiontion Coren prcedry 20 ‘When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel: @ ‘Loosen the three lockscrews (7, fig. 8-4) securing the antenna azimuth mil ring and then set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth angle determined at the M2 aiming circle. NOTE Por detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF azimuth mil ring, refer to section II. (2) Secure the azimuth mil ring. a Direct the HIPIR personnel to perform the HIPIR antenna synchro nulling procedure. @ Proceed to step & f When directed by the HIPIR personnel, backsight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction on the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope is centered on the HIPIR telescope. NOTE ‘The IFF antenna must be manually held in place and its telescope crosshair continually centered on the HIPIR telescope until the IFF alinement procedures are completed. NOTE If the HIPIR alinement telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IFF antenna must be moved in elevation by the upper stud nut (8, fig. 8-4) or the tilt adjust nut (5, fig. 84) and adjusting the tilt of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the IFF antenna elevation is set, correctly per step 19 (8) of table 8-2. o When directed by the HIPIR personnel @M ‘Loosen the three lockscrews (7, fig. 8-4) securing the antenna azimuth mil ring and then set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth determined by the HIPIR personnel. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF azimuth mil ring, refer to section II. (2) Secure the azimuth mil ring. Inform the HIPIR personnel that IFF antenna orientation is complete. Manually rotate the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction until the azimuth mil ring indicates 0 mils, and insure that the antenna does not move while steps j through ! below are performed. Open the AZ ADJ access cover (1, fig. 8-11) and loosen the AZ ADJ LOCK. Adjust the AZ ADJ control until the TDECC indicator sweep is positioned at 0 mils. Tighten the AZ ADJ LOCK, and secure the cover. Remove the M90F alinement telescope and mounting bracket. ne PrTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table 8-8. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure without the CWAR—Continued tm | ome es iin ( arc rents Set the PWR switch on the IFF communication module to OFF. Disconnect and remove the headset. Secure the IFF communication module door. Verify HIPIR Antenna Synchro Null. When the HIPIR personnel report completion of the antenna synchro nulling procedure, mt the status panel mode switch (12, fig. 2-12) to HPI and observe the following: ‘The HIPIR track symbol (4, fig. 3-28) appears over the azimuth cursor at 0 mi on the TDECC PPI. If the track symbol is displaced 3200 mils from the cursor, 1 false null was obtained at the HIPIR. Direct the HIPIR personnel to repeat the antenna synchro nulling Adjust the Tactical Elevation Angle Control. a When the HIPIR personnel report completion of the HIPIR/LCHR alinement procedure request them to determine and report the tactical elevation angle. b Open the status panel and set the center angle adjust control (fig. 7-2.1) to the tactical elevation angle, (See the note below.) NoTE ‘The center angle adjust control dial is marked in 10-mil increments from ~120 to 240 mils. « Record the tactical elevation setting. ad Close and secure the status panel. @ Direct HIPIR personnel to: () Clear the antenna area. (2) | Energize the antenna. (3) Set the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to REMOTE. f Press the TDECC ELEVATION LOW indicator-switch (15, fig. 2-14). o Press and hold the TDECC BREAKLOCK indicator-switch (18, fig. 2-14). ‘The TDECC SEARCH label (2, fig. 2-13) is flashing. h Direct the HIPIR personnel to verify that: ‘The HIPIR antenna is in low box search. ‘The lower search limit is from —20 to zero mils below the tactical setting. ‘The upper search limit is from 85 to 115 mils above the tactical setting. If the search limits (total excursion) are incorrect, direct the HIPIR operator to place the radar in local and perform the low search adjustment procedure per TM 9—1430—583—12-L. é Release the BREAKLOCK indicator-switch. i Press the MANUAL AZ/EL indicator-switch (14, fig. 2-14), 8-16@ @) TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 8-8. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure without the CWAR—Continued Neral eden Direct the HIPIR personnel to set the antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE, the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL, and to deenergize the antenna. Prepare the PCP for local operation as follows: Press the status panel TEST ROTATE indicator-switch (16, fig. 2-12). Set the IFF antenna control drawer ANT SYNC switch to INT. 8-17TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 NOTE: APPLY SEALING COMPOUND 8-18 (TM 740-1525, APPENDIX D, ITEM 39) TO ALL MATING SURFACES, AND AROUND ALL SCREW HOLES, AND MOUNTING HARDWARE. SEE NOTE < eS ~ MS 313700 1—Quick-disconnect pin ‘TMi ring lock screws (3) 2—Quick-disconnect pin. 8—Synchro B3 location 3—Upper stud nut ‘9—Access cover 4—Tilt indicator 10—Communications station and ‘5—Tilt adjust nut adapter plate (remove as a unit). 6—Quick-disconnect pin Figure 8-4. IFF antenna alinement adjustments.TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 MS 164723A Figure 8-5. IFF antenna alinement telescope—mounted.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Section Il. AZIMUTH MIL RING 8-11. Introduction This section explains how to read and adjust the IFF antenna azimuth mil ring and vernier scale. Part A of figure 8-6 illustrates the azimuth mil ring, while part B illustrates the vernier scale. These two items provide antenna position data. The azimuth mil ring is read to provide data accurate to within 20 mils, while the vernier scale is used to provide data accurate to within one mil. The azimuth mil ring data, together with the vernier scale data, provides the antenna azimuth mil ring reading. 8-12. Description of the Azimuth Mil Ring and Vernier Scale a, Azimuth Mil Ring. When the antenna is oriented and alined, the azimuth mil ring lined up with the zero (0) mark on the vernier scale can be read to obtain the IFF antenna azimuth position in mils. The azimuth mil ring contains 320 equi. spaced marks which divide the ring into 2m) sections equalling 6400 mils. These marks are in tw lengths, long and short. Every other long mark bisa number, beginning with zero (0) (1, fig. 8-6). The ure mark has a value of zero mils or 6400 mils. Thee numbers continue with 2 (2, fig. 8-6), which has value of 200 mils. This is followed by 4 (3, fig 86), which has a value of 400 mils, and 80 on, through & which has a value of 6200 mils, and finally to zen with a value of 6400 mils. Long unnumbered maris located between two numbered marke divide the area inside the numbered marks into two 100-n sections. Each 100-mil section contains four oquly: | spaced unnumbered short marks which form fir 20-mil sections. The mil ring is secured by thre lockscrews which are loosened for alinement. b. Vernier Scale. The vernier scale is mounted that it can be used to aid in reading the | | J V ——- 2 1-0 (Zero mils—tong mark) 4-20 (long mark) 2-2 (200 mils—tong mark) 510 (long mark) 3-4 (400 mils—iong mark) 6-0 (Zero—iong mark) 5 TTT TT TT TT TT TT PART © VERWIER SCALE MS 432475 Figure 8-4. Azimuth mil ring/vernier scale,zimuth mil ring. The value of the mil ring is always ead at a point exactly opposite the zero (0) mark (6, ig. 8-6) on the vernier scale. There are 21 long and hort marks that divide the vernier scale into 20 qual sections. The first, middle, and last marks are umbered zero (0), 10, and 20, respectively, (6, 5, and , fig. 8-6). The long marks between zero and 10, and 0 and 20, are not numbered, but have a value of five nd 15, respectively. None of the short marks are umbered, but each has a value of one. Each of the wenty sections of the scale has a value of one. The osition of the vernier scale is fixed and cannot be djusted. ‘The azimuth mil ring reading when used with the ernier scale indicates the antenna azimuth position 1 mils. The azimuth mil ring reading is always iken opposite the zero (0) mark on the vernier scale. art A of figure 8-7 shows the vernier scale zero .ark lined up with the 100-mil mark on the azimuth til ring. In this example, the mil ring reading mply reads 100 mils. But a simple mil ring reading not always possible. Often, the azimuth mil ring wust be read, using the vernier as shown in part B of gure 8-7. In this situation, notice that the vernier sale zero mark is not lined up with a mil ring mark. istead, the zero mark is somewhere between 100 ils and 120 mils. This means that the reading is at ast 100 mils, but less than 120 mils. The vernier tale now must be used to indicate the number of ils between 100 and 120. This number is more than wro, but less than 20. When located, this number is ided to 100 to complete the azimuth mil ring tading. This is how the vernier scale is read. Ob- eve each mark (B, fig. 8-7) from zero to 20 on the wnier scale. By design, only one of these marks nes up with a mark on the azimuth mil ring. In this ample, the mark numbered 10 lines up perfectly ith a mark (900 mils) on the mil ring. The value of mark on the vernier scale is 10. This number, hen added to 100, gives a total of 110 mils. The dmuth mil ring reading then is 100 mils read on le azimuth mil ring, plus 10 mile read on the scale. This means a total reading of 110 mils. 14, How to Set the Azimuth Mil Ring a. Introduction. There are two methods used to {just the azimuth mil ring setting. The method lected depends on the value of the azimuth mil ng setting. One method is used for those azimuth ring settings which can be read directly on an imuth mil ring mark. This azimuth mil ring T 9—1430—1535—12—1 Az ING (PART A=100 Ls. aznasTn a me 129 2] x0 me mm Vener scans PART B10 MLS. MS 432476 Figure 8-7. How to read the azimuth mil ring and vernier soale, setting is divisible by 20 and requires a single adjustment. A second method is used for those azimuth mil ring settings that lie between two marks on the azimuth mil ring. This azimuth mil ring setting is not divisible by 20, and, therefore requires two adjustments. 8-21™9 , Azimuth Mil Ring Setting For Values Divis- ‘ible by 20. A single fine adjustment is made when the value of the azimuth mil ring is divisible by 20. Assume the value of the required setting is 100 mi (A, fig. 8-7). This value is divisible by 20. One setting of the azimuth mil ring i that is required. First, loosen the three azimuth mil ring lockscrews. Next, rotate the azimuth mil ring until the zero (0) mark on the vernier scale is exactly opposite the 100-mil mark. Tighten the three lockscrews. Now the azimuth mil ring is set to 100 mils. 1430—1535—12—1 ¢. Azimuth Mil Ring Setting For Values Not Divisible by 20. Two adjustments to the azimuth mil ring are made when the azimuth mil ring setting is not divisible by 20. The first is a coarse adjustment. This is followed by a fine adjustment. Both adjustments are made to the azimuth mil ring. (1) Azimuth mil ring coarse adjustment. The coarse adjustment adjusts the azimuth mil ring to within 20 mils of the azimuth mil ring setting. Assume the value of the desired azimuth mil ring setting is 110 mils. This value is not divisible by 20. Notice on figure 8-8 that 110 mils on the azimuth mil ring is located somewhere between the 100-mil and 120-mil marks. The lower value mark (100 mils) is O 10 VERWER SCALE MS 432477 Figure 8.8, Azimuth mil ring coarse adjustment, 8-22 AzmuTa a Ane 2 Fine Abus MET Manes MS 432478 Figure 8-9. Azimuth mil ring fine setting, called the coarse adjustment mark. Before at; adjustments can be made, loosen the azimuth mi ring lockscrews. Line up the 100-mil coarse adj ment mark exactly opposite the vernier scale 270(0) mark. This completes the coarse adjustment. Ths setting also provides data needed to make the fx adjustment to the azimuth mil ring. (2) Azimuth mil ring fine adjustment, Theft adjustment to the azimuth mil ring is made by ling up the fine adjustment mark on the azimuth mil rig exactly opposite the fine adjustment mark on tit er scale (fig. 8-9). These fine adjustment marts must be located and identified. (a) Vernier scale fine adjustment mark. The vernier scale fine adjustment mark is found by subtracting the value of the coarse adjustment mark from the value of the desired azimuth mil ring setting. Assume an azimuth mil ring setting of 110 mils results in: 110-100 = 10. The vernier scale fie adjustment mark equals 10 mils and is located at the vernier scale long mark numbered 10. (0) Azimuth mil ring fine adjustment mark The azimuth mil ring fine adjustment mark it located directly above and slightly to the right of the vernier scale fine adjustment mark numbered 10 Note and identify this mark on the azimuth mil ring (fig. 8-8). The fine adjustment is now made by lining up the azimuth mil ring fine adjustment mart» sactly opposite the vernier scale fine adjustment aark (fig. 8-9). When this adjustment has been ompleted, tighten the azimuth mil ring lockscrews. ‘his completes the azimuth mil ring setting of 110 ails. (8) Azimuth mil ring setting rules. Azimuth iil ring setting rules are listed below. (a) Obtain the azimuth mil ring setting. (®) Determine the value of the coarse adjust- vent mark. TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 (c) Loosen the azimuth mil ring lockscrews. (@) Adjust the azimuth mil ring to the coarse adjustment mark. (¢) Calculate the value of the vernier scale fine adjustment mark. (A) Locate the azimuth mil ring fine adjustment mark. (g) Line up the azimuth mil ring fine adjustment mark exactly opposite the vernier scale fine adjustment mark. (h) Tighten the azimuth mil ring lockscrews.paved ay GOORTe atized by ZOO RICco TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 CHAPTER 9 ORIENTING AND ALINING AN ICC (HAWK BATTERY) »1. Purpose ¢, Second Alternate Method. If the CWAR and a, Accurate target firing d arget engagement largely depei he HAWK battery. Alinement of the battery is complished after HIPIR A has been oriented to a mown azimuth reference. If the proper procedures ire not carefully followed, misleading target infor- nation will be displayed on the major item scopes, and effective target engagement will be degraded. b. Normally, the battery is oriented so that \ccurate presentations of north, east, south, and vest coordinates are shown on its cathode-ray tubes CRT’s). However, the orientation to true north is mly necessary for the tactical control officer or issistant to accurately correlate data from an over- ay map of the defended area, or to utilize tactical nformation from an Army air defense command vost (AADCP). When it is not necessary to correlate lata from an overlay map or to utilize information tom an AADCP, any available landmark may be ised as a reference point for orienting the battery. 2:2. Methods of Orienting and Alining e ICC There are three methods of orienting and alining che ICC, a primary and two alternates. Subpara- maphs a through d below provide a general descrip- :ion of the three methods. a. Primary Method. When the battery being ilined includes a CWAR, the primary method of orienting and alining the ICC’s IFF radar is employ- xd. In this method, the CWAR is first alined with HIPIR A. Once alined, the CWAR is utilized as the alinement reference piece or basepiece for the remainder of the system, including the IFF. b. First Alternate Method. If the CWAR is not available during the battery orientation and aline- tent, and the PAR is available, the first alternate method of alinement is used. In this method, the PAR is first alined with HIPIR A.Once alined, the PAR serves as the basepiece for the remainder of the system, including the IFF. the PAR are not available during battery orientation and alinement, the second alternate method is used to aline the IFF. In this method, the IFF antenna is alined directly with the HIPIR A antenna, Once alined, the IFF antenna is used to aline the HIPIR B antenna. The IFF antenna synchro is then alined by rotating the IFF antenna to O mils and adjusting the IFF AZ ADJ control on the antenna control drawer until the casualty mode sweep on the ‘TCC CRT is positioned at O mils. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF azimuth mil ring, refer to section II of chapter 8. 9-3. Sequence of HAWK Battery Alinement Operations Figure 9-1 illustrates the typical sequence of alinement operations for a battery from major item preparation to LCHR alinement with the HIPIR. ‘The unshaded areas indicate where the ICC and IFF participate in the alinement scenario, while the shaded areas illustrate other on-going alinement operations relative to the ICC and IFF. Table 9-1 contains all the procedures required of the ICC personnel during battery alinement. Due to configuration variations, some steps do not apply in all situations. The procedures contained in table 9-1 are initiated, monitored, and coordinated by the IBCC personnel. 9-4, M2 Aiming Circle NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 82 ‘The aiming circle (31) is a small, light-weight instrument that is used in the battery for calculating azimuth angles when any of the alternate non-line‘TM 9—1430—1535—12-1FRONT SIGHT ON cware TELESCOPE Ser BzimuTH Wit miwe ToTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 o a ae OPERATIONS 3 BaREACE aCe. PAR FF (ICO) WAR HII. ROR Les renrcran ( stom gels sate ea ae nogen are omer eat MS 1647592 Figure 9-1. Sequence of HAWK battery alinement operations—typical (sheet 8 of 3). of sight alinement procedures contained in table 9-1 are used. Basically, it consists of a 4-power, fixed-focus telescope mounted on a body that permits unlimited horizontal and limited vertical rotation of the telescope. Azimuth angle measurements ‘are recorded on a graduated scale azimuth mil ring (11) and micrometer (18). The aiming circle has two horizontal rotating motions. The upper (recording) motion changes the readings of the azimuth scale of the instrument; the lower (non-recording) motion does not. The aiming circle is equipped with leveling ‘screws (12), level vials (6), and a locking lever for the magnetic compass (21). The instrument is mounted on a base plate (13) that serves as the base of the carrying case and is also used in mounting the instrument on a tripod (30). The accessory equip- t for the aiming circle consists of the tripod, the plumb bob (25), lampholder and remover (29), backplate (26) and canvas cover (28). Further information concerning the emplacement operation, and maintenance of the M2 aiming circle is provided in FM 6-2 9-5. Orientation and Alinement During Blackout Conditions During blackout conditions, any of the methods discussed in paragraph 9-2 above may be employed with the assistance of an M53E1 instrument light. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 8-8. ‘The M53E1 instrument light (5) is used in conjunction with the M90F alinement telescope on the ICC. Both the telescope and the instrument light are 94 stored in the drawer cabinet set. The M5E1 eon- tains a battery power lead (6), a dovetail fitting (7, and a lead with a pen light (3) on the end. This light fits into a bracket (2) which is mounted on the alinement telescope (1). The lamps are illuminated by means of a control switch (4). During alinement at night, the telescopes on the radars and the LCHR’s are sighted on the pen lights. 9-6. Preliminary Procedures Before orientation and alinement of the battery can be attemped, steps a through c below must be accomplished. a. Emplace the ICC as described in paragraphs 15 (prime mover) or 7-9 (helicopter). b, Energize the power generators in accordance with the instructions posted on the inside of the generator’s panel, and set the output of the genent- tors for 425 vac. cc. Establish interunit communications. 9-7. Synchro Contrel System Detailed functional schematics of the synchro control system for the HAWK battery are contained in TM 9—1425—1525—12—5, together with synchro alinement procedures for each major item. 9-8. Orientation and Alinement Procedures Perform the appropriate procedures in table 9-11» orient and aline the IFF antenna. Table 9-1 also contains procedures, or references to procedures, to be performed by personnel at other HAWK major items. Those procedures performed at other major items are contained in the Operator and ional Maintenance manual (12-1) for the major@ @ (8) (4) (6) 6) ”M (8) (9) (@) (0) © TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 ‘Table $-1. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure Corretv prosadare ‘The following procedures are coordinated from the BCC. Perform only those steps you are directed to perform. Preparation. Load and initialize the ISC software program. Prepare the IFF equipment as follows: Set the ANT SYNC switch (8, fig. 3-11) to EXT. Set the INT ANT SYNC switch (2, fig. 3-11) to 0 RPM. Set the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch (17, fig. 1-1) to SAFE, and the AZ DRIVE switch (11, fig. 1-8) to OFF (SAFE). Set the IFF circuit breaker (14, fig. 2-1) to ON. Set the POWER switch (18, fig. 85) to ON. If the IFF antenna is roof-mounted, insure that the ICC/PCP is level (par. 7-56). If the IFF is remotely installed, insure that the antenna is level (par. 7-6). Install the M90F telescope on the IFF antenna in the frontaight position. Insure the IFF antenna tilt angle is set to 25° (see note below). If an adjustment is required, perform step (9) below. If not required, proceed to step 2. NOTE If holes appear in the IFF coverage on the associated PPI display (example: holes resulting from multipath nolling), increase or decrease the tilt angle until the holes disappear. Do not select a tlt angle greater than 80° as it will degrade IFF detection range beyond acceptable limits. (Refer to TM 914251825.) . To adjust the tilt of the IFF antenna, proceed as follows: Loosen the antenna upper stud nut (8, fig. 8-4). NOTE ‘The tilt indicator is calibrated to a maximum reading of 10°, Tilt angles greater than 10° must be ‘estimated based upon travel along the TILT ADJUST strut. The tilt angle adjustmenta between 10° and ‘the maximum of 85° are essentially linear. A tilt angle of 25° is obtained by adjusting to a position which i 60% of the distance between the 10° and 85° positions. (Refer to paragraph 2-51 of TM 11-5895—582—12,) Observe the antenna tilt indicator and adjust the tilt adjust nut (5, fig. 8-4) to obtain the specified tilt with respect to the horizon. Tighten the upper stud nut, being careful not to change the adjustment. a1 9—1430—1535—12—1 a Table 9-1, System Orientation and Alinement Procedure—Continued q@ Alinement with the CWAR Antenna. If line of sight exists between the IFF and CWAR, proceed directly to step e below. If lined sight does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 ainiag circle. Also, refer to the note below. NOTE ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the IFF with the CWAR, the reference point used mast be located at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the CWAR and the IFF. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the CWAR and the IFF. When the M2 aiming circle is emplaced, frontsight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction until the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming cirde telescope. NOTE In high wind, the antenna must be held in place manually. NOTE If the M2 aiming cirele telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IPF antenna must be moved in elevation by loosening the upper stud nut (8, fig. 8-4) or the tilt adjust nut (5, fig. 84) and adjusting the tilt of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the IPF antenna elevation is at correctly per step 19 (8). When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel: Loosen the three mil ring lockscrews (7, fig. 8-4) and set the azimuth mil ring to the aximath angle determined at the M2 aiming circle while insuring that the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope remains centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF azimuth mil ring, refer to ‘section II of chapter 8. Secure the azimuth mil ring. Rotate the antenna clockwise to the azimuth of the CWAR antenna. Proceed to step h. When directed by the CWAR personnel, frontsight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction ot the backsighted CWAR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IFF telescope is centered ot the CWAR telescope. NOTE ‘The IFF antenna must be manually held in place and ita telescope continually sighted on the CWAR telescope until the IFF alinement procedures are completed.2e. Cont. 7s meee 7 > TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 9-1. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure—Continued Corretiveprocedare NOTE If the CWAR alinement telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IFF antenna must be moved in elevation by loosening the upper stud nut (8, fig. 8-4) or the tilt adjust nut (5, fig. 8-4) and adjusting the ‘of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the IPF antenna elevation is set correctly per step 1 (8). ‘Loosen the IFF azimuth mil ring and set it to indicate the azimuth of the CWAR while insuring that the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope remains centered on the CWAR alinement telescope. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF azimuth mil ring, refer to section II of chapter 8. Secure the azimuth mil ring. Open the antenna control panel (5, fig. 9-1) and connect the ac voltmeter between A2J1-5 (3, fig. 3-12) and chassis ground. Open the AZ ADJ access cover on the antenna control panel and loosen the AZ ADJ LOCK. Adjust the AZ ADJ control clockwise until a null is obtained on the ac voltmeter. ‘Tighten the AZ ADJUST LOCK. Secure the access cover. Remove the ac voltmeter leads and close the antenna control drawer. Failure to perform step m may result in injury to personnel. Clear all personnel from the immediate area of IFF antenna. Make certain that the antenna hoisting unit is in the stowed position before performing the following steps. Set the AZ DRIVE switch to ON. Set the antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch to OPERATE. ‘The IFF antenna remains frontsighted on the CWAR. If the IFF antenna rotates 3200 mils, a false null was obtained in step j. Set the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE. If a line of sight exists, repeat steps e, and h throughp above for a correct null. If line of sight does not exist, repeat steps c (3), and h through p above. Set the antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE. Set the AZ DRIVE switch to OFF (SAFE). Direct the BCC personnel to set the SCAN MODE switch to CW. 9-7T 9—1430—1535—12—1 o Table $-1. System Orientation and Alinement Procedurs—Continued SSS ten cam Namal itn es penne ( at. Press and release the CASUALTY/CW ROTATE indicator-switch (28, fig. 2-2) for | CASUALTY indication. | * Set the ANT SYNC switch (3, fig. 8-11) to INT. ® Inform the BCC personnel that the casualty scan mode has been selected. NOTE ee lee ee ac Aiea tr prem rrd pedestal. When reinstalling the access cover (9) and communications station (10), insure that moistare- | proof sealing compound is properly applied (See figure 8-4 for details.) ». ‘When the BCC personnel report that the casualty scan mode alinement check is complete, pre the CASUALTY/CW ROTATE indicator-switch for a CW ROTATE indication. | 2 Set the ANT SYNC switch to EXT. v. Remove and stow the M90F alinement telescope. | z Set the PWR switch on the IFF communication module to OFF. | aa, Disconnect and remove the headset. ab, Secure the IFF communication module door. 3. Alinement with the PAR Antenna. : | @ Uline of ght exist betwonn the IFF and PAR, prosed directly tsiap« below. If Haat it does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming cine Also refer to the note below. NOTE When the alternate procedure is used to alin the IFF with the PAR, the reference point used mast located at least 805 m (1000 ft) from the PAR and the IFF. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the PAR and the IFF. b When the M2 aiming circle is emplaced, frontaight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direcia until the vertical crosshair of he IFF alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming cick telescope. NOTE In high wind, the antenna must be held in place manually. NOTE If the M2 aiming circle telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IFF antenna must be moved in elevation by loosening the upper stud nut (8, fig. 8-4) or the tilt adjust nut (5, fig. 8-4) and adjusting the tilt of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the IFF antenna elevation is set correctly per step 19 (8).TH 9—1430—1535; 2—1 Table 9-1, System Orientation and Alinement Procedure—Continued (2) (3) mee When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel: Loosen the three mil ring lockscrews (7, fig. 8-4) and set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth angle determined at the M2 aiming circle while insuring that the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope remains centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF azimuth mil ring, refer to section II of chapter 8. Secure the azimuth ring. Rotate the antenna clockwise to the azimuth of the PAR antenna. Proceed to step h. When directed by the PAR personnel, frontsight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction on the backsighted PAR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IF telescope is centered on the PAR telescope. NOTE ‘The IFF antenna must be manually held in place and its telescope continually sighted on the PAR telescope until the IFF alinement procedures are completed. NOTE If the PAR alinement telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IFF antenna must be moved in elevation by loosening the upper stud nut (8, fig. 8-4) or the tilt adjust nut (6, fig. 8-4) and adjusting the tilt of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the IFF antenna elevation is set correctly per step 1g (8). Loosen the IFF azimuth mil ring and set it to indicate the azimuth of the PAR while insuring that the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope remains centered on the PAR alinement telescope. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF azimuth mil ring, refer to ‘section II of chapter 8. Secure the azimuth mil ring. Open the antenna control drawer (5, fig. 3-1) and connect the ac voltmeter between A2J1-5 (3, fig. 3-12) and chassis ground. Open the AZ ADJ access cover on the antenna control panel and loosen the AZ ADJ LOCK. Adjust the AZ ADJ control (1, fig. 3-11) clockwise until a null is obtained on the ac voltmeter. ‘Tighten the AZ ADJUST LOCK. Secure the access cover.TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 o reas r 8 BEERS 9-10 Table 9-1. System Orientation and Alinement Prooedure—Continued ermal indeton Corrective procedure Remove the ac voltmeter leads and close the antenna control drawer. WARNING } Failure to perform step m may result in injury to personnel. Clear all personnel from the immediate area of the IFF antenna. Make certain that the antenna hoisting unit is in the stowed position before performing the following steps. Set the AZ DRIVE switch to ON. Set the antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch to OPERATE. ‘The IFF antenna remains frontsighted on the PAR. If the IFF antenna rotates 3200 mils, a false null was obtained in step j. Set the IFF antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE. If a line of sight exists, repeat steps e, and h throughp above for a correct null. If line of sight does not exist, epat steps c (3), and h through p above. Set the antenna SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE position. Set the AZ DRIVE switch to OFF (SAFE). Direct the BCC personnel to set the SCAN MODE switch to CW. Press and release the CASUALTY/CW ROTATE indicator-switch (23, fig. 2-2) for CASUALTY indication. Set the ANT SYNC switch to INT. Inform the BCC personnel that the casualty scan mode has been selected. NOTE BOC personnel may request adjustment of IFF synchro BS (, fig. £4), located inside the IFF antenna pedestal. When reinstalling the access cover (9) and communications station (10), insure that moistare ‘proof sealing compound is properly applied. (See figure 8-4 for details) When the BCC personnel report that the casualty scan mode alinement check is complete, pres the CASUALTY/CW ROTATE indicator-switch for a CW ROTATE indication. Set the ANT SYNC switch to EXT. Direct the BCC personnel to set the SCAN MODE switch to NORMAL. Remove and stow the M90F alinement telescope. Set the PWR switch on the IFF communication module to OFF. Disconnect and remove the headset. Secure the IFF communication module door.30—1535—12—1 Table 6-1. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure—Continued @ Alinement with the HIPIR A Antenna. If line of sight exists between the IFF and HIPIR, proceed directly to step ¢ below. If line of sight does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle. Also, refer to the note below. NOTE ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the IFF with the HIPIR, the reference point used must ‘be located at least 306 m (1000 ft) from the HIPIR and the IFF. The M2 aiming circle must be located at, this reference point and must be visible to both the HIPIR and the IFF. When the M2 aiming circle is emplaced, frontaight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction until the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. NOTE In high wind, the antenna must be held in place manually. NOTE If the M2 aiming cirele telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IFF antenna must be moved in elevation by loosening the upper stud nut (8, fig. &-4) or the tilt adjust nut (6, fig. 8-4) and adjusting the tilt of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the IFF antenna elevation is set correctly per step 1g (8). ‘When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel: Loosen the three mil ring screws (7, fig. 8-4) and set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth angle determined at the M2 aiming circle while insuring that the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope remains centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF asimath mil ring, refer to section II of chapter & Secure the azimuth mil ring. Proceed to step 5. Reverse the position of the alinement telescope on the IFF antenna. ‘When dirocted by the HiPIR personnel, backsight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction on the frontsighted HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IFF telescope is centered on the HIPIR telescope. NOTE just be manually held in place and its telescope continually sighted on the HIPIR telescope until the IF alinement procedures are completed. oNTH 9—1430—1535—12—1 ° Table 9-1, System Orientation and Alinement Procedure—Continued If the HIPIR alinement telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IFF antenna must be moved in ‘elevation by loosening the upper stud nut (8, fig. &-4) or the tlt adjust nut (6, fig. 8-4) and adjusting the tilt of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the IFF antenna elevation is set correctly per step 19 (8). Loosen the IFF azimuth mil ring and set it to indicate the azimuth of the HIPIR while insuring that the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope remains centered on the HIPIR alinement telescope. For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the IFF azimuth mil ring, refer to ‘ection II of chapter 8. Secure the azimuth mil ring. Proceed to step 5. Aline HIPIR B Antenna. If line of sight exists between the IFF and the HIPIR, proceed directly to step m below; if not, perform steps b through J. Also, refer to the note below. When the alternate method is being used to aline the HIPIR with the 1 reference point used must be located at least 806 m (1000 ft) from the IFF and the HIPIR. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the IFF and the HIPIR. NOTE Unless otherwise indicated, the key numbers in parentheses shown below refer to figure 8-2. Emplace the M2 siming circle (fig. 8-2) and level it using the circular and tubular levels (7) and @). Adjust the azimuth recording knob (19) until the azimuth micrometer (18) indicates 0 mils. NOTE If the M2 aiming circle telescope is not in the field of view, the entire IFF antenna must be moved in elevation by loosening the upper stud nut (8, fig. 8-4) or the tilt adjust nut (6, fig. €4) and adjusting the tilt of the antenna as required. After alinement is complete, insure that the IFF antenna elevation is set correctly per step 19 (8). Frontsight the IFF antenna in a clockwise direction until the vertical crosshair of the IFF telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Prevent the IFF antenna from moving in azimuth. Observe and record the IFF antenna azimuth from the IFF azimuth mil ring.TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 9-1. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure—Continued 5. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth recording knob (19) and rotate the M2 aiming circle until the azimuth mil ring (11) upper scale indicates the approximate azimuth as determined in step f above. Lock the recording knob. A Rotate the recording knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale and azimuth micrometer indicates the azimuth as recorded in step f above. é Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob (10) and frontsight the M2 aiming circle on the IFF telescope. Lock the non-recording orienting knob and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. é Direct the HIPIR personnel to frontsight the HIPIR alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle, and simultaneously sight the M2 aiming circle on the HIPIR antenna using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. k Direct the HIPIR personnel to: (1) | Loosen the two thumbscrews securing the azimuth mil ring on the HIPIR antenna and set the mil ring to the azimuth indicated by the upper scale and azimuth micrometer of the M2 aiming circle while insuring that the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope remains centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. (2) | Tighten the two thumbecrews securing the azimuth mil ring. L Proceed to step p. ™ Insure that the alinement telescope is in the backsight position on the IFF antenna. a Direct the HIPIR personnel to frontsight the HIPIR antenna, and then simultaneously backsight the IFF antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IFF alinement telescope is vertically centered on the HIPIR alinement telescope. a Direct the HIPIR personnel to: (2) | Loosen the two thumbecrews securing the azimuth mil ring on the HIPIR antenna and set the mil ring to the azimuth indicated by the IFF antenna mil ring while insuring that the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope remains centered on the IFF alinement telescope. (2) | Tighten the two thumbscrews securing the azimuth mil ring. B Report completion of HIPIR B antenna alinement to the BCC personnel, and proceed to step 6. 6 IFF Antenna Synchro Nalling. a When directed by the BCC personnel: (1) | Press the auxiliary control box CASUALTY/CW ROTATE indicstor-switch (28, fig. 2-2) for a CASUALTY indication. (2) | Rotate the IFF antenna clockwise to an indication of 0 mils on the azimuth mil ring. (8) | Insure that the antenna remains at this position until completion of IFF antenna synchro alinement. b When directed by the BCC personnel to adjust the AZ ADJ control: (2) | Open the AZ ADJ (1, fig. 8-11) access cover and loosen the AZ ADJ LOCK. (2) | Adjust the AZ ADJ control until the BCC personnel report that the sweep is positioned at 0 mils on the TCC. (8) | Tighten the AZ ADJ LOCK and secure the cover. « Remove and stow the M9OF alinement telescope. @ Set the PWR switch on the IFF communication module to OFF. 9-13TH 9—1430—1535—12—1 ° Table 9-1, System Orientation and Alinement Procedures—Continued Disconnect and remove the headset. Secure the IFF communication module door. 9-14TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 CHAPTER 10 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 10-1. Scope « This chapter contains instructions for protect- ag the ICC/IPCP from direct and indirect lightning trikes. Standard battery emplacement procedures equire equipment grounding. However, lightning cotection is also required in areas where the battery ite is higher than the surrounding terrain and in reas where severe electrical storms are experienced. », Individual site requirements may dictate hanges in the procedures described in this chapter. ‘hanges are permissible as long as equivalent rotection is provided for the system. 3-2. Lightning Rod Design and Construction 2. General. The procedures contained in this para- raph are used to design, construct, and emplace a ghtning rod for the ICC/IPCP shelter. Once em- laced, the lightning rod is connected to the ICC/ 2CP lightning protection ground system. The resence of a well-grounded lightning rod for each ajor item protects the IHAWK system from rect lightning strikes and lightning-induced cur- nt surges. >. Cone of Protection. The “cone of protection” incept is used in the following procedures to pro- ct the IHAWK major items. A cone of protection arts at the highest point of a vertical shielding inductor, and extends conically downward, The ielding conductor provides lightning protection r all items or structures completely enclosed by e cone. The radius of the circular base of the cone fines the ground area protected by the vertical ielding conductor. This radius is equal to twice e height of the vertical shielding conductor (fig. 41). - Design and Construction. (1) ICC/PCP and IBCC (IHAWK battery). ibricate a lightning protection assembly for the ‘C/IPCP and IBCC shelters in accordance with jure 10-2. Refer to table 10-1 for a list of mater- ‘s required. NOTE: THE RADIUS OF THE CONE IS EQUAL To TWICE ITS HEIGHT. Raps. (OF CONE Ms 313701 Figure 10-1. Cone of protection concept. (2) ICC/IPCP (IAFU). Fabricate a lightning protection assembly for the ICC/IPCP accordance with figure 10-3. Refer to table 10-1 for a list of materials required. (8) Remotely located AN/TPX-46 interrogator/ receiver set and IFF antenna, Fabricate a lightning protection assembly for the AN/TPX-46 interrogator/receiver set and IFF antenna in accordance with figure 10-4, Refer to table 10-1 for a list of materials required. 10-3. Lightning Rod Emplacemont Procodures ‘The following are the detailed procedures for emplacing the vertical shielding conductor and mast ‘assemblies fabricated according to paragraph 10-2c. NOTE If bedrock prevents driving the shielding conductor ground rod 1.83 m (6 ft) deep, dig radial trench 3.66 m long by 0.914 m deep (12 ft by 8 ft) from the base of the mast and away from the equipment being protected. Connect No. 2 copper wire to the vertical shielding conductor, and bury the wire in the trench. 10-1TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 10-2 L 60 6M (2 FT) Mast SHIELDING ‘coNDUCTOR ~N] Note: ‘THIS ISTHE MINIMUM ABOVE GROUND UTILITY POLE HEIGHT NECESSARY TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE PROTECTION FOR THE ICC/IP DO NOT CONNECT THE ICC/IPCP AND IBCC GROUND ROD TO THE SHIELDING CONDUCTOR GROUND ROD. MAINTAIN PRACTICAL DISTANCE BETWEEN GROUNDS. 213m (FT) 8.85 m (29 1) MIN SEE NOTE 2.44 m MIN (8 FT) 3.6m MAX (12 FT) 258m en (search indicator) can be activated. Numbers nt enclosed refer to other tests in the NO. co! umn that check the same function. Example: Search cmd digit 3 is checked again in 171,169 etc. of the NO. column. © SYSTEM SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS TEST POINT LOCATOR (5)—Same as para above except that a NO. column is provided for signal number referencing. © SYMBOLIC DIAGRAM REF. (6)—Same par. a above. © RANDOM ENTRY (7)—Same_as par. 0 above. Also, entries shown as DTO SW-10 BIT 12 (step 1d in this example), means that with the ADP REGISTER DISPLAY switeh on DTO DWR #2 set to position 10, bit number 12 of the DISPLAY REGISTER lamps should be illuminated. This informs the operator that the auto fire signal from the TDECC is being received at the ADP. Entries shown as DTO SW-5 0777 step 1 (©) DESIG- NATION) means that with the switch set to position 5, an octal code number of 00000777 should be displayed.T™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 115, ICWAR Check (ADP Normal Mode) le a Senet eect pects ‘eens Aiemest es Diet he ICWAR opertr tot the LOCAL/REMOTE etch to REMOTE Shaded Area) @ Th statas pane KCWAM FAILURE amp (8, #18) ashing. Prose the status panel ASI NORMAL/AS! APPROACH ewitch (6, fig. 2-1f) to ABI AP- PROACH. ©The TWEE AST speed hand changes to lheppronch os the neve doppler le moves te the ute cge ofthe mreey. Dest the ICWAR operator to: ‘Sat the ANTENNA SAPE/OPERATE owitch to SAFE. Mannally rotate the antenna clockwise through the sectonstart asimath, and thea stop the an- ‘wun fn vectar. Malntain the antenna fa «stationary postion. Sane ele eee eae o Le ‘Pram the TDECC HOSTILE indiestor-wich (fg. 213), Nove ‘Te ADE sae the 1CWAR ante meth pon oth tne fr we ering the PIR dager al nent cee © Aras ager spear re mie 6m. NOTE ‘Tas Lagngre Mae ntl tp prtrmed. Divect the ECWAR operator to: Sat the SIGNAL PROCESSOR TEST Il ewtch to 0-10. Set the LOWER RCVB/BITE owtch to RADAR FAIL LIGHTS 4. A ICWAS video tp sppoers ot the enter ads ofthe appreech spond band, sade Jecal beta © symbal appears at 6 om. © The 1CWAR video bp and acl one © symbol are atthe same aimuth a the Stationary meen. © —_ANIOWAR dopoer tone i heard in the RO headset. @ The logogram isnot Hashing Set the IFF coderdecoder roup INT ANT SYNC switch to0 RPM (2, fi. 310) Set the IFF coderdecoder group ANT SYNC switch to INT. Press the auxiliary control box CASUALTY CW ROTATE indicator-switeh (25, fi. 2-2) to ‘CASUALTY. © THe TECC weep and lec hoste © symbol rman satinary Failure to perform step i below may result in injury to personnel. MS 312260 Figure 11-5. Sample ISC table.TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 | O40 CRT DISPLAY NEXT CHECK VIDEO MAJOR ITEM SYSTEM TEST OPERATOR ‘COMPARE ‘SEPARATE MAJOR ITEM FAULT DIRECTORIES: FAULT ISOLATION DIRECTORY FAULT ISOLATION DIRECTORY INFORMATION ‘SYSTEM |. ALTERNATE TESTS 2. GOTO COLOR CODED ‘SYSTEM TRACING DIAGRAMS. | 3. Go To symBouic DIAGRAM AND EXP. OF CHECKS SECTION ‘CABLE ‘4. GO TO SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST POINTS. acral MS 312261 Figure 11-6. 1SC—fault isolation interface. ‘This indicates to the operator that the ADP digital word designating zero azimuth position is being sent to the IHIPIR. NOTE Fire section test sequence charts (par. and fig.) are ‘also provided to show the step-by-step progression of the ADP fourparameter THIPIR auto designation through simulated missle firing sequence. 11-7. Explanation of Checks and Symbolic Diagrams a. Explanations of Checks. The explanation of checks will provide information to understand the basic system test being performed. The checks in gen- 16 eral are functionally related to actual system oper tion (where BITE permits) and provide technical i= formation to assist in self-developed fault isolation techniques. Explanation of checks and symbolic dix grams are provided in section IV. b. Symbolic Diagrams. Symbolic diagrams (fg 11-9) provide an overview of the ISC’s being per formed and support the explanation of the checks for inereased understanding. The dit symbolically show the major signal paths ( [A] , [B] , ete.) and control line paths ( [I] , [2] , ete.) between major items and are keyed to the fault isolation directary matrices provided in section III for troubleshooting purposes.1.8, System Color-Coded Tracing Diagrams Figures 11-10 through 11-12 (section III) illustrate e system color-coded tracing diagram for the bat- iy The colors quickly identify the major item inter- ™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 wires involved in the various ISC’s and can be CF during tactical system operation. ferenced for fault isolation purposes through self- 11.9. Random Entry Index to Indicators Table 11-1 contains an index to indicators for random entry into the fault isolation directories located in section III. The index is used when system faults oc- ‘he random entry index will quickly point to an ISC which tests the area of concern. The index lists the IPCP tactical swit- repel actions. ches and indicators in alphabetic order, and each indicator is referenced to the appropriate test and applicable fault directory for fault isolation information. 1 2 3 / / / l f f aware Taare “PreTEu BenAL GUAACTENITICR-TEAT POUT LOCATOR sworn | T= hero “= Sa Sona [er To - -_/FEE [' as | =| == lofne, fem [= = peers a |e seme ame pa = ae =o Bl g-0 [wel [eo aie of aan cee ORT ae 7 z Tee Westone TESTA ETE ste 15 aa a a= = ig aoe === algo TO Eo | sais? seg a Opener Thy [rans Tar aoa oe aaa a Se Figure 11-7. Sample fault isolation directory matrix—(ICWAR). MS 312263TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 1 2 3 4 - cae A wal geet a ee Sere ee | oa erro | oem ooncrenere ores Teoma ao] Fi ie |: a s 1O| sea intact Tiamat Lacs] « lol Bens rom oe 0) ae oe TS "| |e = ___{olz= = PRE. ntti | et — | «fe Rae [Oe lamer ees |B || DiS | | | | [omc lems, [I opm Tm pesmomen 1 tt = Bites (0 | mmm Paraea Se Esra aad ole me a 5 z= I> = en aie | ae, a moateiaiat fer i [Phe ™ ihe [oo D in. ww, ko) Es a, ‘ete Seton es cr ae = = = ol ca = sun 1? | some gaat? | Figure 11-8. Sample fault isolation directory matriz—(IHIPIR/ILCHR). 11-8 Google[iewar 7 | oAM STROBE | | | Dom raters7) T™ 9—1430—1535—12—1 ADP JGWAR DIGITAL WORD AND CLOCK 0 JAM BIT =4 FM/OW BIT ©ALTERNATING | I = | 17] RECEIVER |PRocessoR’ So be) Table 11-1 CKNOWLEDGE indicator-switeh (T.0. panel) DCP ALTITUDE meter (status panel) DCP POINTER CLEAR indicator. ‘witch (T.0. panel) DCP POINTER INITIATE indicator. switch (T.0. panel) DP label (status panel) DP REQUEST/ACCEPT indicator. switch (T.O. panel) FC HOLD indicatorswitch (T.0. panel) LIITUDE UNKNOWN label (status panel) PPROACH/RECEDE indicator-ewitch (RO panel) 2M lamp (miniature missile simulator) 31 NORMAL/ASI APPROACH indicator-switch (status panel) SSIGNED label (RO panel) 510 CHALLENGE OFF indicator- ‘riteh (status panel) ‘770 label (RO panel) [TO RANGE label (RO panel) CTO SPEED indicator-switch (RO panel) REAKLOCK indicator-switch (RO panel) SYMBOL AT 80 KM, JAM STROBE TDECE DISPLAY lowWAR LOCAL HOSTILE orsTEM MasTER ow azimuTH TOCAL WOSTILE SYMBOL AT Go KM FF IN Sector onty (casuaLty) | conrRaLs. [ovenowl Ms 312265 Figure 11-8. Sample aymbolie diagram. Index to Indicatore (IAFL) IHIPIR/ILCHR IHIPIR/ILCHR IHIPIR/ILCHR ‘AADCP IHIPIR/ILCHR IHIPIRALCHR ICWAR IHIPIR‘ILCHR FF IHIPIR/LCHR IHIPIR/ILCHR IHIPIR/ILCHR IHIPIR/ILCHR Table 11-1. Index to Indicators (IAFU)—Continued TPCP system indicators Matix table reference CCM OVERRIDE indicatorswitch (T.0. | IHIPIR/ILCHR CENSE ENGAGE bel 0. panel) ‘AADCP ‘CEASE FIRE label (T.0. panel) CHALLENGE indicatonswiteh (7.0. panel) COAST label (7.0. panel) COVER label (T.0. panel) CW ROTATE lable (TDECC) DESTROY indicator-switch (T.O. panel) DISPLAY FRIENDS indicator-switeh (1.0. panel) DISPLAY HOSTILES/UNKNOWNS indieatorswiteh (T.0. panel) DISPLAY LOCALS indicatonswiteh (T.0. panel) DISPLAY REMOTES indieatorswiteh (7.0. panel) ELEVATION HIGH indicatorawiteh (RO panel) ELEVATION LOW indicatonswitch (RO panel) ELEVATION MILS meter (RO panel) ENGAGE label (7.0. panel) IHIPIRALCHR FF IHIPIR/ILCHR IHIPIR/ILCHR ICWAR IHIPIR/ILCHR ‘AADCP IHIPIRALCHR IHIPIR/ALCHR IHIPIR/ILCHR ‘AADCP aTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 Table 11-1. Inder to Indicators LAFL'}—Continued TPCP system indicators ENGAGE OTHER indicatorswitch (T.0. panel) FAIL TO FIRE lamp (ILSCB) FEW indicator-switch (RO panel) FIRE indicatorswitch (T.0. panel) FIRE SECT communications (T.0. and RO ‘communications panels) FIRE SECTION OFF indicatorswitch (etatus panel) FIRE SECTION STANDBY indicator ‘switch (status panel) FIRING label (T.0. panel) FREQ CMD TEST lamp (ILSCB) FRIEND indicator-switeh (T.0. panel) FRIENDLY TARGET indicator (TO. pane) GROUND SPEED meter (status panel) GYRO RUNUP lamp (miniature missile simulator) HIGH ALTITUDE meter (status panel) HOLD FIRE label (T.0. panel) HOSTILE indieator-switch (T.O. panel) HPI label (tatus panel) HPI ACTIVATE indicatorpane! (status panel) HPI BITE/TEST OK indicator-switch (status panel) ICWAR communications (T.0. and RO ‘communiestions panels) ICWAR doppler (RO headset) ICWAR FAILURE label (status panel) ICWAR OFF indicator-switch (status panel) ICWAR RADIATE indicator-switch (etatus pane!) ICWAR STANDBY indicator-switch (etatus panel) ID CONFLICT label (7.0. panel) IFF communications (T.0. and RO communications panels) IFF FAILURE label status panel) IFF ROTATE label (status panel) IFF SYNC FAILURE label (status panel) IHIPIR doppler (RO headset) INITIATOR lamp (miniature missle simulator) IN RANGE label (1.0. panel) JAMMED label (7.0. pane) KILL indicatorswitch (7.0. pane LAUNCHERS 1. 2 and 3 indicator switches (T.0. panel) LOW ALTITUDE meter (status pane MANY indieator-switeh (R.0. panel) MANUAL ASSIGN indieatorswiteh (T.0. panel) MANUAL AZ.EL indieator-switch (RO panel) MANUAL RANGE indicatorswiteh (RO panel) MANUAL SPEED indieator-switch (RO panel) MISFIRE label (7.0. pane) Matric table reference IHIPIR.ILCHR IHIPIR.ILCHR ‘AADCP IHIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR.ILCHR Refer to TM 91425-15252 Refer to TM 9.1425.1525125 THIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR IFF IHIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR.ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR ‘AADCP ICWAR IHIPIR ILCHR Refer to TM 9-1425-1525-12.5, IHIPIR ILCHR TM 9-1425-1525-12.5, IcwaR ICWAR Refer to TM 9:1525-1525.12-5, Refer to TM 9:1425-1525.12-5, Refer to TM 9:1425-1525.12.5, ‘AADCP IFF IFF IFF IFF IHIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR THIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR ‘AADCP IHIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR Table 11-1. Index to Indicators (IAFL }—Continuet rep sy ym indicators ‘Matrtx cable relemee MISSILE CODE indicator-switch (T.0. panel) ‘MISSILE READY lamps (ILSCB) MODE 1. 2. 3, and 4 labels (T.0. panel) ‘MSG CMD TEST lamp (ILSCB) ROW indicator-switch (RO panel) KILL indicator-switch (T.0. panel) NORMAL indicatorswitch (T.0. panel) ONE indicator-switch (RO panel) OUT OF ACTION READY indicator switeh (T.0. panel) OUTPUT TEST lamp (IHIPIR) THIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR FF THIPIR ILCHR THIPIR ILCHR IHIPIR ILCHR THIPIR ILCHR AADCP THIPIR ILcHR IHIPIR ILCHR PLATOON TEST indicator-switch istatus | THIPIR ILCHR panel) RED label (T.0. panel) INITIALIZATIOS REFUSE indicatorswitch (T.0. panel) THIPIR ILCHR REJECT indicator-switch (T.0. panel) AADCP RESUME FIRE CEASE FIRE indicator} IHIPIR ILCHR switch (T.0. pane ROTATE indicator-switch(RO panel) ‘SEARCH label (T.0. panel THIPIR ILCHR THIPIR ILCHR TARGET READOUT indicator-switeh AADCP (ZO. panel) TERMINATE ENGAGE indicatorewitch | IHIPIR ILCHR (TO. pane ‘Tone burst (RO headset) IHIPIR ILCHR ‘TDECC CRT display ICWAR approach video IcWaR ICWAR azimuth sweep ICWAR IHIPIR track symbol IHIPIR ILCHR TDECC RO spectrum analyzer THIPIR lock indicators THIPIR ILCER THIPIR target video THIPIR ILCHR UNKNOWN indicator-ewiteh (T.0. panel) | ICWAR VITAL AREA CALL indicator-switch INITIALIzaTIox (ZO. pane VITAL AREA INSERT indicatorswitch | INITIALIZATION (ZO. pane) WHITE label (T.0. panel) INITIALIZATION WIDE indicator-awitch IHIPIR ILCHR YELLOW label (7.0. panel) INITIALIZATIOS 11-10. Site and Integrated Equipment Adjustments NOTE ‘The following information is given for operator reference purposes only. Site location and integrated equipment adjustments are verified during the normal performance of the ISC’s. The site adjustments are made each time the IAFU is march-ordered and emplaced to compensate for geographic position, terrain and altitude. Integr ted equipment adjustments must be performed the first time major items are integrated in an LAFU. and any time thereafter when major items are repaired or replaced. Tables 11-2 and 11-3 give a detailed listing of> adjustments and reference the controls, ISC rification and adjustment procedures for servicing. Site Adjustments Geographic location Azimuth sector THIPIR height above sea level IHIPIR center search Minimum launch angle Shoot-around Alinement Equipment Adjustments ICWAR false alarms Range designate ‘Manual speed cursor TDECC display calibration 1-11. Additional ISC ADP Operator Aids ‘There are three aids provided to verify ADP ability » operate on the ISC as designed: 1) ISC procedure tatus, 2) ISC software program self-test, and 3) ADP ‘AIL, PARITY, and OVERFLOW indicators. a. ISC Status. The ADP front panel DISPLAY ‘EGISTER lamps provide operator personnel with SC program information pertaining to the status of he checks. Each major ISC is assigned a DISPLAY TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 REGISTER lamp for operator observation as specified below. In addition, a flashing lamp indicates that the ISC is in progress, and that those lamps steadily illuminated identify those checks which have already been performed. Lamp ISC 2B Initialization 22 ICWAR Frequency a ICWAR Jam Strobe 20 IFF 17 AADCP 16 IHIPIR A 12 ICWAR False Alarm 3 Antenna Azimuth Alinement b. ISC Software Program Self-Test. The pro- ‘gram continuously performs an internal check on itself during ISC operation. It performs what is called “Sum-Check”, a software technique which continuously monitors the known number bits of the instructions and constants stored in blocks of memory location not modified by the program. If one or more locations in a block change, the ISC program will halt and display the address of that block on the IN- STRUCTION REGISTER and turn on the CPU FAULT and OAR lamps. Otherwise, the CPU DIS- PLAY REGISTER lamp “O” will remain flashing as an indication that no errors in the sum-check software exist. Table 11-2, Site Adjustmente 1sC. Site Adjustment Controt Procedure Verification Geographic Location | BATTERY LATITUDE switches | AADCP checks (table ICC/IPCP emplacement @, fg. 2-4) 116) (chapter 7) BATTERY LONGITUDE switches (®, fg. 24) DLRP LATITUDE switches (10, fig. 24) DLRP LONGITUDE switches (1, fig. 2-4) ‘Azimuth Sector AZIMUTH SECTOR START ICWAR checks (table ICC/IPCP emplacement (83, fig. 2-4) 115) (chapter 7) AZIMUTH SECTOR STOP G1, fig. 2-4) IHIPIR Height Above | HPI ALTITUDE control THIPIR/ILCHR checks ICC/IPCP emplacement Sea Level fig. 8-19) (able 11-8) (chapter THIPIR Center Search | IHIPIR center angle IHIPIR/ILCHR checks ICC/TPCP emplacement, adjust control (fig. (able 11-8) (chapter 7) weaTM 9—1430—1535—12—1 clo Table 11-2. Site Adjustments—Continued HIPIR minimum elevation control (TM 9-1480-1583- 12-1 *(AD)') (TM 9-1480- 583-121 *(AC)') HIPIR/ LCHR checks (table 11-8) (TM 9-1490-1583-12-1 *(AD}) (TM 9-1490-588-12-1 *(AC}}) LCHR azimuth cutout ‘switches, azimuth over. ride lever, minimum elevation lever, and eleva tion fre interrupter lever (TM 9-1440-581-12-1) HIPIR/ LCHR checks (table 11-8) alining (TM 9-1440- 581-121 Table 11-8. Equipment Adjustmente Equipment “Agia Aduiment Controt Procedure Veifeation ‘Shcedare. CCWAR False Alarms | 1) CWAR signal processor CWAR checks (table -CWAR weekly checks (TM threshold adjustment ASR7 11-6) 9-1490-1628-12-1) (TM 9-1430-1528-12-1) CWAR radar data coupler 2)ADP radar data coupler ‘ard (TM 9-1430-1686-12) card ASRI6, RL variable resistor | (AC)! HIPIR Range|°(AC)' HIPIR tracker no.1 | (AC)! HIPIR/LCHR checks| *(AC)' System equipment | Designate ‘AGR25 control (TM 9-1480- | (table 11-8) ‘adjustments (table 11-9, | 538-12-1) step 8) | ‘DECC Manual Speed | MARKER CALIBRATE variable] HIPIR/ LCHR checks ICC! POP system equipment Cursor resistor (2, fig. 8-19) (table 11-8) adjustments (table 11-9, | step 1) ‘TDECC, Display Calibration ‘Sweep X, ¥ CENTERING controls CWAR checks ICC/ PCP system equipment ‘Cand 8, fig. 8-16) (table 11-8) ‘adjustments (table X,Y SWEEP GAIN controls . 114, step 2a) | (Qo and 9, fig. 3-15) X,Y ICWAR PED controls (G and 5, fig. 3-15) ‘Symbols Y-SYMBOL CALIBRATE control | Initialization checks ICC/ PCP system equipment. | ‘ALLAGAI00R30 (table 11-4) ‘adjustments (table | 2, fg. 1) 11-8, step 28) X-SYMBOL CALIBRATE ‘control AI1A4A96R30 2, fig. 1.8) ‘CWAR Antenna CWAR SYNCHRO ‘CWAR checks (table CWAR orienting and ‘Alinement, ‘CLUSTER ORIENT 115) lining (TM 9-1480- control (TM 9- 1828-12-1) 1490-1628.12:1) IFF Antenna ‘AZ ADS Controt CWAR checks (table ‘APU orienting and alining ‘Alinement @, fig. 811) 115) (chapter 8) HIPIR Antenna HIPIR Synchro adjust control | HIPIR/ LCHR checks HIPIR orienting and aline- ‘Alinement (TM 9-1430-1583-12-1 *(AD)}) (table 11-8) ng (TM 9-1490-1689-12-1 (AD!) (TM 9-1490-588-12-1 (AC)! (TM 9-1480-589-12-1 *(AC)') LCHR Boom LOHR COARSE, HIPIR/ LCHR checks LCHR orienting and ‘Alinement ADJUST control (table 11-8) lining (TM 9-1440- (TM 9-1440531-12-1) 531-12-1) []tReter to appendix E for serial number effectivity. 11-12a NOTE Should the ISC program self-test fail, reload and rerun the ISC program. Ift fails a second time, perform the ADP diagnostic checks, c, ADP FAIL, PARITY Check, and OVERFLOW ‘ndicators. If any of these indicators illuminate, read and rerun the ISC program. If it fails a second ime perform the ADP diagnostic checks. d. Alinement Assistance. The ADP may be used ss an operator aid when alining system radar anten- Section Il. INTEGRATED 1-12. General This section contains the integrated system check SO) procedures for the AFU. Tables 11-3 through \-T contain sectionalized checks for system operation the normal ADP mode, including some casualty ode checks to insure system operation should the DP become a casualty during tactical system opera- n, 1-13. ISC Program Loading @. Preparation. (1) Energize the ADP (tables 3-5 and 3-6). (2) Set the ADP LOCAL/REMOTE switch LOCAL. (3) Press the CWAR INHIBIT and PAR HIBIT indicator-switches (36 and 35, fig. 2-4) off (extinguished). (4) Press the MEMORY PARITY ERROR ‘SET and LAMP TEST pushbutton. (5) Reset the DTO and CPU (see note 1). NOTE 1, ‘The “DTO and CPU reset” is accomplished bby pressing (in order) DTO MANUAL RE- SET indicatorswitch (21, fig. 2-4), CPU RESET pushbutton (15, fig. 25), and then the CPU DISPLAY ENABLE indicator-ewitch (6, fig. 2-5). TM 9—1430—1535—12—1 nas, or in conjunction with the ISC_ CWAR alinement check (table 11-4). Azimuth alinement differences of greater than 5 mils cause the ADP logogram to flash. Operator entry into the ISC software program from the CPU front panel is required to perform this test: The CPU INSTRUCTION INPUT switches are set to 26075775 to enter the alinement test software routine, where the azimuth is recorded and used as a reference. The software then continuously checks azimuth and compares it with the reference for differences. SYSTEM CHECK PROCEDURES NOTE 2. Do not press the CPU LAMP TEST pushbutton during, and following, the loading of the ISC program. If the button is presed, the memory contents will be altered and the program must be reloaded. NOTE 3, Fluctuations in input power may alter the contents of the memory. If it is ob- ‘or suspected that a power fluctuation has occurred, reload the ISC Program. b, Memory Clear. Enter the following memory clear instructions (patches) into the CPU INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches, Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUCTION pushbutton after each entry: Instruction Input 26037604 26037605 26037606 ¢. Program Loading with the SSR. (1) Set the solid state reader (SSR) power switch (6, fig. 2-7) to ON. (2) Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to 06044100. (3) Set the SSR PROGRAM SELECTION dial switches (3, fig. 2-7) to 150. W138TM 9—1430—1535—12-1 (4) Reset the DTO and CPU. (5) Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUC- TION pushbutton, (6) The following lamps are illuminated: SSR PROGRAM BEGIN (1, fig. 2-7), CPU END, CADO1, and CAD04. (7) The INSTRUCTION REGISTER lamps display 06044100. (8) The following lamps are extinguished: CADO02, CADO3, 11-14, E1-E4, RUN, and HNG. (9) Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dial switches to 06044022. (10) Reset the CPU. (11) Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUC- TION pushbutton. (12) The SSR PROGRAM END lamp (2, fig. 2-7) illuminates. (13) When the ISC program is completely loaded, the INSTRUCTION REGISTER and DISPLAY REGISTER both display 00007212. (14) Reset the DTO and CPU. d. Program Loading with the Tape Reader. Make certain that the tape printer AUTO switch (1, fig. 2-8) is in the off (up) position. (1) Load the ISC program tape (PN 1151- 0256-10) as follows: NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 3-24, unless otherwise indicated. (2) Remove the tape reader cover and set the SPOOLING switch (6) to DISABLE. (8) Place the ISC tape reel on the left tape reader spindle (7) and lock the reel in place, Wes a NOTE Insure that the sprocket holes on the tape ‘ae facing toward the inside. (4) Unwind about four feet of leader, then thread the tape around the tape guides (1) ad tension arms (2 and 4). Manually wind a portion of the tape onto the take-up reel (5) until the punched portion is at the read head. (5) Insert the tape through the read head by following the guide lines on the tape rade panel. Insure that the sprocket drive gear engages the sprocket holes on the tape. Do not force-pull the tape against the sprocket drive gear as tape damage results. (6) Set the READER POWER switch (4, fig. 2-8) to ON. (7) Set the SPOOLING switch (3, fig. 28) to ENABLE and observe that the reels momenta ily turn to center the tension arms. (8) Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT dil switches on the CPU panel to read 06044042 (9) Make certain that the DATA INPUT dial switches are set to 00000000. (10) Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUC- TION pushbutton. (11) The tape moves to the beginning of the block mark, and then stops. (12) Reset the DTO and CPU. (13) Set the INSTRUCTION INPUT di switches to 06044022. (14) Press the EXECUTE INPUT INSTRUC ‘TION pushbutton. (15) The red CPU HNG lamp flickers about five seconds. The tape moves forward loaing the ISC into the computer memory. As the rt moves, observe that lamps 10 through 23 are coutt ing.

TM 9-1430-1535-12-1 Icc An - MSQ-110, An - MSW-13 PCP Hawk

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

TM 9-1430-1535-12-1 Icc An - MSQ-110, An - MSW-13 PCP Hawk

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

S-ar putea să vă placă și